DOCUMENT RESUME
' ED 132 256. 'CZ 008 186 TITLE Electrician's Mate 1 & C. Rate Training Manual and Nonresident Career Course. INSTITUTION E Naval Education and Training Command, Pensacola, Fla. REPORT NO NAVEDTRA-10547-D
PUB DATE 76 , 'NOTE 254p.; For a related document see ED 110 703 AVAILABLE FROM.Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402 (Stoat Number 0502-1P-052-7360)
r, EDRS PRICE MF-$0.83 HC-$14.05 Plus Postage. DESCRIPTORS Autoinstructional Aids; Correspondence.Courses; Electronics; *Electronic Technician's; Instructional Materials; *Job Training; Manuals;,Military Training; Subprofessionals; Technical Occupations; Textbooks IDENTIFIERS, Navy
ABSTRACT One.of a series of training manuals prepared,for enlisted personnel in the Navy and NavalReserve, this self-study program is designed to enable the electrician's mate to prepare himself for the increased responsibilities of a senior petty officer with ability to operate, maintain, and repair voltage and frequency regulatihg equipment transistorized control devices, automatic degaussing systems, no-break power supplies, and electrohydraulic load-sensing goVernors. Contents include an 11-chapter text followed by a subject index, cccupational standards, and the associated nonresident career course (five reading assignments with technical questions based on the occupational standards in the respective assignment).= Chapter headings are (1) Career Program, (2) Safety, (3) Voltage and Frequency Regulation,(4) Transistorized Control Devices.; (5) Automatic aegaussingc (6) Gyrocompasses,(7), No Break Power Supplies, (8)Electrohydraulic Load-Sensing Speed Governors, (9) Engineering Casualty Control,(10) Maintenance Administration, and/ (11) Visual Landing Aids (VIA). The appendixes include temperature and met4e conydrsion tables. (HD)
)**********************************************************t*********** DocUments acquired by ERIC include mahy informal unpufflished *, * materiais not available from other sources. ERIC makeg,.eVery effort * to cibtain the best copy available. Nevertheless, items of mafginal reproducibility areoften encountered and this affects the quality * of the.microfic.he and hardcopy reproductions ERIC makes available * via the ERIC Document Reproduction Service (EDRS). EDRS is not *' * reskinsible for the quality of the original, document. Reproductions * supplied by-EDRS are the best that can be made from the original., * ***********************4*********************************************** os
0 1;
°PREFACE
, 2 , , hi te Ifrag Manual and Nonresident Career. Course (RTM/NRCC) for,a,'11td,dy program that will .enable the ambitious Electrician's Mate td'' 'reparel4i*lf for the increased responsibilities of a senior petty officer . ong these TOponsibilities are the abilities to operate, maintain,.andrepait voltage and frellquency regulating equipment, transistoriied coVrol device's, automatic- e ga ussin g systems; no-break powir supplieS and 'electrohydraulit load-sensing "gchernors. In a'dditian, he must kprepare himself to administer' :maintenance an14 safety programs asr well as to teach- entineeringcaSualty. control.' ' This RTM-/NRCC package is designed for individual, stn4y and not formal classrootn Instruction.. The RTM presents subject matter that relates directly, to the occupational qualifications of the Electrician's Mate rating.The; NRCC pr4rides guidance in studying the RTM with learning objectives and study itemS that emphasize the iinportant study Material. This RTM/NRCC was prepared by the Naval Education and Training Program Development Center, Pensacola, Florida fbr the Chief of Naval Education and Training.
Stock Ordering No. 0502-LP-052-7360
Published by NAVAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING SUPPORT COMMAND
Revised 1976
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE WASHINGTON, D.C.:1976 I , f. 4,
ei THE UNITED SATES NAVYe , oUAltDrAN ,OF:00 eF:IUNTRY - The United StatesNavy is responsible,for maintainingcontrol, of ihe sel andisready forCe on .watoli at,hocrieand overseag; volpatile qf strong' action to preserve,the peace or of itistanfoffensive ktion to win, inWar. . It is upon the maintenance Of this control-Thalour Country's gloridis future depends; the United StatesNavy exists'to make it so. . 4 WESERVE WITH HoNOR Tradition, valor, and victory are. the Navy's heritage from the 'past. To: these may be added dedication, discipline,'and vigilance as thi watchwords of the present and the future.
At hone or on distant stationswe serve with' pride, confident in the respect of our country, our shipmates,and our,families.
Our-responsibilities soberut; our adversities strengthenus. Service, to God and Country isour special privilege. We serve with honor. , ' 'THE FUTURE OF THENAVY - .1 Tile Navywill . always employ, newweapons, new technique§, and i greater Powerto protect and defend the United Stateson the sea, tinder I . .. the sea, :and in the air. . Now and in the future, controlof the segives the United,5tates her greatest advantage for the, maintenance,of C eace and for victory, in war. q , . MObility, surprise, dispersal, 'andoffensiv power are the eynofesof the new Navy.The roots of the Navy lie ina strong belief in the future, in, continued 'dedication.to our tasks, and in'reflection 'onour heritage froM the Past. .
Never have 'our -oppOrtu.nitiesand our responsibilities beengreater.
4 .. 2.Safety- .--,..,, .,,:, 10 .
3. Yoltage and FrequencyReguaonlti 23
, 4.TransisOrized'Control. Device§ , ,50 : , 5. Automatic Degaussing 76 6. Gyrocompasses .86
7. ,No Break Power Supplles 117 8. ElectrohYalaulic Load-Sensing Speed.Gbvernors ...... 135 9. EngiheeringPastAltyon'frol 147 1, ' et 10. ,MaintenanceAdmini*tration 163
11. Visual Landing Aids (VLAj..,, 171
APPENDICES
I.Tempertaure Cenversion Table; II. The Metric System
INDEX
4CUPATIONAL STANDARDS 201
Nonresidetnt Career Course Follows Occupational Standards CAREER fROGRAM .;:e
?This rate training manual is designed to help Inlargemeasure,theextqltof lour youmeettheoccupationalstandardsfor conqibutibritothe Navy depengs .On flz)ur advancement to Electrician's Mate First Class willingnessand. 'abilitytoacceptincreasing and Chief Electrician's Mate. Chapters 2 through responsibilitiesasyou' advance. When you 11 ofthistrainingmanual dealwith' the assumed the duies of EM3, you began to accept technical subject matter of theElectrician's ceTtain amotint of responsibility for: the Work Mate rating.It is strongly recommended that of others. With each advancement, yciu accept youstudythischaptercarefullybefore an increasing responsibility in military matters beginning intensive study of the chapters that and,. 41matters relating io the occdpatiortal follow. requireinents of the Electrician's Mate rUing.
, . t find that yOur responsibilities for REWARDS AND RESPONSIBILITIES militaryleadership are abOut the same as those of petty 'officers in other ratings, sirice every Advancement 'brings both, increased rewards petty offieeis'. a military person as Well as a andirtcreased responsibilities. The time to start technicalpeciakk., Your responsibilitiesfor looking ahead and considering the rewards and technical le!adqrship are special to your rating the responsibilities of\advancement is right now and are direCtly related to the natdre of your while you are preparing for advancement to work. dperating and maintaining the, ship's ,EM1 or B/W. distributionlystem is a job`of vital importance, By this time, you are probably well aware of and itiS a teamwork job;it .requires'a special many of the advafitges of advanctitent: higher kind of leadership ability that can be deVeloped pay,greaterprestige, moreinteresting and only 'by pqrsonnel who have a high degree of 'challenging work, and the satisfaction of getting technicalCompetence,' andadeep sense of s. aheadin your chosen career. Also, you have persdnal retpqnsibility,: probablydiscoveredthat one oP the mosC Certain practical udetails that reltite: tb-pour enduring rewards of advancement is the petsonal ( resPonsibilitiesfordiyisionaladMinistration satisfaction you find in developing your skills supervision are discussed in chapter 10 f this and increasing your kntwledge. training manual. At this point, let's consider TheNavyalsobeniefitsbyyour some of the iiroader aspects of Your ip'creasing advancement.Highlytrainedpersonnelare responsibilitriesformilitaryand technical essential to the functioning of the Nary. With -.leadership. Q each advancement,' you increase your valuei the .Navy in two ways. First, you become, more YOUR R ESPONtS BILITIESWI.LL valuable as a techniCal.pecialist irt your own EXTEND BOTWUPWAR ND DOWNWARD. rating, and second, you beconie more valuable as Both officer%and enlisted personnel will expect a who can supervise, lead, and train you to translate the general orders given by ot he sandthusmakefar-reachingand Officers - intodetailedpractical- on-the-job long-lastiitg contributions to the Navy. language- that can be understood and followed ELECTRICIAN'S MATE 1 & C
ev;nrelatively inexperienced pettonnel. In to speak and write in stich a way that others .d aling 4th your jpniors,,it is can up to you to see understand exactly what youmean. Ullathe .,.perfOrm their 'work properly. At the- A eon dre q uirement same e, you must be able 'to explain.: to foreffective }communicationintheNavyisasound leersny iniportant needs'Or problems of the._ knowledge of thq Navy enlisteden. way of saying things. Some Navy terms have beenstandardized to enSureeffectivecommunicatiorf. 'When a YOU WILL HAVE REGULAR AND situationcallsfor, the_use Of 'standard, Navy cbNTINul NC RE SPONSIBILITIESFOR terminOlo0 use TRAINING. Even if gouare lucky enough to Stillanotherrequireinent have a highly skilled and, well-trained ofeffective E division, communicationisprecisionintheuse 'of you-will,still find that training isnecessary..For technical 'terms.s. A command ofthe technical ' Ixample, you wilh always be responsiblefor language of the -training lower rated, lectriCian's Mate will enable men for advancement in.; you tO receive'and. convey. .inf'ormation rating. Also; "Sonic of your best.workersmay be accurately and to exchange ideas transferred, and inexperienced br with others: A- poorly trained person who 'does not understand 'hieprecise personnel May. beassignedto you. Qi; a meaning of terms used in connection particular job may call for skills that .With the none ofi"', work Of his'rating isit a:disadyantage 'whenhe your personnel haye. These and similar problems, tiies to read official publications require you to be a training relating to his- specialist who can Work. He is also at a.greatdisadvantage when he' conduct formal and informal training prOgrams takes the written examinations for to qualify personnel for advancement advancement. and who Although it is always important foryou to use r. can strain indiyiduals and groups in .the, effeotive technicaltermscOrrectly, 'execution of assigned tasks. itisparularly important when you are dealingwitmen of YOU. WILL HAVE lower rate. Sloppiness in. theuse of technical INCREASING tekrnsislikely- to be very coAusingto an . RESPONSIBILITIES 'FOR WORKINGWITH inekperienced man. OTHERS. As you advance to EMI andthen to EMC. you will find thatmany of your plans and YOU WILL 'HAV decisions affect a farge number of INCREASED people, some. RESPONSIBILITIES FOR KEErINGUP WITH of whom are not Electrician'sMates, and some NEW DEV,ELOPMENTS. Practi&llyeverythiwe of Whorn are ...noteveninthe engineering in the Nakry-policies, department. It becomes increasingly procedures, equipment, important, publications, systemsis subject to change and .therefore;tounderstandthe dutiesand development. As anM.J 'and even more as an responsibilities df personnel. in other ratings. EMC, you ninst ke Every -petty officer in the Navy is yourself informed abont a technical all changes and nedevelopments that might specialist in his oWn field. Learnas muth as you affect your rating or ¼ur work. can about the work..4of other ratings, and plan Som.changes will be called directly.' your work so that it will fit in with the overall to your mission of the organization. attention, but you have to look forothers. Try to deVeloP a speCial kind ofalertness for new information. Keep up-to-date 'AS YOUR R,ESPONSIBILITIES on all available 'sources orteclutital information: And,above alk -;. INCREASE, YOUR A`BILITY,TO keep an Open,mind.,on the new types of,control-' CO'MMUNICA'TECLEARLY AND devices beiredeveloped for EF.FECTIVELY MUST Ai:SO INCkEASE. and ivorporated The within existing Andnew electrical .systems. If' basic requirement' for effectivecommunication you 1 back over the history of isa knowledge of your own, language. Use electrical ste r since theend of World War 1I,you will correct language rin speaking and in.writing. fin, 'that a numbdr of Rernembpr,thebasic important changes have purposeofall occurred ,during this time.: By far,one of the communication 'is understanding. Tolead, to most imPortant developments supervise', and to train others,you must be able was the Zener diode along with othersemiconductor devices, Chapter 1CAREER PROGRAM
, 'such asthe junction diode and 'thesilicon new .and improved eleCtrical equipment and . . c6ntro.110rectifier.Although -these systeMs. semiconductor devices ate. used in many o-f the systems with which you are familiar, magnetic amplifiers also had a place in the development of THE NAVY ENLISTED ADVANCEMENT better. electrical systems. These changes were SYSTEM necesSary..to cope with the ever increasin'g demands put upon the electrical plant. As more Many or the rewords of Navy .life are earned and.inore' technological advanced were made .to through the advancement system. The basic. . systems that utilized electric -poWer, so it Was ideas behind the system htive remained stable for., With the systems that provided the Power. As a many years, but specific portions may change result of these ever-occurring changes, the need rather rapidly. It is important. that you know the forincreasingyour teChnicalknowledgeis system and follow charies carefully. BuPers apparent and .you must do your part to keep Notices 1418 will normally keep you up to date. abreast of these changes. . The normal system ,of advancement may he easier to understand ifit is brOken .into .two parts: . THE EM BILLET I. -Those,reqiiirements that must be met before you may be considered for advancement. The EM isOneof: the generalratings. 2.Thefactorsthatactuallydetermine E4ectrician's Mates are included in the personnel whether you will he advanced. ,,allowance for ,practically all types of Navy ships including repair ships and tenders.
. As arr EMI, You may be assigned to almdst QUALIFYING FOR ADVANCEMENT any type/of ship and may be required to fill the ' senior Elleetricjan's Mate ,billet. on ships the-size in general, to qualify (be Considered) for of *a destroyer and smaller. Chief Electrician's advancement, you must first: .14ates are usually assigned tO 'ships the size of destroYers and larger. ; I.Have a 'certain innotint of tirine in pay Shore' billeisforChief and First Class. grade. . . Mate 'inchide' recruitingduty, /.Demonstrate knowledge 'of,. material., itv instrctor 'duty' :ataserviceschool,recruit. your manddtoryRateTraining Manuals by A: training_comrninds,NavalReserve,training..achieving a -suitable score on your comMand's cenOrs; and the Naval ;EdjaCation and Training test,- by successfullY completing the appropriate . Program Development Center Which is lOcated in NRCC's or,ingime. cases,by successfully Pensacola;florida. completing,an abrOpriate,Navy school. 3.Demonstrate' the ability to perform ,all the practical, requirements for,advancement by4 h.7 DUTIES f/ Completing the Record of Practical Fact Ors,r. NAVEDTRA 1414/J; is !!' ElectriciSn'sMatessiancl. Watchon 4. Be recommended by your -pomManding 4:g enerator s-,swit.chboards,-and.control officer. : " equipment:operateelectrical*esquipment: 5.For. ,pettyofficer third ands Maintain and repair Orr and lighting circuits,. c.andidateSonly, demonstrate knowledge of electricalfixtuls,..motor's,generatOrs; ;militarysubjectsby :_passing *a locally distribUtion switt(hyie)ards, and other electrical , ,adrninislere'd1.44litary/IeeaderShip examination eqWpment; -and repair and rebuild electrical based on the nkval .t.andardS, fOr advancement sqtament in electrical shops. The specific jobs (NavPers -18068 series).
-and' *procedures for carrying out these duties are . DemOnstrate keowledge O'f the technical continually canging1.1U$ to the development of agpects of your rafe , by pa'ssinga Navywide
ar, ELECTRICIAN'S MATE I & C.-'
ady a n ce tnent :examinationbasedonthe pftulation are, then placedon the list, based on . ibeeupatioifial standards applicableto, your rate this coMposite figure, with -the highestachiever' (those standards liste,d at and below,your rate first, and so on down to the last qualifiedperson level). in tbe, population. Beginning at the*top of the -listofcandidatesforE-4,E-5, 'andE-6, Ifyou meetall the above :requirefnents advancement athhorizations are issuedto.' the'. 'satislactorply, you. become a member of the number -6fpeopleneededtofillexisting group' frdin which advancements will be made. vaearicies. 6 ar)Candidates for E-7 with high final mtliiple 4WHO WILL BE ADVANCED? designatedPASS SELBD ELIG .(Pass Selectio9 Board Eligible), Theirnanr will. be'
_ . Advam:Nnent is not atItOmatie. Meeting .all placed.'before the Chief Petty Offi'cer!Selection the requirements makes ,you:eligible, but does 'Board, a BuPers 'board .c.hargedwith considtiring,, all eligible candidates for advancement not guarantee your advancement. Sothe of the to CPO,. factors, that determine whichpersons of those Advancement authoriza' tions-forthosebeing' advanced io.CP0 ard isst4by this bOa.rd. beoadvanCedin rate,are: Who, then, Ai- are 4he individuals who are The score. made on the advancehient advanced'? Basically,the.yare the ones who '.achiei,edtheMOSTin p.repariSg fo 2.Th6l6ngth ot&ime incseri/ice?' advancerwhit. 'They were not contentto just .3.The perforpanee marks earned."' qualify.. They wont the extra mileintheir training. Through, that training and . 4.The numbk of Yacancies being filled ina their work given rate. experience they deTlopéd greater skillslearned more, and accepted More respgnsibility: Whilethe If the number Of vacaticies iraa- giv.eif rate advancementsystemcannot exceed the number of qualified personn6'' then guarantee that any one person will be advanced, does guaranteethat all of those qualified will be advanced:More allpersons Within a 6,Often, the...number .of qUalified particular sate will compete equally forthe - t people exceeds vacancres that exist.' the number of vaeancies. When this happenS,the Navy uses a procedure:to advance those whoare BEST qualified. This procedure is based,on'a ,...combinationofthree' personnelev,aluatio4 OF THIS RATE systems; TRAINING MANUAL 4141% I
7,Metit rating system (anal cvaluatbn and BefOre studYing,Iny book, itis a good idea' to know the purpose and the . CO recommendation). . scope of /he book. You should'know that this rate trainingmanual Personneltesting rn adv.ancement will give yod information f theoccupational, examination scorc--,-:withsoe credit for passing standardS fOr advancement tO .EMI and EMC previous advancement c s). and that ,you must skisfactorilycomplete the o 1 Cs. nonresident: career course as.sociated with the Longevity (seniority) systern (time in fate manual before- yOd can advance \_1(ci Ltirne in service). to EMI or EMC, whether you .are in the regular Nayyor in the- , Naval Reserve. . Sin-1ply stated, creelit is given fdr how much ' This rate training manual does NOT give the individual shas achieved inothe three you areas of . "informationon° thenaval sequirementsfor perrmance,knowledge,andseniority. g advancement to PO l com or CPO. Rate training site, or final mdltiplescore, is generated Manuals that are, speciallyPrepared -to from'thesethree give factors with emphasis on .informationofthenavalrequirémentsare performanc. of the 'qualified candidates .'discussed in the section of thischapter that deals from a o kivenadvancementexaminatiori with sources Of \information. ChaPfer 1"CAREER PROGRAM
.. , naval This rate training Manual doesNOT give you information On all subjects related to the requiremynts and to theoccupational standards' informationthatisrelatedprimarily, to the of the Electrician's Mate. occupatibnal standards for adv.ancement to EM3 in this information is givenin Some of the publications discwssed andEN12: Such revision from .Electrician's Mate 3 & 2, NAVEDTRA I0546-D. section are subject to change or others as1 The occupational standardsiat were used time .to timesome at regular intervals, the need-arises. When using any publication that as a guide in theprePattion of thrate training Manual of is subject to change or revision, be surethat you manual were those set forth in the any Qualifications for Advancement (called the Navy havethelatestedition.Whenusing and Personnel Classifications publicatidn thatis kept current by means of . Enlisted Manpower which all and Occupational Standards)NAVPERS 1 8068 changes, be sure you have a opy in series. Thereforechanges in .the Electrician's official changes" have been entered. , ,b be Mate" qualifications or standards may not , reflected in thy information given, in this training NAVPERS AND .NAVEDTRA Manual. Since your major purpose in Studying. PUBLICATIONS 'this training manual is City meet theo6cupational . .). standards for advancement to EMI andEMC, it NAVPERS and 'NAVEDTRA stud)j'a set of T,,pe is important for you to obtain and tionsdescribedbelowinclude soem standards. public' . the most recent Electrician's Mate whichareabsolutelyessentialforanyone seeking dvancewent and some which, although manualt inclddes Thisratetraining not essential, are extremely helpful. . informationthat is'relatedtoboththe KNOWLEDGE FACTORS and thePRACTICAL FACTORS of the standards for advancement to Manual of- Navy- Enlgted Manpower EMI and EMC. However, no trainingmanual can and Personnel Classifications take the place of actual on-the-jobexperience and Occupational Standards for developing skill in the practicalfactors. The (Occupational Standards Manual) training manual can help you understand some of the technical applintions, but youshould The Manual of Navy Enlisted Manpower and combine knowledge with'practical experience to PersonnelClassificationsandOcctpational oftvelop the requiied skills. Use the Recordof Standards gives the minimum requirementsfor advancement to each pay grade, within -each PracticalFactors, NAVEDTRA 1414/1,in conjunction with this training manualwhenever 'rating. The Occupational Standards Manual lists requirements which applytoall possible.' thenalial This training ,manual,deals almostentirely ratings and the occupational standards that are wi thelecIri calequipment -installedon specific to each rating. ?. conventional steam-driven surface ships.Before The Occupational Standards Manual" is kept cUrrent by .11-leans of numbered changes. These studyingthismanual,studythe :tableof contentsandnotethearrangementof changes are issued more frequently than most information. Information can be organizedand rate training" manuals can be revised;therefor-e;-- presented in many different ways. You willfind the training manual cannOt alwaysreflect tlie advancement.When. ithelpfultohaveanoverall.fiewof' the lateststandardsfor organization of this manual before you start to preparing "for advancement, you should always study it. checkthe LATFST Occupational Standards Manual dna the LATEST chankes.to be sure that youknowtliecurrentrequirementsfor SOURCES OF INFORMATION advancement in your rating. When' studyi-nigthestandardsfor advancemtnt, remenTher that the standards -are Itisveryimportani that you have an extensive knowledge of the references toconsult the MINIM UM req uire nts foradvancement to fordetaile,d,authoritati've,up-to-date each paY grad- within each rating. If you study ELECTRICIAN'S MATE 1 &C more than the required minimum, yoir will of Standards for' advancement. course haVe,a greater advantagewhen you take. Keep th s: in mind the written examination when you are trainingand SUpervising lower for ,advancement. Each rated standardhasa designatedpay gradeE-4 personnel..ra-mandemonstrates through E-9. You proficiencydierOme skill whichis not fisted in are responsible for meeting all the Ekctrician's Mate standardssplicifiedfor advancement "tothe standards but which falls paygrade to which within the generalscope of the rating, report you Are seeking advancemeilt this fa'et to the supervising AND allstandardsspecifiedfor loWer pay officer so thatan appropriate entry can bemade. grades.Thewrittenexaminationsfor The Record of PracticalFactors should be t to E-6 and above cohtainquestions kept in each man's relating 0thepracticalfactors. and service record and shouldbe the forwarded with. the servicerecord to knowlecfge factors of BOTHmilitary7leadership ie next requirementsand duty station. Eachman should alsO keepa copy occupationalstandards. oe the recordfor his own Personnel preparing foradvancement to E-4 br use. E-5 must pass.aseparate military/leadership / examination,Prior to,participationinthe Ifiibliography, forAdvancement Study Navy-wideoccupational examination.The 4 military/leadership examinationeprthe E-4 and ES levels'.. are givenaccording to a schedule TheIfibliography forAdvancement Study, NANEDTRA. 10052,isa pyesctibedbythecommandingofficer. veryimportant Candidates are required publicationforanyon.epreparingfor to pass the aPpliable advancement. This publication military/leadership examinationonly once. lists required and recommended rate trainingmanuals and other reference materialto be used by personnel The RECORD OF_PRACTICALFACTORS is a special form used working for advancement.NAVEDTRA 10052 to reiiord the satisfactory revised and issued comfiletion of the practical'factors, both naval once each year by the Naval and occupational, Education andTraining PrograrhDevelopment listed in the Occupational Center. Each revised -StandardsManual. edition is identified bya Whenever a person letter following the demonstrates his abilityto perforn8 a .practical NAVEDTRA number.When factrn, appropriate entries using this publication,be SUREyou have the should'iheAade in _the most recent edition. DATE and INITIALScolumn, AS an EMIor EMC, you will often be The required andrecommended references required to check the are listed by pay grade levei practical:fabtorsperformance of lower rated in NAVEDTRA 10052. It is importantto remember that men.arid toreport the results toyoursupervising you are 'fTicèr .'To responsible for all referencesat lower pay grade facilitate 'recordkeeping, group levels, as well .,Tecords of practical factorsare often maintainfN as those listed for tilepay grade to which you are seekingadvancemerW abOard ship. Entriesfrom the grouprecords shouldbe Rate training mantialsthat are marked with transferredtoeachindividual's an asterisk (*) in NAVEDTRA Record, ofPracticalFactorsatappropriate 10052 have a intervals. MANDATORY nonresidefitcareer Course at the As changes ,are made indicated pay grade levels.Credit for mandatory periodically to the training courses mayte /OccupationalStandards Marittal,anewforms of obtained by passing the NAV DT RA appropriate nonresidentcareer course based on 1414/ I areprovidedwhen the necessary. Extra space is allowed mandatorytrainingmanual(additional. on the Record credit will not be giveh of Practical Factorsto enter additional practical if you, have previously factors as theyare published in changes tifthe completed any EM 1 & Ccourse), passing locally. Occupatidnal Standards prepared .tests basedon the information given in Manual. The Record of the mandatory training PracticalFactorsalsoprovidesspacefor manual, or in some recording demonstrated cases,successfully completingan appropriate proficiencyinskills Navy school. , which are. within the general scope of the rating It butwhicharenot is important to notibethat all references, identified, as minimum whether mandatory or, recommended, listedin C. 1 1 4 Chapter 1--CAREER PROqRAMI, . 3 , NAVEDTRA. 10052 may be used source tA-e of all tyiies of handtools and portable power the tools commonly u§ed in the Navy. material for the written examinations, at Sketching,' approbriate pay gra Bluepi.intReading and NAVEDTRA 10077-Dcontainsinformation that may be of value t.o you as you prepare,for Rate Training Manuals advaneement to EM1 and EMC. Mathematics. Vol.. I ,NAVEDTRA I 0069-C, Rate training manuals are writt andMathematics, Yol. 2,NAVEDTRA .10071-B tlfat may .6e helpful if :personnel -prepareforadvancem are two training manuals cotirses are general in natUrell and are you need to' brush up on,Your rilathelhatits.' basic for uge by mire than one rating; others(stich Vo I ume in particular,cutgiai this lone) are,specifio to the particularraling. information that is needed fOr.using forinulas Rate training manuals 'are revised fromtime andfor 'makingsimple computations. The to time to bring them up-to-date.The revision of informationcontained in volume 2 is more ea rate training manualis identified. by a,letter advanced than 'you will need fOr niost purposes, following the NAVEDTRA number. You can but you may occasionally find it helpful.. tell, whether a rate training manual is thelatest Satisfactory completion of the nonresident number edition by checking- the NAVEDTRA career course associated withElectrician's Mate num6er in the most 'and the letter following the 3 & 27NAVEDTRA 10546-D is required for recent edition of the-List of Trdining Manuals advancement to. EM3 and EM2. If you have met. andCorrespondence Courses,NAVEDTRA this...requirement by satisfactorily completing an 10061. Electrician's Mate 3 & 2,nonresident that `.earlier There are three rate training manuals career cause, you should at least glancethroUgh are speciallypreparea to/resent information on the latest .revisicin of the training manual: Much the navat requireinents Jim- advancement.These of the informthion-given inthis edition of, Requirement's, manuals.are'Basic.Military Electrician's MateI Cisbased on the NAVEDTRA 1.00541Military Requirem'ent:s or are, familiar with the NAVEDTRA 10056; nd assumptionthat you Petty Officers 3 & 2, contentsof Electrician's Mate 3 & 2. Military Requirements for Petty. Officers I C, Rate training Manuals prepared for other. . NAVEDTRA 10057. ratings are often a. useful source of information. Each- of these, rate training manuals has. a Reference.to these manuals will increase your. mandatory. nonresident career course associated 'knowledge of the ditties and skills'of other men withitat the indicated pay grade levels.In department'. The rine training. ' naval in the engineering addition,to giving information on the manual.preparedfor IC Electricians. .will requirements,' these three books give acigood deal probably be of particular interest .to you. of useful information on :the enlistedrating structrire; how to prepare for advancement;hot to supervise,, train,: and lead other men: and-how Officer Texts to meet your increasing responsibilities as you advance in rating. OffiCer texts rciat you may find helpful as Some.of.. the rate training Manuals that may you prepare for advancement toEM1 and EMC beuseful to j/duwhen you are preparing tomeef includeEngineeringAdministration, the occupational standards for advancement to NAVEDTRA 10858.-E: andShipboard Electrical t and* EMC are :discussedbriefly in the Systems.NAVED-FRA 1064-C. following 'Paragraphs. For:a complete listingof List of Training training manuals, consult the Nonresident Career Courses Manuals and Correspondence.Courses. Tools and Their Uses;NAVEDTRA l 0086-B is not Specifically requiredfor advancement ds. , MOst rate training manuals and officer tsxts a- are used as the basis fornonresident carefr *" , anElectrician's-Mate. -.However itcontains , . good deal of useful information on.the. careand courses.You willfindit 'helpfu.1totake .) 7 . t. 1 2 4 Chapter 1-.-CAREER PROQRAMI,
NAVEDTRA. 10052 may be used source tme of all tyPes of handtools and portable power 6 material for the written examinations, atthe tools commonly ujed in the Navy. appropriate pay grat4levels. Bluepi.intReading andSketching,' NAVEDTRA 10077-Dcontainsinformation that may be of value.to You as youprepare.for Rate Training Manuals advaneement to EMI and EMC. - Mathematics, Vol.. I , NAVEDTRA 10069-C, Rafe training manuals are wrctt and Mathematics, Yol. 2, 19,VEDTRA.10071-B training manuals tlfat may bt helpful if :personnel -prepareforadvancem . are two naturdi and are you need to' brush up onYour rhathefilatits.. courses are general in basic for Lige by mire than one rating; others(stich V o 1 ume..1. in particular,ccultajAs this Ione) are,specific. to the particularraling. information that is needed fOrmusing forrnulas Rate training manuals 'are revised from time andfor 'makingsimple computations. The to time to bring them up-to-date.The revisio,p of. information -containedin volume 2 is more ,0 rate training manual isidentified. by ajetter advanced than 'you will needfOr niost purposes, following the NAVEDTRA number.You can hut you may occasiOnally find it helpful.. tell, whether a rate training manualis the latest Satisfactory completion of the nonresident number edition by checking- the NAVEDTRA career course associated withElectrician's Mate numtier in the most 'and the letter following the 3 & 2-, NAVEDTRA 10546-D is requiredfor recent edition of the- List ofTraining Manuals advancement to. EM3 and EM2. If you have met., andcorrespondenceCourses, NAVEDTRA this...requirement by satisfactorily completing an 10061. Electrician's Mate 3 & 2, nonresident that ' earlier There are three rate training manuals career cause, you should at leastglance throUgh are speciallyprepared to joresent information on the latest .revisiOn of the training manual: Much the naval, requireinents for advancement.These of the informtion-given inthis edition of, MilitaryRequirement's, manuals.are'Basic. 1 C is- based on the Requirem'ent:s Or Electrician's Mate NAVEDTRA 1.0054: Military assumptionthat youare, familiar with the Petty Officers 3 & 2, WAVEDTRA 10056;nd contents of Electrician's Mate 3 & 2. - Military Requirements for Petty. Officers I C, Rate training Manuals prepared for other- . NAVEDTRA 10057. ratings are often a' useful source of information. Each- of these, rate training manuals has, a Reference to these manuals will increase your. mandatory. nonresident career course associated 'knowledge of the ditties and skills'of other men In withitat the indicated pay grade levels. in the engineeringdepartmenr The rikte training. ' additiOnto giving information on the naval for IC Electricians. .will a6good deal manual-prepared requirements,' these three books give prohably be of particular interest to you. of useful information on :the enlistedrating .structtire; how to prepare for advancement; to supervise; train,. ahd lead other men; and-how Officer Texts
to meet your increasing responsibilities as you . . advance in rating. OffiCer texts rat you may find helpful as Some..q. the rate training Manuals that may you prepare foradvancement'. to EMI and EMC be useful to Yon when you tire preparing tomeef includeEngineeringAdministration, the occupational standards for advancementto NAVEDTRA 10858.-E: and Shiplkoard Electrical t. -EM.l and EMC are .discussedbriefly in the Systems. NAVEDT-RA 10864-C. following 'Paragraphs. For, a complete listingof Training training manuals, consult the List of Nonresident Career Courses Manuals and correspondence.courses. Tools and Their Uses; NAVEDTRA 10086-B is not Specifically, required tbr advancementzis Most rale traiiiing manuals and officer tsxts , an Electrician's-Mate.-.1:loweveritcontainsa- are used as the basis fornonresident caiefr good deal of useful information on.the.careand courses.You willfindit 'helpful -totake
7 t. 1 2 -Or ELECTRidAXS'MATE 1 C
nonresident career courses other tlia ri. those that Chapter are mandatory: Forexample, the completion the of Number nonresidentcareer courk based on .. Title Introductionto Electronics is strongly 9600 recommendedforpersonnel, preparingfor Electric Plant-General advancementto EMC.. Takinga nonresident career 9610 Electric Power Generators course helpsyoutolirigterthe and information given in thetraining manual and Conversion Equipment also gives you a pretty good idea of howmuch you have learn'ed from studyingthe book. 9621 E I ectricPower Distribution . 2 _System NAVSEA PUI3LICATIONS 9622 A' number StbrageBatteries (Portable) ofpublications issued by and Dry Batteries NAVSEA will be ofinterest to you. Whileyou do not need .to knoweverything that is given 9630 in Electric Motors andControllers the .publicationsmentioned here,you should have a general idea ryf where to find information 9640 Lighting in NAVSEA publications, , 9660 Searchl4, NAVSHIPS TechnicalManual 4 9813 Mine .The Protection;Shipboard NAVSIIIPS TechnicalManualisthe basic doctrine Degaupirig Installation publication of the Naval.Sea Systems Command: Themanual is kept up to . 9850 date Motion Picture Equipment by means ofissuingchapter changes annually or less frequently 9883 as necesSary. When Engineering CasualtyControl intra-year changesare necessary, eithera new chapteris issued doff, a NAVSEANoticeis ..isffibuted as atemilorary chapter supplement. NAVSEA Journal All copies of the manual should have allchanges , made in Ahemas soon as possible after the Thei, changes are.received. NA.VSEAJOurnal is a Monthiy publication .The following whichcontainsinterestingand' chapters of theNAVSIIIPS useful 'information Technical Manwdare of particular importance on alt aspects of shipboard to .you, engineering. The magazineis' particularly because it supplements useful and.clarifies information Chapter contained in theNAVSIIIPS Technical and Manual Number becaus,c .. itpreset's informationon new equipment. policies, andprocedures. .4003. Allowances, Surveys, and Requests l'or Material ; Manufacturers' TechnicalManuals 9004 inspections, Records,Reports, and Tests The manufacturers'technical manuals that are furnished ,with mostelectrical components 9400 and many types ofequipment are Tables of Technical Data Sources valuable , ofinformation on operation, 9450 maintenance, andrepair. The manufacturers' Lubricating Oils, Greases,and Hydraulic technical manuals forgenerator sets and other Fluids and electrical equipment LubricatiOn Systems are- usually given NAVSEA numbers.
8 13 Chapter1 --CAREER PRO6RAM
TRAINING FILMS procedures sometimes change rapidly. Thus, (erne films bi:come obsolete rapidly. If a film is Training films 'availab1to naval persofind obsolete only inpart,it may sometimes.,.be: shown effectively-if before Or during its showing, are a valuablesourceofsupplementary information on many .technical subjeets. Films you.carefullypointouttotraineesthe. that may be of interest .are .listed in theUnited procedures that have changed...For this.reason, if States Navy IMn C:atalog,NAVSEA you -are shoWing a film to train other lierSOnnel, Supplerhents totheFilm Catalog carrythe taV a look atitin advance if possible so that' number NavAir 10-1-777. you may spot material that may have become obsoleteandvcrifycurrentproce,dur;. by ,When selecting a film, note its,date of issue looking them upinthe appropriate sources listedinthefilmcatalog.As you know, before the formal showing.
14
9 CHAPTER 2
SAFETY
.This chapter is about safety. It covers the atilt. are observing allshipboard, safety responsibilities of the senior pettyoffiter in the precautions, especially those regardingelectrical pe:fformance 61 evoIntionswhere safe1yis safety. necessary to accomplish assigned -tasks successfnlly. Responsi,liilities concerningnbnelectrical ratingsas ,an EM Ior- Chief.lectrician's _Mate, 'you will. autoniaticalir be consideredan expert on electripl safety precautions. Thus, RESPONSIBILITY you have aresponsibility to educate' themen, whose FOR SAFETY pri ma ry duti es a re :nonelectrical, inthese, precautions.. The responsibilitieSin this area are RespOnsibility for. .the safety ofpersonnel is ever .increasing as more and Moreelectrical veste'd in the commanding officer.Article 071.2 of U.S. maihines and equipment are beingutilized for Navy. Regulatiónsreads as follows: "The the various jobs aboard ship. Comma.nding Officer, shall require thatall Respoitsibilities as apetty officer,in this persons concerned are instrueted and drilledin area you have the some responsibilities applicable, safety' precautionsand procedures; as- all that they 'ard complied with ot her petty. officers of equalpaygrades in and that applicable enforcing all safety precautions. safetY precautions orextracts thefefrom are posted in appropriate places. Inany instance whefe safety precautions have not been issued or ELECTRIC SHOCK are 'incomplete, he shall issue or augmentsuch safety precautions 'as hedeems necessary, The flow of current through notifying,.when appropriate,higher authorities the body is the, concerned." cause of electric shock'. Factors determiningthe extent of the body damage dueto electric shock While the commandingofficer cannot are the amount and duration of thecurrent delegate his responsibility forthe safety of all flow, thq parts of the bodyinvolved, and the personnel under his jurisdictionhe must frequency of the current, if'a.c. In general, the necessarily delegate his authorityto all officers greater the current or the longer.te current and petty officers under hiscommand to ensure flows, the greater 4ill be thebody daMage. thatall urescri bed .safety'precautions are Body damage is also greatest whenthe current undersf"noiPaird enforced aceordingto the above flow is through ornear nerve centers and vital articl organs. Sixty-hertz current is consideredsliglitly more dangerous than current either of A st he leading Electrician's Mate, a lower your 'frequency or d.c. Thisdifferenceis small, responsibilities regarding shfqtymay be grouped however, and the same precautions into three areas as foilows: that apply to 60-hertz a.c. also apply to directcurrent. Roponsibilities concerning the FMGroup or Men differin their resistance to electric E DiOsion- these responsibilitiesinclude ensur* that all shock, and consequently, anamount of current men in the group are aware of that may cause only a.painfulshock to one.man
10 1 5 4
Chapter 2,:SAFETY might be fatal to another. Table 2-1 presentsAe Table 2-1.-60 Hertz Current Viblues effects Of 60-hertz currents flowing through the !: Affecting Human Beings body from hand to hand or hand tofoot.' Summarizing, the table,itcan 'be said that at. approximately I ma. (0.001 ampere) shoek ,is Currnt Value Effects ,perceptible: at approximateV .10tha. (0.010 ampere) shock is,Sufficient to prevent voluntaf 1:,ess. than 1 ta.No 'sensation. control of the muscles :. and at apprOximatel 100 ma. (0.1 ampere) shockis fatal, if it lastsfor 1.tO 20. ma., Mild sensationto painful 1 second or more. shock, may lose control of adjacent muscles between High-frequency currents of approximately 10 to 20 ma. 200 Hz and above have a,tendency toflow along .the surfaoe of the skin (skin effect) .and persons 2p tp 50. ma. 4 gainful shock, severe mus- coming into contact with these cNrrents usually cular contractions, breith-, ing difficult. . stiffer severe burns,'althdugh the current. may .. not penetrate the body. In .addition to the possibility .of severe burns or death,linvoluntary 50,, to 100 Ma. Same 'asabwe, only. More A severe, upbto 0100 ma. movedients..: as a result -of electrical bshock% can,. 'cause other types of serious injuries sesulting' to 200 ma. A heart,concilian knownas . from falls, c9ntact with rotating .machinery or vefit'l.ittilal heated materials, etc. . may , occur ,''annlitiere be- SeriOus injuries of this nature can occur tween 100 anct 200 ma: caus without the real i!ause receiving widewread. ing deatiriqmost immedi-, attention. Two conditions must be present for ately. an electric current to flow through the body and Over 200 ma. Severe buIrrOaqd muscular cause electric shock...First, the body:or:some contradti6n4 skOlyere that part of the body must forni part of a closed the chest mt1se'*,4p clamp circuit, and second. somewhere in the closed the he,art and Stop it for the circuit there must be it voltage, or a difference in duration of the shock.. Potential, to cause a flow of current. It follows Nk.;' then, that to prevent electric shock you_should ensure that your body never forms, part of a closed circuit (make certain that your body is
well insulated from ground). . shock evenif skillfully designedfor.safety, Tests made by the National Bureau of ,t horoughly testedbefore use, and uSedin Standards show that the resistance of the human accordance with applicable:Safety precautions. body may be as low as 300 ohms under This can happen, but rarely, doeS. Nearly all the unfavorable conditions such as thosecaused by shipboard deaths are cpsed by unauthorized use saltwater and perspiration. This indicates of, or unauthorized.. modifications to, irimwdiately thatitis possible yn a potential equiPment; failUreto observeth'eapplicable difference 'as low as 30 volts to (cause the fatal safety precautions when Using, or when working 0.1 .ampere flow of current through the body, It on or near energized equipment; failure to repair is truet ha tt hisis an extremely 'unlikely equipment which is known to be defective and conditiorr; however, it leaves no iloubt as to the has previouslY given amild shock tousers: dangers involved or to precautions necessary failure to test ami inspect equipment for defects: regarding the 120-yolt circuits aboard ship. 'or failuie to remedy all defects found by tests Practicallyall decal !locks are due to and inspections. All of these failures may be human error, rather ,than equipment failure. summarized asfailureto observe applicable Equipment may suddenly fail and cause fatal safety precautions..
1 6 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE 1.& C 4 CI kit. LECTRICAM unauthOrized entry to therear of service SAFETY PRECXLJTIONS switchboards. The previou§ly *mentioned Preventing injuryor death from electric informationis shock 'and damage to electrical applicable to.-eqtatiment installedand, operated equipment in the battery: locker. However,because of the requires strict adherence to applicableelectrical. nature of the work involved, added safety precautions by all personnel: precautions are found pertaining to' [fie mixing andhandling In addition, to the general electricalsafety of the electrolyte and precautions precautions as discussed in electrician's and warnings Alt10:3-: . related to high'hydrogengas mi,xtures. & 2, NavEdTra.16546-1j,-and AllSV,UPS`. Technical Mannak t here.are other 'special In all the work areas mentioned,the posted precautions that -"Wly to specificl'elettricil.4items and .safeguardsare *therel4intructs and equipment' and to -terthin protect thy individual. They inust*nain type§ ,of = intact jobs. As -an EM1.or Chief- Ett and in optimum condition. etrician's-Mate ydif, ".1t.! 4 -must be thoroug.hly fAntiliarwith these In most electric shopthive vatiVstypes precautions asppl# tO..tlip equipment and of rotating machinery electrical work ort, yoittl.: ship.it your coil winders, lathes, andl7.'k Corlrion responsibility to ;.sio,p,WOrkuntil safety sense safe practicesap1.). types of, violations are cOrrected. wheneyerthey Occur. power-driven t ools; for examPle: donot att'empt to operate a machine with-whichyooare not familiar. Likewise always makesure thereis WORK AREA SAFETY plenty of light anytimeyou are ), operating electrical tools. In any work 'area, certain hazards, .can, be Before operatinga machine be '- found. Ground rules, must beset and followed. 4,. the machine guards are -in place (mach.' ards- Past problemo and mistakesmake it mandatory should be kept in position that these instructions 'bc posted at all tim 'st, unless in your work removal is authdrized bya supervisor or during areas. To alertthe individnal, warning and repairs and inspections). To danger signs must be postedj For minimize the hazard the worker, of getting caught in. themachine, don't wear operating instructions and safetyprecautions loose or torn clothing, gloves, must be. posted.. Also, applicable neckties, long first 'aid' sleeves, wrist watches, wristbands, or ne.ck instructions are poSted. cha ns. Let us examine some of the safety features hen opetating aMachine...do nOtHean, found in electrical work areas. Theworkbench is against it or allow others to. insulated on all surflice Clamp work pieceS:' areas and rubber matting s6ctirely to the machineand do not exceed the is on the deck. To 'further protectthe wOrker, grounding straps are installed recommended .depth, of cut, cuttingspeed, or on the bench. For feed.- Wear goggles,a handling purposes, rubber and leather face shield, or other gloves are authorized eye protective deviceswhen you are 4,p...storedat . the workbench along with safety grinding o.r when flying chips glasses or face. shields. may be a hazard. Ensure that others in the inimediatearea do the A test switchboard is 'normallysupplied to same. If clothing gets caught in the machine, test the various items that willconic into the shop. To properly utilize the secure the power immediately. If you must leave test switchboard. the Machine unattended,secure it. operating instructions, safetyprecautions, and During repairs or adjustments, high voltage signs ig well shut .off the ifsinstructions in machine, take tli>dtteeessaryprecautions by artificial respiration and heartmassage are. posted: attaching a warning tag to theswitch to warn others not to energize it (fig;,,2-1).Chips should On or close by any switchboard;are found be removed with a brush the same written items, .mentioned or other suitable tool, for test rather than by hand or withcompressed air. The switchboards. Rubber matting is 'alsoinstalled and protective barriers area around the machine should he kellt clearof are provided lo prevent obstructions and in a pcinslipperycondition.
12 17 (hapter 2-7SAFETY
COLOR: BLACK OVER RED shock, are (1) the insulation on the distribution ..**4 OVERPRINY- system, (2) the inulation on the tool and cord, / and (3) the grounding conductor. If .t.hei.n siltation resistance of the distribution system.is not free of grounds and .. the insulation of the tool is not só.und, then the', only line of defense left for an 'operator is the grounding .conductor. It is of vital iniportance that- the ground. Wire connections between the metal.honsing Of the tool.and th e. steel structure Of the ship roniain intact and' have a'?resistiince Of less than 1 ohm. To ensure that all theSe requirements are. iiiSpections are 'necessary. The frequen.cy and-types of tests and. inspections ..necessary are:found in NAVSIIIPS. Technical.Manual. Chapter:9600:: .itis .Suggested that, at the discretion.of the cominanding officer,a, listbe maintained of portable equipment Which retwite testing on a set-.cycle dependingmp ship Conditions'. The list should include'portable hand-held electrifc toots that are permanently' charged_ out Or are on loan to Other shipboard epartrnentsj 'and 'electrkal..equipment 'whielt:. isfreqatently' to u c hed, stich .as hot plates,. :coffee maliers,
tpasters, portable20-Volt. Kni.sets, anci rno.oiC projectors.%
SOLVENTS AND rLATILE LIQUIDS, The choice of a solvent will depend upon
40A7(67B)C , availability, the degreeof fire 'risk involved,lind Figure 2-1.Danger tag. the' facilities for..'maintaining adequate ventilation.. GasOline ot ben'i.ine should. ,not be Used for cleaning purposes under any Whenworking around energized machines circumstances. The _following are the three take care not to distract the operator. If you are ..principal solvents approved for use in removing using portable electric equipment, take special oil, grease, etc. from electriCal current carrying care that the cord is clear of all movingmachine' parts.or insulation. parts. Inhibited methylchloroform (1,1, I trichloroethane, as covered by the.latest issue of PORTABLE METAL CASE Federal Specifications 0-T7620) should be ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT restricted to those cleaning obs where other cleaning agents, such as .soap and 'water or type When'an operator is.using a portable metal II dry cleaning solvent are unsatiSfactory, and case tool on an ungroundeddistributioksystem; should be distributed in small cplantities (pint assuming all conneetions arecorAt and that the cans), to avoid, indiscriminate use from open plug is inserted in the right position, the three buckets for cleaning jobs sueh as bilge cleaning, lines of defenge that .protect him from electric .etc.
1 3 18 ELECTRIC1AN'S'MATE 1, &C *Inhibited methylchloroforM may be 'very TRICHLOROETRYLENE,as covered by injtirious to certain Varnishes andinsulation if the latest issue of Federal alloWed to collect in pockets Where Specification 0-T-634, it does not is a chlOrinated solvent whichis nonexplosive- evaporate readily. Before using,observe the- and noninflammable, but has' action on a small areaor sample of the-insulating appreciable toxic effects. Trichloroethylepe isused in .a material. If it is apparent thatit will injure the vapor process to degrease metals on tenderswhich are varnish oe insulation, anothersolvent shoUld be outfitted for this process. It selected, should notbe used, An inhibitor is added,to for cleaning electrical !insulationbecause of its methylchloroform strong solvent actionon these materials. In to permit its use dn. aluminum.Inhibited general, the same health and safety rnethylchloroform itselfis precautions nonflammable. and iipply as .those listedabove for, inhibited nonexplOsive, but after 90 percentevaporation, methychloroforrii. the residUe contains highOrcentages SOLVENT, DRY CEEAN1NG,TYPE 11, as tlaninible inhibitor. , . covered by ---the 'Inhibited methylchloroformwill cause latest issue-of Federal' rusting od bare ferrous surfaces Specification P-D-680, isa safety type solvent in' ifit .,isnot which thefire and health hazards have completely evaporatedor otherwise removed at been minimized. Nevertheless,\precautions against fire the cOmpletion of the cleaningoperation: It 'and explosion should should not be allowed tocome in contact' with a be observed. The efficiency of this solvent issomewhat leis than commutator or bnishesas \insatisfactory that of the chlorinated i:ominutation may result: solvents, and ill effects to °This solvent produces personnel are also, reduced. Experiencehas a hypnotic, effect shown that this solution hasan injurious effect whenbteathed for relatively shortperiods of im.e 1 on some types of insulation. Before itis used, a ,and, when used withoutadeq4ate test, should be-made by applying ventilation, the fumes will displacethe air and the solution to may suffocate those in the a small spot on the, insulation concernedto area. The hypnotic determine whether it is affectedby the solvent. effect makes the victimunresponsive to dangers as welY as -unrespopi When a solventisbeing usecLthe,.two., Therefliire7 greatest hazards aretire and suffocation. To every reasonable effo t must be madeto ensure minimize the possibility of liberal ventilation throughuse of exhaust fans or fires, any portable blowers whenever supplenientary lighting requiredshould be' \ personnel use this. furnished ,by vaporproofor watertight portable solvent for More than a,few, minutes.In the rar lights°. The nozzles of cases when such nic.anS, of ventilation any sprayer or atomizer arc 'being operated should begrounded. You should iMpractical, an air linerespirator,.. or :ibe careful self-contained breathing appariAtus.nitiv, nOt to produce sparki by striking when the worK is to continue for metallic objects together. No'solvent should be m sed on hot equipmentor open flames add, few, rrautes.'When perxonnelare Wo'rk naturally, you should have fire decks,itis suggested' that extinguishers an observe'? b available for immediateuse. hand out Of range of the fuMes , to respond to Prevention of suffocationcan be ',most the workers' 'safety, incase of accident. readily effected through liberal Personnel...should be instructedto avoid ventilation by e?chaust fans or other suirablemeans. As prolonged or repeated breathing ofthe vapors of nie+tioned before, if the cleaning inhibited methylchloroformor prolonged or must be done in a space which lacksadequate ventilation,an repeated contact with the skin.by taking a airlinemask, self-contained breathing 15-minute break (away fromthe fumes) for each, apparatus,Or preferably, fresh airsupplied from one-hplf hoar y/orked: outside the enclosure through methylchloroform should not be exhaust fans or used on hot portable blowers should be.provided. It should equipment 1?ecause the acceleratedevaporation be noted that when inhibited will increase the toxic hazard. methylchloroform On contact with or trichloroethylene is used open .flame, this solvent can form phosgene, a chemical cartridge . which is highly toxic. respirator will not prevent suffocation,since the 19vapor from these solvents displaces airand 14 1...apter2SAFETY,.
. " oxygen. Saturation of the user's clothing should You should use only tOols With insulated be avOided and no less than two persons should handles while servicing..a, battery, and:you must be assigned to cleaning operations.in a single :lake care 'not' to Short-circuit the 'terminals. compartment . Never make repairs tO battery connections when curreatis 'flowing in the circuit, and never connect or disconnect batteries from the BATTERY LOCKERS chalrging line without first turning off the charging cUrrent. When' batteries are used with Battery lockers must be provided with one terminal ,..grounded, the grounded terminal adequate ventilation to reibove the explosive should be discOnnected first When removing the mixture of hydrogen and air. When.b'atteries are battery and .connected la'st when you replace' the being:charged, hydrogen isliberated;if the battery. By this action, you will avoid the surrounding air contains from 4 to 8 percent possibility of- grounding the hot, terminal and hydrogen, a mixture -is formed that will burn-if-,- short frig-t he battery imhen the :'ungrounded ignited.If the mixture contains .more. than 8 terminal'is disconnected first. percent hydrogen, it will explode. Hence, ample When mixing electrolyte, always pour the ventilation is necessary to =keep the hydrogen acid into theWATER.-NEVkRpour the water concentration below an established saTe limit of, into 'acid, The acid must be added. slowly tb 3 percent, ." prevent excessive heating and cautiously, to . When alarge number 'of'batteries is revent splashing. Stir the, solution continually concentrated inasingle coMpartrnenr, the during mixing because the-acid is heavier than ventilation problem becoines serious, :and 'card the water and will settle to the bottom of the must be exertised to ensure .that the ventilation container:The solution becomes very hot when .systemis operating atalltimes. The system the concentratedacid is diluted. should be supplied with fresh air from the PersOnnel who handle or mix electrolyte exterior of the Ship, and the..exhaust from the must wear rubber aprons, rubber boots,, and bat tery compartment should.. tead _overboard. rybbcr gloves_to preventsplashing the acid pn Battery explosions are dangerous and can result the skin or clothing. The eyes in particUlar in, serious injury to persOnnel; as well as damage must be protected by goggles. to equipment. All batteries must be kept clean and free The ventilation syStem, in aildition to from, t lie accumulation of acid and dirt; preventing the formation of the.* explosive otherwise, corrosion will occur and will mixture, provides a means of 'keeping the eventually ,lead to troublesome grounds. temperature of the batterj, locker at 950 F. or chGrounds are formed by the collecti6n of dirt lower. and 'acid .on the tops of cells and sides of a Aftera sealed battery compartment has been' battery. They cause a dissipation of batteryir _opened,. it must be thoroughly ventilated before energy and disarrangement. of the circuitin. light switches are turned:on,. before any other which the battery is connected. Also, a ground electrical connections made or broken, or before in the vicinity of a battery can furnish a spark 'work of any kindisperformed. Flames and that will ignite an explosive mixture. sparks..'must be kept aWay froin the vicinity' You must exercise caution when using salt be ca use storage batteries- give off a certain water around .storage batteries or spilled battery amount of ga's at alltinie"S.. acid. A chemicatreaction between sulpheiric acid The -ventilation system must be operating and Salt prO`duces chlorine gas which isfatal properly before you start a .charge: you must even in very small concentrations, stop a charge if ventilOon is interrupted; and except in an emergeney..you should not resume SERVICING SWITCHBOARDS the charge until ventilation has been restored, A:.battery should alWays be charged at the Switches should be operated with the safety prescribed rates; nevertie a higher finishing rate of both the operator and other personnel in than that indicated on the nameplate. Mind. BefOre.closing any switch. be'sure that the
15 2 0' ELECTRItIAN'S MATE1 & C
circuitis ready in all respects to beenergized and' that any men working, The worker should beinsulated from-- on tlie circuit are 'ground. Suitable insulating materials notified that it is to be energized. are rubber . mats, dry phenolic inaterial,!Arywood, dry When operating circuit breakersor switches, use onlyone hand if canvas,or even several thicknesses of;heavydry possible. .Use good paper. Besure that the material used is dry, free judgment in replacigg blown fuses. Only,fuses of of holes, and that. noR;!onducting.,material is -10 ampere capacityor less.shoUld be rgmoved or embedded in 'it. Cover'sufficientarea so that replaced in- energizedvircuits Fuseslarger than enough latitude is permittai8 'formoving around 10 ampere rat ingt should..be removed or 1 . . during work.- -. replaeed only when the -circuitis. deenergized. 1:. 'When practicable-, the worker shouldalso be Work should not be done on.any energized insulated from any live metal' partsnear the area circuit, switehbOard,ior other piece ofelectrical.. iii which he is working. lik, vquipment .unless ;Osolutelynecessary. . De e nergize_any eircuiis or While working, 'personnelshould wear equipment .to_he rubbergloves-on-botb-hands-if-the-type of work- worked on, bY opennig 'allswitches through permits it; otherwrse .they- shouldwear arubber whieh pc.Ater can be supplied andthen.test the tircuit, with a voltmeter glove on the 'band not handlingthe insulated or 'voltage tegter. You tools. As. far. 4.practicable, shoUld then tag these switches a worker should-use with warning 'only one hand in,aecomplishingthe wOrk.. ' tags'.. In case more than one pary isngaged hi repair. work on a eitcuiLa warm tag for each REMOVING party ,should be -placed 'o METERS AND the sup1yswitches. %INSTRUMENT TRANSVORMERS When checking ti..)2 see -hether citcuitS are t ., . .d e e n e r14.i 7, e n 'before starting . repair wOrk :Oii- 'When removing 'switchboards, ...he or installing .switchbbant and sure to check, metering and c 6 n tr o Ipa n e.lmeters a nd instrument control circuits as sonic instrumenttransformers will be energized transforni`erl.Syou, should exercise care to avoid even though 'main'circuit electric shock to yourself and damage breakers are open. to the . transformers and:Meters.: Keepin mind that !----When, military. considerationsrequire- some potential transformer primaries electrical repair work on energized may'.-be switchboards, energized even thong,h allpower circuit breakers permission to do the work shouldbe...obtained are off, In most installations potential from the' commanding ,officer.The.work should be done only by adequatelY tra'nsformer primariesare fused, 'and- the supervised transformer and associatedmeter can be personnel who are fully .aware ofthe dangers involved. removed 'after pulling the fusesfor .the. . transformer concerned. You mustexercise 'care, Ample illumination should' be .providedand however; in disconnecting the men should be stationed by circuit breakers c.ir transformer and meter leads .t o a void contact withnearby 'switches (and a telephone, ifnecessary) so that energized leads and terminals. . the circuit or switchboardcan be deenergized iamediately in case of anemergency. A man qualiHed infirstaid for electric shock should also be immediately available: CONNECTING AND DISCONNECTING .SHOREPOWER To minimize the, chances ofan emergency during work on energized circuits . or equipment The primary hazard involved in where the voltage exceeds 30 volts, connecting the person and disconnecting shorepower -is.the possibility doing the work should notwear a wrist watch;,\ -.1./of personvl comings-in rings, wa tch chain, metal articls_, contact with energiied or loosi.ft''; - conductors. Another hazard to consideris. the clothing which might make accidentalcontact co ndition of the shore with live parts or which might . power cable and its accidentally catch associated terminal box (both and throw some part of his body in are vulnerable to contact with exposure .from sea gpray, which isa primary live parts. The clothing and shoes heis wearing cause of grounds and short circuits). should be as dry as possible. Reverse rotation of electrical rotating.equipment can .21 16 Ni Chanter 22-SFETY also cause.numerolsProblems with the connection of the neutral wire, which .would possibility that 'some .equipment Will 15tirri out. resultinhaving high voltags on low voltage Because of the hazards involved, connecting circuits. and disconnecting shore power slicrid be The procedure also..differs. slightly for the supervised., by the,isenior EM and the eldctricat plug-in type- of shore power..cablti preSently officer,The Proceduresforconnecting and being 'installed on .new ships.. New ships are. disconnecting thbre power arid precautionS to be pro vi,cled'. wit h swchboard=mounte.d, Observed will vary slightly, depending on the phase-Sequence _indicators for illonitOring the type of ship concerned.: phase sequence of the connected shore power The procedure applicable to moSt ships is, to before the ship's sho're °power circuit breaker is. shut off and tag,the shore power circint breaker; closed. Then, meters ar :. permanently connected to test the terminals iFt the ,ship's Shore powd and are located on the control benchboard,jf terminal box With a voltage tester to ensure that ie- -is .pravided, or,on the switcliboard- bus tie- they arJdeeTtergiTe-d; and to re-gr-titicapa-t-fun unit 'containing the' shOre power circuit breaker. resistance between terminals and ground with a Periodic checks should be made to ensure meggere the shore pOwer cable: that the .cable remains 'intact ;and iS not subjht (The fuses for shore povier voltmeler and/or to, being pinehed,.stretched, irf. contact with.a indicating light transformer primaries must be shore steam line, or.to any,- other condition that pulled to get an accurate insulation 'regiSthnce may cause damage to the cable. reading between the Shore power terniinals.)- -Other ..pier services can be found in the vicinity where the ashore power cable- is located. When. kannecting the shore power cable, One, previousli;, mentioned,-is the shore -.steam' connect one end to the terminals in the ship's line,ahazard' to, both:personnel 'and cable shore power terminal box according to the phase insulation. person can be badly burned if he or polarity markings in the box on the cable, comes in contact with such a line,and if the_ line check the terminals in the source shore . power should rupture, the shore power cable should be, terminal bOx to ensure that they are deeriergizecl. Shore telephone connection 'boxes deebergized, and then connect the other end of have potentials in excess of 35 volts and musrbe the shore power eable to 'these terminals treated as such. The shore water line-is.a lesser observing polirity or phase markings as before. problem, butitcould 'release water under A f the ship'S shore power terminal box, pressure near electrical connection boxeS. connect the phase sequence meter (if three .,,To disconnect the shore- power .cable after phase a.c.) to the proper terminals, then energize the electrical load has been shifted to the ship's the cable from the shore power. source. Check generators, ensure that .the ship's shore power for proper phase sequence by observing -,the, circuit breaker is Off and tagged and that .the phase sequence meter. If the phase sequence is supply circuit breaker at the shore powersourde correct, deenergize the cable,,disconnect the is off and tagged. Atthe source shore power phase sequence meter, and reenergize the cable.' terminal box, test the terminals to -ensure-tit-tit If the phase sequence is ineorrect, deenergize they are. &energized and disconnect the cable. the Cable, recheck the phase sequence meter At the shiP's shore power terminal box, test the connectionS and, if they are correct, interchange terminals to ensure that thevare deenergized any two of the shore power cable conductors. and .disconnect the cable. Irthe cablq is the Then, energize the cable from the shore power plug-intype, unplug the cable, then test the source again, ensure that the phasesequence is male prongs of the plug to.ensure that the cable correet, deenergize the cable, disconnect the is .deenerkized 'before. You disconnect the cable, phase sequence meter, and reenergize the 'cable. The above procedure is modified slightly for SUPERVISING -ships supplied entirely with d.c, power as the shore power polarity should be checked with a Connecting and disconnecting shore power polarity indicating voltage tester. Thisisto .. requires close on-the-job supervision. In some ))revent reverse polarity and to prevent incorrect cases, the connecting and disconnecting at the
17 ,2 2 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE 1& C Ai shorepower source will be done by personnel : .Men working near a. stack Mustwear the attached to the activityfurnishing th,e shore recommended okygen breathing.apparatus. power. This means that both ends of theshore A,mong .o [her toxic substanceS, poWer cable may be in. the process of being stack ga0 contains carbon monoxide. Carbonmonoxide is connected or disconnectedsimultanedusly by. t 00 unstable to build up to seParate.groue, wider separate supervisors. a 'high coneentration ThiS" in. the .Open, but. prolonged exposure to even requires the S''pcciel attention orbothsupervisors .small quantities is dangerous. in.cbordinating the work of thetyro groups. Each time a mahgoes aloftto wOrk,,he must As the supervisor attacl4tothe hip make.it a practice to: receiving shore power;.you are responsiblejor ensuring that the prescribed proceaures for your 1.Get permission- of 'the comniunicatio.ns particular ship are carriedout. You ,are responsibhe for informing, (in watch.offiCeOCWO) apd the 00D. person) the . 2.Check. with ':the engineer' officerto supp-visor attached to the activityfurnishing,_. ensure that the-boiler.safe_ty_valves-are-not-bip-ing ---L7sliore-power, when tlrenergizeordeenergizethe shore ppwer cable. You should alsoinform him, if possible., 'before A Get the assistance of anotl0;man along ypa open 'your Shore power with a .ship's Boalswaih,s M4e who is qualified, ,circuit ,breaker while/receiving sporepower. M riggiii. As 'the supeiyisor '',attaChedto the activity 4. -furnishing shore powq, Wear ,a Rote safety harness. To any you are responSible .for b'enefit, the. harnets must be fastened ensuring thatthe .preseribed procedures'for,yoUr. securely as I'soon as,tho Place of work is reaehed.Some men activity are carried out. Youare also responsible-.. fo r have co mplained'on occasionthat a 'parachute ensuring that the shorepower cableis harness is chibgy7:tud interferes with ,energized only upon di'rect wotdfrom the movement. supervisor or other .4,ppropriate True as,this 'May be; itis also true thata fall authority, from the. height of an antenna. is Usuallyfatal. attached to the ship Jeceiving shorepower. You shyuld also inform the supervisor 5..4,,eepboth hands free for climbing.Tools of the ship are nOtsid be carried in hand; an'assistantcan lift receiving shore power, if posSible, beforeyou them tO "the work site, open the shore power supply circuit breaker 6.Secure tools with preVenter lines r'while supplyinfshorepower. to keep them from dropping on a'shipmate.y* - 7. WORK ALOFT Keep a good footing and firmgrasp at all times.. The nautical expressionHOLD.. FAST serves as a good memory deviCe,-incase One is When radio or radarantennas are energized needed, by transmitters, workmenmust not go, aloft unless advance tests show positivelythat no danger exists. A casualty 'can,occurfrom even a small spark drawn from WARNING SIGNS,- a charged piece of' metal PLATES, AND TAGS .orrigging. Although the spark itselfmay be harmless, the "surprise- may cause the ii. to 1.1 let go his grasp involuntarily. There is.also shock Warning signs d suitable .guards shall. be hazard if .nearby antennasare energized, such as provided to prevent personnel fromcoming into those on sta tions ashore, or aboard a ship accidental contact with dangecms moored alongside or acrossa pier. voltages, to warn personnel of' possiblepresence of' explosive ..An added -daliger .exists formen working aloft. The radar or other rotating vapors, to warn ,personnel working .aloftof. antennas may poisonous effects of stack gases,and to wIrn of knOck he men froM their perchand cause them to other dangers Whichmay cause injuries to fall, Motor safety switchescontrolling the personnel. Equipment installation motion of ,radar antennasmust be tagged .and should not be considered, complete until'appropriate warning locked orien before' anyone is allowedaloft near such antennas. ,signs have been posted in fullview of operating 23 personnel.
I 18 A Chapter. 2SAFETY 4 Certain .types ot standard eleclionics warning signs are aVailable for procurement:from
the Commander; phiIadelphia Naval Ship Yard. A 11111111'1111 111111.111:1111.;;FI, list' of signs that are available hA been distributed to all 'ships, coMmands, and shore activitieS. Any warning 'signs not listed should be ordetied en a separate requesting docunient.. , Drawings of the standard warning signs Mbst PERSONNEL ARE CAUTIONED TO GUARD AGAINST POISONOUS 'EFFECTS OF SMOKE PIPE freqUentlY used have been prepare,d.by the Naval GASES WHILE SERVICING EQUIPMENT ALOFT.
Sea Systems Conunand. . WHEN 'SERVICING EQUIPMENT IN THE WAY OF. SMOKE PIPE BASES USE OXYGEN BREATHING.,'
High 'Voltage Warning Sign (NavSea( Ship.) APPMWS AND A TELEPHONE CHEST OR . Dyawing NO. RE 10 WY-08B). This sign.(fig.42-2)* THOM '1A1CROPHONE SET FOR COMMUNICATION aust disphiyaln all locations where .clariger,_ WITH. OTHiRS IN WORKING PARTY. OBTAIN :NECESSARY E0e1PMENT-BEFORE topersormel existskeither tHrough diteet (;ontact GOING ALOFT. W i t h igh voltage Or through voltage arc,rsvet. ApprOpriate guardsliod alsb be installe.d at these'loption Watning Sign' for Porsonife,1Wdyking Aloft in 40.67(26D) Way .6 f Smoke Pipe Gases( NavSea( Ship) Figure 2-3.Smoke pipe gases,warning sign. Drawing No.E 10 AA 529A). This sign (fig. 2-3).is th be displayed at the bottom and top of .aecess ladders .to electronic equipment in the 2.Type B. To .be located on or adjacent to way of smoke pipe gases.. radar set controls: / . RF Radiation Hazard Warning Sign (NavSea 3.Type C:To be located at eye level at the (Ship) Drawing No. RE 10 D 2282). Four types foot of ladders or othey accesses to all towers, of this sign are included in the Orne &awing masts, and superstructures which are subjected (fig: 2.-4A through 0):..1: to hazardous levels of radiatio4 4. Type D. To be located in radio 1; TypeA' ToVe,,lodlitecl,biliNar a ftten na transmitter rooms in suitable locations in full pedestals. ;kW view of personnel oVating transmitters. Warning' PlatefOr Eleetronic Equipment Installed in Small Cr.aft (NavSea(Ship) Drawing No. RE 10 A 589). This sign- (fig:. 2-5)is a warning againstthe' energizing of electronic equipment until ventilation blowers have been operating a minimum of 5 minutes, to expel explosive vapors. Although the drawing title indicates this warning plate iS to be installed in small craft,it should also be displayed in -all spaces Where there is electronic equipment and a possibility of the accumulation of explosive vapors.
TEST EQUIPMENT
40.67(31) Sonie of the danger to personnel using test Figure 2-2.--High voltage warning equipment are: ..coming into contact with live
19 2 4 a, 14,
ELECYR1C1AN'SMATE 1 & C
kWARNING)i R F RADIATION HAZARD
A HAZAjtO TO PERSONNEL EXISTS IN THE ANTENNA BEAMO HIGH POWEitED RADAR; 141/M41.01 WI DISTANCE IFILETI sworn RADAR 140 MASHING ROTATING MO ROUT
°
WARNING WARNING RF RADIATION HAZARD R F RADIATION HAZARD
DO MOT MAKE A DIffECT VISUAL EXAMINATION A RADIATION HAZARD TD PERSONNEL EXISTS IN THE OF AMY MICROWAVE RADIATOR,REFLECTOR, ANTENNA BEAM OF HIGH POWERED RADARS WAVEGUIDE OPENING Or WAVEGUIDE CHECK WITH RADAR PERSOKHEL MORN DURING PERIODS OF BEFOREPROCEEDING TRANSMISSION BEYOND THIS -POINT T TIC I TYPE C
WARNI C. . R F: RADIATIONHAZ RD
TROIS111 WITH POWER OUTPUTS Of EGO WATTS OR LISS WILL NOT SE OPERATIC WHEN IMPOUND DOSIMISTIOLES OR ILICTRICM.LT MIMIC ORDNANCE WITHIN SOFT OF IMO. CIATIO 1 WITH P0W101, OUTPUTS OP DORI THAN ISO WATTS WILL POT K OPIRATIO ANT OPT/IC ADM IIINTIONID IMPS WITHIN 100 PT OP ASSOCIATED
111
40.67(76E) Figure 2-4.RF eadiation hazard maiming signs.
terminals or test lehds, becoming entangledin Wires attached to portable test' leads or cords, and being hit by instruments equipment that should 'extend from the back of theinstruments are accidentally thrown to the deck. In addition, away from the observer, if bossible. If thikis nOt if two or more test instruMentspe being used, a possible, they should be ctamped,to the bench potential-difference between the metal_ cases,of or table n .af the iiistr,Omerrts. When utirig the inStruments may. be sufficittto' cause instruments.jiVplaces whete vibrationsis severe shock, present, place the ill truments on .pads of foldedcloth,
20 ..2 Chapter 2-SAFETY
. - Exposure tostrong Magnetic fields should, be a voidid 'as strong magnetic 'fields may WA RNILNG perrnaynently impair the accurcy of an DO NOT. ENERGIZE ELEC.TRAIC EQUIPMENT i n s t.r u men t y1 eaving- permanenf-magne tic UNTIL 'VENTILATION BLOWERBLHAVE BE EN OPERATING A M,INIMUM OF FIVE MINUTE S effects in the..magne.t of permanent magnet TO EXPEL EX PLOSIVE VAPORS oving coilistrumentS, in the iron of moving iro.n instruments. or in the *magnetic materials IN. use'd to shield instruinents.. ,4 0 .67 (1 40) Excessive floW of current should also lie igure.2-5.--WArnin9,plate for electronic avoided. This includes various precautions gu,i,rimenidinstafiet1 in smt,11,1 crafp: . ". dependent ( m the type of instrumentIngeneral, make 1.ection'sl' while.. the .circuit is deenergi/ed, if possible, 'and *hen check all, felt, or similar material. Additional precautiOns connections o enSure that .no instrumentis 'are' necessaryjihen you ,use portabletest- overloaded. before energizing: Make 'st.ire that'
. equipmenit duri g heavy Seas. I - meters-An motor circuits can handle the-,motor To av idinjury' to personnel, keep all" starting'eurrent. This current may be as high as 7 .. unauthoriz dperSonnel clear Of the.area where or 8 times the-normal running.current. portable t st equipment is being used. Never leave an instrunient connected with its- EnSUre that the metal case of' each.. pointer 'of. fscale .or deflected in; the wrong instrument and one ide 43f the secondary of '- direction. Never...attempt to measure the internal every external ins'trument transformer is resistance' of,,a ,meter -movement- with an grounded. If equipMent must be energized for:. ohmmeter because the movement may be testing after removal from its normal rack or damaged bY the cihrent required to operate the mounting, ensure that allparts normally, at 'ohmmeter.
gr o und.potential are securely grounded. , .4 Make sure that test leads on voltmeters or multirneters are not , pulled out of the meter JURY RIGS while the probe end is,being ,touched to a .1ive electric part. Avoid testing voltages in excess of The practice of having unauthorized or 300 volts while holding test piobes in the bare jury-rigged electrical equipment on board is a hand., Instead, use 'rubber gloves:or deenergize hazard arid must be.dealt with as such. The only ..the ecibipment and attach ,t1te test leads. Then', way to e:nsure that jury-rigged items are energize .the equipment and read. the Meter. eliminatedisfor you, as a senior EM, to Ensure that any high voltage capacitors in the personally see that jury rigs are not being circuit and the terminalsto, be tested are insialled. The assignment of personnel within discharged to ground before .connecting or yoK division,for the periOdic patrolling of areas 'disconnecting the test leads. When feasible, check is/of valuaWe assistance, but you should check
for continuity and resistance rather than directly periodically yourself. . checking voltages. .. The electrical meaaurig instruments included inportable testeq. uipment are of SAFETY PRECAUTION& delicate construction, therefore, certain precautions are necessa avoid damage to the . Through training and experience you have_ instrumelrts an. d to ensuaccurate readings. become an expert in electrical safety. You have
. Mechanical shock should be avoided the responsibility to impart this knowledge to because, although the moving elements in your subordinates and, through them, to all electrical, measuring instruments are lightin handS. This is where a safety education program weight, the bearing pressure at pivots and jewel comes into play. There is a need for formal and bearings often exceeds 10 :tons per square inch informal training in eleetrical safety and it is up because of the small area olthe bearing( surface.. to you to setit up or improve on it. Every
21. 26 Chapter 2SAFETY
- Exposure tostrong Magnetic fields should, be a voidid .as strong magnetic 'fields may WARNILNG per.maynently impair the accurcy of an DO NOT. ENERGIZE ELEC.TRAIC EQUIPMENT instrument -byleaving- permanenfmagnetic . UNTIL 'VENTILATION BLOWERBLHAVE BE EN OPERATING A MINIMUM OF FIVE MINUTE S effects in .the..magne.t of permanent magnet TO EXPEL EX PLOSIVE VAPORS oving coil instrumentS,- . in the' iron of moving . iron instruments. or in the 'magnetic materials use'd to shield instruMents.. 40.670401 Excessive floW of current should also lie
igure.2-5.--WArnin9plate for electronic aVoided. This includes various precautions ? guirimenidinstaffed in smtycrafp: ". dependent (m the,type of instrumentIngeneral, m a-k e 71.ection 's.while.. the .circuitis'
deenergi/cd. if possible,:and *hen check all, . felt, or similar material. Additional precautiOns connections o enSure that .no instrumentis .a re necessaryj.ihen you , use portabletest- overloaded before energizing: Make 'stlre that'
equipmenit, duri g heavy Seas. I meters-:in motor circuits can handle the-,motor To av idinjury' to personnel, keep all" starting.current, This current may be as high as 7 unauthoriz d perSonnel clear Of the.area where or 8 times the -nOrmarrunning.current. portable t st equipment is being used. Never leave an instrunient connected with its- EnSUre that the metal case of' each pointer 'offscale, .or deflected in; the wrong instrument and one ide Of the secondary of direction. Nevet.attempt to measure the internal every external ins'trument transformer is resistance of,,a ,meter -movement- with an grounded. If equipMent must be energized for ohmmeter because the movement may be' testing after removal from its normal rack or damaged bj the cihrent required to operate the mounting, ensure that allparts normally at bhmineter. 4 - gr o und.potential are securely grounded. , .Make sure that test leads on voltmeters or multirneters are not , pulled out of the meter JURY RIGS while the probe end is,being ,touched to a .1ive electric part. Avoid testing voltages in excess of The practice of having unauthorized or 300 volts while holding test probes in the bare jury-rigged electrical equipment on board is a hand. Instead, use 'rubber gloves:or deenergize hazard arid must be.clealt with as such. The only :the ecibipment and attach,t1te test leads. Then', way to e:nsure that jury-rigged items are energize .the equipment and read. the Meter. eliminatedisfor you, as a senior EM, to Ensure that any high voltage capacitors in the personally see that jury rigs are not being circuit and the terminalsto, be tested are insialled. The assignment of personnel within discharged to ground before .connecting or yoK division,for the periOdic patrolling of areas 'disconnecting the test leads. When feasible, check is/of valuaWe assistance, but you should check
for continuity and resistance rather than directly periodically yourself. . checking voltages. ' The electrical meaaurig instruments included inporiable testeq. uipment are of SAFETY PRECAUTION& delicate construction, therefore, certain precautions are necessa avoid damage to the Through training and experience you have_ . instrumetts an.d to ensuaccurate readings. become an expert in electrical safety. You have Mechanical shock should be avoided the responsibility to impart this knowledge to because, although the moving elements in your subordinates and, through them, to all electrical, measuring instruments are lightin handS. This is where a safety education program weight, the bearing pressure at pivots and jewel comes into play. There is a need for formal and bearings often exceeds 10 :tons per square inch informal training in eleetrical safety and it is up because of the small area olthe bearing( surface. to you to setit up or improve on it. Every
21, 26 -ELECTRICIAN'S MATE I &C
electricianin your division mustrec'eive --Although these safety patrols or inspections adequate instructions in safetyprecautions. are beneficial, this does not relieve.the electrical There are plenty of .reference materials located _supervisor of his Own responsibility to conduct in the various publications.. Use standard lesson safety checks thtoughout the ship. plans and. maintain checkoff sheets. addition, oecasional shortgroup Safety education for the nonelectrical discussions concerning electrical safetyare ratings -should include information concerning recommended. Those discussions may take place electric shock and precautionS- they .must at any time without prior, preParation. There4 observe when using electrical equipment aboard . may be at least.one man in the EM group every. month who receives _a slight shock. Th is.can be Some fae'ts to bring out and points to stress the basis the .discussion. 'Have the. man to:the nonelectrical ratings concerning ele.ctric concerned relate, the exact circumstances under shock are that 'voltages as low as 30 voltscan be which he received the shock. The group 'may dangerous, that the dangerS from electric shock then discuss the slightly different conditions are much greater aboard ship than ashore asthe I .f that might liave prevailed causing- the shock to shipcan be considere'd to be a floating bathtub, be more severe or perhaps fatal. an'd that thereis verylittle middle ground .When practical. the showing of filMs between a,slight tingle and alatal shock. concerninii, safety will be helpful both as.asafety Precautions that you should stress to reminder and for safety education. nonelectrical ratings using electrical equipment include: (1) always visuallyinspeCt13ortable ENFORCING SAFETY 'electrical equipment before using (lobking for damaged plugs, frayed cords, etc.); (2)never use Safety precautions, as allrules, laws, or ,portable electrical equipment if itis believed to regulations, sh.ould be enforced...It isyour duty . .be defective (have it tested and/or repaired by to take appropriate- action any timeyou see a authorized persOnneldo. not -test or repair it junior man disregarding a safety precaution. You- yourself); (3) do. not use any personal portable should require that all jobs be done accordingto electrical equipment aboard ship, unless ithas applicable safety precautions. been inspected and_ approved: and (4) always Doing a job the safe way in some. .,re port a ny ,shock received from electrical cases may take alittle longer or _bealittle more equipment, regardless of how slight. inconvenientr however, there isno doubt as to the importance of doing it this way.. PROMOTING SAFETY rn PERIODICALS Promoting safety within the EM.group, E division, or the ship in general will require your 0 Many sources of .safety inforMationare becoming safety conscious to the point thatyou distributed on a monthly or :quarterly basis by automatically consider' safety inevery job or various naval activities. The Naval Safety Center operation. By safetY reminders andyour publishes Fathom, a quarterly surface shipand personal. example, you pass this safety submarine safety review. Fathompresents consciousness on to the other men. accurate and current information on the subject Periodic safetY patrols or inspections made of nautical accident prevention. SafetyReview, by the junior men in the groupcan also he published monthly .by the Naval Material helpful in prOmoting safety within thegroup Command, contains informationon the safe a d in reducing electrical haZards such as storage storage, handling, or other use Of productS and f foreign articles in ornear switchboards, materials. Articles, dealing with safety ontrol appliances and panels, appear open panels ,or often in the Electronics Installation_and covers missing froin junction boxes, etc. Maintenance Bulletin and the NarSea Journal. eti 2 7
'V) CHAPTER 3
I VOLTA6EAND FREQUENCY REGULATION
Sophisticated electronics and weapons VOLTAGE U N BA LANCE BETWEEN systems aboard modern Navy ships require PHASES.The difference between the highest closely 'regulatedelectrical power .for proper and lowest phase voltage, expressed in operation. To meet the increased demand for percentage of the eqUipment voltage rating. the closely regulated power, new standards for a.c: shipboard powtr systems have been established, and new voltage and frequency MODULATION AMPLITUDEA periodic regulating..quipment has been developed. voltage variation. (peak' to valley) about the equipment voltage' rating. expressed in . Following abrief discussion of the new percentage of the equipmenrvoltage rating. This standards and equipment, this chapter will is a random disturbance such as,may .be caused 'discuss the various tYpes of-voltage regulators by regulators, or by reciprocatingor ;for a.c. geneiatOrs in use aboard Navy ships. intermittent loads.
TYPES I, TRANSIENT VOLTAGE LIMITS.The AND IRPOWER changing conditions of the voltage whichgoes beyond and returns to the steady state tolerance band within a specified time period (recovery Mil-Std-761B (Ships) of 15 July1965 time), expressed-in percentage of the equipment establishes standard ekctrical characteristics for voltage rating. a.c.. -power systems. The threebasic power supplies (typa I.II, and III) are described in VOLTAGE 4Z-KCOVERY TIME.The time table 3-1. The power sut,em characteristics elapsed from initiation of the voltage change shown 5re those existing aithe load and do not until the voltage recovers and remains within the re,present generator output characteristics. All steady state tolerance band. figures are the maxiinum allowable percentages or times forthat type power. STEADY STXTE FREQUENCY
BAND.The frequencY'variations. expressed in . The' terms used intable 3-1are defined percentage of system frequency rating under. below: 'steady load conditions.. These variations are the same type as for the steady state tolerance band STEADY. STATE TOLERANCE variations: BAND.The thadcimum average voltaL:e variations, expressed in percentage of equipment TRANSIENT FREQUENCY LIMITS.The voltage rating under steady state load changi4 condition of 'the frequency which goes conditions. This includes variations caused by beyond and returns to th,teady state lo:ad changes, environ.ment (temperature. frequency band within a sp A(.1* [ime period inclination, meter error.etc.). and drift, but (recovery time). ex2ressed ..itage of the does not include transientload changes. system frequeml raTing.
23 n o ELECTRICIAN'S MATE 1- 84. C
Table 3-1.Standard Electiical Characteristics for Shipboard A.C. Power Systems
Voltage . Type I Type II Type III (a) Nominal user voltage, yol.ts rrns t 440 or 115 440 or 115 440, 115 or 115/200 (see note 1) (b) User voltage tolerances (I) Steady state voltage (see figures 2 through 7) a. Average of the three line-to-line voltages ±5% ±5% +1/2% b. Any one line-to-line voltage including a. above and ±7% ±7% ±1 1/6% line voltage unbalance tolerance (2) Line voltage unbalance 3% 3% 1% (3) Voltage modulation 2% 2% 1% (4) Voltage transient a. Voltage transient limits ±16% ±16% ±5% b. Voltage ,transient recovery time, seconds 2 2 0.25 (5) Voltage spike (peak value) volts 2500 2500 2500. (6) The maximum worst case departure from nominal ±6% ±6% ±I% user voltage resulting from (b) (1) and (b) (3) combined, except under transient or fault conditions. (7) The worst case voltage excursion from nominal user ±20% ±20% 5 1/2% voltage resulting from (b) (4) a, (b) (I) a, and (b) (3) combined except zinder fault conditionssee note'l Waveform (c) Total harmonic distortion 5% 3% (d) Maximum single harmonic 3% 3% 2% (e) Deviation factor 5% 5% 5% - Fre t_a.!Icy (1) Nominal frequency (Hertz) 60 400 400 (g) Frequency tolerances (I) Steady state 'frequency ±-3% ±5% ±1/2% (2) Frequency cyclic variation +1/2% 1/2% 1/2% (3) Frequency transient ±3% ±-1% (4) Frequency transient recovery time, 'seconds 2 2 0.25 (5) The worst case frequency excursion from-nominal 5-1/2% 6-1/2% l-l/2,% Frequency resulting from (g) (1)(g) (2), and (g) (3) combined, except under fault conditions Power Continuity (h) Typical power interruption time, scconds 0.5 to 20 0.5 to 20 0,5 to 3 Notes: 1. When a 115/200 volt, 3 phase 4 wire, wye system is suppilVa from line voltage regulators,the type_ Ill characteristics apply to line-to-neutral power. Line toline power characteristics may be expected to exceed these limits under certain conditions. 115/200 volt power is only supplied for aircraft servicing and avionics ships. 2. Excursions of this magnitude will only occur infrequently.
FREQUENCY RECOVERY TIME.The DEVIATION FACTOR.The ratio of the time ekipsed from initiation of the frequency maximum difference between the voltagewave change until the frequency recovers and remains and the harmoniecontent to 1.414 times the within the steady state frequency band. voltage rating.
HARMONIC CONTENT.The ratio' Max. deviation (expressed as a percentage) of the effective value Deviation factor % (1 00) of the voltage variations remaining after 112 nominal voltage elimination 'of the .fundamental voltage to the equipment voltage rating. Present ship seryice generators and distribution systems are adequate- for 60 and 400 hertz type I power. Type 11power differs SINGLE HARMONIC.The .percentage of principally from type I in having more stringent the effective valbe of the voltage variation voltage requirements. Better voltage regulation compared to the equ,ipment voltage,rating. 'atthe ship service generator will 'not satisfy
'24 ChaRter 3VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY REGULATION these voltage requirements as the specified elements are not installed for voRage regulatdrs voltage is at the equipment or load and mit'at used on emergencY generatOrS. the generator output. Static type 'line voltage 'regulator§ which provide type 11 voRage control DIRECT ACTING RHEOSTAT at the lOad are discussed in chapter 4. VOLTAGE REGULATOR :The voltage and frequency requirements for tyPe III 'power cannot be met without isolating The direct 'acting rheostat type voltage the equipment requiring the.power from the rest_ regulator consistS of a control element in the df the power system. Motor generator sets are form of aregulator coil which exerts a normally used for this purpose.. 'mechanical force directly on a special type of regulating resistance. The installation of direct acting (silverstat TYPES OF VOLTAGE type) voltage regulators used on emergency'a.c. REGULATORS generators isillustrated by the schematic diagram in figure 3-1. As stated previously,- in each installation one regulator controls one a.c. A voltage regulator cons'ists essentially of a generator. When a Standby regulator is installed, control element and associated metThanical or a standby. regulator transfer switchisalso electrical means to produce the changes in the installed to provide a- switching means for generator held .currentthat are necessary to substituting the standby regulatorfo.r.the maintain a predetermined constant generator' normal regulator. terminal voltage. When used on (Lc. generators. The voltage regulatorcontrols the voltage of voltage regulators and their auxiliary equipment the a.c. generator by the variableregulating func tionto maintain the generator terminal resistance, which is-built into the regulator, and voltage within specified limits and, to.provide for is connected in series.with the shunt field, of the proper division of the load between generators exciter: The complete regulator includes a operating inparallel.. When used on a.c. control element(1)'. , a dampirig generators, voltage regulators and their auxiliary transformer , and a cross-current equipment function to maintain the generator compensator. terminal voltage within specified lirnits anq to provide for proper diVision of the reactive Cohtrol Elernent current between generators operating in paralleL The types of voltage regulators use,d in naval The control element (fig. 3-2) consists of a vessels are (1) the indirect acting rheostatic, (2) regulator coil, which carries a spring-niounted the -direct acting rheostatic, (3) the rotary moving arm and aregulating resistance. The amphfier, and (4) the combined static excitation regulator coil, comprises a stationary coil wound and voltage regulation system. on a C-shaped iron core and a spring-mounted The indirect acting rheostatic type voRage moving arm. The nonmagnetic spring-rnouRted regulator§ Were used on alla.c. ship's service Nmoving a'rm is pivoted so that an iron armature generatOrs and many emergency generators. until 'attached to one end is centrally located in the 1943..Very 'few of these voltage regulators are fixed air,gap, Of the magnetic circuit. A pusher still in service, so they will not be-discussed in- arm and a coiled spring are attached to the otlier this m,anual. end of:the moving arm. The pusher arm carries One voltage regulator is provided for each two insulated pusher pins arranged to bear generator that is to be' regulated. In some ship's against silver buttons, which are spring moUnted service installations aspare voltage-sensitive and connected to the regulating resistance. (control) element 'is inStalled: on the- The silver buttons are individually mounted switchboard:: Ttie switchboard is provided with a on leaf springs insulated from each other and transfer.switch so .ihat the spare elemb.nt can he connected to consecutive taps on the stationary placed in serviceit' eit4er of the other control regulating resistance plates (fig.3-3). The elements become 'deranged. Spare control resistance plates consist of tapped resistance
25 30 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE I & C
STANDP-NE51A.ATOR TRANSFER SWITCH ITS) POSITION CONTACT STANDBY Normal. I - 2 X Y- 2 3 - 4' 4' - 4 5 -6' X 6 STANDBY REGULATOR TRANSFER SWITCH FY- N T 9 -10' NORMAL 3 C RA E-PSUART 10.-10 STANDBY 11-12' - 12 PHASE SEQUENCE 13 NPIFV( "ABC" 14.-14 A 8 CONTACTS 7-8 a 9-10' MUST OvERLAP CO WITH CONTACTS 8.-8 a I0"-10
RESPECTIVELY AND MUST "MAXE , BEFORE BREAR. IN EITHER DIRECTION
REGULATOR CONTROL SVITCHICS1 POSITION CONTACT MAN TEST 1AUTO I, -2 x x REGULATOR 3 - 4 x x CONTROL SWITCH 2-P0 T TRANS 5-6 X X x TEST 9 -10 x x MAN 11-12 x x 7/ -TO 13 -14 x x 15 -16 x NP.(F.V.) CS ,
TA 1 2 1 12' 4, 4.14.4 6'6
GEN. FLD.
DAMP TRANS 3 ExC. FLO. DTI EXT.( -1 RECTIFIER RECTIFIER
11.. (Amp RANGE TRANS. SETTING RES VOLT ADJ RHEO.
PCRTION OF
CONTROL , LEMENT
RRI STANOBY REG EQUIP TS N ID
0 14' 14 13
CS TA
27.20 Figure 3-1.Schematic diagram of direct acting voltage regulator in'allation. 31
26 ,Chapter 3VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCYREGULATION
I REGULATINGRESISTANCE '')uk-)Cdi'L) 41
INSULATING S RIPS BETWEEN LEAVES 000 1...r SILVER BUTTONS 1 NS ULAT ION ER ARM PUSHER PIN COILED ADJUSTING SCREW SPRING AND NUT
TORQUE 'MOTOR
*MAGNET PIVOT MOVING ARM MOVING ARM iI
INSULATED PUSHER PIN
IIGULATED LEAVES (BACK -UP STOP BLOCK LEAF. NOT SHOWN) SILVER BUTTON PUSHER PIN
.41 REGULATING RESISTANCE 111.26 RANGE SETTING RESISTORS Figure 3-3.Silver button assembly.
RR 2 wire embedded in vitreous enamel. The control RRI lement includes tweresistance plates, one for DT3 each silver button dss6-iiib1y,.mounted in the rear of the unit. The silver blittons connect to taps froM the associated.ssistance plate. PARALLEL 1 The coritrol element, also indudes two riiiiiiiiiii adjustable range-setting resistors(fig.3-2) connected in series with the regulator coil. These resiStors are uSed to set the range (covered by W the voltage adjusting rheostat) so that 'rated ,generator voltage is obtained with the voltage adjustingsheostat hi the rnidposition. RR 2 RR I RR2 RR I ,-The primaries of two potential transformers, connected in open delta, are connected across crr3 DT3 the terminals of the a.c. s?,enerator (fiz. 3-1). The secondaries of these transformers are connecthd to a 3-phase, full-waVe rectifier through the 111:25 compensator. The d.c, output of the rectifier.is Figure 3-2.Control element of direct acting applied to the series circuit co`nsisting of the voltage regulator. regulator coil, range-setting resistance, voltage
2 7 3 2 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE: 1 C
adjusting rheostat, and secondary of the , the center leg of a C-shaped laminated iron core. damping tranSformer. The primary of this transformer is connected When the regulator coilis ,e,neigized, the across the output of the exciter (fig. 3-1). When .magnetic pull on the iron armature )s balanced a change occurs inthe exciter voltage, the against the mechanical pull of the coiled spring. primary of the damping transformer inducesa If the magnetic pull of the armature overcomes voltage in its secondary. The secondary voltage the pull of the spring, all of the silver btittons acts on th.eregulator coil* to dampen the are separated from each.other, placing maximum .movement of the armature and thus prevents 'resistance ia the field circuit. Conversely, if the hunting and eXcessive chabges in the generator tension of the coiled spring. overcomes the .pull terminal voltage: of the armature, the silver buttons are pressed The voltage adjtisting. rheostat (fig. 3-I).is together, shorting out the resistimin the field used to raise or lower the regulated value of the
'circuit. Thus, the moving arM operates-through a.c. generator voltage. . . its travel, depending on the direction of motion, The regulator control sWitch has three to successively pen or close the silver buttons, positions (manual, test, and automatic). Aillich increases or decreaseS the resi§tance in the When the control switch is in the MANUAL (pc citer flejil. Titre moving arm has a short, travel positiOn, the a.c generator voltage is controlled so that all resistance can be inserted or cut out manually., by the EXCITER FIELD rheostat (fig. quickly, or it can be varied gradually,.depending 3-1). on the required change in excitatiom When the control switthis in the TEST For example, when the alternating voltage 'position (as shown), the control -element is rises,the regulator operates becauSe of the energized, but the regulating resistanceis increasing magnetic pull on the armature. This shorted out. The current in the eZciter field action inserts .resistance inthe exciter field circuit can be varied by the exciter field circuit :to reduce the exciter field current and rheostat, and the eration of the moving arm in armature voltage. The primary of the damping f the control elem nt can be observed.' *transformer across the exciter circnitis When the control switch: is in the subjected .to this change in current and,.through AUTOMATIC position, the generator is under transformer action,a momentary Voltageis full control of the regulator,.which will adjust inducedinthe secondarythat opposes the the voltage to the value predetermined "-by 'the increase in regulator coil curreat. This action isa position of the voltage adjusting rheostat. form of negative feedback that lowers the When operating the control switch from the magnitude of the increase . inregulator coil MANUAL to the AUTOMATIC position,pause current and: thiis Testricts the magnitude of the inthe TEST position' to allow the trarisient decrease in exciter field current and armature current in the regulator coil circuit to disappear vol tage. without disturbing 'thea.c. generator voltage. Conversely. when the alternatThg voltage The transient current is. caused by .the sudden falls, the regulator operate§ inthe opposite connection of the damping transformer-primary dirC:Ction because of the pull exerted by the across the exciter armature. coiled spring. This aCtion shorts out resistanLe in the exciter fkld circuit, and the impulse from Cross-Current CompenSator th e damping.twisformer momentarilyopposes the decreasein regulator coilcurrent. This When two or more regulator-controlled a.C. action reduces. 28 33 Chapter 3VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY REGULATION . . The compensator (fig.3-1) consists of a required to increase the generated voltage and to tapped a utotransformer connected acrossa, restrict the fall in terminal voltage. , resistor-reactor combination. The . The decrease in.generator terminal voltage is autotransformer is energized from a current transmitted through the .4400 10-volt potential transfOrmer connected in the B-phase of the-a.c: tralisformers and, the rectifier, thus decreaSing generator between the generator terminals and the magnetizing effect of the regnlator coil. The thebus. Two isolation transformers, with a pull of the coiled .spring overcomes the magnetic 1-to-1 ratio, pick up the voltage drops from the pull on the armature-and moves the arm in a resistor-reactor combination. The output direction to begin closing in .,sequence more of potential terminals of these transformers (XI, thesilver buttons. This action shorts out (in X2 and Yl, Y2)are connected.in series with the smaill steps) additional positions of the .a.c. potential leadsbetween the secondaries of regulating resistance which, being connected in thet wo 440/1-10-volt open delta.. potential the exciter field circuit, causes the exciter field transformers and the 3-phase, full-wave rectifier current to be increased and the a.c. generated, that supplies direct current for the regulator voltage to be raised. This action prevents a .; coil. The compensator is designed to supply further decrease in the terminal voltage.. When 4" compensating voltages in tWo legs of the 3-phase the voltage decrease is checked, the moving arm regulator potential circuit to ensure that a of the regulator is, again in a balanced state. The balanced 3-phase voltageis applied to the position of the regulator moving arm, however, regulator element. has changed to correspond to the increase in The taps on the autotransformer are load on the generator. connected to two DIAL SWITCHES (not If some load is removed from the generator, shown) on the compensator faceplate. One of causing the terminal voltage to rise, a decreasein these switches provides a coarse adjustment and the exciter field current is required to restore, the other .a fine adjustment of the compensator. the voltage to normal. The increase in terminal A total of 24 stePsisavailable on the two voltage increases the magnetizing effect of the switches which, inthe case of the standard regulator coil so that the magnetic pull on the 1 tcompensation, givesa" one-half armature overcomes the pull of ,the coiled spring perctiM4hange in compensation per step. The and. moves the arm in a direction to begin 12-percent. compensation is based on 4 amperes separating in sequence more of the silver supplied from the current transforiner. If the buttons. This action inserts (in small steps) current transformer ratio should give some other additional portions of the regulating resistance, . value of secondary .current, the compensation which causes the exciter field current to settings willbe affected proportionally. The decrease and the.a.c. generated voltage ta lower compensating droop introduced by the so that the rise in terminal voltage is restricted compensator should be set tb approximately 6 to a small value. percent from no load to full load at 0.8 lagging The silv6rstat voltage regulator can increase power factor. However, when the proper the excitation to the ceiling /oltage of the connections and settings have been made, no excitei, or it can reduce the excitation to the further adjustments should be neceSsary. lowest value required. Because the total travel of the moving drm is only a fraction of an inch, the Operation regulating resiVance can be varied in a few When the generator circuit breaker is closed cycles from maxiThi to practically zero, and the control switch is in the AUTOMATIC depending on the requir Ments of the operating position, the generator iS under control of. the conditions. voltage regulat& (fig. 371). If'the a.c. generator To place the voltaé regulator in control for voltage is normal, the regulator moving arm is at the first time, be certain that the generator line rest in a,balanced state. circuit breaker is open. Then, turn the regulator If an additional loadisplaced .,onthe .control switch to the MANUAL position, turn generator, cgnsing the terminal voltage.to drop, the exciter field rheostat in the_drection to an increase inthe exciter fk1d current is loWer thes Lige .an he voltage adjusting 29 A ELECTRICIAINI'SMATE 1 & C rheostat to a position midway between Ihe of' the 3-M system and the rnamifacturer's lower and raise ends of its travel. Next, checkto detailed instructions given' in the voltage see that the *brush settings are correct before regulator ,technical manuals, routine . bringing thec-a.c. generator and exciter up to maintenance should inelude ensuring that speed. Aftdr bringing the generator and exciter connections are tight and strictly in accordance , up to speed, turn the exciterfield rhedstat with installation diagrams (to maintainthe gradually in the direction to raise the voltage effective resistance in the shunt field circuitof and, at th'e same time, observe thea.c, generator the exciter) and that the.operation of the silver ,voltmeter.When the voltmeter inilicates the buttons is smooth throughout the-entire travel ' .rateda.c.generator voltage, stop turning the of* the movable core. exciter field rheostat. Iris well to recall information. about silver To placethe regulator in control of thea.c. contacts given in the training manual, enerator voltage, turn the regulator control Eleetrklah's Mate 3 & 2, NavEdTra 1054,6-D, switch from the MANUAL to. the TEST Contacts made 'of .silver. or its alloys conduct position. Pause for two or three seconds ,and cUrrent when discolored (blackenedduring` then turn the switch to. the AUTOMATIC arcing) Jvithsilver oxide.,This discolored position. Then, turn the voltage adjusting condition- therefore requires no filing, polishing, rheostat until,the. a.c, generator reaches the. tn. removing. rated vafue. After this condition has been 'obtained, the regulator Movingarm should 'settle promptly after a load or voltage change. (If the ROTARY AMPLIFIEW' arm should swing back and forth continuously, VOLTAGE REGULATOR check the polarity of the damping transformer terminals. The wrong polarity or an open circuit The rotary amplifier (amplidyne)type of, will cause this violent swinging.) When the voltage regulator utilizes a special type of exciter generator voltage is approximately at rated that furnishes a large change in outputvoltage value, close the generator circuit breaker if the for a small change in the control fieldcurrent of generator is operating alone., the exciter. The control elementdetects the If the generator is to be operated,in parallel varialion of ,thea.c. generator...voltage from a with a generator already connected to the bus, reference voltag-e, 'whichcan tivs,e tto a close the circuit breaker ofte incoming predetermined value. The variation betYeen the generator only when the two v ltagesare in actual alternating voltage and thereference synchronism. The incoming gerator can be voltage sends a current through the control field cOnnected to the line with the/regulator control of the exciter to change its outputvoltage, and, tswitch ..inthe AUTOMATIC ., hence change thea.c. generator field current to, position.As soon as the wo 'generators are hold the alternating voltaige at the desiredvalue.\ operating in parallel, readjust thegovernor The complete amplidyne voltageregulator motor (speed-changer) uhtil each unit takes its equipment consists of share of the kilowatt load. an amplidyne exciter 1 , a pilot alternator 2 , a To shut down the generator,remove the kW stabilizer3 , a voltage adjusting unit4.,, an 7 load on the generator by governor motor control automatic control unit5 ,a manual control rheostat while observing the wattmeter.If unit 6 , and apotential unitV .; as necessary turn the voltage adjuSting rheostat in a illustrated by the block diagram in figure.3-4. direction to reduce the reactive load. As the load Some installations include two normalvoltage approaches zero, open the generator line, circuit regulators and one standby regulator fortwo a.c. breaker. generators. A cutout switch with two positions Maintenance (manual and automatic) is provided for eachgenerator.. This switch isuseFI to connect the amplidyne In addition to the maintenance actions exciter and the regulator for eithermanual or shown on the Maintenance Requirement Cardb automatic control of the a.c. generator vOltage. 30 Chapter 3VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY REGULATION - 1.9.111 GENERATORI.,. STABILIZER (MOUNTED CN MAC)INE) VOLTAGE Ei MANUAL CONTROL ADJUSTING UNIT UNIT aar/1MAladoAlk. CURRENT TRANSFORMER WHERE PARALLEL OPERATION,IS REQUIRED POTENTIAL UNIT 111.27 Figure 3-4.Block diagram of amplidyne voltage regulator system. A transfer switch with, three positions in control field current to cause large changes in (NORMAL, GEN A,. and GES1 B) is provided to oiltput. It iS mounted on the shaft of the prime permit substitutiii g. the standby voltageregulatbr mover and provides the excitatibn for the a.c. for either of the two normal egulators: generator. The principles of the amplidyne In the NORMAL position,eneratots A and exciter are explained inthe training manual, B are connected in the normal automatic voltage Basic ElectricC4v.NavEdTra 10086 (revised).. controlcircuits of their reSpective regulators, and the.standby regulator is disconnected. Inthe GEN A pbsition, .the standby Voltage Adjusting Unit regulator has taken control from the normal regulator of generator A, and. generator. B is The. voltage adjiiting unitis provided to connected to its Ormalsegulator. establish the a.c. generator voltage that Me 'In. the GEN B position, the standby' regulator will maintain: This unit(fig.3-5) regulator has 'taken control from the normal consists of a- tap switch and tapped saturated regulator of generator 13, and. generator A is reactor de.Signed for mounting:directly behind connected to its normal regulator. the .generatorAj...ontrol panel...with the handle-of the tap switcR,on. the 'front .of the panel: The Amplidyne Exciter saturateGi Jeactor is the main component of .the . The amplidyne exciter (fig: 3-4) is a rotary 'voltage- -adjnsting' Unit and .the heart of the amPlifier that responds quickly to small changes regulator.system. 31 3 6 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE I& C INPUT AND OUTPUT B TERMINALS VOLTAGE ADJUSTING TAP SWITCH TERMINAL BOARD 10 COARSE OR ADJUSTING TAPS GO 'TO TERMINAL...A.m, BOAR D 1-10 REACTOR WITH TAPS\/ 1A.A/Vk ELECTRtCAL SYMBOL FOR REACTOR TAPS 1-40 46 VOLTAGEADJUSTING '..**sxmomiessa,,jomosilmarrommo0 TAPS GO TO TAP SWITCH *.A B." I 2 3 49 IV 2 3 45 383940 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM 111.28 Figure 3-5.1-VOItage,adjusting unit. The saturated 'reactor determines the a.c. , generator voltage;:which the current. Tap changing is performedonly at the regulator will time of original installationor gyring an maintain.Itconsists of a tapped coil of overhaul. approximately 400 turns woundon a soft iron core. The core is operated inthe saturated ilot Alternator region so that a_very small change in the applied voltage and flux density will . produce a large -A voltage regulator requires change in coil cUrrent. a "reference" or ,,T,, standard to which the voltagebeing regulated changing the taps on the coil may becompared to detertnine phetheror not change's the \the regulator shouldact to change the excitation reactance of the coil c,ircuit and thevoltage level held by the regulator. Increasing of the, a.c. generator. In thepreviouslydescribed the turns (to a direct acting voltage regulator higher taP number) increases this reference is the reactance and provided by a coiled spring.In the amplidyne voltage required to Maintaina given coil current. voltage regulator- -the reference isprovided bya Conversely, decreasing jhc,turns, deereases the "boost" current of reactanc'e, Old voltage required approximately 0.5 ampere to. maintain the from the pilot alternator.The pilot alteinator . . 32 3 7 Chapter 3VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY REGULATION (fig. 3-4) isa small permanent-magnet, restrain the regUlator from making excessive single-phase a.c. generator mounted on an correction_ of the exciter voltage, thereby extension of the amplidyne shaft. The output preventing hunting. effective voltage of the pilot alternatoris essentially constant. Manual Control Unit Potential Unit The manual control unit (fig. 3-4) controls the voltage of the,generator when the automatic The potential unit (fig. 3-4) provides a signal control equipment is not in use and consists of voltage to the regulator proportional to the two resistor plates and a single-phase full-wave. voltage of the a.c. generator. The unit contains a potential transformer and a potentiometer rectifier. ThetWo resistor plates are connected rheostat and is mounted inside the generator as a rheostat and a potentiometer, Which operate con cen tritally. The manual control unitis switchboard near .the current tr.ansformer and mounted inside the switchboard with the the generator circuit breaker. The potOrltial transformer is a special operating hand wheels protruding through on the T-con.nected, 450-volt transforMer. The front of the panel. The large handwheel provides potentiometer rheostat is connected inthe for coarse voltage adjustment, and the small circuit of a .current transformer and is uSed to handwheel is used for fine or. vernier adjustment. provide the reactive load division between generators operating in parallel. Automatic Control Circuit Automatic Control Unit An elementary diagram of the automatic contlol 'circuit is illustrated in figure 3-6. The The automatic control unit (fig.3-4) circuit consists of a buck circuit shown in heavy contains the static elements that are required for lines and a boost circuit shown in light lines. The. automatic voltage control and is mounted inside a.c. portions of the circuitare.,,indicate...4 the generator control switchboard. Portions of double-headed arrows and the d.c. portions by the control-unit circuit make the voltage single-headed arrows. The saturated reactor Ls, rpgula tor responsive to the average of the is energized by the a.c. generatOr voltage that is; 3phase vol tages of the generator. Also, a to be regulated is connected to rectifier, frequency compensating network permits the CRI. The pilot alternator feeds rectifier CR2. regulator to hold the a.c. generator voltage The amplidyne control field, Fl P2is practically constant with changes in the connected across the output of CR1 and CR2. generator frequency between 57 and 63 hertz. The amplidyne-exciter supplies the a.c. 1 generator field directly. 0 Stabilizer. The voltage from the pilot alternator tries to . _ force current through the amplidyne control The stabilizer (fig,' 3-4) is mounted on or near field in such a direction (frdm Fl to F2) that the amplidyne exciter and prevents sustained the amplidyne will boost, the a.c.' generatOr oscillations of the generator. It is essentially a voltage. The saturated reactor circuit trieg to transformer but, because it is in a d.c, circuit, force1 current through the' control field in the the stabilizer functions only when there is a opposite direction (from F2 to FI), tending to change in the exciter voltage, which is impresseck decrease the generator voltage. When the a.c. across itsprimary. The secoridary winding is generator voltage is near normal, the regulator is connected in series with the control field of the at its,.normal operating point and the boost amplidyne exciter. current.supplied by the pilot alternator is in the When the regulator operates to change the :Oppdsitedirection and nearly equal to the buck exciter voltage, a voltage is induced in the zcujren 'supplied by the saturated reactor circuit . control field circuit through the stabilizer. This us, the current through the control field is, momentarily affects the control field current to negligibfe, and the amplinyne excitation is 33 38, ELECTRICIAN'S MATE 1 STABILIZER GEWATOR FIELD PRIMARY PILOT ; ALTERNATOR MEW CAPLIDYNE1.' DOTTED . ROL FIELD, ,VOLTAGE LINES SHOW ;_ . ADJusTING... CONNECTIONS UNIT IF PARALLEL /OPERATION OIF GENERATORS' - IS NECESSARY POSITIVE PHAS. SEQUENCE NETWORK TEASER kat LEG SATURATED REACTOR : FREQUENCY COMPENSATION STABILIZER SECONDARY 411 BOOST . CIRCUIT BUCK CIRCUIT 27.32 Figure 3-6.Automatic control circuit. provided by the series fi8ld of the amplidyne to buc:k or decrease the,.a.c. generatedvoltage and maintain normal terminal vatage of thea.c. to prevent a furtluWincrease in theterminal generator. voltage. However, if the generator voltageshould' drop slightly below normal; the buckcurrent Three-Phase Response Circuit supplied by the saturated reactorwould drop considerably. This action causesa boost current The 3-phase 'response4rcuit (fig.' '3-7) to flow in the control field, which tends to raise d'onsists of a T-connected potentihl transformer, the a.c. generated" voltage and thusprevents a T, a resistor, R, andan inductor, L. The further decrease in the terminal voltage.This resistance and inductanceare in series across one action occurs,because the pilotalternator is not secondary winding of .the potential transfOrrner affected by the gener t,or voltage andisstill (fig. 3-7A). When a balanced 3-phasevoltage is trying to force a bt current throughthe imgressed on the primary, 1-2-3,a voltage, control field., 4-5-6, appears across the sec6ndary.The voltages If the generator voltage should across the inductor,,L, and the resistor, R,are increase 4-7 and 7-5, respectively (fig.377B). The sligh tly above normal, the saturatedreactor\ relationship, of these voltages is 4-7-5, circuit would _i3ass giving a a large additional current resultant voltage, 7-0, in phase withand a,dded through the aniplidyne control field, tendingto fo the voltage 0-6. 39 34- Chapter 3VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY REGULATIOR The resulting voltage, 7-0-6 (Vr),is the voltage of the network used to energize, the -regulator circuits. ,The regulator at constant frequency swill always act /o maintain voltage Vr constalftlf there isty deyiation in generator voltage from its noal value, the system will make corrections Until the 3-phase voltages, :1-2-3, are' the, vilues that will produce normal voltage Vr. The correct phase sequence :of the Connections of the potential unit US the generator leads is ;essential to* the correct functioning of this network. If the connections are reversed; for example, by interchanging the two lettds4rom the secondary ;teaser winding, the vatage '-121 would be subt-facttd+ from the voltage 0-6 instead of addeepolt. The /oltage, Vr, impressed on the regliatot.,woUld,tlien be . a p proxim a t ely one-fifth ';'tli'. .,reqiii44 value. ?Thus:4Ie regulator in attempting..,to, go to the 'eiliit Vatage would overexcite ithe ge4rator to --. abnormal levels. Frequency Compensation , The Teactance of the saturated reactor .(fig. 3-6) inereases as the frequency increases. Thus, an increase in, frequency from 60 to 63 hertz_at, normal 100 percent yoltage would decrease the buck -current, and the boost current' would- predominate so that the regulator would tend to hold a .higher voltage. A frequency lower. than 60 hertz would have the opposite effect, tending BRESPONSE VECTORS - to increase.the buck current so that it would`4 predominate, and the Tegulator would tend to hold a lower voltage. Therefore, a. voltage 'regulator system utilizing a saturated reactor must be prqvided with a. ,meanS to compensate the effect of frequency changes. Frequency compensation is provided by the addition of an inductor, LI ,nd a capacitor,' CI, in parallel with each other and -across theresistance portion. of the positiye phase:. sequence network used for 3-phase / respohse .;(11g. 3-6). The valuesuf the inductor LAG LEAD and capacitor are such .that at.:the normal P F. frequency of 60 herti they provide a resonant C REACTIVEVECTORS'' parallel' circuit. Which acts.like a high resistance. The 'other cohir4nents of the systeni' are, 27.28:33 adjusted So that this resistance has nO effect on , ;figure 3-7.-ThreePhase response the Sction ofithe regulator at normal.frequendy. 35 40 . A ELECTRICIAN'S MATE I & C When the frequency increasesabove 60 'current lb produces hertz, the parallel circuit has a voltage, 6-8, across the a capacitive effect, compensating rheostat, R, whichis .900 which raises the apparent voltage"seen" by the ont-of-Aase with voltage 7-6 --,satujated reactor andcauses it to pass ifs much (fig. 3-7C). The .,Itage 6-8 (IbRp) is the compensatingvoltage. buck current on normal voltageat the higher The voltage 7,-8 (Vr) is frequency as at.normal frequency. now impressed on they When the frequency decreases saturated reactor, and ate regulatOr below 60 hjie Mage proportionalto 7-8, hertz, the parallel circuitacts more like 'an .inductance, which lowers the elLtwo duplicate generators, A andB, are apparent voltage as oP ra ing in parallel atrated-power factor, the "seen'7 by the saturated reactorand,causes it to litrcurrents, I, will be eqnal; arid tilevoltage 7=8 pass on more buck current.at normal voltagesat toyo "seen" by the the lower freque ' cy,,,than saturated reactors of both it Would at normal regulators will also be equal if ,the frequency.. Tus.,the parallel circuit field,ctirrents , are balanced (made' equal), thecompensating compensates for the frequency effecton the . rheostats set at the same value of resistance, and ) saturated.'reactot, and itpasses thr same buck the governors set for equal current ata division of kiloWatt. particularli - -,,H'leat any load. Assume thata reactive load is placekon fr.equency between 57 and 6",; , the system and thatan instantaneous unbalance Reactive COmpensation occursrwith generator A havinga weaker field and genefator B having When a.c. generatorsare operated in parallel, a stronger field: This the division of the load between unbalanCe can be due to slightdifferences in the machines is a reactances or saturation characteristicsof the function of the goVernors of theprime. movers. gene ra tors or in The division of the reactive.kilovoltamp is a tlee echaracteristi,cs of the regulators. Because the excitalionis unbalimced, function of the, regulators, whichincrease or thereisa cirealating* current beiweerj,, thetwo . decrease 'the excitation .of the generators. generatOrs and, their'pomer Tactors are. The division of the reactivekilovoltamp unbalanced. between egenerators,(when operatedin parallel) The eiTect of this tobalahcedistavts the is '.acComplished byacompensating tage triangle, 7-6-8 (fig potentiometer rheostat. R, and 3-70; arta 'the a ciirrent network voltage, 7-6';, docrehsesslightly due 'to transformer. CT, provided for eachmachine (fig. the drop in 3-7A), The rheostat is connected line voltag,The compensatirt in series with voltage, 6-8 (IbRp),from. the current the Teaser l'eg of" the T-2:onneetedpotential \transformer and thecompensating rheostat have transforme'r.secondaiy. The currenttransformer changed due to the is connecteil in the Bphase of the .generator unbalanced line currents and pOwer factors. Therefore, thecompensating with its secondary connected.acpiss one side of voltage, 6-8, for generator B the potentiometer rheostat._ is greater and at different phase angle thanth-e corresponding Thegeneratorvoltage,.. l'-2-3,feedsthe primaryofthe voltage for generator, A.Thus, the resultant T-connectedpotential voltage, 7-8 (Vr), of the two transformer (fig. 3-7A). The line,current, lb, of machines is unequal phase B, in which the current transformer and different from the originalvoltage that, the is regulators were set to hold connected',isin, ph.ase with the line-to-neutral constant. The regulators willact., td change the voltage,- at unity power factor, andlib.,is.at 90" excitation of the two to 'thevoltage, 2-3 (fig.3-7('). At any other genzerators:to restore the yoltar, 7-8, 'to equal the.value, Vr, for which power factor, cuLrent lb swings out ofphase they are set by changing with the line-to-nenti-al voltagefor lag or lead the values of' the 4'16*(7 conditimis.. currents so that they ,ace balanced,The line currents and power factorswillthen be 'The secondary voltage. 7-6(rig. 3-713), which iwproximately balanced is the resultant outputvoltage of the 3-phase to give equal response network,is compensating voltages, 7-8,so that .fliese in. phase withtheline voltages "seen" by- the voltage, 2-3. and is the voltage, regulators for generators Vr, impressed on A and B. respeively, will beequal to each the saturated reactor.At unity power factor, other. 44 r , 4 chadtev 3 VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY. R4GULATION The regulator bolds voltage Vr constant, and is so .desigitedt;hat for any one setting of the the Voltagg, .7-6, depends on the vala and phase maripatwooriffol rheostat the aMplidyne,terminal angle 'of the compensating voltage, 6-8. The voltage applied to the.generator field will remain network voltage,7-6, which isthe difference constant. betwgen Vr and'6-8.and is proportiOnal to the line, voltage, has decreased slightly due to this Operation change; thus, the line voltage will be slightly less than that maintained before the change occurred The schematic diagram of an amplidyne on the sy.stem. This drop inline voltage, voltage regula-tor installationisillustrated in 4 resulting from an increase in, loa,c1, is' the Droop figure 3-9. from which the individual compensation type of The norinal operational sequence fdr a single, reactive comp.ensation is derived. generator sto setboth handwheels of the manual control unitinthe extreme LOWER Manual Control Circuit position, turnthe regulator .cutout switch to MANUAt, and turn the tranSfer switch to An elOnentary diagram of the manual NORMAL; after making certain that the control ciryitis' illustrated in figure 3-8. The----generati»- circuit breaker is.,open. Then start the buck and boost circuits arc indicated by heavy prime mo,er a»d briAg the generator up to and 'light arrows, respectively. The'voltage that speed. When the generator is up to speed, raise the amplidyhe exciter will maintain across its the 'generator voltage to approximately 450 volts terminals can be adjusted by the manual control byt Liming the handwheels of the manual rheo's ta ts. Thus, thea.c.generator terminal control tinit in the RAIE direction and set the voltage be \vied. Tlimanual control circuit handle of' the vol,e adjusting unit for 450 volts STABILIZER PRIMARY GENERATOR SERIES FIELD FIELD AMPLIDYNE EXCI TER LE, CONTROL FIELD T' F2 STABLIZER eca. SECONDARY MANUAI CONTROI RHEO STA I 1 COASE FIXED RESISTANCE VOLTAGE DIVIDER ADJUSITMENT IN MANUAL CONTROL UNIT MANUAL CONTROL RHEOSTAT VINE ADJUSTMENT BOOST CIRCUIT DUCK CIRCUI 41lb 27.34 Figure 3.8.--Manual control circuit. os .37 4 2 ECECTRICIAN'SMATE i & C 44- EXCITER FIELD PILOT 7./".."---'ALTERNATOR L. STABILIZER AUTOMATIC CONTROL uNIT I I I .L. t e I I I I '1 r I I .PI L. MANLIAL CONTROL-U-NIT-- j I .1. I 1 _J VOLTAGE--ADJUSTING- UNIT A C POTINfIAL CONMOLUNIT 111.29 Figur.e MI.Schematic diagram ofa lidyne voltage regulator installation. 1 Chapter 3VOLTAGE AND FREQUEIICY REGULATION corresponding to no-load: Then put, -the The amplidyne's shdrt-circting brushes s re'gulator in control of the a.c. generator voltage should be checked pe iodically, as improper by tkirning the cutoUt switch from MANUAL to brush contact may resulin an excessively high AUTOMATIC. Finally, adjust the generator amplidyne voltage output. voltage to 450 volts by turning the handle of the voltage adjusting unit and then close the generator circuit breaker. STATIC EXCITATION AND VOLTAGE If the generator is to be operated in parallel REGULATION SYSTEM with a generator already connected to the bus, closethe Circuit breaker of the %coming The static excitation voltage regulator generator only when the two voltags are, in system furnishes the a.c. generator fielkprtertte, synchronism. As soon as the two genertors are by rectitYing a part of the a.c. genelaThr:-oUtput..!411 operating in parallel, readjust the govenors of After the a.c. :generator hasbttil.t...uPsOtrie the prime mover§ until each unit takests share output with the-aid of d.c. switclitel.temporarily *';;;. of ithe kW load *and then equalize thpower to the field from a field flashinkpoWer sour4:' ,ifk.tOrs 'of the machines -by means of the voltage such as a d.c. generator oy batteryn automatic :.adjUSI:ink units. When the kW loads and power voltage regulator controls the outpurtd, al static feCtorthe generators are tqual, the current exciter to supply the necessary field current. oreacp:kenerator should alsobe equal . The gchematic of a static excitation and the'SYstem voltage is high after thepower magnetic amplifier type voltage'regulator system factors are balanced, slowly turn the voltage is illustrate4 in figure 3710. The system provides ai.ijusting units of both generators in the lower field excitation and manual and automatic direction until the system voltageis control ,fort hc 400-kW, 4507volt, 3-phase, approximately 450 volts. If the system voltage is 607hertz generators. low, slowly. turn the voltage adjusting unit of The control switch (SI) in figure 3-10B has both generators in the raise direction funtil the three positions (OFF, MANUAL, and system voltage is approximately,AWyolfs. AUTOMATIC). The setting of this switch To remove an alternator frOriftlihne, first determines tho 'type of operation to be used. remove the load by .adjusting the governorwhile The OrF positioP .can be used to quickly observing the wattmeter. When the kW load deenergize the generator in case of an approaches zero, reduce reactive load with the emergency. With the switch inthis OFF voltage adjtiqing unit. Then, trip the alternator's position, four sets of conpcts (sets P. Q, R, and circuit breakci. After the generator is off the S) are closed. Contacts P. Q, and R thereby line, check to see that the 'manual control unit is "short circuit" the potential winding of three set tio the mark for 450 volts corresponding to potential transformers, respectively identified as , no load. Then, shift the voltageregulator.froi* T I, T2, and T3 infigure 3-10A to remove A UTOMATIC to . MANUAL. Next,. turn the rectified current from the exeiter..Concurrently, minitial control in the lower direction.. S. contact (upper right, Fig. 3-10A) fu,h:tions to trip the main breaker. An analysis of the contact .arrangeinent (fig. . e Maintenance 3-10B) in switch SI show.64 contactelements are .placed (four per pole) on 16poles. The first The maintenance instructions for a specific four poles produce 8 Single-pole-single-throw rotary amplifier regulator given in: the,MRC and Switches (each SPST identified by 8 letters, A 3-M instructions Shalltake precedence over through These 8 have12terminals .other proce'dures.. However. the .artiCles (identified further by1 2 'numbers. 1 through concerning care..of rotating.electrical.machinery I 2). in chapter 9610 of NarShips Technteal Manual The fifth pole (No. 5 in- figt,3-10B) has only shall .be observed in all cases where they do not -two numbered terminals (13 anti 14) to identify conflict with the M or manufacturer's switch seCtionI. where its two SPST switches instruction's. are arranged in'series. Ilw function of this:series 39 4 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE1 & C 111 120 - 10 VOLTS D.C. GENERATOR 400 KW OUTPUT - GENERATOR GEN TO MAIN S2-C GEN BREAKER I I _IN MAIN BREAKER S2-8 TRIP SOIL CIRCUIT STATIC 10 EXCITER 58 R6 24 25 SI -H II SI F CONTROL 19 RHEOSTAT R-7 . . SI-B ( MAN ) 28 SI-D CONTROL SWITCH I h. *in lote.Pol SI-I SI JSI-A PI'lli A RelarO,ttleNr I1 A I towef444WD , , o__1117e24 ),...,: I 33 2 41 R15 31°HO/1-40-1'4 6( A 4, /.4_11134,_LI 1_4: 39 CR6 5- 42 4 4,c1;11.___i_H i_o 7017: C . l' 711,11. ___Li1_4, ... :".40 GW2 47 GWI A , 0_11.____I 41, . 5 Li CR.5 Al ..,..11___IL_Ip13, IDIf .if--2=-11-14M 016" X )T:1,18 II'.-11-1-41-1.00 )( a"E-414 x /a".--liE---9-0,v / 35 Ai".--q-1.--11-4.R A 44 R12 CONTROL SWITCH (52) 55 56 Pow eoferAe r 1/1441010/14 4,ennA/46-VIAT VOLTAGE WNW ADJUSTING RHEOSTAT R II p-i 111.30 F igure 3-10.Elementary dieci4Vn of, static excitation voltage regulatorsystem. 40 5 Chapter 3VOLTAGE AND, FREQUENCY REGULATION arrangement is twofold: First, to provide several , shownin the AUTOMATIC position in figure contacts that open fast and wide to quickly 3-10A. quench the several arcs produced ,(in an Switch S2 is an- assembly of, 16 contact inductive-reactance circuit) during the OFF elenients (fig. 3-10C) which are connected in "break" of the switching action. Second, td series to produce 8 switches, which operate provide optimum cooling of heated Contacts simultaneously to functicm as a single ON-OFF that become hot from arcing; device. Again, the function (using many switches) -serves to break a long arciffio several Each remaining (eleven) 'pole Of switch SI smaller arts for produeidg long life from several also is arranged with series assemblies like switch heat-dissipating contacts. sectionI.They are identified by letters J through T, with their terminals nuMbered 15 STATIC EXCITER through 36. SwitCh section T is a spare. The letter X denotes those contacts that are closed The static exciter (fig. 3-11.) :consists of a when the switch is put into a selected position 3-phase rectifier, CR1, three lineir inductors, of OFF,, MANUAL, or NUTOMAT1C. SIis LI, L2, L3, and three transformeis,31, T2, T3. GEN , T I T 2 r I I 2 P 2 P 2 1 ; S 2 S 2 L 16 13 18 14 15 16 L2 23 'A a CR I : 111.31 Figure 3-11.Static exciter. 41 46 ELECTRICIAN'S MATt 1 The transformersare alike and interchangeable Each transformer contains 4windings but figure 3-11 shows only the three windingsthat,perform in the basic exciter circuits;one is the potential or primary (P2) winding, the secondary(S2) winding, and the current winding. Theremaining CONTROL SWITCH S2 control winding is discussed later. 2 POSITIONS Briefly, each I. NORMALLY OPEN transformer is identified as an SCPT(saturable 2 NORMALLY CLOSED current potential transformer). The primary winding of,T1, T2, and T3are Y-connected through thetinear inductors LI, L2, and L3 by conductors13, 14, 15, and 23. The secondary winding is deltaconnected to' diodes (A, B, C, D, E, and F) ofrectifier CR1; by means of conductors 16,17, and 18. These elements comPrisea 30 full-wave bridge reetifier that delivers d.c. to conductorsNo. I1 and No. 9 which supply thegenerator field. The cUrrent in the controlwindings CW1, CW2, and CW3 (fig. 3-10A)cOntrols the output of the SCPT secondaricsand, thus the output of the static exci,tce:Jhe.control windingsare supplied f)yt4re..Itage regulatoroutput as .discussed lathert..:tOadcurrent flowing ,in the current windifigs(ii, 12 and 13 in fig. 3-I0A) compensates fbr'rhanges in the 111.32 generator load. Figure 3-12.Field flashing circuit. Field Flashing Circuit The field does not haveto be f ashed every Since the static. 'exciter time the system is placedin opt. ion.Itis Onnot supplY'f,ield usually necessary to flash current until sOira.e. voltage the field Rnly aftera has built up in generator malfunetion or'when the 400-kW generatOr,d.e. power is tenworarily the generator is idle forIong periodS.4time, such -4overhaul provided by a 50-kW d.c.generator delivering periods. 120 Volts. To star;1,- the system thespring-return field flashing switch, S2 (fig.3-10C), should be moved to the FLASH Manual Voltage position. The control Control Circuit switch, SI,may be plAicedin either the MANUAL or AUTOMATIC'position. This S,1 alloWs flashing current to flow temporarily to With. switch Si 3-13 the field. of the a.c.generator, as shown in figure $41 'Manual 3-12, when the prime position, contacts Fm16-.,.1 H ip. nnecting mover is started and the the 29 vol t. secondary.ofta:It . . plq 475 to the generator is brought up toward, itsfated speed. --,, .bridge rectifier CR2.'.1The., resiting d..c. 'leave Switch S2 should be releasedas soon as the CR2 from its negative generator voltage begins to buildup because termin:al, flow byway of resistor R6, njanual controlR7:,', ahd eiokd.' thereafter the static exciter (fig.3-11) is capable switch Sl-D t6 condbetor Nc.i of continuing thed.c. flow required by the 22,. Tlii'direct generator field. c u rre n t :.(lOW Ic 6 n ti lines throughthe ' series a rrangethOnt, of i'eaCli SCPTcOtytrol Winding,.' 4 7 42 Chapter 3VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY REGULATION 0,1 FIELD -r 1 j "I I 1 'I T 2 9 I I T I i I , CWI . CW2 I I I. C 3 1 I I .mviir- I VriVic I I I j -120 L _ --46-Wre 0-Wro RI R2 22 SI-A CRI r SINGLE ()INPUT ICR2 1 T5 5 firparnineer 1 I R6 L______I r -1 I 6 I I I i L_° J I 1 SI-D I 29V SECONDARY SI-HSI-F Ji' 30 SI-C SI-E SI-G SI-K 111.33 . Figure 3-13.Manual voltage control circuits. combines temporarily with the flow of the AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE generator's d.c.field passing from + to-of REGULATOR rectifier CR I. and terminates at the positive terminal of rectifier CR2. The static exciter alone (fig. 3-11) willot maintain the different amounts of field current Five swath.ections .pf SI., are 4osed to required to maintain a constant value Of a.c. estitblish minival'control of ihe exciter's output: voltage at the generator terminal during various namely -B, D. F, H,..and..0. Switclp SI-0 shor,t _load chqnges. circuits the oU t pia of tranfattnei T4 The.Vefor0, a voltage regulator ise.needed to eliminate a drooping 'characteristic whieh Os not :1:i1:4b14i:theOnerator voltagre:constant.reOrdless of now required. Manual, operaticin 'istichlet(pd .that.. t-end:t6 ,ilter its regulating resitor''.R7; which.' functitts:.'ici the saturation of theits atLT: output 1:i Jegtilatinprecisely the Varying the amot.Ant,Of.:,direct .e.urrent.!.,,ttei_11,:f;;1.110; of d.c. in.the controtv:finclingoliach SCPT core saturation and those.variatiOnSiIl chiAthiv;':..,:3Wf,'1.2. T3 in figure 3-14). fki.e,th6. initial a.c. the- voltage value thatis11fdqc:C{,1,L. from'''riaelf,P,It provided by the 85-volt secondary of primary into its associated secondary winclfhg.:''''"transfornwr ys. which feeds rectifier CRZ, to shown in figuyé 3-11. provide the d.c. source" at terminals 39 pnd 42; 43 48 EILECTRICIAN'SMATE 1 & .0 T I 12 T 3 CWI CW2 CW3 20 '21 R2 22 GR-I 6 1 T5 t0000r---1-°- 5 prinruormii14 8 5 V o o _o I SECONDARY WINDING SI-0 SI-C SI-K SI- sr 0-C PULSES FROM CR5 CW5 ! 1 R14 46 .1 MAGNETIC AMPLIFIER POWER STAGE. 111.34 Figure 3-14.Final stage Magneticamplifier. The, flow of d.c. is preciselycontrolled by the further in the reference aridcomparison circuits ohmic reactance values ofeach coil, of L6. Thc (fig. 3-15B and controlled reactance depends for amplification, inthe on3 the state of preamprifier ot figure3-16. magnetic sa.tUration produced..byanother regulatedd..c.flow fromi:',Lreetifug.: CR5,(4...- . . 3-10A). . . Sensing Circuit , The control of thiS.::regulate0.:Op-tput...of .,,' rectifier CR5 originates'with-.;Sargpling the average of the threeflifie:Vp4ageS-by, the To oblain"tlie bests'regulation during. sensing unbalanced load conditions inthe th'ree phases, circuit _in' figure. 3-,15A....ThiS"Vol tage is processed the sensing circuit (fig. 3-15A)which responds 44 4 9 Ch'apter 37-VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY REGULATION , Figure 315.Automatic voltage regulator. to thp average of the three vahfes of a.c. Reference Circuit voltages is used; Transformer T6 reduces the line voltage of '.Thereference circuit (fig., 3-1 5B) conSists,of each Vliase to a' convenitht value and rectifier resistor R9, and rectifier CR4. The functfeir of CR corivertS_Ihe 3-phase 6.c.' to d.o. voltage. If CR4 is to supplY ,a nearly .constant (25 an unbaldriced condition' uses the thr .e line reference voltage to the comparison circuit. voltages to become upeq al, the d.c. acss the Iroiiping. resistor R9 limits-the- current through rectifier will haVe cons'rabic (third harmonic) CR4 to-. a- safe value. If.the voltage (near 50 ri pple ,bu tth.rcqtnbined filter actions *Of )(olisl.aCioss R9 and CR4 inefeases, the current inductor L4, and- Cacftpr Cl will remOVP.,,the, increases in both items, but the voltage increases ad! produce'dc. ab-rbSs CI (near 56 vOlts) only across R9 leaving the voltage across CR4 at *hick is alWays in proportion to the average. of itsoriginal voltage value (25 volts). this is, e line4oltages. because CR4 is av assembly'of four silicon Urlits, each unit, opecatiiig in the natural breakdown (or !elist or R8 isused for 'reactive droop Zpner) region and having -nearly constant 6:2_, s tjon And will be discussed later. volt drop across each-.unit. 45 .1 5 0 I ELECTRI IAN' MATEU. 8r.,C r CW4CONTROL WINDING OF 1-5.. GW_I Ist GATE WINDING OF1-5 GW2. 2^dGATE WINDINGOF 1-5 CW5 I r 6 75 =Nas SI-K SI-K r---71 i I I I CW5 1 CW5\I. Le' L6 RI4 GVYI'. 54 57 CW4 52 I L5 52 Figure 3-16.--Firtt.stage magneticamplifier. 51 46 s.". Chiipter 3VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY REGULATION ;- . Comparison Circuit consist ,Of 1-5, CR5, R1.3., R14, L6, CR6, and , R1.5. The comparison circuit consists of the ,Cha'nges in generatorr,,voltage .produce.. re ference circuit(fig. 3-15B) combined w,ith changes in .current in the comparison cirtuit . resistors R I 0, R 1 1, and R12 (fig. 3-15C). Its which are in the order of millianweres while function isto' compiire the "average flowing in thecontrol winding,. CW4 (fig. 3-16), line-voltage" to the reference voltage'and to act ItiSnecessary'', to amplify considerably these on the first-stage magnetic amplifier to correct initial Small' currents so their effect, is in the any 'difference. order of several .amperes in 'the final.. control windings, cw1,.CW2, and CW3 of the SCPTs. Error Voltage wo ma.gnetic-amplifierates' (GWI. and functionatitomatically and alternately in 'Threesets of tests. are made with figure.3-16 to regulate the 'flow'of.a.C..delivered voltneerter at the 3 terminals (numbered 54;57, by the 56-volt se.condary Of transformer T5.. The and 60). in figure 3-15C and:will reveal several autoinatic _regulatibn is achieved by saturating facts tr4exiiralti the ERROR VOLTAGE (VE) 'and desaturating the .flux in the cores of GW1- produced across terminals No.. 54 and No. 57 and GW-2.,..The degree of flux at any monient in . (fig: 3-15D . - ea chc Ore' iv, det4mined by. the previously .. . . Connec a d-c vOltniFter to the VE terminals. described conditions of d.c. flow in the control Disregardtne ter-polarity cOnections beca.t.tse4, winding, CW4. . regardless. fpolarityselections, some of 'the The. flow. 'of gated a.c.4 and its conversion perforManc 'tests will cause the meter to read into d.c. pulses in:Another control 'winding (CW5 dowiiscalt4 when the 'polarity (ofthe error of the power aMplifier, J.6), is readily traced by . . voltage) rev rses. . inspection of, the arro)vs in figure 3-16B and C., Initial hanges in'. the' amount of VE are ;These arrows alongSide the conductors' and made by adjusting the slider oh VOLTAGE rectifier elements are in the direction of electron ADJUSTING R.HE4S.-PAT R11. A slider flow dtiring one half cyclto in .figure 371-6B and .; position Alf R II,wilf be fqiind where VE the other half cycle in figure 3-1.6C..The control registers ieVO. Then reposition the meter leads to winding current' can be changed until' the full verify° that the referen voltage VR (terminal supply., voltage is applied to the load...In ..this No.,60 is negative: No.4 is positive) will always way, a control winding '. in each -stage of the remain at 25 volts 05rdless of circuit changeS'. several saturated cores controls the mitput from Relocate :the meter .1cads to measure VL and the magnetic amplifier. verify' that it has'e same ,value (25 voltS) as The-seiies --resistori--R14 (fig. 3-16) and k15. VR, for this special/measurement only, when VE (fir3-14) are adjusted sd that 'each amplifier is zero. If resistOr g Liis readjusted to produce, op,...I.ites in the center of its saturation curve (for for example, either a 27- or a 23-volt reading for the magnetic core materials that are.".used). YL 'then VEltaS a numerical value of 2 votts-b-14.------In4-u4or -L7.(fig.3-16) is Used to assre polarities are' reversed. When VL is greater than smOoth 'continuous control of the second stgOo VR, a direct curpent "will flow in the control amplifier. _L primary winding ("W4 of the first-stage magnetic Transforiner T5 is used to supplY a.c. pO ver amplifier. and the' autornatic voltage regulator to the two magnetic amplifiers. It is also useto ,.'. will reduee the exciter Voltage, thereby lowering supply control cnrrent 'when itis operating in the line voltage. Conversely, when VL isless manual control. than VR, the regulatowill increase the exciter A control Winding would function to change voltage, thus raising the line voltage. its ..fluX' by meanS of either '"d.c. pulses or 'COntrOl winding 'CW4 erimloYs Magnetic Amplifier Circuits filtered d.c. by virtue of using c'apacitor CI in the.sensing circuit,' . .The essential parts-4 that comprise' two stages' If, in figure 3-16B, the supply voltage. ( from of magnetic amplifierS (figs.3-14 and 3-16) ie. transformer T5) is.applied td the gate winding in 47 .' ELECTRICIAN'SMATE 1 & C series with its CW5 load,most of the voltage drop is acnoss the gate winding(and very little lioltage drop is across the CW5control-winding load) provided the fluxin°the, L5 core never 7 reaches saturation. If the-control-windingCW4 current is; now changed so that the core flux '-, reaches saturation: for Nart of,the cycle, tIt'l gate-winding inductance .dropsto a very low 1 3 value for that part Of'the . A cycle and a portion of . the supply voltage I wave is applied to the load. REAL LOAD REaTIVE LOAD :- (A) VECTOR DIAGRAMS OF LINE VOLTAGESAND CURRENTS. Stabilizing Circuit, 01' 1' In any closed-loopregulating system R8 containing several timeconstants and having high.gain, sustained .oscillatiOnsWould be 2' produced: These undesiredoscillations are sometimes called HUINNING.To prevent hunting, a stabilizing filter cireuit(resistor R17 . 03' . 03' REAL LOAD and capacitor C3- in fig. 3-10A)removes the REACTIVE LOAD , - (al VECTOR DIAGRAMS OF 10LTAGES normal ripple froni the exciteroutput: voltage AND CURRENTS FOR T6 8 T4 and another network (resistorR18 and'capacitor C4) stabilizes the exciteroutput voltage. The nonlinear resistor, R19, is used ...to Figure 3-17.Vector diagrams of suppress abnormally high transient yoltagesthat reactive droop circuit. rn4 appear across the field rectifier,CR1. Sincethe average of' the threevectors 01'; -40-Clive Droop 02% and COmpensatipn Circuit 03' did not change forreal load, the generatorshould remain essentiallyconstant. Th eamoun t of reactive droop, Current transformer T4 andresistor R8 are can be increasedby increising- the resktanceof resistor Used. to obtain thegenerator drooping R8. characteristic. The vector diagramsforthis circuit are shown in figure 3-17A and B. Figure pARAI.LEtOPERATION 317A shows the line voltagesand currerrts for real and reactive loads. Figure 3-17B shows the - Be fore connectingan a.c. generator in voltages onthe secondary of thelransformer T6, parallel with another machine along with the IR (voltage)drop (produced for the first time, " across resistor .R8 due twits make a chseck of thereactive droop "current from the compensation circuit and check secondary. T4," called 14). Foranin-phase, reg the prime mover load this -"14 R8" voltage instructions on paralleloperation. Make the drop shortens vector *same test'for both 01'. but lengthens vector'02'.(dashed generators. , the average of the three lines) and Deenergize the generator bystopping it or vectors remains by turning switch SIto the EMERGENCY essentially. constant. Howe-ver, forreactive...load or the "14 R8" Voltage. drop OFF position; Checkt e resistance of R8 and be lengthens vectors 01'. certain its resistance and 02' .(dashed lines) andincreases. the average ohms or more.iStart the of the three vectors; generator again, flah the field, and adjustthe ,ioltage adjusting' rheostatfor rated voltage with The regulator senses this highervoltageand' thereby reduces the generator switch SI in the AUTO position. voltage,by giving To check the polarity of the the generator a drodPingcharacteristic for reactive droop reactive load. circuit, note the terminalvoltage of the generator at no loadon automatic control. 5 3. 48 Chapter 3VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY REGULATION Th,en,, add a. lagging reactive load to the The control switch SIhas an emergency gerieratorand again-note the generator voltage.'shutdown feature- when, placed inits OFF It SHOULD DECgEAgt. If the voltage rises, position. This can be used to quickly deenergize shut.down the systeni and reverse the leads to the generator in case of an emergency. the secondary of the current transformer. Set resistor R8 so that the voltage decrease is MAINTENANCE the same for both ge'nerators and is not .more than 4 percent of the nominal Voltage" when The static regulator. has no.moving parts andf' reactive load is applied. Set the same terminal its components are extrernely rugged, therefdre; voltage ori the two generators, and check to see l!it the mai n tenance:besides preventiVe. , that the phase rotation ,is the,same. for both Maintenance,is requirkt generators. Parallelthe generators'. after they Regular.preventive steps .must be assured by have been properly synchronized.... checking equipMent "fot .cleadlineSS and all connections for tightn0t..,...- 'MAIsIU AL OPERATION Protecting all. par:tV TE-64j: moistui-eis essential', eSPeciajty Where' gfelen1i0 rectifiers are,6, To start the equipment, setthe manual concerned.. AlthOtigh treated to:§top destruction control rheostat R7 for minimum volts,(fully by moisture continuedexposUre to,moisture or counterclockwise). Set the control switch SI on , mercury cpmpourids tends to destroy selenium MANUAL. Next hold the FLASHING sWitCh°S2 cells. in the FLASH position until the generatOr'Starts' , inreplacing new rectifier units in CR4, 5, or to build up. Then adjusi the manual control 6itis important not to overheat their leads - rheostat R7 to. obtain the proper generator when soldering. to prevent this, use a low voltage,. The sys.temis now operating in tetnperaidre solder '(resin core). and attach a MANUAL. small "heat sink" such as an alligator clip or grip with long nose-pliers between the rectifier and AUTOMATIC OPERATION the attached lead where the soldering is done. This willprevent damaging heat reaching the To operate the system in AUTOMATIC, rectifier cell. turn thv control switch SIto 'the AUTO '.-Ifitis necessary to apply a hipot position and adjust the voltage regulating (high-po ten tial) test with megger or other rheostat RI I to obtain the proper voltage. devices to exciter or generator, all rectifiers must The control switch 51 should hever tre left in be shorted ut with clip leads. High-potential an intermediate position between MANUAL and tests are discussed in" chapter 9600, NAVSHIP'S AUTOMATIC. Technical Manual. ,ri)7:7't 411. S. CHAPTER 4 'TRANSISTORIZEDCONTROL DEVICES Morearid, more, senliconduttoi!arc. controlling .11 it of-eurrent delivered to replacing..electron tubes, magnetic amPl4fiers, the gene' andothersuch exeiter-regulator sq,nsels devicesusedinelectrical the., gen Aid compares a rectified equipment. 5ome of the semiconductordevices sam'ple used t.ige reference 'voltage. inshipboardelectricalequipment are Theresult:H., silicon ior signisr amplified by a controlled, rectifiers, Junction diodes, transistorized differential amplifier io 'energize zener diodes, triode transistors, and unijunction-.the control windings of transistors. _a magnetic amplifier. The, magnetic amplified 'output controlsthe You muSt thoroughlyuuderstQnd Conduction' time o( tw6.SCR (silicon controlled semiconductorS ,before you atte,mptany wo-irk rectifier) thyristOrs whichin turn control the- on equipment that uses*thern. Technical manuals degree.of . saturation thesaturable on eleetrical, ,,equiprnentusing semiconductor transfort4rs and thereby c:':-4.1.their devicesdonot oqtput. alAyays. includedetailed' The saturable transformers tecerve their,output information on semicOnductorS. In addition to' power, from the yenera tor voltage. The iturrent text,there 'are two_ exeell references trarisforiners ...are connected, in series with,' .Wihich the describe the theoiy and igeration,of geherator terminals rid the load: theltoutput iS semiconductor circuits in all types ofelectronic deterniined, bY- the load. Theoutput oi the equipment E Han'd Eleetronk current transformers, together,with theoutput. Cikuits, NSN 0967-LP-60970120,and Basic of 'the satUrable transformers,,is Electionics, NAYEDTRA 100877C. applied tO the fieldrectifier bridge.. ,efli`e vector' summationof Thischapterisabasic.. treatmentof- these two outputs deterMines the generator fiekt- se m i conduct o rs. We shall discussthree chrrentandthereby.the* generatoroutput r e pr e se ntativeexamples'of' ..transistorized voltage, The exciter-regulatOr 'consists of,two, 5 ystemsship7ss..ervice.generat or ,functional sections, the .exciter and the voltage exciter-regulatortypeSB-SR, SPR-400line regulator. voltage regulator, and synchronizingmonitor. You may have no knowledge ofsemicoi:ductor EXCITER eircuitsor you may have attended a service sehool where :these circuits wcre taught. In any 'Theexcitercontainsthreecurrent event, when you complete your study this transformers; three saturable transformers; material,you three shouldhavethe' necessary linearreactors:' athreell)hase, full-wave field backgroundto analyie, repair, or direct the; rectifier bridge: a field rfashingt system; a surge . maintenance of any similar sv'tem. 'arrestor; and a paralleling current transformer. The vOltage developedatthefieldrectifier bridgeisthevector sum of the Saturable SHIP'S SERVICE GENERATOR transformer,linearreactor, and the current EXCITER-REGULATOR TYPE SB-SR transformer secondary voltages. Figure 4-1 is a block diagram of theexciter. The.ship's sentice generator eXciter-regulator Dpritig no load conditions, type SB-SR Controls the 'generator voltage by no current flows throughthecurrenttransformerprimary, 50 5 5 01 , Chapter 4TRANSISTORIZED CONTROL DEVICES FIELD FLASH AP FIELD 4' A FIELD RECTIVER CURREN? TRM4SFONMER BRIDGE a LOAD PARALLING VANSFORMER "SURGE ARRESTOR 4't VECIPORIAL SUM VOLTAGE A SATURABLE CORE TRANSFORMERSJ LINEAR REACTORS. DT* 111.160 Figure 4-1,Exciter (Block Diagram). therefore,.makingnocontributicintothe saturation of She transformer core. The degree excitation of the generator field. At this time, ofsaturationdeterminesitsoutput which, the saturable transformer and the linear reactor combinedwiththecurrenttransformers, furnish the necessarypower toexcitethe4" controls generator terminal voltage. The d.c. generator throughthefieldrectifier bridge. c9rrent for this winding is produced by the When'aload isappliedtothegenerator, secondportionofthis system,the voltage synchronousreactancedevelopswithinthe regulator. generator tending to loWer the terminal voltage. At this time, the current transformer,. in series VOLTAGE REGUtATOR with the load, develops a oltage proportional to theload.ThisvOltage, combined withthe ° The voltage regulator supplies and controls voltage developed by the saturable transformer, the d:c. current to the control winding of the issupplied to thefieldrectifier bridge. The saturabletransformer. To ac bmplish this, a increased output to the field tends' to increase combination of circuits and de s are designed terminal voltage. This system would seem ample to (1) sense terminal voltage,2) amplify and but, due to the effects of change in ambient cumpare the signal with a reference voltage, (3) temperatures, changes infield resistance, and rectifyandsendthesignal'tosatiMble other non-linear factors, the g nerator and the transformers. and (4) stabilize the regulator. exciter can never be matched exactly. A d.c. j,controlcurreptwindingin thesaturable Sensing Circuit (Figure 4-2) transformer provides a means of compensating Thegeneratorvoltage issensedby a for the mismatch. The amount of d.c. current ste p-down,three-phase sensingtransformer through this winding determines the degree of ; (T2), rectified by diOdes CR1, CR2, CR3, CR4, .51 56 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE 1 & C T 2 CR I L z TRANSISTORIZED DIFFERENTIAL R6 .AMPLIFIERS CR3 FROM G ENE R ATOR OU TP UT SENSED R14 CI CR 5 'OLTAGEV 'CR 6 R 16 AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE CONTROL RHEOSTAT R 60 E X CIT AYION TO BI A S WINDING MAGNETIC AMPLIFIER L ' 111.161 Figure 4:2.Sensirg Circuit. CR5 and CR6.filtered by choke L2 and capacitor CI. 'and Amplifier and Reference applied through external Circuit (Figure 4-3) voltage adjust rheostat R60to voltage divider netWork resistors R6. RI 4. and RI6.The d.c. sensing Volpge also provides Transistots QI., Q2, Q3, and Q4and their power for the two associated circuitry form a two-stage tra nsi st o ri z ed differentialamplifiersand differential amplifier. Transistors 03 and Q4amplify the e,xcitation for the bias windings ofa magnetic error signal and apply it to transistors amplifier LI. QI and Q2. Temperature compensated 5 7 reference Zener 5 2 Chapter .4TRANISISTORIZED CONTROL DEVICES T 2 ON OFF BIAS BIAS MAGNETIC 'AMF'LIFIER L I 111.162 Fi4ure 4-3.Amplifier and Reference Circuit. diode VR2 maintains the base of transistor Q3 potentiometer R.14. The collector of QI supplies ata constantvoltageandistheBASIC .currenttothe,off-bias -controlwinding of REFERENCE 'POINT in the voltage regulator: magnetic amplifier LI, The colleetor of Q2 When the generator is at rated voltage, the base supplies current to th.e.on-bias winding of LI. of transistor Q4 is maintained at approximately Now that yoti\ are-fp,miliar with the sensing the same voltage as the base of Q3 by the tap of circuit and the amplifier \and reference circuit, ; 53 I,nk ELECTRICIAN'S MATE 1 & C let us discuSs, in the next two paragraphs, steady As shown infigtire 4-5, if the generator state voltage and variable voltage as related to voltage begins to decrease, the voltage from T2 these two circuits. that is developell across the divider networkR6, Duringa steadystateloadcondition, R14, and R16 will also decrease, making the apprOximately equal voltagesare applied to the bases voltage of Q4 less negative,causing its bases of Q3 and Q4 and therefore thesame 'collector current to decrease. Transistors Q3and collector current flows through .transistors QI - Q4 have a common emitter resistor RIO and a and Q2 to the on and off bias windings of LI, decreasing etirrent through Q4 results in less cancelling their effect. Magnetic amplifier Ll voltage, drop .across RIO. The base voltage of Q3 (fig. 4-4) is a self-saturating device and, whenno is held constant by Zener diode VR2, but its current flows through its bias 'windings, its gate emitter voltage is lowered by the voltage drop windingprovides'aminimumimpedance, across RI 0, causing an increase in the, current resulting in maximum output. However, another flow through 93. A similar action takes place in off-bias winding (terminals 8 and 9) is biasedin theother differentialamplifier stage which the off directiori,to a point which maintains'Ll contains transistors QI and Q2. The overall at approximately one-half its maximumoutput.,result is that the current supplied by Q2to the 'Thisft.ff-bias winding receives itspowet,from a, on-bias winding (terminals 5 and 6) of LI regulated source, reference Zener diode VA I. decreases, and the current supplied by Q1 tO he FROM 02 01 ON OFF BIAS BIAS R 6 0 5 9 111:163 Figure 4-4.--Magnetic Armilifier Ll. 54 0 414' Chapter 4 --TRANSISTORIZED CONTROL DEVICES R5 R4 R3° Einc. T2 CR 24 CR 23 14 01 2 I R.-16 R 60 I inc. ON OFF BIAS BIAS Figure 4-5.Transistorized Differential Amplifier. 111.164 (showing vOltage dectease sensed at T2) off-bias winding (terminals6and 7) of LI .,magnVicamplifierLI.TheoutputfrOm increases. As more off-bias is applied to LI, its magnetic amplifier LI is converted to d.c. firing input to the rectifier circuit decreases: Ir the- pulses by diodes CR12, CR13, CR14, CR15, generatorvoltage -increases,theactionjust CR16. and CR17 and resistors R18. R19, R20. -described is reversed. . - R21, R22. and R23 andisapplied to SCR thyristors CR 10 and CR11. Resistor R24 and .Rectifier' Circiiit (Figure 4-6) capacitor C7, prevent snap-on .action of maenetic amplifier LI. SCR thyristors CR 10 and CR11, Power transformer T3 supplies power for the . tog.ether with diodes CR7 and CR9. form a operation of the automatic rectifier bridge and. single-phase.full-Wave control rectifier bridge 55 6 0 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE 14 C FROM TRANSISTORIZED DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFER ii CRI5 R23 CRI4 OUTPUT R28 R27 111:.165 Figure 4-0., Rectifier CArp.utt. ,4A ' 1`;:t that supplies d.c. current to the controlWinding- :,..moltake is of the saturable transformer interrupted.,: :Resist&R26- during automatic capacitor,C8 font a filter:netWorkacross ate operation. As the output of LI decreases,SCR control rectifier bridge.. . .thyristors CR 10 and CR II together with diodeS CR7 and CR9 .decreases; thus, causing,the d.c. signal in the saturable transformerto decrease. Stabilizer Circuit (Figure 4-7) This action causes the saturablecore to have less impedance andits outputWillincreaseto AnR-Cf,edbackcircUit, reestablish terminal voltage. Adjustable Consisting of resistor's potentiometerR13,capaditors C4, C5, and .C6, R27 and R28 are-factory adjustedto limit the and resistors R15, R-17,.. and current to 4.5 amperes maximum. Diode CR8 R25, forms a stability .control circuit. Thestability signal is a 'flyback diode that provides a current path for,' taken froni the- generator field the indtrc.tance current whenever and applied to the applied d.c. the base of transistor Q4. The magnitudeof the 56 61- 0. Chapter 4TRANSISTORIZED CONTROLDEVICES MANUAL OP.ERATION OF THE . EXCITER-REGULATOR (Figure 4-9) R 6 R 5i R4 R3 Themanualvoltagecontrolprovidesa 'CR24.CR23 method of controlling the exciter output by manually controlling the d.c. current to the saturabletransformer.Themanualvbltage control consists of the manual position of switch 02 01 S60, variable resistor R70, and diodes CR18, C2 CR19, CR20 and CR21. When S60 is in the 0 4 R13 rnaptial position, the d.c. control current for the R14 T 2 saturabletransformer iS , 114.4114 guppliedbythe secondary of isolation transformer T4 (terminals 5 and 6), rectified by diodes CRI 8 through C5T C 4 CR2I, and manually controlled by variable R12 resistor R70. The voltage regulator is energized but inoperative, and the generator voltage is R 15 R 9 subject to changes caused by variation in load, temperature,etc.Manualcontrolallows operation thatis" independent of the voltage regulator. j C6 pF F BIAS 'TO LI FIELD FLASHING (Figure 4-10) , F i eld flashingis accomplishedby a R 25 parmanent magnet alternator (PMA); field flash switch, and diodes CR56, CR58, CR59, CR60, CR61, CR62/and CR63. When the prime mover R 17 is rotating, the attached PMA is producingan voltage. When the field flashing' switch is closed, the a:c. voltage is applied to the diodes, FEEDBACK thus applying a d.c. current directly/ to the generator field. Diode CR56 _acts as'a blocking diode to prevent the exciter froin supplying 111.166 current back into the PMA. ,Figure 4-7.Stabilizer DROOP .AND CROSS CURRENT COMPENSATION CIRCUIT (Figure 4-11 ) ,ignal applied to'the base of'Q4 is determinedby :the setting of_polentibmeter R4.3. Resistor R12 nd capacitor C3 form anR-C circuit tha't During parallel operation, either a voltage provides interlo9p .Stabifity. Di6des CR23 aritl droop 'circuit or cross-current circuit is necessary CO4 limit the tevtirse:etilitter-to-basevoltage. to provide reactive load division and to reduce Capasit,or'- C2 `pre.P'entshighfrequency circulatingcurrentsbetweengeneratorsin *Oscillations. . . parallel. A currenttransformer(or - . transformers), located in the exciter section, and You-have noik gonejllidiigh the components. an adjustablerc":56,4or (R50) are required to of ,tbesvoltage sFgolat9i..Referring to figure 4-8. obtaineitherVad_rooporcross-current yoU willSe'e!the interaynnections of each circuit. compensation. 57 6 2 »16 r 3 6f-ril" 0 A H AUTO Ot)j',.',1 1 3 4Cfi,,,, :4 ,,. 4- -..,,,,,,,---_,_-_* ., ,. :14 lo . ' 1 1 6, 1 r2 .NSW .'"1 MaffijAL ADAISTIT, HOFOSTAI , FEWJAC0 e Figure 4-8.Type SB-SR Voltage Regulator. ,'MR , ,. , 141% ;IS; ( Ul; OD P to' COY PEN$A71c1N . , i 1 2 -4- ---(''fi, Irh. 7 r v--1 1 , : - (.) 1 1 : I, 1 t L.1 ; 4 - ! , .. :;. e ,.. ,tt-- 2i ; L._ ...... 7.- .... -' , '-1.1' ';li ;:.,_ I :1, 11 ,--1- +4 1 H1 ,t, 1, 1.y.,._., ._I' 14c* ; +;,' f HL % 10 .1% 1.1 ! ;7 t . iHA , 9 . ( LI "1 I I ' L. 1 . VAN LAD.'USI`.6 6 E A V 2 Figure 4-8.Type Se-SR Voltage Regulator. . Chapter 4TRANSISTORIZEDCONTROL DEVICES T 4 T 0 SATURABLE TRANS FORME,R,S , 111.168 Figure 4-9.Manual VoltageControl. FIEL6 RECTIFIER BRIDGE FIELD TO LOAD FIELD FLASH SWITCH , ICRA CR59 ICR 60 CR 56 , 1CR63 CR 62i I CR 61 FROM PERMANENT MAGNET FIELD FLASH ALTERNATOR 111.169 Figure 4-10.Field FlashingCircuit. 59 6 5 I TO . CR 4 F.R VOLTAGE GENERATOR REG U L ATO R OUTPUT .111.170 Figure 4-11.proop ana Cross-current Compensation Circuit. During parallel operation., a voltage that is transformer 1.1. When a'resistive..load is applied, 90- ouo of phase (for unity power factor) with the secondary voltage.. from T1 leads the sensing the regulator in put se`rtsMg* voltage is ckvelop.- vpltaL.e from T2,hy 90'. The veetor.soni of the across-resistor R50. This voltage,is propollional two) yoltages.is nearly the. same -.as the original to the generator load current in magnitude and. voltagefromT2: cosequehtly, ...nochange phase.-fhevoltageapfilij:dtothesensing occurs in the g.enerator output voltage. When a rectifiersfcliods CR1throughCR-61in .the lagging., power (actor (inductive) load is applied., voltageregulatoristhevectorial sy01 of the the, seCondary voltage from .T 1is in phase with 0 input sensing voltage from sensing transformer the. sensing ..voltagefrbm T2, andthetwO J2 plusthevoltage developedacross resistor voltages cambine vectorially. Then, th-e'resultant O.ciich is apc)lied th'rdugh parallel isolatibn voltage applied to.:the sensing i-P,'tifier is larger '° 6 6 ChaPter 4TRANSISTORIZED CONTROL DEVICES 4)- . than befbre. Since the action of the regulator frequency, and power faetor variations in single maintains aconstant voltageatthesensing or.throe-phase(deltaorwyeconnection) rectifiers, the regulator reacts by detA-easing-the circuits, There are several. designs of line.voltage -generator output voltage. When a leading power ' regulators available.The' operalion described in factor (capacitive) load is applied, the secondary the ',next; section will 'cover-a.typical design. The'. voltages.conibine vectotially in such a manner line voltage regulator is4lesigned around.the use that the resOltant voltage applied to the sensing of the silicon controlled rectifier, or.SCR,which rectifieris "smallerthanbefore.Thenthe acts as a .switch when a control Voltage is appli0 'regulatorreacts, byincreasingthe generator to it.. output. voltage. = "When two, generators are in parallel during ....no load :conditions and one 'upplies a lagging OPERATION powc,r factor (inductive) load, the load appoTars as a ledding power fdctor (capacitive) load tothe The vgltae regulator isinstalled in series othergenerator.Thenthereactionof the 'withtheloadwhich:.refqUiresthepeecisely ,respective regulatorsistO decreae the cdtput regula-ted powewto-ily. TIteunit shown in , voltage of thjfirst generator and increase the figure 4712 controls a single phase circiiit. The, output voltage of .tho second' generator. This input terrnitials X1 'and X2 on terminal:. .action minimizes circulating currents between board 1 (TBH.1-Zegulatedoutputisfroici paralleledgenerators.'Droopcompensatibn. terminals Y1 and Y2 on TB I. Regulation, is 'iallowsparalleled generatorsto . share reactive achieved! Bycontrolling . the two auto dirrentloadsproportionallyby:..7aiOng .transforMers. T 1 andT2.Toensurean decrease (droop) in the generator syStem output acceptable wave form one-sideofthe voltage. transformer outpUt goes to a:harmonic filter via° 'terminal 1 on The filter consists of the inductor L4 on'TB6, and the parallel Caracitors MAINTENANCE C6, C7, and C8. t . Since this systeni. Inis no mOying parts and., Voltage from terminals. Y Iand 1 on .-TB1 therefore, has inherent long life:i2.haracteristics. drives the rectifier 'rbridge consisting of CR 1, . little preventive. maintenance is required other CR2, CR3, and CR4 on the circuit board. This thanthatdesignated.on,r...4he Maintenance. bridge provides d.c. power for the solidfte Requirement Cards. components on the board. The:input from tlfe gOnerator is Sensed,at X1 and X2, This.Signal is then applied tb Yl and 1 CAUTION t h r.oii g.h a 0 t otra ns forme rS T1 andT2, Transformer T3thensendsthissignalto THE USE01' MEGGERS AND HIGH differentialamplifierQ3 andQ4 fhrough POTEN-TIALTEST EQUIPMENTIS'NOT rectifiers CR5 and CR,12, Here the ;Signal :is RECOMMENDED,INCORRECT.USE,. OF compared to Zener diode (CR16) reference. . SUCH EQUIPMENT ' WILL DESTROY THE S.E.M1CONDUCTO R.SIN ,TH-L: The .pulse 'circuit QI respondsp theerror EXCITER-REGULATOR. 17' signal from the differential atiiplifiJi; !Which has beenamplifiedby .Q2. :The H pulses aro transmitted to the silicon-cOntrolled rectifiers SPR-400 LINE yJ25LTAG E ttEGULATOR (SCR's) CR2r0 and CR2I (via" terminals 1 and 2 of TB3). The SCR's determine the level of d.c. The., SPR-49 linevoltageregulatorisa to the control windings of T.1 and 12 and thus general 'purposeautomaticallw.controlled rsgulate the output. line regula.tpr designed. for nait ships. It enstires kememher, the application of. input power preOisionvoltageregulatio..n.!.... for , line,load, (across terminals XI. and X2 of TB1, fig.. 4-1 2) s. 61. 6 7 UNE DROP Cal4PC0',AtiON 1 R9 RI3 LI RI3 RIZ NIIC UTPUT voL, Crf ADJUST CR CR') CHIO 1 c4 CRI1 CRI2 C2 CR. CRII rq() 81 OUTPUT vOLT4GE / 816 ADJUST4AENT CR8 FL 1 . , Cl!ICUIT BOARD 1 e+, T 81 T 3 rtg, J 1 It. Ao. , A g I .1 CR20 N r,P 21 MA1C[O PAO 1 68 21 4 C9 Figure 4.12.SPO400 LineVoltage Regulator. Dw3P_ too! re h I 1- 1 _ 9 , 1P13 P9 ;' i? V A T i4! 1 t' 4.. '40LrAGE _CIPCulT ,JOARD .41 ; --1 ..11: f 1 .1 j T t 4 irrff f.' ----1"1 , 1-) /;- rT H4 TE.I5 , , 14 . 1 1 r- r 1-0 -r I 1 I I 41.t 1 , 6) I.II .1 /1` 4. t'OWL L .J _ 4' 4.1('r .j L 111.102(111C) Figure 4-12.SOR-4b0Line Voltage Regulator, 4 Chapter 4:-TRANSISTORIZP CONTROL :DEVICES , energizesthetwo :TAM Het .operated SYNCHRONIZtNG MONITOR autotransformers. The input :voltage is stepped up by an aiding winding (MD) wound directly: Thesynaronizingmonitor(fig.4-13) over the primary winding' (PRI): The voltage is monitors the phase angle, voltage, and frequency then reduced .to nominal output by an opposing relationshipbetween a 450-volt,60-hertz Winding(OPP). Themagilitudeofinduced generataz and an .e,nergized- bus. Ciceuits within voltage in the ppposing winning is varied-by the this panetenergize a relay'when the phase angle. leyel of d.c. in the control windings (CON) from (0) is between-30° Jand ttit ,voltage '- the. SCR's.The Opposing andthecontrol difference (AV) is lç6s thiin5 perce'fft, or the windings are s,eparated from the primary,and the ti-equencydrift -(AF) ,betweenan oncoming aqing windings tiv a intkgnetic shunt Increasing generator-m(11in eneu;ized bus is lethan 0.2' the:d.c.in ,:the.controlwindings forces the hjrtz. magnetiCffux through the 'shunt. decreasing the .o.pposing:voltage,andthus, increasingthe output. tte Power to the SCR'S is taken from stepdown II- EU IT BREAKER transformer T4, whose primaryis connected CLOSI,NG CdITCH acrossthe'regulatoroutput.Diode CR11 C4N TACT S provides a discharge path via terminals 6 and .7 -of TB3 for the control windings of T1 and T2 when the SCR's arc shut off. 'Fite SCR's aie protected from excessive peak inverse'voltage by BUS OUTPUT K I silicone diode CR22: The silicone diode acts as CIRCUIT RELAY an insulator during normal oPeration, but when an excessive voltage is applied to it. It shorts and thusprotectsthe SCR's. \Olenthevoltage A returns to normal. the silicime didde will again be an insulator. IL To provideanadditional output voltage BUS PHASE A compensation for cable loss, the stud of terminal EIFFERENCE O= -30° and f 0° 01 p PO MONITORING Y2 passes through current tranSformer T5 and fi= > -30' and 4- 0° (31 OFF induces a signal in T5 proportional to the' load ON COMING.e 'CIRCUIT '3 current.Adjustmentofpotentiometer .R21 GEN,ERA TO providesLompensationinthiscircuit.The A potentiometersettingcompensates. 'forthe BUS resistancein cables from the regulator to the ISETAGE load. Once set,it does not have to he changed GII I ERENCE ,AV <5% ()I ON2 mONITOFfING AV.= >57. 01 OFF unless the cables (not the load) are changed. . ON COMINGH. CIRCUIT 6FNERATOH. MAINTENANCE' BUS F ItEQUCNCY Norni(ly, lit tle, preventiveinaintenance, 01FF ERENCE AI 302 hertz 02 ON MONITORING that described on the Main tenance AV >0ligriz 02 OFF other tha ON ,COM IN Go. Cards, ;isrequired, becausethe CIRCUIT ,Requirement GENERATOR components are stable and nonwearing with no . moving parts" (other than two potentiometers). Make frequent inspections for (lust, dirt, and moisture accumulation and clean the equipment 111.105 as necessary. Figure 4-13.Block Diagram'of Synchronizing Monitor, 0 63 7 0 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE I & C ° Thesynchronizingmonitor doesnot The synchronizing monitorconsis4 cif four automatically parallel twogenerators when it is maincircuits': Connected to tWe system. The the output circuit, thephase generators must differenqe monitor circuit, the beparalleledmanually, whether or not the voltage difference monitbring.circuit, ind'ithe frequencydifference synchronizing monitorisconnectedtothe. monitoring circuit. circuit.Thefunctionof thesynchronizing monitor is to prevent the manual paralleling of OUTPUT 'CIRCUIT' two generators whon the phaseangle, vohage difference, and frequency differenceof the two The output circuit (fig. 4-14)contains the generators are not within safe limits. K 1 relay, its power supply, anda set of contacts . CIRCUIT BREAKER CLOSING SWITCH CONTACTS K I 1'0000T-1H2K 2L 4 CR3 CR2 Cf I CIO ACR4 RC 4 W, CRY 11 *CR5 02 AC2 R 5 CRC fII-If 1111 DIVELHI.NCE 'f-frOUUNC'l (.1IcHl I u'MIII Omni-, M ON ITIMINC, CIOCUI1 cind, (/' 1,11 IrJI I AV , Ca I Of 0 2 herl, 02 ON (1"1.11 (IF f 5"/,, UI Of- F her), 02 eAf: , 111.106 Figure 4-14.Output Circuit. Chapter 4TRANSISTORIZED CONTROL DEVICES (circuit breaker closingiswitch contacts) in series saturation. This, in turn, acts like a short circuit withtransistors Q1 and Q. The K1relay (equivalenttoclosed, contacts.). If thebase providesanelectrical interlockthroughthe currentsignal is weakened,reversed,or closing circuit of a circuit breaker. This interlock eliminated, the transistor then acts as an open will prevent an operator from electrically closing circuit (equivalent to open contacts). thecircuitbreaker unlessthenecessary conditipns have been met. /To energize the K1 TransistorQ2completesthecircuitto telay, the circuit breaker closing contacts must energize relay K1. Transistor' Q2 is biased on be open "and Q1 and Q2 must be ON. With from'thefrequencydifftrencemonitor. proper"circuitbreakerlineup,"thefirt Rectifiers CR2, CR3, and CRf', Tii.pacitors CI conditionis met. To turn on Q1 and. Q2,- tkie and C2, and resistors R2 and' R3 damp-opt monitoring circiiits must provide the current voltage spikes on Q1 and Q2. Rectifiers CR4 and signals to QI and Q2. CR6 limit emitter to.base (reverse bias) voltages . onQ1 and Q2 tolow values.6's LoOking at the schematic in figure 4-15, you can see that the energized bus voltage, is stepped To sum up the operation of this circuit: down bysecondary windnig XI and X2 of relay K1 is enci-gized When transistors 01 and transformerT1.andrectiffedbyfull-wave Q2 arebidsed on, and circuit breaker 'switch rectifier ("RI to form the power supply fortelay ccontacts connected between 2K and 2L are K1 andtransistorsQ1andQ2.. Full-wave dosed. rectifier .CR7 rectifies the output of secondary winding X3 and X4 of transformer T1 to form PHASE DIFFERENCE 'thereferencebias supplytotransistor QI. Resistor R4 and capacitor C3 filter the. output MONITORING CIRCUIT of rectifier CR7. Zener diode CR8, due to its flat' voltage characteristic, maintains a constant The phase difference monitoring circuit (fig. referencetoQ1 . ResistorR5isavoltage 4-16) prevents energizing of the KI relayir the dropping resistor that limits the voltage across phasedil,ferencebetweenthebus and the Zener ,diode CR8 o a safe value.,If the voltage oncoming 'generator is more than -30° andi 0°. It applied to R5 and CR8 increases, the increased does this by .reducing and Comparing botlhfiput voltage ts absorbed as an JR drop across R5, and voltages (bus and incoming generator); rect4ing the 'voltage across CR8 remains constant. and filtering both input voltages; and using its Output to control transistor Ql. Two circuits affect the bias voltage of Ql. Thefir4circuit is thephasedifference Looking at the schematic in figure 4-17, the monitoring circuit, which inchulcs resistor R6. secondary winding X Ifind X3 of 12 and XI and When avoltageolsufficientmagnitudeis X3 of 13 are. connccted SQ that the "output. developed across R6, the base to emitter bias of voltageS of T2 and T3 subtract from each other. transistor Q1is 'reversed, turning Off Ql. The For instance, fissu me that the voltages are in -secondcircuit is thevoltagedifference phaseas showninfigure 4-18. When these monitoring circuit connected across the base to voltages are in phase, the potential at points A emitter of transistor QI. When transjstor Q5 and B (across rectifier CRIO) in. figure 4-18 will conducts, this circuit disables Q1 by shorting the bethe same, so no current: can flow. Now base to emittcr of QIthus removing the bias assume that the energized bus and the oncoming reference supply. 01 can conduct or be biased generator are180' out of phase, as shown in on only when these two circuits are off. The figure 4-19. Under these conditions the voltage action by the QI transistor is similar to that of a atpoint Aisata maximum inapositive switch. A transistor can be used -so that it acts direction, while die voltage at point 13is at a like contacts that are either closed or opened. maximum iii t negative direction. This causes This is done by using a large enough base current maximum currentto flow inrectifier CR10. signal, so thatitcan drive:the transistor into Filtering of the rectified current is accomplished 0 65 7 2 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE I & C INDICATING LIGHT INDICATING LIGHT ENERGIZED. LAMP I. TEST L AMP I ' ! I rrr; _ J _J ro. ' 7P ro - x4 46 T.I r 1 4 c ; c C 3 2 o 3 CR7 '7-if v 1 . R 8 1 C\ fid OR 1 C3 CIO 30 It a I x C' C IOU( '1 .04-.--CL.}.- RS $16 i-- 2 20 PHASE OIFFERENCE MONI TONING U T ---7, NIT ly D*;9o4A (R,, 7 I/ :9 C '8 o F FIEOuldrICY DIFFERPICE 02 MONITORING " UNIT 10! s RI Al '4.0 5 SCR-r R C PI, -.6 -6.14.441.-.1w.- -- VOLT Asiit DIFFERENCE MONITORING ..., rel UNIT 1 , 1. ,'--lir71 x VIrr . L:',2,,,, 44,./ f 6r /3' nlik, ' 2, 1 or:KA 6C, 4 ,or1 L. _ 111.107 Moro 4-15.--SynchronitingMonitor. 66 7 3 Chapter 4TRANS1STORIZED CONTROL DEVICES Q I OUTPUT CIRCUIT BUS POWER SUPPLY SUBTRACTING SIGNAL RECTiFY AND FILTER VOLTAGE DROP CIRCUIT ON COMING GENERATOR POWER SUPPLY 111.108 Figure 4-16.Block Diagram of Phase Difference Monitoring Circuit. OUTPUT CIRCUIT R6, X I eT2 X3 8 X I CZa T3 g. X3 Figure 4-17.Schematic Diagram of,Phase Diffe/rencelAoriitoring if 67 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE I. &C. ° VOLTAGE ACROSS qmo WHEN ENERGIZEDBUS AND 4 * # ss ONCOMING'GENERATOR ARE IN PHASE Figure 4-18.Input Voltage to CR10(in phase). GEN. 4,77: 1AGE ACROSS CRIO WHENENGRGIZEP BUS ,AND ONCOMING; IVRA.TOR ARE' 1800 OpT OFPHASE , )4 A.i ure 4.19,A4 age to CR16 (180° oUt'cif))ha'sil). . . . lia7 . . t,,e" . ,hyresist Ti. .R7iiict OpacitOr. C4 (fig. 4-1r7). Reniefn differ'eneis, 1'8V between thelwo `1 V when no phase difference exists CR.FG outinit: is applied betweeid) .'ittiergized bus. and. Alio aerossiesistors R8 and oncoming At a' gkiren magnikide,4e Voltage drop generatAV CR 1 0 rectiheroutput is zero, and acro .reist('* thilt a maXimkim output ove:reomes the is,developed when. the positive 'bias fIxAn baleto emitter of transistor 47-- ' 14.1" 7o. Chapter 4TRANSISTORIZED CONTROLDEVLCES QI (due tO Zener diode CR8), and the netresult Transformer T3 steps the voltage down, CR15 -is a negative bias which shuts off transistorQF rectifies it, and R17 and C8 filters it. , Zener diode CR18 is used to increase the the VOLTAGE DIFFERENCE sensitivity of vbltage divider R20 and R21 in all the . MONITORING CIRCUIT bus signal circuit. The Zener diode causes increase or decrease of the bus signalvoltage to,`: appear acrosSthevoltagedivider. This also `i" The .voltage difference monitoring circuit happens to voltage divider R18A and RI8B,1 prevents energizing of the 'KI relay if thevolta using Zener diode CRI 0. The resultant,sign difference between the bus and the onco mg, out of each voltage divider is the sensingsigna generafoj is more than 5 percent. It does tis by These sensing sigas are then fed to arectifi (fig. 44-20) reducing anli rectifying both input bridge consisting of CR's I7A, B, C, andD. andincominggenerator); voltages(bus . Whenthebus and the oncoming' generator producing and delivering a sensing signal from sensing signals are equal, there is zero voltage comparingthedifferencein each;;:input; betweenthebridge(points A andB). A .rnagnittide of the two sensing signals in a bridge difference between the bus voltage and the, ircuit; and using.transistor Q5 for am ON-OFF oncoming Voltage causes a voltage to exist across 61 ch. the bridge. Looking at the schematic in figure 4-21; you can see:that the bus voltageis stepped down by Connected between points A and B of the winding X7 and X9 on T2. The reduced voltage bridge is the emitter and baseof transistor Q5. base of ( is then rectified by full-wave rectifierCR19 and The collector of Q5 is connected to the filtered by R22 and C9. The same thing occurs Q1, and thecircuit.iscompleted from the forthe oncoming 'generator voltage at T3, emitter :4f, QI to the emitter of Q5. If the 01 i0504 01 IS SHUT OFF .05 OFF Ot IS LEFT ON 05 >5% 05 ON A5,,V05 OFF; ONCOMING ENERGIZED Cf. GENERATOR BUS FULLWAVE RECT FULL WAVE REOT POWER SUPPLY POwER SUPPLY VOLTAGE DIVIDER BRIDGE VOLTAGEDIVIDER RECTIFIED .SIGNAL RECTIFIED SIGNAL ON COMING GENERATOR SENSING SIGNAL ENERGIZED BUS SF.NSING SIGNAL 111.112 FigOre 4-20.Block Dgram of VoltageDifference Monitoring Circuit. . 69 7 6 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE1 & C -0 UTRUT IRCUIT 01 X7 ENERGIZED Bus CRI 7A CR1.713 14 2E 1 2 K I RI 9 X9. 2F. Q5 ONCOMING GENERATOR R I 7 r CRI 6 C 9 1 3 x9 r R2I 1I CR I7D CRI7C Figure 4-21.Schematic 111.113 Diagram of Voltage DifferenceMonitoring Circuit. voltage between A and B (across the bridge)is frequency voltage in zero, Q5 cannot be biasedon, and therefore the a timing circuit.to firean base to er'nitter of QI SCR. is not shorted out. Ifa Look at the schematic voltage doeS appearacross points A and B of the in. figure 4-23. The bridge, which can be .secondary winding X4 andX6'of T2 and X4 and caused by as littleas a ,5 X6 of T3 arc connected percent voltage differencebetween the bus and in such amanner that a the oncoming generator, beat- frequency voltage Q5 will be biasedon (heterodyne wave) is and short out the base generated. This beatfrequency voltage is the to emitter of Q1. This differencebetween willturnoff QI(fig.4,15) and prevent busandthe. oncoming generator frequencies (fig..4-24A). energizing of relay K I. Resistor R19 prevents small morfientary changes in voltage differences The beat frequency from turning on Q5.once relay KI has picked voltage is rectified by up. CR I I(fig; 4-23) and Owresultant d.c. signal (fig. 4-24B).. isfiltered byresistorR9' and .capacitor C5 (fig. 4-24C).The beat frequency FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE voltageis clipped by resistorRIO and Zener MONITORING CIRCUIT diode CR12 toa constant d.c. level (fig:4-24D): The signal is now sent to resistor.R I 1 anddiode CR-13 (A aridB),- where about This circuit preventsenergizing of' relay KI I volt iS if,the frequency subtracted frm theclippedbeat freMiency difference between thebus and signill (fig. 4-24E). ,the oncoming generator This is done to ensuiethat is'inore than 0.2 hertz. the clipped beat frequency Itdoesthis- by(fig.4-22) changing both voltage signalgoes to frequencY signals into zero when the original beatfrequency goeg to a beat frequency 'voltage; zero. At this point, the Tectifying,filtering,andreducingthebeat signal is a rectified, frequency voltage; and filtered, arW. 'clippedbeat frequency voltage thenusing the , beat it signal ;.(1.10erodyne wave). The final .ste,p.is to, 7 7 t 1 Chapter 4TRANSISTORIZED CONTROL DEVICES OUTPUT CIRCUIT 02 BUS POwER SUPPLY 0 CUPPING POLARITy SWITCH RECTIFIER ANDILTER:.F CIRCUIT CIRCUIT REFERENCE TIMING CIRCUIT BEAT FREQUENCY ONCOMING GENERATOR 11 POwER SUP.PLY Figure 4-22.Block Diagram of Frequency Difference Monitoring Circuit. .s. OUTPuT CIRCUIT ENERGIZED BUS T 2 X6 R9 RIO x 4 T3 ONCOMING GENERATOR CRI3A S4 14 CRI3B x6 M1 111'.115 a Figure 4-23.Schematic piligram of Frequency Difference Monitoring Circuit. 7 8 ELECTRICIAN'S MATEI & C operation of aunijunctiontransistor.A unijunction transistorhas two bases131and.:B2 and one emitter (fig.4-25). The characteristics of a, unijunction.transistor are such that the voltage between when B1 and die emitter risesto a certain., percentage of, the voltage betweenB1 and B2, the unijunctiontransisfor will fire. The percentage is equal to emittervoltage divided.by the B2 voltage. Inthe case of the unijiinction transistors, if is equalto a nominal 62.percent. This means thatwhen the emittervoltage is approxinfately 60percent of B2 voltage, bothin reference tO B1, theunijunction transistOr will. JCA fire. By understandingthat Q3 and Q4 have I. different values.for the same voltage; that C6has a definite charging rate(determined by R9, RIO, RI 3., and rectifierCR14); 'and that different beat 'frequencies have different timeintervals (and byiigingthe: follAipgexamples), yoU should have 'a .basic'understanding of how' timing circuit (operates. the Fix the following.examples, ,the values are arbitrary. Let used us use two examples toshow hew these' imijunctiontransistors can be fired: Inthe firstexample(fig.4-26),thebeat frequency voltage isa difference of 0.2 hertz which causes 18/oLTS a time period of 5 secondsfor one cycle. Withinthe 5-second timeperiod, the 0 following events.occur: The voltage acrossQ3 and' Q4 increases sharply and remainsat IT volts until the end the cycle. of The 17 volts are LTS applied,across B1 andB2of unijuriction transistors Q3 anQ4,across 0 /77\17 capaCitor C7,andaerossthe ,RC containing circuit 111.116 , Figure 4-24.Beat FrequencyVoltages. I3ASE 2 (VB2) + fake tki.N..sigjial and feeAit thf the imijunction VE EMITTER (NrE) timing -circuit: :De clThpedeat frequency (eta) TI. = vi-30 voltage signal is alipkosi across base I and base 2 1103 = 65% of unijunctVn transistorsQ3 and Q4 Ti Q4 60% BASE and also tb the RC circuitconsisting of resistors... (VRt).- . R 13A,R I 31, 3C, andi:apAci tor CO. tc We lore.continuing_ withthe-\., circuit. ..deSciiption; you needa brief exPlanatidn 111.117 Figure 4-25,--UnijunctionTra 72 Chapters4TRANS1STORIZED CONTROL DEVICES VOLTAGE BASE 2 BASE 2 I7V 4 Vc7(+17V) VB2(+ I 7V ) VB2(+17V) EMITTER EMITTER ( + I 0.2V) Q3#4.0/.VE (+10.2V)cm C7 V B1(ov) VBI (0V) 4. 4 I SEC 2 SEC 3 SEC, 4 SEC 5 SEC BASE I BASE 1 TIME '111.118 Figure 4-26.Firing Sequence for 04. Capacitor C7 blocksrectifier CR14. and 4-23) and is applied to the gate of SCRI, which th'erefofe will maintain approximafely 17 volts. isthenaimed . on.. When , SCR1turns on The only place C7 can discharge is through Q4, 'transistor Q2 in 'the output circuit, is supplied which has a very low leakage rate. 0 'with a base current throUgh limiting Tesistor R16 Tfie RC circuit containing C6 is charging at a Which turns on Q2. When the beat. frequency specific, rate. If we,assume that within 4 sedonds voltage goes to 'zero, SCR1 tains ,off,, and the C6 reaches 10.2 volts, then the following, wil,1 timing process repeats itsqlf..° occur: In tbe 6econd example (fig. 4-27), the beat The VE for Q1 will fire before Q3. When Q4k frequency voltage isa differeOe' of 0..4 hertz fire3,1 voltage pulse is generated across R15 (fig. which causes a time period of .2.5 seconds for VOLTAGE BASE 2. FBASE2 ik Nc.7(+17V) VB2 (4-17V) -VB2(+10V) JOV C 7 , Q3 EMIT1 Ep...7,.4 EMITTER ol (65V) A''VE(+6.5V) . VE(4-6,5vr 1 C6 -4 , : '' VBI (OV). ,1* 44.er I SEC 2 SEC 2.5 SEC .l.... 14 J. TIME BASE I B'ASE I ' , Figure 4-27. trung SequinCe for 03. 73, 8 0 ELECTRICIAN'S 'MATE1 & C one- cycle. Within this 2.5-second time period,: with one jtou know to be good. the following events occur: In trandstorized cireuits, the transistorsare frequently soldered in and the substitution method - is impraCtical. The voltage acroSs Q3 and Q4increaseS Furthermore, -you should avoid Sharply and remains at 17 Voltsuntit.the end of indiscriminate the cycle... substitutionoftransistorsandother; semiconductors. Y,I-Ou should test tranlistorswith The .17-,volts are applied . across B Iand B2 of an approved transistor test set. unijunction, tranSistors- Q3. and-. .Q4,across capacitorC7,andacrosstheRCcircuit --containing-C6. TESTING Capacitor. 06 -charees at thesame rate as befCire (assuming. 10.2vOlts ',in 4 ; secondS1.-The Most good ynality test equipmentused for period .of- time for.this cycle,is only2.5seconds,. ek'ctiontubetesting can als0 .be .usedfor therefore, the-.voltage% across C6- can,only reach transistor Circuittesting.. You can use .aPproxiMateljr 6.5 Vol.tA'within.thistime. generators, both .RF and': AF; At the end of 2.5 SeConds, approximately. 11 if the -pOWer, :supply in the equipment isisolated frOm the t Volts are held across Q4.:by capacitorC7, with a. power line by a transformer. CAUTION: sharpdecreast;. of vOltage.acrossBl..and B2 of Before you make, any tests with a signalgeneratcir,.. Q3.. When the voltage reaches approximately.]0. connect a common ground-wire volts, Q3 can fire clue to its relative from.thechassis value.of this of the .equipment to be testedtO.,the jhassis of voltage: whereas,. Q4 Still.hasapproximatelY 17 the signal generator' before volts across it. you make any other connections.. After Qa tires and the beat frequencygoes Yon can use signal tracers (suchas.'clual trace to zero, the timing process:againrepeats itself. oseilloscopes)- ontransistorcircuitsifyou"- You. Can s9e that differeiit beatfrequencies obserVe -the precautions are compared just as the differences comoerning the, power, were in sUpplies. Many signal tracersuse transformerless phase and voltage, and the functionof the .power suPplies: therefore, to prevent damage frequeney difference circuit isto energize 'relay to the transistor, use an isolation.transformer. throngh the con trOl of transistorQ2, if the . '- diMrence of the frequency of the,bus and the Multimeters used 'for voltage' measurements oncoming generator is less,tharc0.2 . hertz, intrarrsistor.circuitsshould.tiave... a. high. ohms/Volt sensitivity (arleast 20,000-dhms/volt) to ensure an .aCcurate reading. SERVICING TECHNIQUES / Ohmmeter cirCuits ..Which . FOR TRANSISTORIZED CIRCUITS pass a crurrent,of,,,,..,,- more than I millianipere: throughthe under testcannotb:e, used ..pfely '.There ,many in 'te' sein -7) 'differencesbetween transistor eircUits.'Before'usingan olimmet* transistorized and electron tube.circi4ts froin a transistor circuit, Cheek hoW much- curtenkit4.:, thestandpoint Of servicing.For instance, you passes on all range set:tit-1e. rely:on your senses of sight, touch, bonot .tise any range... and smell in fdr testing that .passesmore. than'.:1-'in:ilhampere. tHe viSual inspection O'F.electrontube Circuits. But this is ribt as. fedsible* in transistorcircuits. 7e, Kany transistor§ cleiklop Conventional test prods, When'used- in the so little heat that .you closely(-:nfinedareas -.Of (Inlearn-nothingby"' feeling theM., High transistor 'circuits,,, -often are the cause of aLcidentalshorts befween frequency traiisistorS -hardly 'get.warm. Usually, adjacent terminals.:In electron if. a transistor (except.a high-POwertransiston'is tube circuits the mOmentary short `jaused by,'test prodsrarely hot e4ough .to, .be ithas been results in damage, burin transistor damagt,d 6ey4d use. circuits,this , short- candestroy." a,. transistor. AiSo;since. 7 In'eilectron tube cirCuits,lon oft,en.Make a 'transistors.',are, yeily sensitive ..1o2imprpper quick .t.ei4 by,,the tplio suhstitutOnMethod; that voltag'es, is; you re R1,4ce thelube yon ..ust. avoidthepractice.otir suOe'ct Of being bad tioubleshooting ,7! 1111L siclorting varicitis pdrmtsto 74 e. - Chapter 4TRANSISTORIZED TROL DEVICES ,ground and listening for a click. When ylou test ; of the wrong polarity to the circuit. Do 42)t use = transistor circuit's, remember the vulnefability a range that passes more than 1 mA. a transistor ro surge currents. WhenunidentifiedItansistdrsare encountered in equipment, you .must identify their type before any testing is started. PNP and 'PRECAUTIONS NPN transistors are not into-changeable. When testing . transistorcircuits, do note' ThefollowingprecautionsshoUld ..be . removeatransistor whilethe °powerison .observedwhenyou.. service transistoriZed because you may- damage,. thetransistoror . - circUits. circuit under test. 4 . bo not ground transistor elements.while the I°Ensure -thatall.- pOwer has beeiLremoVed power is on. , fromthe- equipment ; underteit before When- ,.soldering,orunsoldering,use a connectingy test equipment. light:duty soldering iron rated at 50 watth or onnect..a common grotind lead from the less.If there is any doubt Ccmcerning leakage chassisof the'setunder- testtothe.,test'. currentin. a soldering iron, use an' isolation"' , , .equiipmentWore Makingany, .other transformer. 11 an isolation transformer, is nof connections. available, you should bring the iron to scildering 'U.Se -anisOlation transforMer -with alltest temperature, reniove it from the a.e. outlet'and:,. 'equipment unless .the_test equiptnent has a then apply it to the part to be soldered-. transformer in its Power siipply.-- .-When soldering or unsoldering trahsistots%r.. 'Beforeusing'.. anohmmetertocheck other semiconductor devices, exercise.cautita to- resistance' in a transistor eircuct, ensure fhatthe avoid overheating the devices. If necessarjt; meterillnotPplY excessive voltage orvoitage 14. '1 v., CHAPTER 5 AUTOMATICDEGAUSSING 4 Automatic degaussing equipment isnow installedin information to the controlcircuits. The all new tor\struction shipswhich magnitude .and polarity of the have coil currents thatmust be changed currents to the whenever 'the ship's heading( FPLQP and M degaussing coilsare manually set 5hanges. Most by controls mountedon the degaussing automatic degaussing 'equip,-ntlboard Navy switchboard. ships provides automaticco ;4t.ion, for the induced magnetization due. ship's heading. DEGAUSSING SWITCHBOARD This' chapter discusses at4 au The degaussing switchboard 4ig.5-2) equipment using the SS 'sY:Stern contains the switching and representative system. You willfind.the basic control circuits required for automatic andmanual control of, principles of degaussing inElectrician's Mate 3 the degaussing current ,2.NAVEDTRA 10546-D. output of the FI-QI, FP-QP, M and A coilpower supplies. These circuits are mounted in drawersor on 'f)anel assemblies in the switchboardVnclosure.. SSM AUTOMVIC drawers and panels mounted in DEGAUSSING SYSTEM the degaussing switchboardare:thecomputer, drawer, the The S-S-NI Automatic Degaussing CoW4o1 two-channel automaticAra.wer; thealarm and System is a new standard-system ground detector panel; the two-channelmanual installed on all drawer; and the power panel. Thereare twg new steel-hulled, ships which requiredegaussing, _It differs: from older access panels for front access to chassis-mounted systems in the way the fuses and terminal boards. urrent is controlled and sent to the.degaussing As illustrated in the block diagram coils. The SSM uses solidstate. devices for (fig. 5-3), control and power, amplificatio, the SSM controls the.cutrent infour separate instead of degaussing coils of the ship.The circuit magnetic amplifiers. The siliCon,controlled controlling the degaussing rectifier has takenover many Osks that current in each coil is independent of the other threecoil circuits. magnetic amplifiers performed in Itheolder However, the 440-volt primary systems. A brief description of ,the SSM-follows. power and the The. SSM (Tig. 5-1) ground detector and alarm -circuitare tied into is made Up of the all four coil circuits.The M and the FP-QP degaussing switchboard. FI-QI coilpoWer channels, are manually controlled. supply. FP-QP coil poWer supply,A t;oil power The polarity arid magnitude of thecurrent to these coils is set supply, Moil Power supply, anda remote to values specified in the ship'sdegaussing folder control unit. The magnitude andpolarity Of the for the ship's current in the A and the FI-QI degaussing zone of operation. The coils is automatically contlled channels (FI-QI and A . automatically controlled by the c.ontrol circuits coil channels)arsimilar to -the manually in the degaussing switchboardas a function of "the ship's magnetiC heading. controlled channelse cept that provisions are The ship's made inthe. control ài,,rcuits toautomatically gyrc:pompass equipment provides the hooding change the magnitudand polaritrOf the 76 8 3 " 5 AU FOMATI(' 1)14AUSSING .'REMOTE CONTROL UNIT 440 VOLT 60 3 0 POWER 115 VAC GYRO RErERENCE POWER GYRO SIGNAL REMOTE MANUAL CONTROL DEGAUSSING SIGNAL SWITCH5OARD POWER SUPPLY- CONTROL SIGNALS '4111 , -4 & , M COIL FI-QI COIL u,Fp oP-wQEPpCsOulpLp' A COIL ,Li POWER SUPPLY POWER SUPPLY i'OWER SUPPLY ) FP-QP A - M DEGAUSSING DEGAUSSING DEGAUSSING DEGAUSSING COIL COIL COIL COIL Figure 5-1.-SSM automatic degaussing control system. C%77 8 4 4 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE 1& ALARM AND GROUND COMPUTER DETECTOR PANEL DRAWER TWO CHAN NEL AUTOMATIC DRAWER TWO CHANNEL MANUAL DR,1AWER POWER PANEL ACCESS . PLATES Figure 5-2.Switchboard. 111.124.1 degaussing current withchanges in the ship's magnetic-heading. for these tWocoilsisidentical electrically; therefore, thedescription followingapplies to Manual Coil Channel each.. Each.section of the Control Circuits its control manual drawer receives power from a separatepower The circUits_which control transfct;rmer. Thetwo secondary windings the current in the furnish a.C1 Mand the F,P7QPmanual coil channeks power to the in'dicator lightsof the located in the manual are .channkl and themanual d.c. drawer (fig. 54) andare trans power supply. The used to adjust andmonitor the degaussing er primary receivespower from the current in the two manual ship's40 volt ax.-power through the channel's coils. The circuitry main ower contactor. A rectifiersupplies 78 85 , ' ,? F. Chapter 5' AUTOMATIC DEGAUSSING DEGAUSSING SWITCHBOARD 1 SHIPS 'ASSEMBLY I COURSE ____ A COIL GYRO > I A io-POWER 'SIGNALS j T W 0 ' SUPPLY COIL. * COMPuTER CHANNEL ,c FIE-MOTE 1 DRAWER IPPlAuTOMATIC CONTROL , DRAWER COt.; I UNIT FI-Ol. -7 POWER SUPPLY COIL A MANUAL H ZONE CONTROL "SOTING SE ,ITIN GA MAGNETIC vARIATION SETTING GROUND DET a REMOTE CONTROL UNITSIGNAL; KAE TER ALARM PANEL 'A A TEMPERATURE,. )11r ALARM ..- ,SIGNALK- FP-OP COIL FP-OP POLARITY POWER CCIL SWITCH >- . . Tiy0 . SUPPLY . SETTING fHANNEL 'MANUAL MANUAL . DRAWER INDUCED M COIL I MAGNITUDE>- POWER 5 m COIL CONTROL SUPPLY 3 SETTINGS 111.121.-v Figure 5-3.Overall. functional block diagram. filtered -d.e.voltage wnichisregulated and t both channels Acepr where differences are appl-ied to the channels inaueed'magnitude pointed out. -f control where, the signal voltage, proportional to'' The automatk!' coil*: channels prMally 'the magnitude of the coilcurrent,is, set contain'. con t rolsignals t;rom the computer manually, The proper polarity for the degaussing ciicui twhich operate inrOsponscto the true coilcnrk.ent, is;selec,ted by the maftual heading.5ignals from the 'snip's gyrOThe push-to-operate switch. heading signal iuust,be' modified by the magnetic variation to obtain the magnetic headiii'' signals Automatic Coil Channel necessary to compute the requiredegaussing Control Circuits. ..currents. The computer gear train Ioperateq hy thc servomotor whiel; positions aes9lver.a,t an The circuits which control tilic4iIrrelit'in'thc; angle equal to4he magnetic headin. ,angle. The A and the FI-QI automatic 'coil channels: ( fig. servoamplifier drives the se'rvornot until -the 5-5) are locatad in the computer drawer and the gear train angle equals the anglef the ship's automatic coil drawer. m a gn et icheading.. Reguluted. voltage )is The control circuits of the two abtomatic apphed to the ge'ar train resolver which supplies channels are independent Of each other with the '1.two a.c. output signals: a cosine function of the exception of' the gear train. Fl-zone eircifit. and; magnetic heading for controlling. the Fl-Q1 coil magnetic variation circuit; of Ihe computer _channel. and a sine function for controlling' the odrawer,- The following deseription apAes to A channel. , t 19 86 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE 1) excess error amplifier is; connected tocompare TO MOP COIL POLAR1T Y INDUCED' the input and otitput Signals. In theevent the POWER SWITCH MAGNITUDE signals are riot of equal voltage,the Signal excess, SUPPLY ADJ error light is energized. T-he automatic coil channelshave an REG alternate mode of 4iperation'-which DC is 'employed P OW E in the event of failure in thecomputer drawer or in the ship's gO'o. Insuchan event, the DR AW E R Auto-Manual Switch must :be setto MANUAL AC POWER and the DegaussineCoil.HeadingSwitch set to the poSition closest to theship's magnetic FP-OP SECTION heading.lhe switeh appliesa positive, negative, or- zero signal to the ipanual inducedmagnitude 2 -CHANNEL MANUAL DRAWER control which is connected 'tothe input side of a the operational amplifier. Inthe-A-coil channel M SECTION only, a separate perm circuit appliesa manually set d.c. signal to the operational amPlifierinput. 'TOM COIL 'INDUCED POW E Rc .POLARITY 'SWITCH MAGNITUDE SUPPLY ADJ r POWER SUPPLY The reversible 5-volt d.c. Control:signalfroni REG DC each coil channel ,confrok,circuitis POWER - interconnected to the $Ower Ripplyfor that coil. The 4-channel.powersupplies:..of the SSM . W.- DRAWER system are identical electrically; AC thOrefore, the POWER description given here appliesto all%ghannels, see . figure 5.-6. . r.,..,,, -.! 'The control signal input is applieddirectly 111.128 to the po er supply circuits'which arepolarity Figure 5-4.Manual coil channel control sensitivethe Switching Illi.mplifier and circuits block diagram. the Excess Error Amplifier. Thesingle.-ended Mixer Amplifier (mixer and _pulse eircuit),isconnected ik through reversing contactson the:pilot relay. The .FI-QI and A coil demodulatorsconvert which pmsents the a.c. output sign* of theresolver to d.c. a constant polarity signal to the - inputs of this circuit. . signals . , whiCh -are sent through the H-zone The Mixer Amplifier is ,selector netwOrk 'and figeCome Hcos A (FI-QI a magnetic amplifier, used because of its abilityto isolate several d.c, coil)a.nd 01 sine A (A. coil). Thesearethe control signals. In this stage, thecontrol signal degaussing function signals that.ultimately mixed mith current feedback deriverd control the degaussine current inthe FI-QI LIM] fräpi and the A' coil. filtered, constant polarity'part of the -oil circuit. The output of theMixer Amplifid The automatic induced magnitudecontrol is a voltaee divider which sets the maximurri full-wave rectified signal of fixedyolarity. control signal or gain of the control magnitude of the output is modifiedby curriit, circuit. The feedback _from the. output circuit, resulting-1kt' signal from the automaticcontrol circuitis imProved response and amplified '(for the loading effect ofthe power. accuracy or the degaussing coil current. _ supply circuits) by the operationalamplifier.. The operational aMplifier provides The,Pulse Circuit is driven by theoutput of current gain the Mixer Arriplifier and supplies only. To provide indication ofa possible failure time controlled inthe operational amplifier circuit, firing pulses for the SCRDriver Circuit which, in a signal turn, drives the power stage circuit. BO 87 c IP COMPUTER DRAWER HICAL MANU4 /REGULATED C,CL,RSE4411DUCE1) Dc .StITCA bJLOr .POWER 1 :ONE OPERATIONAL SWITOri AMPUFIER # (PAr) FROM ',1OSG TRA't MIT TO 141 SIGNAL Ita AUTO DEMOO, ATOR AUTe EXCESS MANUAL iNDUCED SWITCH ERROR AMP AC " POWER 1-QL COIL:SECTION' .1. CHANNEL AUTOMATIC DRAWER) i "AH COIL SECTION AC POWER AUTO UAL 'V t C, OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER (PAP,T) TO.L,OC4. MANUAL REGULATE') 700 DC , 5TC,H ADJUST P (YNER PERM f'. ADJ 4. tigurei Automatic,coil channel control circuits block diagram. e 'ER DRAWER CCA; MANUAL RE6UL ATE) CCI:RSL-4-1INCYL;CED DC : SWITCH ADJUST' POWER TO FI-QI OPER 4:1;10NAL o-COIL .IMPLR POWER SUP PL'C' AU71) MANUAL : SWITCH C 40WER 't I:. Oq,ANNEL AUTOMA'TIC.EF,41WE.; Fordrior . ',k''', . . ...fre4,,-'.',,(--".ti. ii i ,,,,....,, '''' p. It..ok" %a.... Q.Itil.i.' ,,4,,-4! .ii: -. 11 SL6N,V.. r N ,.f4( , p ERA? TO . .*. PNEEri AM_F'I E R , r ..' ./ s 4 ,,,C,... ' 4., : i'CiX) :'e . 11Pc11.177"17-7" 3 '.--..',1:-:k .4.--7-: ,-_;'.7_,,": h ...'..,,c.AtijuS.7 - P'I,-.)WF.!'..1 PERM ADJ ...,,y., 41* 111.129 ure 55 .Automatic coil, dharinol tontrolcirCuits bloCk,dia6'ram. ,10 ' 4 0 HO- NS 'It. ; OP' -Hib.A, j g a ' 4+4 i. r ,'.,441H 1 0 COIL POWER SUPpLY . Figure 56.Coilpower supply block di6gram. 9 -44 \:7 , 7 1 es, "44 .01'6 1 COW 7 COIL POWER SuPPLY Figure 5-6,--Coil power supply block dia Chapter 5 AUTOMATIC DEc;AUSSING the SCR Driver Circuit is the intermediate'', control unit when the automatic coils,are in the,. stage between the. Puke Circuit and, the output manual operation mode: Various IIhtsJare SCR's (Power Stage). It supplies sustainedliting mounted, as shown, for system mOnitpri pulses of the current level and pLise relationship required by the-Power StageCircpit,ow- .# The Power Stage CircuiC.consists of 'six MAINTENANCE silicon 'controlled 'rectifiers (SCR's). A pair of p. SCR's is connected in paralln with- each other Preventive maintenance should..beperformed.. and in series witts1,1 each of the primary windings as., indicated on .the MRC's for the SSI4 sysni: of a .delta eonnected 3-phase power transtormer. to inSure proPer. system operation'. and to The SCR's in the Power Stage Circuit are tUrned miniMize the pasibility of future .failure. In ON by the tiring pulses generated by the SCR addition,, it should be noted that system Dri_v.q. Circuit. The firing pulses are of the operation can be jai-Paired by defective current level and phav required ,t6 deliver the degauSsing eoils. proper power to the degaussWg coil. Th lis, by For personnel .arid' equipment safetty turning the SCR's ON and Oleata .preset rate removing drawers from the. switaboard, and time duration, the current through the remember that each drawer weighs morecttian 50 primary windings of a 3-phase transfOrmer is pounds and take appropriate precautiOns.mi controlled,which in turn controls the power to When working with, the power supplies the degaus'sTng coil. This 3-phase power diScharge gll capacitors and RH filters ntween transformer steps- the voltage down to the t.heir terminals and between the terininids and proper value..The secondary, winding is tapped ground to prevent dangerods shock to n7ourself to allow matching of the supply to a' wide range and others. of degaussing coil load resistances. To. prevent damage.' to the. Printed circuit . The secondary power isrectified, filtered, card.semiconductorcomponents dileto and then connected to the degaussing coil in the _transient voltages, be.sure to turn off *the unit proper polarity aS determined by the Reversing power before remoVing or replacing ,the card. No Contactoi, The Reversing Contactor is'energized repairs .or adjustments (except as .noted in-.the according to the contrOl signal polarity by tfittechnical i. nual) should be made aboard fiip, pilot relay which is,in pin, operated by the excePt in- cas of.ernergency, because the :Cards Switching Ainplifier. are a .clepottzelanTaintenanee item and are The. Excess Error Amplifier is included in criticalfosafe',otIration of the degausSinig each power supply to proyide indication of a \system. fault in that supply. This circint compares the.7,4:6 I. control signal to the supply witio sample of the degaussing coil current. Slid,: oeigizes an TROUBLESHOOTING indicator light cirit when the "power siipply output is notpryportiona.1-tt pthe control,signal. The SSM -Automatic Degaussing Control . System uSes modularized packaging concepts DEGAUSSING REMOT? "Which are new to degaussing systems. Therefore, CONTROL UNIT. thereis very little historical data available to aid 'in- system troubleshooting so alogical.method The remote control' unit (fig, 5-7) contains technique has been' designed to aid in. Circuitry necessary for monitoring the.zsystem .recognizing and loCating a systeM malfimction. operation anfOr manually controlling the 'The a bility reco nize that there isa . Fl-Q1 and A cilfrom. a location remote to the malfunctionis baseon 'athorptigh and switchboard An amMeter on the unitis c,oMprehensivei. nderstandin.g° of the provided with t ter Selector Switch, which eharacteristics of the ,degaussing *systeM and selects the coil current to be MOnitored.-The' operating in dications. For example; during degaussing.eoil Heading SwitCh is provided for normal operation the first sign of troUble could° control of. the FI-01 and A coil fromi,the remote be the illumination of a red or arribet light, the . 83 9 2 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE I & C FI -QI COIL REMOTE MANUAL AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION - SIGNAL EXCEiv5 OPERATION - LIGHT LIGHT LIGHT ERROR' LIGHT64 REMQTE AM MEIER OEGAUSSI NG COIL HEADING SWITCH COIL POWER SUPPLY EXCESS METER, ERROR- LIGHTS (4) SELECTOR SWIT.CH SIGNAL . REMOTE EXCESS OPERATIQ.C.. AUTOMATIC MANUAL ERROR LIGHT OPEFF.12ATION OPERATION LIGHT ,: LIGHT A COI L 111.126, Figure 5-7.Remote control unit controls andindicators. e ringing of the HIGH TEMPERATURE ALARM initially was thought to bea system Malfunction , belt an .abnormal meterre,aLing for onc of the was actually a control seltingerror. . degaussing coils:or the illim nation of a"blown fuse indicatot. After recognizing thata -faplt ig.xists and O.riCe-a trouble is known toxist, you should 'noting all symptom indications,you.nshcruld obse*e' all indicationsand contls for normal formulate .a number of logicalchoices as to tffe Or alanorinal indications. Insome cases, what cause and likely location of the trouble.The you.lthought Wasa. system malfunction may tarn choices are .based.on knowledge, of the o be an incorrect con trol setting: For equipmOt operation, fullidentification of thr instance.., the ast indicationmay a zeron trouble sy,inp4to,and Jiltinformation cuxrent on,the M COIL meter(ineorrect for the conta'ined in `.1iietechnical manual' for tile ship's particular locatiOn). But system. 1, observation of . , therest of the indicators and controlsmayshow Cheek :tht probable. fault ,sources..iq'the that the M COIL, POWER, ightis °extinguished 'order that Will require the least -..and that the poWr swit is Orf. Thus. what amotint,of time.. If the first -sburce.you.aitckdoes nO 'prove to 84 ciq Chapter 5 -AUTOMATIC DEGAUSSING,.. be the malfunction,1ieck thenext suspected circuit card, the control, or the oThes replaceable section and so oil, u you kicate the faulty unit responsible for the trouble. functionpl sedtion. 'Before reenergizing the equipment,' be :0 .certain that the failed unit you found is-actually 'After you determine Which sectionis the malfunction, And not just the result, of the malfunctioning, you must locate the printed ..t 2 , * 85 .. CHAPTER"6 4 QGYROCOMPASSES A gyrocompass is a device which tip the type While there imore than one type of eabh gyroscdpic principre to obtain aqoindicak,of copass, the functional des9iption of these two' true north. The gyrocompass sygtem Attvelops coMpasses : will explain they tvio basic _types of own ship's heading and transmits the heading lo syStems. ,-vatioUs navigation and weapons stations, and to otherequipment, .throughouttheship. Afterstudying this chapter you should be Gyrdcompasses are identified by the mark-mod able to describe the' action ofa free gyroscope, system... The mark (Mk) number designatesa totellhow itis, converted intoeither On majordevelopmentofa compaSs. -...The electrical/meclianical oran electrical/electronic modification (Mod) number indicatesa change gyrocompass,togive a 1;rieffunctional ' to the major development. description of the Sperry ,'Mk 11 Mod 6 and the Mk 19 . gyrocompasses; and to supervise the All gyrocompasses depend on the-principles opemtorandrepairpersonnelintraining, of the gyroscope, gravity, and earth's rotation., maintenance, . repair, and records pertainingto fortii6roperation.Thischapterdiscusses - this equipment..., gyroscopic principles and their aPplications to obtain a funCtional gyrocompass syStem. We will *skin'onlythe topof this systeit in our . THE FREE GYR6tCOPE 'diScussiozn so that, supervisory persOnnelwill . :have better communication with, the' operator0 * and repairme whO are-assigned to the systems. the gyroscopg is 'ak heavy wheel,or rotor, You may o tain additional information from Suspended so that itsakle is freecto turn inany current edi ions of Sj;nchro, Servo and Gyro direction. The rotor akle is supported bytwo. Fundamentals, NAVEDTRA10105;IC bearings at S and Sin a rinaas- illustrated in Electrician 3'..8c2, NAVEDIRA _105.58; 'IC figure 6-1.. The ring 'is suppaled by studsand Electrician '.1&b. C, NAVEbTRA 10557;and the bearings at H and H ',in a slightly larger outer m a n trfacturer'smanual- foryour i specific ring.Theouterringismountedinthe .installation. supporting frame-by studs and bearings aLV and V '. The two supporting ringsare called gimbals. , There are two baSic tYpes of gyrbcompasses The supporting frameisnot a part of the inuse at the present time. They are type gyroscopelitut merely supports it. The rotor and according to the way the torques are develop d tItti5' two mbals _a/e._ batanced about their 'axis, and apilied tO Control the sensitive elethen whidh.,Rre mutually perPendidular and intersect The older electrical/mechanical type is int e at th4tenter of gravity of therotor. The proce.ssofbeingreplacedby he bearings of the rotor and gimbalsare considered electrical/electronic. type. In this chapter the to be completely free of friction. Actually,*re Sperry:Ivik .11 Mod.6gyrocompass, will represent ,is always some friction, bUt it has been,foitticOd the ''elqtrical/mechanical tYpe and the .Sperry' to.such'an _ 'extentthatitis. cot/0000d Mk 19 will represent the electribal/electronic nonexisteir.:, . 7 4t Chapter 6=-GYROCOMPASSES!.: 6 , develop thu: gYrOseope intoa iy,yrocompass, are rigidity.Of plane anQ precesSion. . FRAVE s-7 , Rigidity o A / When the rdtor of a'gyroscope-is'set spinningl SPIN AXIS , with:its axle, pointeg in.one direction (fig. 6-2A), ' S GIMBAL. RINGS- ,4til VERTICAL (TURN) AXIS Figure 61.The gyroscope. . THREE DEdREES , ..0E-. FREEDOM , c . The gyrdscope- rotor has' three degrees.',. O'l freedomfreedoth to spin, freedom to turn., and .freedom.to ,tiltwhieh permits the -rdtor ."to!, assume any posaion within, tlw supporting fraMe \(fig. 6-1(t. The rotor Isfree to spin about its own axle (spinning axis.S-S ')',-: 'the first :degree of - fre&io.m..Tlie inner gimbzil ring is' free to rotate .4: on .ilS' .beargs aboutthehorizOntal.i'xis ...7 ,(H-Fi!)- Ihe.second degree Dr frJedom. The outer ,rigirnbACriip is free to rotateon its bearings Abdirt, ; the .iierlical. axis (V-V '),.--,f he third degree of. . freedom. 6 > .GYROSCOPIC. TRO,PERTIES . ---- W .n a gyroscppe.rotor.' is' Spi,niting rapidly, the gy oscppe develops two cititertiq,,that . it. does. n t have when'Ahe rotor isat rest. These- 27.128(77A) two :,propertfes.. which. ,i1:ia.keitpossi-ble=, tb Figure 6-2.Bigiclity of pla9e of spinning gyroscope. 87 9 6 ELECTRICIAN'S MATEI & C . I , the rotor continues to spin with its spin axle the spin axle of a spinning gyroscope points. To pointing in the same direction, no matter how change this direction, a force must be applied to the frame of the gy roscope is. tilted or turned the gyroscope rotor or its axle. A downward (fig.6-2B). Askmizas tl .t. bearingsare force on one end of the rotor axle attempts to frictionless and the rotor spins, p turning of the tilt the gyroscope about the horizontal axis-and, ''supporting .frame can change, t ie plane of the if the rotor were not spinning, the axle would rotor with respect 'to space. This property of the tiltin, response to the force. However, if the gyroscopeisknownasrigidityofplane, rotorisspinning,itsrigiditywillresistthe gyroscopicinertia,orstability.Itcanbe attempt to tiltthe 'rotor about the horizontal ,explained by Newton'sfirstlar of motion axiS, and instead, the gyroscdpe will turn about which states that a bodY in motion\ will continue the vertical axis, Any force attempting to turn to niove at a constimt speed in a, straight line the gyroscope about the vertical axis is similarly unless acied upon by an outside force. resisted and results in a tilt about the horizontal A gyroscope can be made mote rigid (1) by axis. making the rotor heavier, (23 II causing the, This rotation of a gyroscope about an axis rotor to spin faster, and (3) byoncentrating perpendicular to the axis about which a force is moreoftherotorweigh nearthe exertediscalled precession. Precession takes circumference. It' tvEd rotors withoss sections place whenever any force tends to tilt and/or like those shown infigure6-3 e of equal turn the axle of a spinning gyroscope rotor. . weight and rotate at the same speethe rotor in A simple way to determine the directidn of Figure 6-3B is more rigid than thetor in figure precession is illustrated in figure 6-4. Consider 6-3A. rhis condition exists because the weight the force that tends to change_ the plane of of the rotor in figure 6-3B is con4ntrated near rotation of the rotor as.it is applied to point A thecircumference.Bothgyr4copeand at the, top of the wheel.' This point does not gyrocompass rotors are shaped liliethe- rotor move in the direction of the applied force; but a -, Shown in figure .6-3B. , point displaced 900 in the direction of rotation moves in the direction.of the applied force. This is the direction of precession. Any force that tends to change the plane of rotationcauses a gyroscopetoprecess. (A) (B) 77.196 Figure 6-3.Weight distribution in rotors. )3recession We stated earlier that:because of gyrosco.pic . inertia.movements -ofthe outer supporting 27:133(77A) tram has no effect on the direcfion in'which 9 7 Figure 6-4.Direction of precession. 88 - Chapter 6.GYROCOMPASSES Precessioncontinuesaslongasthereis'a \iffroni wcsvlo c'ast and carries the gyroscope cqmpondit of force acting to change the plane alOAg. 4,1the earth rotateS; rigidity. Ofplane - of rotation, and pretessiOn teases immediately.. keeps the4gyroscope wheel fixed in space and When the force is removee If the plane through ; rotatingin thc...,0.me 'plane at .all timesir Ahume Avhich4the force is acting remain's unchangea, the' dot the dirc.sObe is set. spinning 4'004hours gyroscope. precesfses until the plane of the. rotor-. /with, its 'spinni(ig axis aligned east 'and wist and is in plane of the forcs. When this position is. parallel 'to the ea:rth!g. surface. At 0600, 6 hour's reached, the force is(about the spinning axis'hnd after the- gyroscopevas ,started, the earth has', can cause no furthMkrecession. v. '-rotirted .900 and the axleof the gyroscope is still lf the plane in which the force acts moverit ,aligned 'with the original .starting position. 'At the same rate and in .the same direction asIlie 1200 the earth has rotated, .180° while the V precession whichit causes, the precession will bc gyroscotie still retains its original position._ At continuous. 1800 the earthhas .rotated 27(r- .while the gyroscope still retains its original position. At EFFECT ,OF 0000 theearlh- hasrotated360°4and the gyroscope is still in its original positiOn. EARTH'S ROTATION Note.that throughout the n-hour peridd the 'spin 'atcle ot the rotor has .maintained a fixed . As, explainedpreviouSly,c, afree;pingg pogition in space. gyroscopecanbe .thovedinanydirection T hisrigidityofplaneappearsquite withoutaltering _theangleofitsplane of differently to an observer standing on the earth's rotation in r0Rect. to a *fixed point in space.. a trface. As the earth rotates, the observer moves free-spinning gyroscopewerepl;aced on the wIthitand Abe.: gyroscope wheel' appears to earth's surface at the eqUator with its spinning. rotate about itshorizontalaxis. Nure 6-6 axis horizontal and aligned east and west,an slitSws/how this gYroscope is set spinning at 0000 :Observer in space below the south pole (fig. 6-5) would, note that the earth rotates clockwise a 0 12.144(77A)A 12.144(77A)IP: Figure 6-5.Free gyrosCope at the equator as Figure 6-6.Frsee gyroscopetot theequatorViewed from viewed from space below the south pole. the earth'i ieriace. 89 9.8 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE 1& C hours , withitsspinning axis \ horizontal and abovethenorth'pole,it 'is seenthat the pointing westwardtoward. the -observer.. -At gyroscope axk ...remainsfixed and the- earth .0600; 6 lidurs .after tWe 1._,,yreiscope' was 'started, rotates under it. To an observeP on- the earth's the earth has iotated 900 and the gyrdscope akle Surface the gyroscope appears to rotate about its apparently has tilted. To the observer, the .axle vertical axis. This apparent rotatiod a6outhe points straieht down an-d'is vertical to the earth's vertil axis is referred to 'vertical earth rate surface.itt 1200thegyroscope . axlcis effect avid it varies with.the Sine of. the latitude. , °,, horizontal...again, but the axle pOints,.away from Itis maxinninat the poles and zero at the the.. gbseiver.: At 1800 -the gyroscope axle is..eqUator:, . :again,. vertical and tpoints straight up. At 0000: , -When the gy,roscope axle is placea paralkl to the earth ,this rotated 360° and the gyroscope iat .an4locatiOn the earth's axis r on the eartlfs..,. \.aXle, a pei, tht; observer to be pack in its.. surface.-the apparent-rotation is sbout the spirt ./While..in fact it has been fixed . axle of the gyrdscOpe and cannot be c?bserved. .in sPac;.e t14 nsire.rieriod. At :any 'point between rhe.- ecfuator alid either gyroscope ,axle .las-se.en 7 pole,..a gyiOscope Whose spinning axis', is not 1:4'. the ob elver.onitlfe",:orth's surface-is known paralleltotheeartli'sspinning' axis has an .asapparent, rotztion..,'ApParentrotationis apparent.: rotatiOnthatis . . a conibination of .7,,.cattsedbyrigidity:. oflane whicll ,tends 'to horizonW1 earth 'Late and verti01 earth rate.. Maintaintheplane of thegyroscope--'wheel Parallel.,toits'originalpo5iticrin.sp/i.c.e .APparent rotation, or tilt of the gyro horizontal .CONVERTING THE axis, isreferre.d to,as norizontal eartli rate effect. GYROScOPE ,INTO A comPAss This-effect ya'ries-*i,th the cosine'of the latitude and is Maximum at the equator and zero at the If a free gyroscope is set with its spinning tcroles. axle in the planelof the Meridian and parallel to ,Now assume that the- spinning 'gy.roscope, the earth's axis, it will 'remain in that position with its.spinning axis hdrizontal, is moved to the because the apparent rotation produced is aboul north pole (fig. .6-7). To an observer in space thegyroscope.axle.Thus,'it.becOmesa o, direction-indica[ting.device.Onceset,'it continues to point north as long as no disturbing forces cause it to precess ourOf 'the plane of the meridian. Suclt an instrument,' however, is not useful as a compass because atiy slight friction sets up torques that cause itto precess away from the meridian. An exceSsive tilt in relation, to the earth's surface, except at or near ,the equator, is required to keep the gyroscope axle parallel to the earth's axis. Also, if the' axle is set su'ffiCiently level for the instrument to be useful as 4 compass in a north or, south latitude, the earth's rotation Causes it to turn away froth the meridian,as explainedinthepreceding paragraphs. The 'following conditions must be met to make a gyros 'ope into a gyroconipass which accurately irtJèates north at all times. tt. 77.198 I Torques of the correct magnitude and Figure 6-J.Apparent rotation of a gyioscope at directionmust be,providedtoprecess the the north pole. gyroscope so that the spinning axis is broughl 9 9 90 ghapter-6GYROCO 6 k .10; parallel to.the meridian _within a reasonable time after the, wheel 440 .spinning. Correct torques aso fnust be provided 'to cakitle'precessibn abit (the veitical axis athe Proper rate ind in the, ,proper direction to candel the effect on, the . earth's rotation: . , .- 2. The spin axis of the gyroscope .must be nearly ledel when .parallel to the meritinin, anda means must be provid4d to ,prevept itfrom across the meridian, The electrical/mechanical (Sperry. Mk 11 Mod 6) type gyrocompass' employs a mercury )"ballistic tO detectan unlevel condition of the rotor axle and appliesthe necessary torque about the horizontal axis which cauiesthe, compass to precess about its vertical axis and seek thc meridian (true North). This forqtie is applied to the bottom of the rotor caSe by means of the connection arm and thê offset connectionbearingstud,hence,thenartie 77.201 mechanical gyrocompass. Figure.6-8.Action of's mercutyballi0c. , In its simplest 'form the mercury ballistic 4 consists of two mercury.;containing ,reservoirs, - one mounted at eacE end of the rotor axle. The control these signals., The unlevel signal is in the two reserNoirs are- connected by a pipe so that form of an electrical, signal, the phase 'and the mertury.is free to flow from one reservoir to magnitude of which indiC,ates the dfteclign and the other, as shown in figure 6-8. the afnount of the gyro akle tilt, within design ° limits. There are two kinds 'of detecting deyices .When the axleislevel(fig. 6-8A), each reservoir contains the same amount of mercury, presently in use:An electrolytic hubble level, is each weighs the same, and each exerts the same used-in -the Mk 23, and all mods of the Mk 1,9 except the 3C and 3D. An accelerometer is used' downwardforceonitsendof 'theaxle. , kin_ the Mk 19 Mods 3C and 3D. Both theset. Therefore, no torque is produced about anyf axis. When the axle is tilted, even slightly (fig. 'devices are mounted parallel to the spin axis of .! the rotor and, therefore, deten, any tilt of thee '6-8B), mercury runs through the connecting in tube from' the higher container to the lower f The °electrolytic bubble level (I6-9) is the container. The amount of mercury in the two ' mostcbmmonly tanks is no longer. e9ual .and the lower tank is useddetecting vice.It consists of a slightly curved cylindrical glass vial heavierberausX,' itcontains more mercury.4,' Therefore/the ',lower Sank exerts more, force corttaining three platintim electrodes situatedas against its axle, than dbes the upper tank, and shown. Thevialis.nearly.filled, withan produces a torque about axis H-H I Thislorque, electrolyte so that a 'nibble is formed at the tbii 'of the vial. When the vialis horizontal, the which seemingly' tendss to increase 'thetilt, bubble is centered ,and the resistance insiead causes precession about the Vertical axis.' , between v-v the top electrode and either of the lower electrodes is equal..If the vialAiltg so the bubble'. The electrical/electronic type gyrocompass moves totheleft,thereislesselectrolyte uses a gravity reference system consisting of a between the top electrode and the lo,ker-left means to detect an unlevel condition, and the electrode and the resistance between the two is necessary electronic circuitry to amplify and i n cr ea sed Correspondingly,theresistante 91 boa,: ELECTRICIAN'S MATE 1& C Waters to cause the controlled precession of ELEOROLYTI the sensitive eleent. These torquers operate AIR BUBBLE . LEVEL BUBBLE (GRAVITY REFERENCE) pairs and a,m OM On opposite sides of-the' sensitive el i.nnt. ch torquer is .made up tot, ... coils woundön uhopen-i\rack made of soft irdn laminations. The two-end legs act as control, 10;1 TILT_ SIGNAL tielk while the' center leg acts as the reference fielUand iS displaced by 90 'electricardegtees. They operate similar to a 2-phase induction motor to place a turning torque\opn the sensitive /-\- element. The..amount of torque is,proportional EXCITATION TRANSFORMER to the magnitude of the signal from- the gr avity reference syStem to thecOntrol windings and the 'direction depends, 011 whether the voltagSis tI5V leading or lagging. the. fixed 'field. The signai_ 400-Fiz voltage,amplifiedandfed 4othetorquers providesthenecessarytorques tp make the , 7.177 rtnpass preceSs 'to seek- and settle on the true Figure 6-9.Electrolytic bubbre level simplified meridian.In the electrical/electronic type 'of , schematic diagram. . gyrocompassthetorquesare'not.applied mechanically. 11 the torque from the mercucy ballistic or KetWeen the iop and .hawer-right electrodes :is gravityreference: system .wereapplied Only, less. The 'difference in resistance is proportional about .the; horizontal ;axis,thet- gyrocompass: tO the movement of the bubble. If the bubble would oscillatecoritinuousl'back, and forth rriOves to the. right, the Opposite effect takes across the meridian. TI t,the unit wo lili be place. north-seeking but not orth-indicating. T e time' As shown infigure...6-9,the .two loWer inminutes 'for one Complete cycle of this electrodes are excited Crd'ip the opposkinds.of MoveMent is .called Atg. period 'ofscillatidn' thoutput winding ot an.`e.kFifatiothnSformer .(usually, calledits period) and is e .of the ( whose PrimarY is connected 'CoAne hase Of the variables in ti;e design of a gyrocomp ss. 400-hertz ower lineThe 'ou pus gn ilt signal)ofthegravityi'eference'circuitis The period onanorth-seeinggyro_ is obtainedbetweenan,accurAtelylocaled 1,,,ctletermined (1) by the weight,siz,and shape.of centaf-tap (signal comtnon), of the second*,ot he rotor, (2) by the rotor Sp ed, (3) by 4he ,the ekcitation transformer.and the top4eCtrode torque developed by the merc ballistic or the of the gravity reference: When thelevelis .A gravity reference system azi th torquer ,and horizontal, the output of the gravity reference (4)bythelatitude.If ashort period (of -circuit is Zero.; As the gravity reference is tilted. oscillation)isused; the rocompassis too -; rrom the horizontal, an output, voltagewill be greatfY d rbed by shipotions, such aS roll, produced Whin is proportional to the ViTount pitch, and eed or, courschanges. Too long a of tilt and 'with the phase dependent'-uPon the period(ofoscillation),however, causes the direction' of: tilt. Thus, the gravity reference is compass to take an exce sive amoUnt of time to' 0-iployeio produce an output signal with settle on the meridianfter starting or after a magnitt andphase- accordingtoThe disturbance. :thagni.tud.e and sense of the departure of the The north-seekingyro will. never settle on :Irotor spin axle tram horizontal, themeridianTher fore,a .means must be ;li T he s ignals detected,developed,and provided to spre s, or damp,, the oscillations ..;:amplified by the gravity. reference system are by reducing thsiz of successive swings past the Lo, , , ppliedtotherotor(sensitiveelement) meridian until thoscillating motion is stopped. -i'electromagneticallythroughdevices.called The damped, no h-indicating, gyrocompass will 41 92 101. 0.) Chapter 6: ROGCMPASSt;S: , - precesseat a rate tcy- cancel theeffect of tY ,-saffect.a.priictilar sYsteM11 be exspl'ained, with earth's rotation, and therefore give a cbritinuUSr its method pf correvtiOn 61; c pensation, under', indication 'of tifile north.. 'theSperrylMk .11\ Mods.6.,and the;',Sperry Mk I 9 The 6llations are ddmped by applYina .sectiOnsliter' _thischaptr: ; Generall'Y, -cOntrolledItOrque about the vertical 4xis IFOwever;pu will te expetted 'tic)obt.'at the inforpation about gyrocompass errors,7'holv.' of. he gyrocompass.; thfiebyai.i.silig controlfed, they affect your :h-Nation, etc, froM, your ... con pound precessiion aboit the horiiontllxis rth-seekingtosoue)and the, vertical',xi mlnufa.ctp re r:g technical miiNual (damping/north-inchcating torque). ' 4 In the electrical/mechanical gyrocompasOhe sP4Ry.MK Ht 'MOD, danpening , torque is applied by offsetting' the GYROCOMPASS. poin of connection_ betweenthe mercury ballistic and ,the rotor vase a fraction of an, inch to the e st of the vs;*rtical axis. Thus, the torque The Sperry Mk .11 Mod 6 c( fig., 6-10) *is an exerteby the mercury ballistic is appliedzabout electrical/mechanical ,type gyrocompass that was both the horizontal axis and the vertical axis. formerly used extensively. on ,destroyer type ships.Althoughthesecompassesarebeing In the electrical/electronic gyrocompass the phased out of service, several are stillto be dampening torque i5obtainedby takinga found in the fleet. The complete syatem consists portion of thegravityr'eferencesignal and of the master compkss, the control system, applying a torque electromagnetically about-the Alarmgystem,follavupsystem,anqthe vertiCal axis N, means of theleveling torquer. transmissionsystem:Themastercompass Thus,, the gravity reference signal developed by includesfive Major components: (P) sensitiye the electrolytic bubble level soaccelerometer, is element, (2) mercuk 6allistic, -(3) phantom ap liedaboutthehorizon 1 axisby . the element, (4) spider, and (5)binnacle and gimbal am uthcontrol s. torquer (n rth-seeking) sand rings. The binnacle and gimbal rings enclOse 'and s ,vertical axis by the leveling torquer suppdrt the 'other four major components. ening/north-indicating torque). Thus, the lc. ference signal isirpplied about both the SENSITIVE ELEMENT. tal axis ar4 the vertical a'xis. , , Thesensitiveelement(fig:6-11)isthe GYROtOMPASS 'ERRORS north-seeking element Of the master compas`s. It (-7- dir* consistsclf: thegyrounit,verticalring, A gyrocompa5-c is subjected to many outside cPmpensating weights, followup indicator.(not-, forces which will induce errors. Some of these shown) and suspension. dretheship'smotion,roll,pitch,' spced, acceleration, cleceleration, whether tileship's direction of travelis adding to or subtract* Gyro Unit from the earth rate, the latitude at which the / ship is operating, etc. The gyrounitof' thesensitive element . pro3ides Digidity of plane. Ile unit consists of. Thedifferenttypesofgy rocompasses the rotot and its case. The case is made airtight Correct for dr eliminate these forces' in different and the rotor olDerates in vacuum (26'to 30 ways. Some of' these errors may notkect a inches,of mercury) to reduce the frictidn caused particular-type of. gyrocompass because of its by air resistance. \.. s;design, and other errors are com'pensated for in ,A gyro case lock \(fig. 6-11) prevents the different ways indifferent. compass systems. tilting ok,the gyro eak about its horizontal axis Therefore, we 'willnot discuss gyrocompass when the compass is not operating. This latch erlorstin any 'depth. Some of the errors that should be disen'gaged only when the rotor is 93. 102 N ELECTITIMi'S. MATE 1 & C .411. GIMBALThRiNG BEARING STUD 1:3 STABILIZER RING SUPPORTING SPRINGS r 4 40.35 Figure 6-10..7-Sperry Mk 11'Mod 6 gyrocompass sbowing binnacle and gimbal rings. r, t- ^3. running..at normal speed. It iS located on the element. The vertical ring is concentric with the lower part of the smith side of the vertical ring. , phantom Ong Whichsurroundstheentire Vertical Ring sensitive eletnent., the phantom ring is kept in 'aligninent with the ring, while thecompass is in The vertical ring (fig. 6-11) iS attached to a operation, by the action of tkei, followup system, . wire suspension from the-head of the phantom discussed latet . J r- Ch(ipter 6GYROCOMPASSES SUSPENSION ARMATURE FOR SIGNAL PICKOFF TRANSkORMER . VACUUM GAGE COMPENSATING . WEIGHT GYRO CASE LEVEL COMPENIATING WEIGHT VERTICAL RING LOCK OIL SIGHT GLASS A VERTICAL RING ' GYRO CASE LOCK 40.30 Figure 6-I1.Sperry Mk 11 Mod 6sensitiveelement. - , .A vertioll ,ring lock (fig.(i-11) keeps the provide an eve,n distribution of the weight of the vertical, ring in Rne with the phantom ring when gyrocompass about the vertical axis. -the compassJs not-operating. This,lock',prevents the wire suspension from acquiring a -.permanent The &mature of thesignalpickoff or set which. Would affect the settling point of the followlip transformer iS attached to an arm tha, 'compass. Ifrotrudes horizontally from the upper part of ' :the south.compensating weight frame (4.g, Compensating Weights .Suspension The compensating ',weights(fig.6-11) are . supported by Iwo frames that .are attached, to" The suspension(fig.6-1 1)suspends the the vertical ring: The .frames projet outward entiresensitiveelementfs,ornthephantom bej7ond each end-of the,rotOr axle. the weights element. It ,consists of a number of small. steel ,are moun,ted on studs:PositiOns of the. weights wires secured at tile Upper end to the head of 'can be adjusted in the direction 'of the axis of the phantom elt.rnent and at' the lower end to the gyrolotor. _The function of the weights is to the vertical ring.. 95 s 104 'ELECTRICIAN'S MATE I & PHANTOM ELEMENT the spider table and supports the weiht of Ihe phantom and sensitive elements., Thephant9melement 't fig. 6-1 2)is in. addition to its function of support of the compdsed of '4 grow) .01 parts that acts ,to sensitiVe element, the phantom ring also carries supporithesensitiveeremc:nt.Itconsists bearings that,support the mercury ballistic. essentially of a holloW cylin3rical stem that . Collectorrings are .'mounted onthe projects radially froni the Tha.ntom.ring, which cylindrical stern below the upper stem bearingto is mounted in the spider and ektends, below the connect the various electrical circuits from the -eentfal hub of the spider table. means, of fixethto the moving.e.arts of the compass'. 'aftaching the.-.top end of the suSpensibn mire- is provided at the fOrkof thL5,s,tepi. - The phantOm element has netnorth-seeking( MERCURY BALLISTIC li-opertiesofitsOwn.. However,itdoeS' -.continuously indicate'north..The action of the The mercury ballistic(fig:Z.613)isthat followil`p system makvs the ploantom element. igbupofparts'whichappliesthr gravity- 'follow all movemens of the lensitive element. controlling force to The gyro unit andmakes it thrusthearine,onthetopofthe./ mirth-seeking.Itconsists of a 'rigidframe cylindrical stem (fig. 642) rests in the hubot stkported pri 'bearings fn the iJhantom ring. 4. These .bearings ale it line with the horizontal case fbearings in the vertical ring s.b that, the rnefeuryballisticisfreet'otilt :abouf the UPPER STEN 1 BEARING east-west axis of the'4ensitive element. the frame supportsa mercurY reservoir in each Of its fouriorners. The N and S restrvoirs _on the east side of the compass areAnnectedby .1COLLECTOR a U-shape'd tut3e, ari'd the N and S reservoirS'on RINGS thewest''side aresimilarly connected. The 41. gravity controlling force Of themercury ballistic isapplied tO the bottom -of thegyro ease throup an adjustable offset bearing stud (2) mounted on the balliStimonnection arm (5). 'The sornection bearing is, offset to the east from ihe- vertical axis by,a short distance to LA'RGE provi.de AZINUTI$ the damping adjustment. When itis GEAR desiredtoeliminatedam'ping,asolenoid (damping eliminator magnet) is energized byan automatic dam`ping eliminator switch (discussed later) that attracts a plunger whichmoves the' pivoted °Nnnection arm until the connection beating isin line with the yertical axis of the gyro.Inadditioh, each mercury. reservoir Is offset from its supporting stem So that zach reservbir can 'be rotated around its stem through an arc of approximately 110° to vary the lever arm of each tank.Thu's,the period of an undamped oscillationof the gyrocompass main tained°, constantinalllatitudes by adjuStment of themercury. reservoirs.This , 40.33 adjustment isreferred tO as the ballistic latitude Pigure 6-12.Sperry Mk 11 M9tt6 phantom element adjust t. , 96 1a , Chapter 6-0.ROCQMPASSES 16 1'1 6 / ---.04111111111k iir.4.44444 . 11. 10 8 4 3 13 2 5 14 4 1. MERCURY BALLASTICyftlAME 9.ATITUDE SCALE 2. OFFSET CONNECTION BEARING STlip 10. DAMPING ELIMINATOR MAGNET 3. MERCURY RESERVOIRS 11. NON-PENDULOUS BALANCING WElaHTS 4. MERCURY TUBE 12. HORIZONTAL BALANCING WEIGHTS 5. CONNECTION ARM 13. NO-DAMPING ADJUSTMENT SCREW , 6. MERCURY BALLISTIC SUPPORT STUD 14. DAMPING ADJUSTMENT 7. MERCURY RESERVOIR SUPPORT STEM 15. MAGNET LINK SPRING 8. LATITUDE SETTING THUMB WHEEL 16. LEVELING SCREW HOLES 40.32 Figure 6-13.Sperry Mk 11 Mod 6 mercury ballistic. SPIDER and he auxiliary latitude corrector arc mounted onth-eafter side of the table. The 36-speed Tlw spider' (fig.. 6-14) 'is a circular table of ;sypchro transmitter'is located on tile port side cast .altIminurn alloy. It is supported in the inner andthesingle-speed asynchrotransmitteris ring of the two rings that comprise the gimbal- located on the starboard side of the table., system.. A' boss in the center Of the spider table supports the thrust bearing and the upper and lower stem bearings Of the phantom .element. CONTROL AND Therefore, the entire inner, or Moving, members ALARM SYSTEM of the compass are supported .by -the spider through the thrust bearing. The SperrN\lk.1. od 6 gYrOcompass control and in systcmi(f .6-15) consists of a TheazimuthfollOwupmotor andthe mator-gencidtor, speed regulator, contreil panel, automatic' . dampingeliminatorswitch are batterythrow6vef;'anel,andbridgealarm mounted on the forward side of the spider.table. indicatHr..withthenecessaryapparatus .to The speed and latitude -correction mechanism .OperaL :md control *.he,master compass. . 97 106 ELECTRICIAN'SMATE I & C 36-SPEED COLLECTO*R-RING TRANSMITTER BRUSHES LEADS 1-SPEED ,\ TRANSMITTER LEADS TRUNN ON BEA G SPIDER s ThBLE- 1 ILL %MIT -.11KSK&U IM IMPS IMMO C111111WEIT INNER GIMBAL-RING G1MBAL-RING BEARING 40.34 -.Figure 6-14.Sperry Mk 11 Mod 6 spider.: ,..The gyrocompass drive system consies-is of a:c. motor and 'the d.c. emefgency motor.are the Orimary and emerdency sources ofpower. mounted on a common shaft in a single frame. The primary power source is the ship's 3-phase, The a.c. generator and the d.c4eneratorarealso 120-volt, 60-Hz supply, and theemergency mounied on a common shaft ip a.singleframe,. power source is the 24-volt battery supply. ,Theshaftsof. these two units are directly Motor-Generator coupled together. Each motor-generatorset is assembled as.a complete unit ,and mounted Ona single bedplatc. Twoseparatemotor-generatorsetsare provided.witheachcomplete Sperry Compass Control Panel gyrocompass equipment. Each set consists of an a.c. ,motor, a d.c. emergency. motor, an a.c. The conipass control. panel is located at the generator, and a d.c. generator pig. 6-15). The upper left-hand section Of the gyrocompass 98 107 Chapter. 6GYROCOMPASSES 4 switchboard(fig.6-16). The controlpanel includes red, blue, and gr'e n *ndicator lamps, a controls and indicates the operating conditions dainping-eliminator pus swi ch and a starting of the master compass. The ship's3-phase, ppshswitch, all, enclosed within a metal case 120-volt, 60-Hz power supply awl the ship's provided for bulkhead mounting. An external single-phase,1.20-volt,1 60-Hz power supply are alarm bell. is -lbcated adjacent to this indicator. connected direc to terminals on the back of , -TheTed indicator lamp in the battery supply thecompasscoTtolpanel.' The3=phase, indicates operation of the compass equipment 120-volt, 60-Hz power supply is fe "from these from the 24-volt battery supply. terminals onthe controlpanelhrough the Ttieblueindicatorlamp is in.t.be batt'eryihrowoverrelay on battery damping-eliminatorOrcuit-as a'warning throwovet panel to the Motor-get ansfer wheneverthedameing-eliminatorcoil is switch .-onthecompassi contr energized. switches and fuses for these power s s.are The green indicator lamp in ship's a.c. included on the IC switchboards. supply is lighted as long as the ship7s suptily_is connected to the compass equipment. Each indicator lamp is provided with.a series ridge Alarm Indicaior variableresistor to controlthe intensity of illumination. The bridge alarm indicator (fig. 6-17) is The starting pushswitch is in parallel with locatedinthepilothouse. The indicator the pushswitch on the battery throwover panel. 3 t .120 V. 60 r.0 BUS BRIDGE 1 .120 V. 60 rks BUS ALARM INDICATOR 120 V DC CIRCUITS SPEED REGULATOR CONTROL PANEL ari BATTERY THROWOVER PANEL M-G 2 :DC AC AC DC MOTOR MOTOR GEN. GEN. 24-V BATTERY 'M-G I 40.36 Figure 6-15,Sperry Mk 11 Mod 6 gyrocompass control and alarm system. 99 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE 1 & C ',CONTROL PANEL] 50 .4, 59.4C.HV'p - FOLT..M.WETE, .1 #70-TO-12.1 !RELAY TRANSMITTER REPEATE.:SYSTIn SELECTOR SWITCH SUPPLY AhmE TER SWITCH AmPLIFIES PANEL H. COMPASS ROTOR SWITCH I COmPASS ROTOI: 1195SUPPLY vOLTmETER n,P1:SS F.CTOs: FLLOWUP AMPLITIER SUPPLY AA AT.TCH LCO;-9T7.-,--- I I-SpEED AND 36-SPEED OVERLOAD SIGNAL LAMP , 1, AZIMUTH MOTOR CUTOUT DETENT RELEASE LY LOW VOLTAGE RELAY AND fhPPPEATER LOW VOLTAGE RELAY ; mOTOR GENER-ATOR TRANSFER SWITCH !AZIMUTH MOTOR I SUPPLY SWITO-I FALARN SELECTOR_ SWITCH FOLLOW UP SUPPLY SWITCH IDC SERVICE SITCH I ONO SWITCH- 'STARTING PUSH5 [LUSE PANEL ISATTERy THROWO vE pANEL [ 14 )'11.10 51 SC H 4.0,115101 SWITCH LOA S IT 4 /la HA TOR] POLTAGE AOIUS MOAT RIILOSTATS 1,:ANsT FR SWITE RELAY TRANSMITTER urPFATER PANEL 40.39 Figure 6-16.Sperry Mk 11 Mod 6 gyrOcompassswitchboard. The da III phig-eli mina tor pushswitchisin FOLLOW() I' SYSTEM parallel with the ,automatic damping-eliminator switch onthe master compass andmay be The followup system includes the folldwup -ma nua Ilyoperatedto energizethe mechanism, I he follOwuptransformer,the d amping-eliminator cOil and thusremove azimuth damping, molor, and the followup panel. The system detects any misalignment betweenthe 1 00 109 Chapter.6'=-GYROCO1PASSES 4 TUBE T fJE., _FADS A. t SHIPc-, AVG' (c,r,IP:,' TET, D MMEN 'AM Et, , Tor, 1 E HMINAL I I;(73E 77.212 Figure 6-17.Bridge alarm indicator. phantom and sensitive elements and drives the re pea ters, also- called own sh ip Vcourse (OSC) phantom element inthe proper directionto repeaters, located at various stations throughout restore alignment. Any misalignment between theship, TheI-speed and 36-speed synchro the plantom and sensitive elements results in a transmitters (driven by the azimuth followup signal voltageoutputfrom the 1...ilowup motor) control the Movement of the Own ships transformer. Theamountofmisalignment course rePeaters which indicate thereadings of determines the rnagnitude of this signal voltage, the master compass at the remote stations. and the direction `01 misalignment determines its phase. The signal output from the foll'owup The transmission system also includes the transformer is amplified by a voltage amplifier transmitter Overload relays, repeater panel, relay ;indis used to control file output of a power transmitter repeater panel, relaytransmitter, amplifier which operates the azimuth motor. relaytransmitter amplifier panel, .difrerential The azimuth motor, indriving the phantom alarm relay, and repeater compasses. element back into alignment with the sensitive Two similartransmitter overloadrelays, element, alsodrives the single and 36-s1eed mounted on the back of the compass 'control synchro transmitters and a lost-motion device panel, provide a visual alarm when an overload through the azimuth followup gearing. occurs in the transmitter circuits. Onerelay is connected in the I-speed transmitter circuit, and TRANSMISSION SYSTEM the other relayis connected in the 36-speed transmitter circuits. The Sperry Mk II gyrocompass transmission The repealer panel(tig'. 6-16)islocated System transmits the heading indicated by the belowthefollownp panel.Itcomprises an auxiliary 'mastergyrocompassto a number of gyro assemblyofrotaryswitches, and ELECTRICIAN'S MATE I &C. equipment. Each .switch, withitsassociated fuses ELECTROLYTIC andoverloadindicatingdevices,is BUBBLE LEVEL assembled as a unit andcan be withdrawn from MERIDIAN the front of the panel for inspection GYRO and repair. VERTICAL:RING To actuate a number ofrepeater compasses without imposing thisloaddirectlyonthe AZIMUTH compass FOLLOWUP transmitters,an _intermediate PICK OFF instrument (relay transmitter) isused. The relay transmitter (not shown) consists LEVELING of al'-speed AZIMUTH TORQUER and a 36-speed synehro'control transformer TORQUE R (CT), . acommutator transmitter,a followup motor, and a reactor, all enclosedwithin a metal case provided for bulkheasLmouniing.-- AZIMUTH FOLLOWUP SPERRY 'MK 19 GYROCOMPASS MOTOR w The Mk 19gyrocompass is a navigational ROL L1PITCH and fire control instrumentwith design features SLAVING willKPIC OFF based on unusual requirements.In addition to TORQUER 4,11 own ship's heading data, it accuratelymeasures ELECTROLYTIC .and transmits angles of rolland pitch..These BUBBLE LEVEL SL AVING features distinguish the Mk 19frOm all other PICK OFF LEVELING shipboard gyrocompasses thatpreceded it. TORQUER Design of the compassisbased on the prineiplethat'twoproperlycontrolled SLAVE horizontal gyros used togethercan furnish a GYRO stable reference for themeasurement of ship's heading, roll, and pitch.Briefly, the basic unit consists of two gyros .placed with 27.168 their,spin axes Figure 6-18.SiMplified diagram of as shown in the Mk 19 . figure 6-18. The top gyrois a gyrocompass element. conventional gyrocompags and isreferred to as , the north-seeking, or meridiangyro. Its spin axis s directed along a 'north-southlineand it stabilize the entire sensitive elem'entin roll and furnishes indications ofship's heading, roll (on pitch, thereby furnishing 090° and-270° 'course), and an indication of' the pitch (on 000° and zenith in terms of roll and pitchdata, 180° course). The lowergyro is positioned with its spin axis slaved to the meridian gyro along an Boththemyridian and cast-west line. It is' referred toas the slave gyro slavegyros are .enclosed inhernictically sealed spheres,-these and furnishes indications of rollon northtouth '4,splieres are suspended in courses, and pitch on east-west oil. The compass is courses. '');4,vcompensatedsfornortherly and easterly speed --, The Mk 19 gyrocompass has , and acceleration, earthrate., constant torques, an electronic and, followup errors. The control system that makes it,seek and indicate system consists of four true north major components: themaster compass, control as well as the. zenith, A gravity cabinet,compass 'failure reference system detectsgyro .'tillt, and torques annunciator,and are standby supply (fig. 6-19). 'MeMk 19 Mod 3B, appliedelectromagneticallytogivethe 3C, and 3D employ meridian gyro the desired a static power supply. (not period and damping, shown)Yin place ofthe m-g set. In all Cases the Futther, signals are generatedby the compass to gyrocompasses are- installedwitha' no-break Chapter 6---6116COM1'ASSES `: MASTER COMPASS STANDBY POWERsuppLy 27.169 Figure 619.Mk 19 Mod 3A gyrocampauequipment. 103 112 * UECTRIC1AN'S MATE 1& C supply from a battery sourcefor use in the even't of a normal supply failure. Supporting Element-. . The gupPitrting element includes the frame and *MASTER COMPASS binnacle.Thecompasselementsare gimbaledinthebinnacle by a Conventional ,gimbaling system with -±60degrees of freedom The'mastercompass(fik.6-19) is ap pro ki mately about the roll axis and -±40degrees of freedom 3 feethighandweighs about the pitch axis: apProximately,, 685pounds., .Itc,:t4(6-',:rilajor portionsare 1-thecompass The meridian and slavegyros are siinilar in eleinientand. the constructiOn with the exception supporting elehiebt (fig. 6-20). ,, that the gravity . , , referenceis invertedillOfej:Slave gyro which necessitates minor changes kiring.The two Compass Element. gyro assemblies are ranolOyfloii,*e inner ring of. the phantom assernlile*Operikitm A gyro is on The comPasslemrinrincluaes top, and the slave gYy;iikisideW40-1,Abelowit, the sensitive >The gyro motorsares, element (meridian', and sjave,gyros), the gimbal, lpj,,41,1,5:v.S11;1(3-phase,e' and 400-Hz squirrel-cage ind,E;94iOyi,.ii'iotors. thephantoriiasseniply.The phantom from the Viewed -assembly includeS the azimuth south,themeridian gyro rotates phantom, which approkimately defines the meridian, andthe roll and pitch 23,600 rpmclockwise,and, viewed from the west, theslave.gYro rotates at phantoM, which defines the zenith. the same speed clockwise: 3.446,0. C GIMBAL PITCH PHANTOM RING COVER AND RING DATA MERIDIAN _ ASSEMBLY MAGNETIC SHIELD GYRO PHANTOM PITCH'STARTING RING ASSEMBLY SYNCHRO AZIMUTH . (PHANTOM) " SLAVE GYRO OLt AND,PITCH;, (PHANTOM) 113 Figure 6-20.Two views of master 27.170 tompass showing compass elementand supporting element. 104 ChaPter 6-GYROCOMPASSES - The azimuth phantom follows the azimuth amplifiersareused. vary, other, components motion of themeridiangyro, and1- and peculiar to a single circuit must be used. For this 36-speed heading data .are transmitted by the 'reason a T-shaped, panel, the computer control azimuth servo and synchro assemblies mounted assembly, is located inside the control cabinet. on the phantom assembly. Theroll and pitch This panel provides a junction box into which phantom is stabilized in roll and pitch, and .2- the amplifiers may be plugged and .serves as a and 36-speed roll and pitch data are transmitted chassis for the various components required to bytherollandpitchservo and 'synchro match the standard amplifiers to the particular assemblies mounted on the frame and binnacle. circuitsconcerned. Thecompntercontrol assembly houses eleven- type1 and two type 2 ge n e ra 1-pur pose computer ; amplifiersand CONTROL CABINET 'contains all the comp6nent.s required to operate the variotts computer and torquer Circuits, other The-control-cabinet (-fig. 64-941.contains:the thanthose " containediiiih-e- meat-me-al d.c. power supply, analog computett, amplifiers, assemblies or in the master compass. and other assemblies requirela for operating and the condition of the gyrocompass indicating System 'Contra AsséMbly system. The cabinet is composed of the control panel,computer . panel,computer indicator The system control assembly is mounted at system control assembly, controlassembly, the top of the rear' section of the control cabinet followup amplifiers, the d.c. power supply, and and includes switches, relays time delay,circuits, a voltage regulator. and auxiliarydeVicesfor cycling ,the' eVents automatically,as requirea; forstarting and Control Panel opeiatingthecomp'* System. These components operate in eojunction with the The control panel, located at the toP of the switches, indicators, and relays on the control control..c.abineA,...COntains all the switches, alarm 0' Paneli- -and -elsewhcre_dmthe_system,. Lo..perforrn lamps, am ndicator fuses required for operating Starting and,control functions:" the sfStëh Only, the sontroli requiredfor nordif* ration of the system are accessible Followup Am Mem; whenthecontrolcabinetisclosed. These controls are on a recessed panel to avoid- inlurr -Merinted below the system Control assembly topersonnel,damagetothecontrols,or, retheToll,pitch, and azimuth followup accidental change of setting. amplifiers. The three followup amplifiers are identical and'interchangeable. Computer Indicator Panel D.C. Paver Supply Below the control panel, int* fhe cabinet, are seven computer assemhlles-forcomputing Below the followup amplifiers is, the d.c, data for the system. The cor*uter indicators ace, power supply unit containing the powersupply viewed through seven flith Windows in the front components (metallic rectifiers, filters and so of the cabinet. Eaph".of these assemblies are forth), a monitoring meter, andassociated, discussed later with-the control system in which . selector switch. The unit, operates from the it is used. 115-volt, 400-Hz, 3-phase supply and furnishes all d,c. voltages required to operate the various Computer control Assembly amplifiers and relays in'the system. ft To minimize the number of different kinds Voltage Regulatoi of amplifiers, used in the system, two types of Standard plug-in computer amplifiers are used in Since a supply voltage fluctuation as'low as 13 applications. As the circuits in which.:the 2 volts canCause 'compass errors, a Voltage 105 114 ELECTRICIAN'S ATEI. & regulator was develojef for the Mk 19 system. /systemsthe meridian gyro controlsystem, slave This regulator is installed in the b'ottomof the gyro controlsystem, control cabinet and provides the azimuth. follOwup, an output of 115 and the-roll and pitch -followupsystem. volts, 400-Hz regulated to within ±-0.75volt for an input of 115 volts -±7 volts. MERIDIAN GYRO An alarm indicator lamp indicatesservo CONTROL SYSTEM unbalance, tube heater failure, andexcessive . input voltage. The meridian gyro controlsystemwhich makes the Mk 19 north seeking and COMPASS FAILURE ANNUNCIATOR indicating includesthegravityreferencesystem,the azimuth control, system, and the leVeling'control system. The compass failure- annunciator (fig.6-19) . is a remote visual indicator Associatedwith the annunciator is usually a Navy standardty Meridian Gyro Gravity alarm bell. The alarm bell andannunciator a e. Reference System actuated by the alarm control tsysteriito gi , both a visual and audible indication of systm failure. The gravity reference system (fig. (1-21A) ?cónsists of the meridiangyro gravity reference (theelectrolytic bubblelevel and excitation STANDBY SUPPLY t ra n sformer),thenorth-Southacceleration computer, a mixer and its associated network. The Sperry Mk 19 Mod 3 and 3Astan by The electrolytic bubble level-is mountedon power supply (fig. 6-19) is a motor-generatoset the mvidian gyro vertical ringso ThatitiS which provides emergencypower to the compass parallel.; to the gyro axle.Its operation was system for a short time when the ship'spower explained earlier in this chapter. Whenthe level.. supply fails. Under normal operationthe a.c. istilted from the horizontal, atioutput signal section opegt,ps as a 115-volt, 40041z,3-phase voltageproportional inmagnitudetothe synchronous' d'thotor,todrivea'120-volt amount of tilt will be.produced and thephase or conipound-wound d.c. generator, whichcharges instantaneous. polarity of tire voltage pe a bank Of ,twenty 6-volt storage batteries. If the dependent on-the direction of tilt. . ship's 400-Hz supply failsor falls bel 102 The tilt signal, from, the electrolyticbubble' volts,theship'sline is discoected levelis fed into the mixer (fig. 6-21A)Which automatically and the 120-volt d.c.!enet is contains a stepup transformerand a cat,hode driven as a motor by tpe sterra :follower. Thetiltsignalismixed with the a.c. section now operates as a !T .-H north-south acceleration signal (acompensation 3-Phase generatry. supplying the signal_ tobe discusse.d x,14p later),andthe The standby supply for thep compensated tilt signal iS fed intoa network of Mod 3B and 3C gyrocompass isa statieunit (not. resistors,potentiometers, and _relay contacts.. shown) with no moving parts other thanrelays.. The networkhasthree output 'signals:the Transistors and magnetic amplifiers makethe. Meridian control signal to theazimuth control ..,unit adaptable for providing 115-volt,3-phas system, the damping signalto the leveling 400-Hz power to the gyro system fromeither control system, and the compensatedtilt signal the ship's 115-volt, 3-phase, 400-Hzsupply or tothemeridiangyroconstanttorque , from a 120-volt battery supply. compensation system. Meridian Gyro Azimuth GYROCOMPASS CONTROLS Control System All controls for the Mk 19gyrocompass The azimuth control system (fig. system (fig. 6-21) are contained in four major. _6-21B) consistsofamixer,anazimuthtorquer 106 115 MERNYAN GYRO ,r CONTROL SYSTEM le#0 epteurti COMM% ig !Dm. GOO !VITEN OhISTANT . 1000UCI CooPEIOATION 1ZI)10TH %IMPS -11711111 141.16. . L .1 kilt0LIN MIX(11 -r InlliOIAN 0010 I I GIRO N(RTOIAN ifrIO 1111104 edITOOL Pirtle aqi.040 NORTH SOUTii 11400 tOltquOt ros# pcCLIPATicPT 10101.41 IIIRIOIA4 SW, APLIFIEN VIP r Welt/Kt COMPUTER SYSTIN ------_ t-N 1 KA/IA!. SAM IMO WIN Reef Dir,010,1'EILY ,T NM NE COMPOSerIceisysrue 1 I (MI SHIP Kell SOON Owl $,1 TPHD SM0 1CKAT(/ COM( IV+ t> ATIIU ,',011PURN Owoo THIP ;ovTt Ipiod 40E41 we,E LATITUOI L r- SLAVE IeR0 51 eel Sele0 Ler MING CONIRth ORhI!Y pee (evict esUM srs MONO LEVELImO ORQutIll TORQUER .4 SL AV( WO GRAVITY ',Empiric/ 11.1, I Si Of len 4 went AZIMUTH SYSTEM HAvol I SLAVE GYRO coma swell Figure 6.21.Block diagram of coMpass control system,of the Mk 19 gyrocompass. , -"" MERMYAN GYRO ig CONTROL surer klfOlIAIN 1 r- 1111110 T413411 11(111(144 0g40 .71 -4z 61"714 M grtte tokrAck, mum. AlIMITM911 1111000 400 r$1.3011,4 /0001.1111 ACCE40147041 A101111(11 t01101.010 ------t' SPUD AO (WIN PUY< COMPOissrtoft systti IL AYITUO1 CC0111i.17(11 100010 LADTV01 COMPUT(0 trAo avfet#G comwr AMP swim I 1.(VILI110 L. C 4 LAG TORQUER TORQUE4 Malt 41.11L11110 mtgE4 SLAV( "WM 4 INS MO Sl IWO Weft 1 5,17111 1111111.1111 PWANYOW SLAVE GYRO IMMO MIMI OM MIN OMB CoNTRoL srsrem 27.175 of the Mk 19 gyrocompass. re 6.21.--Blockdiagram of compass control system, 117 # ELECTRICIAN'S MATE '1 & C amplifier, and two azimuth torquers. Themixer legs) and a reference field (center leg) contains, a .stepup transformer, potentiometers displaced 900 to rorrn a 2-phase inductionmotor field. and .resfstors. The azimuth torquer amplifieris a These coils are excited from theoutput of the. general-purpos& :type 1 computer amplifier, azimuthControlamplifierandthe4004-1z which contains two double-phrpose trioles.The supply. input stage uses one-half of one tube; t1e other The output voltage of the amplifier and the half is used .jr) five compass alarm circuit..The reference "field voltage are 90 electricaldegrees output .stage uses both halVes of its tube ina out-of-phase. When the torquer windingsare push-pull circuit. The mixer input signals are the energized, a moving field is set up in the--airgap. meridiancontrol signal from:thegravity This field cuts the verticalring and induces reference system, an ea-st-west speed signal,a currents in it. 'This dction develops a torque,that constant torque signal, and a vertical. earth-rate tends to drag the ve5tical ring alongwith the compensationsignal. The azimuth. torquer moviiigJJeld. _ amplifier output is fed to the control fields Of The magnitude of the torque is proportional the two azimuth. torquers which apply torque . to the signal fed td the control winding (output about the horizontal axis toprecess the meridian of thi; amplifier). The direction ofthe torque gyrO toward the meridian. depehds Onthephasing of the control-field : voltage which may lead ,or lag the fixed-field TheaZimuthtorquersare ftficoutput eleinentS of the' azimuth ,control ,system ,which Voltage by 90 electrical degrees. actually producethe torques appliedto.-- the. gyro. The torquers,,are located opposite each Meridian Gyth 'Leveling otheron the-cradle(fig.6-18)and are . Control System, electricallyY,connecied to ad togetherto produce the torque:* The meridian gyro leveling controlsystem-,1- Eachtorquer(fig.6-22) consists of an ( lig. 6-21C)consists of.a mixer(stepup ope n-E. -rack. stru&ure:- of so f laMinatiOns. transfoinier: j)Otentiometr. and upon which are w-aind a control field (2 outer resistors), the' leveling . controlamPlif er(anothertype 1 computer amplifier); and the levelingtorquer. > The input signals to the mixerare the damPing. AZIMUTH siimal from the graVity referencesystem and the TORQUERS north-sbuth..speed .plus..the drift. compensation , signal. The amplifier output suppliesthe leveling torquer Control field, which produces thelorque . to levefthe meridian gyro. SLAVE GYRO TO AZIMUTH MERIDIAN TORQUER '--c=GYRO CONTROL SYSTEM AMPLIFIER The slave .gyro control system (fig. 6-211)) . consists of the slavegyro vavity reference system,leveling control systm, and slaving control syste n. TO II5V, 4OO-kz 'SUPPLY Slave. Gyro. Gravity Reference System Z7.341 Figure 622.Azimuth.tortjuers simplified schematic The slave gyro gravity reference system(fig. diagram. 6-2ID) is similar to the meridiangyro. gravity 108 1 8 Chapier. 6- GYROCONIPAyES referencesystem.Itconsists' ofagravity 'output of:the slaving torquer .amplifier is tha reference,a 'mixer andits network, and t,he slaving control signal. and itis fed to the slaving;". east-west aceeleption.computer. The output of torquer control fields. the systemistheslavegyro amplified and The slaving torquers are duplicates of thc'- compensated 'tilt signal, which is fed to the slave azimuthtorquers, and operateinthe s. gyro constant torque compensation,,system ( fig. manlier. They produce the torqa anout 6-21E)andthe-slavegyroleveling'control slave-gyrohorizontal°axis,.whichcauses system (fig. 6-21f). 7 precession 'about the vertical axis, to realign'th)4 slavO gyro with tne azimuth phantom. Slave Gyro Leveling Control System COMPENSATION SIGNALS Tile slave gyro leveling control sy.stem (117.7 'The 'eompenslifionsignalsHothe Mk I-9 6-21.F) consists of a mixer, a leveling torquer gyrocompass' systemservetocounteractor amplifier, anda q.leveling torquer. ',I-11'c! input . ..compenwate.. forcertainefTeetsthatWould signals to the mixer are the compensated otherWise produce azimuth .or leveling errors in, t) 'signalfrom Theslavegyro gravityrefere .tle masteromp.ass. system, horizontal earth rate from _the Pat nu The'i el:fect's may be classifiedns ship effects, computer,east-westspee1.1- fromthe speed whiq include speed, course, find acceleration component computer,andconstanttorque earth, :effects,- whichincludeho4t.tesmtal .and corn pensat ionsignalsfroMtheslavegy ro vertical earth rate: and constant torque' effects, constant 'torque compensation unit. The leveling which May ne caused by mechanical tuibalanc torqueramplifierapd Ieveling toniner are of the ni.V.er. comp*: or aily other mechanical duplicates of those' used in the meridian gyro defects would. cause' the compaSs to settle levelingcontrol. system. The output .ol...the Wit leveling torquer -amplifier to tbe leVeling torquer ,NortilMyor.southerly..Vp:speed produces a control fieldisthe slave gyro leveling, epntrol. gYtiviompass error due to gyro tilt as the ship follb:WS the curvature of the earth. The rate of this :gyro tiltis proportiomillo hie product of ship's spifed (S), and the cpsine Of owin ship's Slave Gyro Slaving course (C). Easterly Speed, ImweVer-, produces nn Control Systern error equal, to the product of ship's speed ( S), and the sine of .own ship's com-se (('). Easterly' Theslavingcontrksystem- (fig., 6-21G) or westcrly speed ,does ndt -ausetile meridian detects any misarignment between the, aziniuth gyro to tilt. ilowever, as the slave gyro is aligned phantom and the slave gyro, and slaves,the gyro east7wcst, itis affected by easterly or westerly toitsproper east:westposition. The systeln speed in thc same manner that ,northerly or consists of theslaving pickoff, slaving signal southerly speed 'affects the meridian gyro. The -amplifier,slaving torquer amplifier and two .Mk 9 compass is compensated for speed errors slaving torquer's. The slaving r'ickoff is an E-eore by applying.a compensation signal equal toS cos transformer mounted on the vertical ring. The C to the meric ian gyro leveling control system armature. of the pickoff is cemented to the and a signal ual to S sine C to the ,slave gyro gyrosphere. Thus, a Misalignment signal between leveling control system: Tnus, both gyros are the azimuth phantom" and theslave gyrois maintained in a level position for any speed or obtained from the- pickoft. This signal is fed into course. These signals' are 'obtained from the the slaving signal amplifier which contains a own-ship speed repeater and speed component stepup transformer and cathode follower. The cbmputer shownin fthe, block dygrarn (fig. output of the slaving signalamplifieristhe 6-211i), slaving signal, and itis fed to the slaving torquer As the ship's heading and course.. may differ amplifier,a type I computer amplifier. The due to north-South drift; the' north-south speed 109 119 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE I& C 4.co1pch5ated for drift .bya nianual If the average signal from the dectfolytic corr.ector located on the .front of the control bubble level, or acceleroffieter, is notzero (such cabinet.Thisdriftsettingis inadeby the aseattedbymechanicalunbalance of the -cOmpasS Operator after he obtains the- ttl..cessary cOmpass), theconstant torque compensation injormation frOM the ship.'s na'ccigator system will produce an output Sigtlal voltage of If the ship accelerates in speed, the inertia.. opposite phase to' (and thus tend to cancel) the rwill displace the electrolyte in the electrolytic tilt signal caused by theC unbalance. bubble level: Deceleration will, cause a displacement inthe opposite. direction. As a result,tilt signals will he produced evert th`o-Ugh AZIMUTH FOLLOWUP SY§TEM,c, thereis' no gyro tilt, ,and compass errors -will result if not compensaM for. i\c'celcration compensation is obtained for The '.azimuth 'folloWup system .functions to indica t-I:ship's-eourse7-brthe-previouspal agi aphs the Meridian gyro by the north-south' acceleration computer, and for the slave gyro by we ''''shown how the meridian gyro control the east-'est acceleration computer. . systemandtheslave crocontrolsystem The effectof %vertical earth rate on the function to mairt:tin the tleridia.ngyro north meridian gyro is proportional to the prodUct of and so.Oh. earth rate, at the equator and the sine of the When the ship changes c urse or thegyro is ship's latitude. The effect of horizontal earth settling out. the ,azimuth folloup system (fig. rate on the slaTie aro is proportional to the 6-23) detectsthe, misalignment, between the product of the earth rate at the equator and the' verticalring and gyrosphere and drivesthe cosine.,of the ship's latitude. Since the effect of vertijal earth rate is catised by the speed ot' the earth's rotation about its north-south axis. a ship GYRO traveling in an easterly or'westerly direction will either addtoor subtract' from the earth's SPHERE rotation. This apparent change ii the speed of the' earth's rotation will, in effeet, produce a MERIDIAN comparable change in vertOeft ah rate. This OTRO efiange. whichisthe 4ieri14ro east-west speed error.is 'proportionati4.;k10 product of the ship's east-west speeitrAKOWiangent of the' ship's krtitude. , , To coltpensatefor theseeffects on the SYNCHRO meridian , gyro. wc need a coMpensating signal TRANSMIT TER (HEADINGDATA) AZIMUTH voltag6 proportional-to the product of earth rate OLLDWUP at the equator aerid the 'sine of the ship's latitude, MOTOR plus a comperrating signal voltage proportional w s to .the AZIMUTH product of east-west speed and the PHANTOM tangent of thtl ship's latitude. T? coMpensate the slave gyro for th'e effect oihorizyntal earth rate, we need a compen'sating signal :voltage!`-proportional to the productt of earth rate and the cosine of the ship's latitude. These comptfivating signals are obtained from the latitude and tangenVlatitude computers (fig...... A 6.-2 I It ). . Becausi of wear it is nqt possible to keep the gyros perfectly balanced at all times. Therefore,, 27.180 a constanttorquecompensation systemis Figure 6-23.Simplified diagram of azimuth followup, provided for both meridian and slavegyros. system. 110 120 Chapter 6---,GYROCOMPASSES 1 .aziMuth phantom (and therefore ' thevertical misalignment' between the cradle and the slave -ring) back into align men twitht he gy rosphere. -gyro's vertical riwi. This Misalignment is about 4' An azimuth pickoff,.consisting of art F.-core theslavegyro's north-south ,horizontalaxis. 'transformer Mounted- on the vatical ring.and an Thus, avy misalignment between the roll-pitch armature cemented to the gyrosphe furnishes phantom mid the vertical: ring of. either gyro the misz gnment signa4.tothefollowup 'produces a rvil-pitch pickoff amplifier .tljecOnYentionalmanner. The A .pitch follow0 motor is mounted on the folfowup niotor. driven by the.aziinuth f011oWup- gimbal ring and' meshes- with the pitch gear on amplifier output', drives the azimuth pl theroll-pitchphantom. It positionsthe, restoringth azimuthpickolfto "its Jneut ral roll-pitch phantom about the pitch axis. A roll position anpositiohing, through gearing, the 1- followup mojorismounted on the support, and 36-sped heading data sYnchro transmitters. assembly and meshed with..the roll gear On the The followup motor, also positions the rotor of gimbal ring.I t inn ions OF Rhantoin the roll-pitch resolvtjr (oot shown in figure 6-23) abotitroll aiTs, thrinill,h the oimbal rino. to a positioncorrespondingtothe v4iip's, . . heading. On-the.nortli-south course,- khe pickoff signal The azimuth followup,amplilier consists of a "- from the meridia,b gyro roll-pitch pie'korl, if fed preamplifier stage,adentodulatOr, stageW;ith through- thepitch followup amplifier. to..tbe displacement and. rate signal networks, and a, ,yitch folloArup motor, -Will compensate for the magicti(.' amplifier outptit stage. Assoc.iated with- effect, of pitch. Similarly,' if the pick(Iff signal:\ theamplifkrare ,two alarmcircuitswhich. from the slave gyro roll-pitch pick011 Were led actuate the contpass alarm in case-of excessive thFough the roll follownp amplifier to the roil pickoff signal or preampltlier tube failarg. follownp motor,it-willcompensate for the effect 0 r .roll. , ) On ancast-westcourse,however,the . . ROLL/AND PITCH niertdian 4:,yro roll-pitch piekoll would have' to FOLLOWUP SYSTEM' ...b-e,,ftTto.:,tilic. roll follpWup amplifier and mOlor, 40 compensateforroll, and theslave gyro The rolland pitch followup system( fig. . ''..?,--_,,C.i.:ro 1-pitch :.I.kkoll -would have to be led to the 6-24) detects and eliminates any n-isalignment t c h f011owupampl,i tierandmotoVto between the rollThitch phantom .and the level -mpensate for pitch. It follows,Therfore: that position maintained by the two gyros. It also on .any ..interinediatecomse,theroll-pitch positionstherollandpAchsynch.rodata motions of th\.ship will have components acting transmitters. The sPystem consists of. two F-core about both no th-south and cast-west axes, and pickoffs,twofollowupamplifiers, and two both roll-pitch pickoffs- willreact.' to both roll lo 1 lo w up motors, 'all Utiplicatesofthe and pitch. As .aresult, the two pickoff signals -correspondingcomponents in theadmuth must be divided into proper proportions to each followupsystein. In addition;thesystem followup amplifier and motor to maintain the includes a roll-pitch resolver." horizontal' stability of the roll-pitch phantom. The ow;i ship's course, determines these proper ThemeridiangyrOroll-pitchpickolfis proportions, and they are obtained from the mounted ,onthemeridiangyrocradle and roll-pitch resolver. ..,. detects any misalignment 'bet we'enthe cradle The roll-pitchresolverhas its rotor andthemeridiangyro'svertical.ring.This positioned corresponding to own shilf.s course misalignment isnboutthemeridian 'gyro's by the azimuth .followup .system, as mentioned east-weSthorintal axis.Theroll-pitch previously. The meridian gYro- roll-pitch pickoll phantoni,physicallYlinkedtothe...azimuth signal is fed to one resolver r(Stor winding. and phantom, will be identically misaligned with the the .slave gyro. roll-Ii,tch pickoff signal is Ted to vertical rings of both gyros. the. other rotor wind The resolVer resOlves its The slave gyro roll-pitth pickoff is mounted own sl il)'s course ayd roll-pitch pickoff input ontheslavegyrocradleand.detqcts any signals into outpult signals Of proper prop'ortions, .., .1 II. 1 2, II,L-ECTRICIAN;S MATE 1 & C . MERIDIAN GYRO MERIDIAN GYRO ROLL-PITCH .4 GIMBAL 'RING PICKOFF , CRADLE4. ROLL & PITCH PHANTOM AZIMUTH PHANTOM SHIPS HEADING PITCH *XIS PITCH SYNC 0 TRANSM ROLL SY NCHRO TRANSMITTER ROLL AXIS ROLL PITCH FOLLOW UP FOLLOW UP MOTOR MOTOR CRADLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLY ROLL &PITCH ERROR SLAVE SIGNALS GYRO PITCH ROLL FOLLOW UP FOLLOW UP AMPL AMPL II. 2 2 27.181 . Figure 6-24.Simplified diagram of roll and pitch followup sy'stem. ChaPter ROCOM PASSFS to the followup amplifiers. The followup motors during starting, which reduces the nine required positiontheroll-pitchphantomuntilthe for the gyros to assume a true level position and pickoffs are restored to their neutral position for themeridiaif gyro to settle on thetrue :and,atthe same time, they position an'd Maid ian, 36-sPeedroll ;Ind pitchsynchrodata transmitters. GYROCOMPASS RECORDS AND LOGS ALARM SYSTEM A Gyrp Service. Record Book is provided 'with each gyrocompass. The book stays with its An alarm .system- is incorporated in the gyrocompass andis- a record of .the coinpas 19 gyrocampass system to the extent that each fromitsconstructionthroughitsentirelife loopinthe systemwillgive multiple alarm cycle. The hook contains acceptance, test, and 'warnings when a trouble develops in that loop. installation data, as well as overhaul, repair, and In addition, as trouble may also develop in the inspection's condncted by off-ship activities.In.. alarm circuits, the circuits are so arranged to givt.1 'the event a coMpass is to be removed from a alarm warnings when 'they themselves- liccome ship.the appropriate enyies are.. made inits defective. Normal tube current is used in each Gyro Service.. Record Book, and the hook is alarmcircuitto . energizeanalarmrelay. transferred with the gyrocompass, Therefore, if trouble d&elops within a circuit to reduce tube current, the relay will deenergize Maintaining the Gyro Serviee Record Book and actuate the alarm. is .required by NAVSFA Systems Command. Instructions, procedures in case of its loss. etc, are found inthefront of the Gyro Service STARTING CONTROL SYSTEMS Record Book and inNaval Ship's .Tochnical Manual chapter 9240. Two pages are shOwn in To aid in starting and operating the master figure6-25. The pageentitled"Inspection, coMpass. twoauxiliarycontrolsystems are overhaul. and repair is completed an'd'signed by provided:thestartingsystem andthefast the gyro electrician who completes the repair. In settling sYstem. theevent 'unfavorable conditions are found During starting, the starting system-levels the during an inspection by an off-Ship facility. a gyros andbringsthemeridian gyroto itthe .report in ust he made to the commanding o. meridian in as short a time as possible with a Planned maintenance s;ompleted by thip's lorce minimum number of manual operations required personnel is reCorded by normal PMS reporting of the compass operator. The .ystein incIRdes procedures _andis not recorded -in[Ins book. fast erect system, thy system control assembly, loviever, a. fault found dn.ring PMS, and then and part of the control panel. repairedwillhe entuTedinthe Gyro Service RecordBook,aswellasreportedthrough When thecompassisto bestarted.the M DCS. roll-pitch phantom will be off its level position. NavyRegulations and OPNAVINST The fast erect system.. greatly reduces the time 3120.32 assign responsibility for the, care and required to bring the roll-pitch phantom (dnd maintenance of the gy rmo m p ass equipment to therefore the gyros as they .are caged to their, Pie Engineer Officer and Electrical Officer. The vertical rings and the azimuth phantom during Gyrocompass Service Record book has items to garting) to a. level position. This system utilize be completed by the navigator. However, these a small stabilizer, or start gyro, mounted in the are normally completed by 'either the Engineer which when started, comes very quickly Officer or .delegatedto the Electrical Officer to a vertical position, providing a fairly accurate who May also he designated as the gyrO officer. level reference for the rolkpitch phantom. The fast-settling system rednceVhe compass Sonic shiPs and type conunands require that period and increasesthe. percent of damping additional. loCallY prepared logs, records, etc, be II 3 123 INSPECTION, OVERHAUL, AND REPAIR DATATO BE ENTERED BY NAVIGATOR Villenever inspecOons, ovierhauls, or repairs are made, the following infor7 Name of gyro electrician matiorf shall be entered below: I. Date; Rate. 2. Results of the inspection 3. Reason for the overh.: : repair. Experience . years months. 4. Description of the work ilon(;, Mark on scale of 4 5. Data and recommendatwns for future reference. 6. Repair activity. Assigned compass duty (date) .7. Sigkature. Relieved from compass duty (date) Cause REMARKS BY NAVIGATOR DATA TO BE ENTERED BY NAVIGATOR Name of gyro electrician. Experience Nrs months. Markon scale of 4 Assigned compass duty (date) , Relieved from compass duty (date) Cause REMARKS BY NAVIGATOR 121 16-111011-1 16-114011-1 Figure 6-25.--Gyrocompass service record book page. , N.OVERHAUL, AND REPAIR t TO BE ENTERED BY NAVIGATOR srhauls, or repairs are made, the following infor- Name of gyr --- w: Rate Experience years months. 11 or repair . lcdone. Mark on scale of 4 4on8 for future reference. Assigned compass duty (date) Relieved from compass duty (date) Cause REMARKS BY.NAVIGATOR --- DATA TO BE ENTERED BY NAVIGATOR Name of gyro electriciL Rate Experience years months. Mark on scale of 4 Assigned compass duty (date) Relie'Ved from compass duty (date) Cause REMARKS BY NAVIGATOR le-- I 930111-1 INOSI 140.141 Figure 6-25.Gyrocompass service record book .page. -Chapter 6GYROCOMPASSES maintained. If required, these recoals should be manualistheultimate aid .inallPhases of maintainedcompletelyandaccuratelyand training and repair. It contains sections devoted checked routinely by supervisory personnei-: A to the localization and isolation of-malfunctions, major problem With all records' is that, when thereforeallwork must beconducted by neglected or when entries are omitted for any perSons familiar withtheseprocedtires. The reason, they give a false record of reliability. manufacturer'smanualnot'onlyindicates .-Therefore,allrecordsincludingMDCS procedures that should be followed, but also. documentation must be checked'to ensure that warns of what oannot be done without causing they are dated, complete, and accurate. further damage to the system. An improperly trained or careless repairman who.is unfamiliar Although not maintained by the electrical with, or is not following, the manufacturer's divisionpersonnel,theMagneticCompass manual can easily cause additional problems. Record Book (NAVSHIPS 1101) can be used to For example, the movement of a weight on a get dataontheaccuracyof,theships mechanical gyro or the turning of the wrong gyrocompass system.Thisisalegalrecord potentiometerinanelectronic gyrocompass required by Navy Regulations and OPNAVINST system can change a period or dampening setting 3120.32andis maintainedby the which will requirerecalibrationofthe Quartermasters under thesupervision of the gyrocompass systemat a 'shore based repair Navigator. It contains a record of errors between facility. the forward and after gyrocompasses, steering repeater, and the magnetic compass; entries are All corrective maintenance and inspections madeevery half,hourwhiletheshipis conducted byoutsideactivitie§must be underway. recorded in the Gyro Service Record Book and throughMDCS documentationtoprovide accurateindications of reliability,cost, and MAINTENANCE AND- REPAIR repair man-hours. The .PQS, PMS, and MDCS programs standardize training, documentation, The gyrocompasses_presently in use will give andpreventiveandcorrectivemaintenance. little trouble if theY are properly Maintained and These programs, if properly implemented and if oyerator/repair personnel are properly trained, supervised, will ensure the most effective and motivated, and supervised. reliable operation of the gyrocompass'systern. If these programs are administered in a hphazard All persons associated with the gyiocompass manner, equipment operation will deteriorate, installationshouldcompletetheapplicable although ship's record indicate reliable operation port ionsofthePersonnelQualification with a minimum of corrective maintenance time. Standards, forthatparticular.typeof gyrocompass syStem. If correctly used, the PQS willensurethatpersonnelassignedtothe OPERATION operation,maintenance,andWatchstanding dutieshave theknowledgenecessaryto adequately perform these 'duties. Supervision Because ofitsimportance -totheship's will ensure that personnel .are carrying out these -safetyduring underway periods andin,: the, duties in the prescribed manner. operation and maintenance 2f weapons systems, set gyrocompass operating 'procedures should be Corrective maintenance must be performed prescribed for starting, operating, and securing by knowledgeable personnel who follow the the gyrocompass system. This chapter indicates manufacturer's manual'. Formal training on a basic requirements.. Type and local commands pa rticu lar.gyrocompasssystem,although will have variations of these procedures and thilY desirable, is not ànecessity. The gyro electrician should be followed for your particular ship and, , must, h'owever, belivroughly familiar with the conditions. manufacttirer's manila] and the installed system.. When the gyrocompass is started 'for any It Should be stressed that the manufacturer's Mason,anentryshouldbemadeinthe ELECTRICIAN'S MATE 1 & C EngineeringLog. When the gyrocompassis both will be informed of the nature of the started prior to, getting .underway, the station casualty which necessitated the change. keeping the Preparation for Getting UnderwaY When the ship enters port, the gyrocompass Check-Off List (usually the Quarterdeck) must systems should be secured only after permission also be notified.Prior to getting underway, has been obtained from the Navigator and the usually when the Special Sea and Anchor Detail 'CommandingOfficer, via theEngineering t isset,entries should be made in both the Officer. Although not required for ship's safety, En gi neeririgLogandtheQuartermasters itmay be advantageous to find ',out what Notebook, indicating which gyrocompass is the requirements the Weapons Department has kis- master (on line). While und,erway, the master the inport period, as many of their preVentiif will be changed only in the event of a casualty maintenance procedures require gyro inputs. or with prior approval. The OOD must be kept Mutual cobrdination and cooperation with other fully informed of all of these changes. In the divisions which may require gyrocompass inputs event of a casualty, the Bridge must be notified while inport, will aid in the most efficient use of immediately, and the engineering officer,of the the systern and also, keep operating hours at a watch should be notified as soon as possible; minimuni while still providing required services. 9 127 116 CHAPTER 7 NO.BREAK POWER SUPPLIES AND STATIC INVERTERS As the Navy expands into the comparatively the other. is the gener'ator. This peilnits two new field of solidwstate technology, so does the operational modes; NORMAL and STOP GAP.''"', work of an Electrician's Mate. This chaptth- will NORMAL operation uses the normal supply discuss the opergion and maintenance of no (ship's generators) with the motor-generator break power supplies and static inverters. driven by the a.c. motor from the ship's supply et,14nne1 lacking.,a thorough understandingof w'hile the d.e. generator is charging batteries. :..,SoTidstate circuitry, components, or terins In STOPGAP operation the motor-generator should review Basic Electronics, NAVEDTRA is driven by the -d.c. motor with power from the ,10087 (Revised). 6 batteries. Under this condition the a.c. generator provides the critical load requirements.. A no break pOweir supply is designed to provide uninterrupted blectrical power to loads by automatic takeover of the power supply OPERATION should the normal supply fail Or momentarily . detearate beyond the demands of the system. , Normal ship's power, as shown in figure 7-2, . No break powet supplies are provided for is, applied' to the voltage and frequency communication systems, computers, Monitors. If the monitors sense that the normal navigational equipment, and related equipment poweris within the frequency add voltage limits where even .-a mOmentary loss of power would required, relay action (re-lay #I) 'will allow the cause 'a permanent loss of information resulting norMal power to be applied to the load and inthe need to recycle or reprogram the, other circuitry. .(Itshould be noted that the equipment. Since equipment requiring no break relay numbersiri:OgUre 7-2 refer to relay action power normally requires closely regulated sequence rather fhan,relay designations.) Power power, no break power supplies are designe'd to is applied to;.the relay 'control power circuit Provide not only uninterrupted power, but also from the battery. to 'Provide power that is regulated to meet the When the system -is turned on, the. needs of the equipment it serves. motor-generator will accelerate to a'pproximately synchronous speed *as an induction motor before a time delay relay is COMPONENTS energized. When the delay energizes (relay #2) it applies normal power to the a.c. field rectifier The° no 'break uninterrupted power supply via the a.c. voltage regulator for application to system consists of two major assemblies plus the the a.c. Motor as field excitation to allow storage batteries. The control cabinet and synchronous motor operation. At the same tirne motor-generated set is illustrated infigure 7-1. the d.c. generator is rerouted to the d.c. supply The control cabinet contains all the control (relay #3) to prevent starting the and monitoring equipment. The motor-generator ;motor-generator set on d.c. and to charge the is a single-shaft unit. Either section of the batteries. The system is now operating in motor-generator can perform as the motor with NORMAL mode. 128 Figure 7-1 .--11 If the normal suppliiy falls ou either voltage or. *frequency, Monitor will sense it, and relayal will shut down the motOr-gener same time the d.c. genet disconnected from the d.c. field connected directly to the batter #5). The d.c. motor speed regnla generator voltage regulatoi are c #6 and #7) to maintain the speed and to control the Ida( system is now in the STOP GAP r ELECTRICIAN'S MATE 1 & C -11 r -114t1777mmi 1T1.142 lo break unieterruptlid power supplpsystem components. t of its limits in If the reason for switching Modes had beena the respective voltage drop, the voltage would not have :tion (relay #4) dropped below 317 volts and the transition itor set. At the would have been accomplished withinone ator fieldis second. In the case of a frequency drop, the -ectifier #2 and change is made within two seconds and the y supply (relay frequency does not drop below 54 Hz. tor and the a.c. When the .ship's power returns to the nergized (relay specified limits (dfscussed later), the equired motor synchronizer will have the normal-power atone 1 voltage. The side and the a.c. generator power at the other. It node. will automatically adjust the s-peed regulatorto 118 129 Chapter 7NO BREAK POWER SUPPLIES AND STATIC INVERTERS NORMAL RELAY SHMS 4. LOAD RELAY POWER *184°4 MOTOR GENERATOR SET A.C. D.C. UNIT UNIT 1 FLD.1 WNDS. I *1 1 *2 VOLTAGE FREQUENCY MONITOR MONITOR RELAY A.C. *2 VOLTAGE REGULATOR RELAY RELAY, SPEED REGULATOR/FREQUENCY CONTROL *6 DISCR IMINATOR POWER CIRCUITS 11 SYNCHRONIZER 0 Figure 7:2.No break uninterrupted power supply system block diagram. match the generator frequency to the normal frequency monitor is basically the sarne.as the power. The matching is accomplished in less- frequency. discriminator. 'and error .voltaee than dne minute and the system is transferred detector circuits. These circuits will be, discussed back to a.c. motor drive and battery charge later inthis chapter. The big difference in the (NORMAL mode). circuits i5 the.output application. The output' of the monitors is used for relay switching, whereas. MONITOR CIRCUITS the output of the otter circuits is for regulation of either voltage or:frequency. The frequency and voltage monitoring circuits aredesignell to switch the set from VQLTAG®ULATOR NORMAL to STOP GAP when the-input frequency drops below .56 Hz or the input, The function of the voltage regulator is to voltage falls below an adjustable limit 4330' to .maintain the output voltage at the preset value 380 volts).4 (±2%) regardless, of temperature or load The voltage monitor circuitry is basically the variations. 'The .basic circuitry for both the a.c. same as the voltage sensing and error voltage and d.c.. regulators .is 'sitriilar except that the d.c. detector circuit Of-the voltage regulator and-the. regulator does nOt use the sixyse rectifiers in . 119 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE I8c C the sensing circuit. Con Stant generator voltage Error Voltage Detector Circuit output is obtained by having the regulating circUit change the voltage feed in eesponse to an Transistors Q Iand 92 (fig.7-4) form a etror signal. differential amplifier to compare the bas'e voltages of the two transistors. The signal from.. A differential amplifier is used, in the error the voltage sensing circuit is applied to the base voltage detector circuit (fig:7-3), to Compare of QI, while the reference voltage is applied to the generator output voltage, from the voltage the base of Q2. The reference voltage is applied sensing circuit, with a reference voltage, via R8, which isa factory set and locked developed in the error voltage &lector circuit, reference voltage adjustment: V--'to produce the. error signalThe error signal, Resistor R9 is the voltage dropping resistor acting through the modulator, modifies the for CR7, and 'capacitor C3 reduces the ripple timing of the pulse repetition frequency of the and noise voltages across CR7 to provide a clean unijunction trigger circuits. The controlled d.c.,reference voltage. Resistors R6 and R7 are pulses are fed to the respective field rectifibr' to load resistors for transistor Q2. control the average power to the generator field. Any difference between the input voltage at The rate circuit modifies the error siinal,to the base of Q.I and thereference voltage at the stabilize the volAage regulator. base of Q2 will produde an error, signal (a change incollector current).If the input voltageis higher than the reference voltage, Q1 conducts Voltage Sensing Circuit heavier than Q2 and vice versa when the reference voltage is,higher than the input. The The voltage sensing circuit (fis. 7-4) steps voltage drop across R6 is the error voltage which down the three phase generator 450-v.a.c. is applied to the base of the modulator 03. - output thrlvoltage sensing transformer T Ito 25 v.a.c. Ehh phase is rectified by diodes CR1 Modulator Circuits thru CR6 and filtered by CI and C2. This d.c: voltage is proportional to the generator outpUt The modulator circuit (fig. 7-4) modifies the voltage. The d.c. voltage is aTiplied to voltage time constant of the RC circuit (C4, RIO, and divider network R11. thru R4 (R3 can be adjusted 'the Q3 collector-emitter resistance). (The to develop the amount of voltage desired asihe collector-emitter resistance is controlled by the representative generator output) for comparison current through resistor R6.) An inctease in, the tothe reference voltage in the error voltage error signal across R6 decreases the detector circuit. collector-emitter resistance of Q3 and thus'" RATE CIRCUIT . 96 GENERATOR VOLTAGE ERROR VOLTAGE F.4IMODOLATORFUNIJUNCTIONI..4TRIGGER1 AC OR DC OUTPUT SENSING DETECTOR CIRCUIT TRIGGER AMPLIFIER 03 FIELD RECTIFIER . VOLTAGE CIRCUIT 04 I95 (FIG. 7-2) , ERROR CONTROLLED SIGNAL PULSES 131 111:144 Figure 7-3.Voktage regulator, block diagranh. _ Chapter 7NO BREAK POWER SUPPLIES AND STATIC INVERTERS VOLTAGE SENSING CIRCUITCR6 RI +Vdc R 6 FROM FREO. ERROR SIG T1 R 2 DISC.(F1G. 7-8) R 9 R 7 GEN. OUTPUT C I R AI0 t 0fik Nur R 8 ERROR CR 7 R4 C 2 VOLTAGE 3 R 5 DETECTOR C 014MON REFERENCE R 14 '0 3 MODULATOR R II CONTROLLED PULSE'S TO GENERATOR FIELD UNIJUNCYION RECTIFIER (FIG .7-5 ) R 10 TRIGGER 04 C 0 5 R 15 FROM TRIGGER SYNCHRONIZER C 4 ( FIG. 7-7 AMPLIFIER 'CR 9 R 16 FROM GENERATOIR ( FIG. 7-5 ) 10( CR 10 111.145 Figure 741Voltage regulator, simplified schemitic, decreases the charge time of C4. If the error Ra e signal decreases, the charge thne of C4 is increaged. The funetioil of tVe rate circuit is to dampen the generator ouViit voltage excursions about a set point. OtherWise the high gain of the voltage -Capacitor C4 discharges when the voltage re gilla tor would cause the generator output across it is approximately 9 volts (the peak point voltage to hunt. The method used for damping voltage of unijun,ction transistor Q4). A the voltage excursion is feeding back an inverted synchronizing'circuit (discussed later) clamps C4 signal (opposite to the error signal) proportional to ground, thus delaying the RC time cycle. A' to the rate of voltage change. rate feedback signal is also applied by the rate circuit to the collector of Q2. This signal The ra te circuit .(fig. 74) consists of a modifies the error signal, thus stabilizing the common emitter amplifier (Q6, R19, and. R20) voltage regulator. and an integrating circuit (R16 and C8). Resistor 121 132 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE I & C R17 is a discharge resistor for C8, and CR9 and C7 comprise .a pulse-shaping network.,to prolong ,CRIO are common rectifiers. the life of the SCR's- in the field rectifier (fig. The input is supplied by the generator field 7-5). rectifier (described later), integrated, and applied as forward base bias to Q6. Any change GENERATOR FIELD RECTIFIER .in the base is amplified arid passed by C9 to the collector of the error detector, Q2. As this signal Both the a.c. and d.c. field rectifiers are isopposite the error signal,itwilldecrease similar in operation. The function of the conduction and.stabilize the circuit. generator field rectifier is to proVide controlled d.c. power to the generator field in order to regulate the generator outPut voltage with .the Unijunction Trigger Circuit field power being proportional to -the conduction line of the SCR's. The trigger, function'.is perforined by the'. TranSformer. T3 (fig. ;7-5). transfers voltage unijunction trigger eircuit(fig, 774). Unijunction from the generator, which...is rectified by the transitof Q4 isa relaxation oscillator which bridge rectifier (CRLI thru CR14). The initiates controlled rate pulses to trigger the4field conduction of the bridge is controlled by SCR's rectifiets: Q4 turns on when the voltage across C113 and CR14. One series combiriation of C4 and dthe emitter current. of Q4 reachpreset diode and SCR (CR11, CRI3 or CR12, CR14) values. When Q4 conducts, trigger pUlses 'are may conduct for alternate half cycles. The d.c. .applied to the trigger amplifier Q5. outpiit is the contrôlled, generator field poWer. Diode CR15 is used as an inductive kickback di.ode to proVide a path for the current Trigger Amplifier Circuit generated by the collapsing magnetic field of the generator during the idle portion of each cycle. The trigger amplifier (fig.. 7-4) amplifies and The amount of field power, ean be adjusted by shapes the trigger pulses. The circiiitisa R21. common emitter amplifier with RC input (R13 The. SCR's accomplish power control and C5) and transformer output (T2). because they are rectifiers and in an a.c. circuit Transistor Q5 isprotected againitfthe they conduct during only half of each cycle, and inductive kickback voltage of T2 by diode CR8. then only after being hirned on by a positive Resistors RI4 and R15 with capaeitor C6 anC1 gate pulse (from the trigger amplifier). Power T 3 GENERATOR' VOLTAGE OUTPUT REGULATOR 1Fig. 7- 4) 111.146 Figure 7-5.Generator field rectifier, simplified,schematic. Chapter 7NO BREAK POWER SUPPLIES AND STATIC INVERTERS control is accomplished by switching the power point in the cycle up to approximately 1800. on for a greater, or smaller, portion of the half Through control a the firing angle, the average cycle. Figure 7-6 shows how power can be power delivpred to the load can be adjusted. increased as the firing point is.moved along the phase time aids. Referring to figure 7-6, note that when a gate pulse at zero degrees of the phase time axis (fig. 7-6A) is applied, output power will b The firing point is determined by the applied during the complete half cycle. position (or timing) of a spiked gate pulse. When 7-6B illustrates that power is oblained for applied to the SCR, the pulse turns it on. By one-half of each half cycle when a pulse at 900 controlling the phase of the gate pulse (with of the phase time axis is applied. The other respect to the supply voltage) the firing (delay) extreme of no output when the phase delay is angle of the SCR gate may be delayed to any 180° is represented in figure 7-6C. GATE ALTERNATE PULSE HALF CYCLE PHASE DELAY0° MAY OUTPUT 180° CONDUCTION A. ANGLE GAT E PULSE PHASE DELAY 90° . AA.14 HAL.F MAX OL/TPUF FIRING CONDUCTION ANGLE ANGLE- GATE . PULSE °PHASE DELAY 1800 NO OUTPUT 18o° o FIRING ANGLE CONDUCTION ANGLE (SHAMA. AREAS REPRESENT OUTPUT POWER) 111.147= ,Figure.7-6.Phaselhift ociate pulse: 123..; \- ELEC+RICIAN'S MATE 1 & C SYNHRONIZER drop across R23 and thus allows Q7 to turn off anti Q8 to turn on. Thus the timing capacitor C4 The function of the synchronizer is to asSure is,clamped until the start of the next half eycle. that the firing angle is always reckoned front the instant the supply wfltage crosses the zerO Akig VREQUENCY DISCRIMINATOR at each posi tive ,half cycle (fig. .7-64). -,As illustrated in figurei7-7, when the SCR's ari4Ipt Tile speed/frequency tegukator automatically conducting, an alte, nate bridge .reetifier OkCifit' maintains the motor speed and7-the generator is. Thii alternate 1341dge consists' of diode CR14. fteql.f:pifcyat apie tvalue despite line , ., resistor R21; the generator field, -resiStors R23 variations br load changes. and R22, d.'iode .CR16, and the secondary of T3 'Constant output frequency is obtained by (solid arrows)., During the altierriate half, cyCle, autbmatically adjusting the power to the motor the path (dashed arrows) is tV same except that contr,o1 field inif.esponse to a; frequency diodes CR11 and CR171ire used. discriminator. The'.frequency discriminafor When the alttrnateliridge rectifier conducts; converts the genoratoVtput 'frequency to -a the voltage across R23 permitsiC4 (fig:7-4) to voltage signal whitli iin direct proportion to chargeintroducing the phase delay of the SCR the speed/frequenCy of th e :motor geneyator. ° , gate pulse.Firing of iiSCk's CR13 and CR14 The speed/frequency .regul4torcUit iSthe applies equal potential of both ends of voltage same as the voltage, regUla tor 'previbusly divider R22 and R23. This removei the voltage discussed. The Operation4 difference is that.the ."0 ° + VCC @TO VOLTAGE REGULATOR', (FIG.7-4 ) e. COMMON REFERENCE T3 1 o I I ty.CR 16 1 R22 -4 4 I 0-*----AAA---. I I 17 R 23. s' GYNCHRON1ZER 1 GENERATOR FIELD R 21 RECTIFIER (FIG.7-5 ) GEN. FLD. GENERATOR FIELD, RECTIFIER( FIG, 7-5 ). Figure 7-7.-SynChrohizer, simplified schematic. 124 135 Chapter 7NO. BREAK POWER SUPPLIES AND STATIC. INVERTERS voltage regulator requires an increase in . Transistors Q10 and Q11 form a one shot generator output voltage to cause a decrease in multivibrator whose output isa 2-millisecond generator field current, but in the frequency wide pulse equal in amplitude to the collector regulator an inOrease in frequency cau'ses voltage. Q11 is nOrmally held on through R27, field current to increase. , CR27, and R28. Thus Q10 is held off as'its base , The discriMinator circuit is shown in figure drive comes frdm Q11's collector. Since Q9 7-8. Essentiallyitconsists of a one-shot saturates when a 1.igker pulse is applied, the muliivibrator Which puts out a constant width collector voltage 0. Q10 is at ground potehtial pu.Ne whenever a, trigger.pulse is applied. The whenever,a pulse iS\:applied. trigger cicuitry Is designed so that a pulse is Before the trigger pulse is applied,Cli has applied each output cycle,in order to been charged to the collector voltage (ycc) level obtain a enough sampling rate to decrease through resistor R25- with the other end' the reSpcinse tithe of the cirouit. The clamped to ground throqgh diode CR27 and the : multivibrator output is integrated in order to base-emitter junction of Q11. When C13 provide a d.c. voltSge that iproportional and discharges due to \the trigger piilse, it turns off linear witlt.freqUency. Q11. The collector willride. to the collector The positive collector voltage input furnishes voltage leVel -and resistor R26 will, apply base the tircuitry operating biases, an4 six-phase,a.c. cur%nr116- Q10 to hold it -sAtwated after the is, used to obtain. the trigger pul'ses. The trigger trigger pulse ends. ; . . circuitry consists of three single-phase full-wave This state (Q10 on, Q14 exist until , rectifiers (CR18 and CR19, CR20 and CR21, C f3 charges through At7 .rcia'7'v9jtage high *and CR22 and .CR23).' Each is drivenl frorii0 enough to allow Q11 to *came ft*wardbiased th.F 11 star (fig. 741 The aittifil.,,,At, this time, the output pulse ends since ..rectified y.00:ges clippe bY tke 'One rs Q11' saturates and the base driv& of Q10 is (CR24; CR'...3.t anCR26) tobtain Square remoVed. The time duration of the output pulse 'pulse, which isfurtfi'ersaped by, the is controlled by C13 and R27, with CR27 in the differentiating ciritry of 00ClC12, and circnit to protect the base junction of QI1 from R24. The .differenated pulsesrive .the trigger overvoltage. trinsistpr ch satutatesiVhenever a The output pulse fiorn the collector of Q11 .pos4iye pe is a pld.. sfed through resistor R29 to integrating 1.4Vcc CR 18 © TO VOLTAGE 6 PHASE A. C. < R 29 REGULATOR C 13 (FIG.7-4 ) C 14 0 II COMMON REFERENCE 111.149 F igure.7-8.FrequericY'discriminatoi, simplified scl4tiatic: -f.1, 125 ,.136 L. it, ELECTRICIAN'S MATE 1 &C capacitor C14. During the timeno output pulse I f the insulation resistance is present, C14iS discharged. thru R29 falls below 1 and the, megohm, the windings should bedried Out. collector-emilter junction of Q11. If the Three recommended methods of drying frequency of the generator incrgases, the are oven ratio of drying, forced warm air drying,or low voltage charge time to discharge time increaseswhich, in current drying. turn increases the discriminator outputvoltage The oven drying method 'requires proportional to the frequency shift. A a decrease maximum temperature of 850 C. Theforced in frequency does the opposite.The output is applied to the error voltage arm air method requires a fin to blowwarm detector, circuit across the damp windings. The air must be (base of QI, figure 7-4)or its equivalent in the Tvith the temperature frequency regulator. below 212°A. The low voltage current method requiresthe tk;"circulation of a limited direct currentthrough the windings. Care should be takento ensure MAINTENANCE that the drying current doesnot exceed 80 percent of the full load rating. In dryingthe Under.normal conditions, themotor field winding, the brushes shouldbe removed to generator set and contrni ,f,44,..ipmentrequire prevent marking or pitting the collector inspection and cleaning rings ,1.-,Ignated by the (which can occur if the brushescarry the drying PMS Maintenance RequirementCards. When the ,current). Motor generator is inspected, cleanliness, brush The insulation resistance should bechecked ,operation,. condition of brushesaqd at regular intervals, Remember that commutator, bearing temperature, and vibration when the . current method is used, the resistance should be observed.. may drop temporarily as the moisture is forcedto the When necessary; remove dustfrom the surface of the winding._Drying should wound section with avacuum cleaner.If a continue/. vacuum cleaner is until the resistance is at least 1 megohm. The not available, either 30 drying process can take days inextreme 'cases. pounds maximum compressed airor a hand When the windingsare dried out, ecoating of bellows may be used. Be certainthat the insulating varnish should be applied. compressed air ,does not haveany grit, oil, or moisture content. Compressed airshould be used with caution, particularlyifabrasive OIL SOAKED WINDINGS particles (carbon, etc.)are present, since these may be driven into the, insulation and puncture it or may be forced beneath insulating If oil enters the windings,insulation tapes or breakdown may be imminent, and other possible trouble spots. If vibration the winding exists, will probably have to berewound. However, check for loose ,parts or mounting bolts. patches of oil should be removed In cleaning the control equipment, with a clean a vacuum cloth soaked inan approved solvent. Use the cleaner or hand bellows sliouldbe used. ACcumulations of -dust solvent sparingly, being carefulnot to saturate or dirt around the insulation as thiscan cause softening of the components can impair the natural air flowand insulation. After a solvent has been Cause overheating. used for cleaning, one of the drying methodsshould be applied. DAMP WINDINGS Moisture in windings eo softenthe STATIC INVERTER insulation and reduce thedielectric strength. Howeier, Considerable time is 'usually required The need for a highly dependablestatic (no before the moisture will harm thewindings. moving parts) source of 400-hertz Possible trouble .can be spotted and power led .to appropriate ct the devdopment of the 4345Astatic inverter. maintenance action taken if theinsulation At present the system is resistance oflhe winding is checked. employed in SINS (Ships Inertial Navigation System)installations; 126 B 7 Cha'pte-1-",7-T.40 BREAK POWER SUPPLIES AND STATIC INVERTERS ; however, most of the circuits employed receive freqtlertgy ,standard oscillator, two driver wide use throughout IC installations. subassemblies, and two silicon ,FontrQ1 rectifier The model 4345A Static Inverter delivers a power stage s. The Power -stage contanis the closely regulated source of 400 hertz 3-phase capacitors, transformers, and filters associated power from i nominal 250 VDC source.Two with the power stages of the inverter. single-phase static inverters are operated with a controlled 900 phase difference. Pulse width FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION modulation is used for control of the output voltage of each static inverter, The outputs of A simplified Ibnctional block diagram of the the two inverters are fe.d into twb scott "T" model 4345A static inverter is shown in 'figure connected transforniers to provide a three-phase 7-10.,A brief discussion of-the various output from A 2-phase input. components and-circuits contai,Qed in the unit The omponents are enclosed in an follows. aluminum cabinet (fig.7-9). The Meter Panel Assembly contains the instruments and contrqls Oscillator Assembly necessary for the operation of theequipmenl. The inverter Module contains a control circuit The oscillatoi (fig. 7-10) ebnsists of a +30 VDC power supply. a drive circbit +30 VDC 160011-lz tuning foil( controlled oscillator and a ...power supply, an input sensing and stepchange binary frNuency divider (countdown) circuit. adjustment circuit, a sync1roniz1ng_subassembly, The countdown circuit reCluces the 1600-Hz three variable pulse width gengrators, a oseillator frequency to .an 800-Hz reference ' freque ncy, requirecV by the inverter control circuits. -, Variable Pulse Width Generator§ The inverter Modu1,6, contains one variable METER PANEL pulse,width genci-ator (VPWG) for each inverter (main andsebondary VPWG, fig. 7-10), and one VPWG ,for. controlling, the j-)h-ase.angle between the inverters. Each VPWG contains4monostable (onc-shot-i1aultivibratQr amodulatorz-CircuLt, and an 'inverter output voltage error. sensing INVERTER MODULE circuit).: R785 The modulator circuit consists-Of a.transitor R786 R787 and resistors conneeted blithe dis(Alarge pa!fh of a capucitor. Varyiug .the level ofconduCtioa of the transistor viaries lhe dischara Jime-of gre capacitor wha:h varies the time 'the .motiostlible... multivibrator remains-in the unstable state:The,' PPWER time the monostable'Multivibratoi remains in STAGE the unstable state dete,rinfires the width of the output pulse. The monostabie multivibrator used in.. the - VPWG can bctriggered only- on pOsitive pulses. The output_ voltage ,error-sensing circuit COI, ea ch V PWG receives an "AC signal (via ,tht,, feed ba'1.7k )oor).. prOi)ortionalto the otitpia 40.79 vol tage t he inverter. The .AC .!;ignalis Figure 7:9.Static inverter. convertdd t(acorrespondin.g DC sign al. I 27 , 1 8 8 . ELECTRICIAN'S 'MATE I & C FEEDBACK LOOP ( VOLTAGE SENSING) MAIN 400,1, COUNTDOWN OS C DRIVE SWITCH FEEDBACK. LOOP PHASE ; ,SYNC " SCOTT STAGE CONTROL CLIPPER 120 VAC VPWG T" 5-PHASE 400rU OUTPUT SECONDARY 400 COUNTDOWN R SECONDARY P.* 11. VPWG FILTER FEEDBACK LOOP CURRENY'SEN 11-c SENSING g, r. ER-OVER 250W DC VOtYAGE SENSING 'INPUT 40.80 Figure 710.Simplified blockdiagram of static inverter. compaYed with a reference signal, andthe .error The main and secondary VPIVG'Sdeliver (difference) signal is used to control thelevel of one 800 Hz input to each'of the driver Londuction of the' transistor in the modulating stages (I circuit. did 2), and another 800-Hzinput to a binary countdown circuit which, in The secOndary .V.PWG regulatesthe output turn, delivers two 400-Hz inputs 1800apart to ea\ch,of the driver voltage of Oast: NB, and the phasecontrol, and stages. main VPWO regulate the vottages ofphases BC and CA respectively. The bhasecontrol, VPWG Drivers also provides a delay in .timebeiween triggering of the main and secondary VPIVrito control the Each driver contains four phase angle betweenrower stages (I and 2) of drive pulse the inverters. generators., Two of the drive pulse.generators generate the triggers for thepower SCR's ("turn ,128 139 Chapter 7NO BREAK POWER SUPPLIES AND STATIC INVERTERS on" SCR's), and the other two generatq the driver,.a rising current will flow through p.rimary .triaers for the commutating SCR's rturnioff" winding 3-4 of output transkihner Tl (thrbUgh' SCR's), in the power stages. Q1,LI, and the 'battery), inducing a voltage in A unijunction transistor isutilizedto the secondary 6-7 in one direction. By generate the drive pulse trigger. autotransformer action, a voltage is also induced in winding 4-5. This,voltage charges capacitor CI Power Stages through Q1, CR1, and R I.When commutating SCR (Q3) istriggered on .by the driver, the Each power stage contains three power and positive voltage from the right plate of CI is three commutating SCRs for each side of the applied through Q3 (Q3 conducting) to the power stage, and a Iransformer. The SCR's Q3-CR3 junction. This applies a reverseaegiitive switch the DC source across the primary of the anode to positive cathode vO1tagg.t0491'iciuir1 gi;, transformer at a 400-Hz rate to produce a Ql to stop conducting. Capaciten- Cr diichargek`: 400-Hz square wave output. The square waVe through LI, CR3, and Q3.-0i.th .Q1 Off,? th .; output is filteyed to produce a sine wave. current in winding 3-4 of Trt.gilid011y dropsio .. :The SCR is the semiconductor equivalent of zero and, slightly laterwhk the .3-4 Orient ...tbos.gas thyratron tube. Qnce itis made to ceases; the voltage between seboiiita,rite'rminals COnduct, itwillcontinue, to conduct for the 6-1 drops to zero. The voltage between terminals :rrniiung, , positive half cycle (anode positive' 4-5 also drops to zero. When CI discharges to ;with- respect to cathode). Neither the removal of zero, Q3 stops conducting. Becauseorri)the the gate voltage nor the reversal of the gate gradual drop of current in the 3-4 winding, the voltage will slop the SCR frorn conducting. voltage induced in the 6-7 winding is of reVersed Conduction may be stopped only by completely polarity and low amplitude. removing the positive anode toliegative cathode voltage or by applying a slightly greater reverse On the other side of The power stage, power negative anode to-positive cathode voltage. SCR (Q2) is then triggered on by the driver The principle of operation "ot the power output, and capacitor C2 charges in the same stages can be describetf...W.the simplified manngr as CI charged. The operation of this side schematic diagram (fig. 7-11.):'When power SCR of the power stage is the same as for the side just '4Q1) is triggered on by an output pulse from the discussed. The polarity of the output is reversed, T I OUT. PUT ANODE CATHOQE GATE A 40.81 Figure 7-11.Power stage, simplified schematic diagram. 129 1 4 0 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE 1 & C however, which completes thesquare ITvave Voltage sensing circuit, and the output on the,secondary of.TI. overload-sensing circuit. 'A positive signal of 20 VDCor greater - from either of these three Filters sources will cause the binary circuit to switch, which in turn willcause the bistable multivibrator to switchto the "turn' . The filters(fig.7-10) convert the square off" condition on the inverter. wave outputs of power stages 1 and 2 to sine The SYNC stage also containsa delayed waves. Each .filter 'consists of one series and four B-voltage interlock to ensure that the shunt LC filters. The series filter provides oscillator, a low VPW , and synchrorlizing circuits have impedance path for the 400-Hz fundamental sufficiet time to stabilize before the inverter is frequency and a high impedance pathfor the turne odd harmonics in the output. n. A unijunction cireuit provides a tithe The,predominate ,delay of approximately, two ,secondsafter the odd harmonics are filtered out "byindividual inverter main power circuitbreaker is shunt Filters. A shunt filter is provided turned on, for.the before the control circuit +30 VDC isapplied -to third, fifth, seventh, and pinthharmonic. Even the inverter circuits. harmonics are negligible dueto the balanced design of the push-pullpower stage. Drive Switch Scott "T" TransfpAner ThC! drive :switch (SI, fig.7-9) has three The Scolt trans former isa positions: OFF, START, and RUN. Inthe OFF ce n ter- ta p p ed: 4utotrtinsformer.. Theou tput position (With the mainpower circuit breakert voltages from the nlain and secondaryinverter ON), power is supplied to the standbyindicator filters combine in the Scott "T" transformerto light to indicate that the inverterisin the produce a 120 volt, 3-phase output. standby mode; a*nd an+30 VDC signalis supplied to the synchronizing stage. The (kirswitch also Clipper functions in the OFF position to/connectthe input DC voltage as asource of poWer for the . The 3-phase clipper network consistingof control circuit +30 VDCpower supply. capacitors, .resistors; :and diodes isconnected In the START positionpower is, removed across the 3-ph4se, OUtPut a the Scott ".T" from the'indieator light, and the +30VDC signal tra ns for me r.The. work 'functionslo to the synchronizing stage isremovedallowing reduce voltageriiitsients'in",:the inverter3-phase 'signals,to pass to properly start the imferter. otaput. When the drive switch is switeliedto the RUN position, the input DC'voltage for the SynchroniziniStrigr,:.. control circuit +30 VDCpower supply is discOnneeted, and a bridge rectifiedOutput from The 'SYNC stage (41g.7-10) contains an phase CA of the inverter is.used. emitter-cbupled binary circuit .anda bistable multivibrator. This stageensures that. drive Power Supplies pulses are initiated properly whenthe unit is turned on. If the drive switch is turnedon at the The. power supplies in the inverter wrong time with respect to the reference signal are the control circuit +30 VDCpower supply and the from the oscillator, ,operationis delayed until drive circuit +30 the beginning of a cyCle in .the VDC power supply. The reference Signal. control circuit +30 VDCpower supply provides lie binary circuit in the SYNCstage has power for all control circuits except the drivers three 'interlock circuits which controlthe and sunder-over voltage circuits. switching of the bistable multivibrator This power is (the. ohtained from the input DCsource during the "turn on" im;c1-:."turn off"condition of the START mode and from phase inverter). The,' three interlock, signals CA of the inverter are output during the RUN modeas mentioned provided by the drive switch, the.if)der-over previously. , . . 130 141 Chapter 7NO BREAK POWER SUPPLIESAND STATIC INVERTERS The drive circuit +30 VDC power supply OPERATION CYCLE provides power for the drivers and the under-over voltagecircuits. This power is When the main power circuit breaker is on obtained from the inverter input DC voltage. and the drive switch is in the OFF position, the Mverter is in the standby mode of operation. Overload Circuit The standby Mode is composed of a transient and. a steady state condition. The, transient The overload circuit functions to turn the condition lasts for ..approximately 2 seconds. inverter off in case of overload. An overload This '2-second tirne delaYis provided by the current from th,e current sensing circuit delayed B+ voltage interlock to alio* the produces a DC signal of sufficient amplitude .to inverter circuits to reach a stgatly state, as trigger a unijunction circuit which in turn mentioned previously. triggers a bistable multivibrator. The bistable Durimg the standby mode the 800-hertz multivibrator output is fed to the binary circuit countdown circUit of the oscillator supplies an in the SYNC stage which switches the bistable 800-Hz 'square wave, voltage to the. SYNC stage multivibrator in this stage putting the inverter in and the main VPWG (waveform B fig. 7-12A and the "turn ofr' condition. fig. 7-10).. A +30 VDC signal is appliedito the binary circuit in the SYNC stage via the drive Under-Over Voltage-Sensing Circuit switch (51 fig. 7-9) which keeps the bistable Multivibrator in the SYNC stage in the "turn The under-over voltage-senSing circuit off" state. functions to turn the inverter,off:Whert the input Turning the drive switch to the START DC source voltage is out of .the.,Operatint range position removes the 300 VDC signal from the (21.0-355 YDC) of the binary circuit and allows the first negative-going .....A4tiodified,Schmitt.,tfigger circuit isused to edge of the 800 Hz square wave (waveform B) to .. , reverse the bistable multivibrator in the SYNC, , su pply thv interlbcX signal to thebinarY-:circuit iti,the..S4YNcist'aget.. The Schmitt trigger is a form stage. This allows the positive-going edge,. of of ti1Stab1ey:.fintiltivibiitor.Itdiffers from the waveform B (at timeplig: 7:42A) to trigger the .cOnvepthhisia6li-multivibrator, however, in' monostable mUltivibi'atortin''the-main ,VPWG. ihafit is at all times sensitive to the amplitude (fig. 7-10). of the input signal. If the amplitude of the input The trailing ei*.pr:* first poSitnie. signalis above a specified level, the Schmitt waveform C (edge*."No::11,.:4.:..,z1,2gfroin.the trigger bistable multivibrator will be in one state inain VPWG .trii,:ge.i%S.:..tlie:00iif. 4 0-hertz (one transistor conducting while the other is countdown circulf;,;..The,:Main 4 0Q-hertz off): if the amplitude is below a specified level, countdown outpirt';.(0)reiggers the pulse it will be in the other state. generator in the clrive.Whieh generates the pulse (E) to trigger the power-SCR's for one side of DC Input Sensing the power stage. The main 400-hertz countdown (D) and the leading. edige of the secOnd positive The DC input sensing circuit functions to half of waveform..C.. (2,fig.7-12A) provide compensate for changes (step changes) in the coincident .gating .for-the. pulse generator in the input DC voltage source. A voltage-sensing driver that geneFate,thepufse (F) to trigger the network composed of resistors and capacitors is commutating :.K,IVSM.,:this side of the power connected to the bus that supplies the DC input stage. to the inverter. Positive and negative step The main 4004140 countdown output (G) changes inthe DC supply voltage produces triggers the .Puise. gdiferator in the driver which positive, arid negative pulse outputs from the generates the:Olse(H) td trigger the power voltage-somsing network. The output pulses are SCR's in tfie'dthef:: half of the power stage. fed to the pulse width modulator circuit in the Waveform d anethe leading edge of the next main and secondary VPWG's Compensate for positive half of waveform C (1 fig. 7-12A) gate the voltage change. . .i the pulse generator in the drive that generates , 131 142 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE tilc MUM, 0 (14) 1 I I 1 I 22V 1600n./ FREO. 1600^u OSC1U.ATOR STANDARD - 22V 800V 800V COUNTDOWN /- POSITIVE I..- TRAILING 1 1- 1 2211 80011) MAIN V.RW.G. (01 EDGE I i 1 22V 4001., N 4001./ COUNTDOWN (01 I 28V 1 4091./ MAIN DR R (TURN ON GATE ) I I - (2) . , I 28V 4001, MAIN D74ER (TURN OFF GATE) . . Ti 22V 4001./ MAIN 400.1.1 COUNTDOWN (1801 8 28V 400'1.s MAIN DRIVER (TURN ON GATE) . INVERTER1 28144001. MAIN DRIVER (TURN OFF GATE) - .... I...- - 22V 8001) MAIN V. P.W.G. (1801 ,.. ), ,- - - -t-250V4001) MAIN, INVERTERsaWAVE OUTPUT I./ illek __ _------I68V400,, MAIN INVERTER SINI;WAVE OUTPUT 4 PHASE 22V8001. PHASE V.P.W.G. , ,a) 25ys 1.75 2.25 1275 .3.25 4.25 4751 t 'HIHit 110 * .5 1.0 1.5 ifIl 2.0 SO 3.5 4A4.5 o 1.25 2.50 175 5.00 .. ; 1 (TO is)) ( Ta) (T3) (T4) 14 . TIME(in..LISEC.)---P _ 0i ''', ". *. :', :' A ", 40..82.1 F igure 7-1 2.Waveforms. 143 132 Chapter 7NO BREAK POWERSUPPLIES AND STATIC INVERTERS the pulse (I) to trigger the commutatingiSCR's delay in time (N) between the main Ai in this half of the power stage.'The leading edge secondary VPWG's to control the phase angle of waveform C controls the duration of theON between the two power stages,. _ time of the power stage. The secondary VPWG is triggered by the The leading edge of the 1800 signal(K) from trailing edge of the iThase control VPWG signal the main VPWG triggers the phasecontrol (waveform N fig. 7-128). The trailing edge of VPWG. The phase control VPWG provides a wave P from the secondaryVPWG triggers the 7 oral SI2.. yiAuFoRtA Ma.°IBM ... (14) (To (TI) (T2) (T3) I t 1 i I I. I 1 i i I 22V 8000A,PHASE VP.W.G. PHASE re 41 1 , 25V 800,1) SECONDARY V.P.W.G. ''' ".1 ® 22V 400,N,SECONDARY 40,0fli COUNTDOWN (0*) 28V. 400'1/ SECONDARY DRIVER (TURN ON GATE) ' 10 . I 28V 4001, SECOND'ARY DRIVER (TURN OFF GATE) CD r -: 1 1J I 22V 400't, SECONDARY 4001., COUNTDOWN(1801 ® , 28V 40011.; SECONDARY DRIVER (TURN ON GATE) ® 1 '0 SECONDARY . I INVERTER SECONDARY DRIVER (TURN OFF GATE) _ 1 28V 400, 0 I , I , /... t 1 , SECONDARY INVERTER SO, WAVE OUTPUT .1 250V 400'L r I . , I .. ,. I68V4001, SECONDARY INVERTER SINE WAV OUTPUT 0r . I i . ) I I I , 125 75 175 2.25i2.I II / I I .5 1 .9 1.5 d,., 0 ... ._ ,.. 2.50,., . 'i.:::, (75) ,(T110:...... VA -; : -, T.011.,1t;1,, ',c4,1',77'",w, . _ 40.82.2, 7-12.WaveformsContinued. 133 4 ELECTRICIAN'S,MATE .1 & C secondary 400-hertz' c&int-down.The out-puts from the secondary 400-hertz phase. Use the y6ltages.sele'etor-SWitCh, and countdown (U meter Mr, to rea.eh the ioltagi: 6f and R) and the leadingedge of the secondary each phase. VPWG output (P) trigger The output voltages ihstbe' adjusted 'in the the pulse generators in following sequenCe:, phase the seconddry driver in CA, phase AB, then , the same manneras just phase BC. described for the maindriver. The sequence of operation for the secondary To secure the inverterturn t e drive sWitch, power stage is the SI same as for the main power , to the OFF position, then jurn. thepOwer stage. circuit breaket CBI to OFF. OPERATING PROCEDURE MAINTENANCE , To operate the static inverter, turn the Alain Maintenance of the static power,:circuit breaker CBI (fig.7-9) to ON. Turn inverter should the drive sevitch, SI, normally be limited tosimple replacement with to the OFF position. The a new or serviceable module. standby light 12 shouldlight. Turn the drive This Will ensure switch, SI, to the START rapid restoratiOn ofthe inverter into service position. The power without risking dangers on light, II, should light, andthe standby light; of handling hightest 12, should go 'Out. voltages. After the output ofthe Complete familiarization inverter has reacheda:steady state operation must be with the theory of (approximateir 2 seconds),turn the drive obtained before switch, Si, to troubleshooting is attempted.Then follow the ths,RUN,,position. Adjust. the step7by-step procedures voltage adju ni.Otentiome,terS,:R785,R786, and_ outlined in the R787, (fig.n,. manufacturer's technicafmanual while using the teqiiiil:;initput for each specified test equipments'. " 4 CHAPTER 8 EtEtTROHYDRAULIC Lb19.13-SENSING SPEED- GOVERNORS%- This chapter will discuss the operation and disativIntage of this Method. The speed signal is maintenance of électrohydraulicload-sensing -applied i's*a frequency sensitive,and,lefirence speed governors. If you do not have athorough circuit in the goVernor control ffieoutput understandingofsolidstatecircuitry, cit!this;circuit is an error signal if therels any components, or.terms review BasicElectronics, deviation from rated Speed. This error signal isv, NAVEDTRA16087(Revised)andEIMB applied to the transigtor arnplifier and adts to . Handbook:ElectronicCircuits,NSN restore rated speed. Stability is obtained by the_ 0967-LP-000-6120: use of electrical feedbadlc cirepits. Electro'hydraupc,!::-:_oad-sensingspeed Load-measuring circuits ,''areusedin the .igovernors have beeni,dey,elt;ied for ship's Service electrghydraulic gArnor to obtain proper load generators inelectricalI;Systtlins which require ratiooneachparalleledgencratot.Most' ,clOser frequency regtiliiiiiffthan that provided governing, systems are sO designed :that any by mechanical tYpe governors. ElectrohYdraulic change ih load produces .%a signal 'which is fed governors have.4been usedsuecessfully on both into the transi#Or aMplifier and..:acts to offset steam-turbine'anddiesel-driven generators. any anticipatd;peed ,changeAue to load bp An ,elettrohYdraulicgovernormay change.T he(41load!:.measuringcircuitson operated as an isochronous governor (constant governors -of, a ll genrators that operatein .".Speed,at all loads) or with speed droop which parallelareconnetted by atiecable. The permits paralleling with other, generators that governor may be designed orpreset,Sthat each have conventional fly-weight governors. paralleled generator will equally sha.rethe total The operation of a typical electrohydraulic load or a load ratio adjustment maY be-provided. load-sensing governing syStern May be generally Any deviationinfproper lbad ratio produces a described as folloWs...The steam Valve or.throttle circulatingcurrent.inthetiecable.This that controls the prime mover fuel supplyis Circulatingeturent 1:aCtsinthe: Httaiiitistor operated by an electrOhydraulic actuator which amplifier circUlt to increase or de'erease'fuel responds to the output Of ainagfietio amPlifier. !Supplied to thelenerator prime m'QsersUitiI -signals are iN into the, prope'r.load ratiKiJSiachieved. ..GenPrator-weed and 16 , . Irinsistof-;amplifier toroduce a poW.Or output The steady. st,ite and transient frequeney sufficienfto.. opera theelectrphYdraulic -requirements .fOrj'Type II power can be met actuator which cOrctly positionsythe steani itb ejectrohydr,Ulic gOvernors of the type just valve or thrOttle. 'de-Scribed. Howi*r, a.ino.tor generator or static . - '4OnVviter wilPtiStill be required for Type III .The speal.Sinal isti.sually provided:TY y21/4-.smalf permanentma,gnet' geneeatót, driven Prom voltage control. . ,;the;. shaft of Ihe prime Mover or 'ship's service The electrohydraulic load-sensing.4,governor erator.Thespeed .Signal issometitbes tise,d in this discussion is.-made tip oifour major' ainedify sensing the Output frequency of the units .(fig. 811)--the Ed,M control box, the load.. :S service generator, but;the kiss of signal in signal box, the EG-R hydraulic:actuator, and the se of short circuit on , the generatorisa -valveoperator. . 1 46 EL CTRIC AN'S MATE 1 &C OPERATION (PMG) and is applied to the t CrMcontrol bti.X.. . The control boxcompares tlis voltage with a Look at the block diagram in figure 8=2.The input signal refaence voltage and,if there is a difference, (voltage)is proportional to the supplies an,output voltage to speedofthepermanent magnet energize the EG-R generator hydraulic .aetuator. A pilot valveplunger in,the ghh EGM CONTROL 'BOX LOAD SIGNAL BOX G-RACTUATOR VALVE OPERATOR ... 111.150X Figure 8-1.Electrohydraulic load-sensinggovernor system components. 2-* 1 36 147- Chapter 8ELECTROHYDRAULICLOAD-SENSING SPEED GOVERNORS REMOTE SERVO EG-R GENERATOR LOAM HYDRAULIC ( VALVE TURBINE ACTUATOR OPERATOR) &OOP RESISTOR SWITCH ' BOX CIRCUIT.BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACT 0IP-PARALLELINGLI NE TO OTHER UNITS LOAD SIGNAL EG-M CONTROL BOX BOX .11 4, SPEED SETTING OOTENTIOMETER 'Is r ' Figure 8-2.Electrohydraulic load-sensing govemoi system, block diagram. actuator directs oil, to or from a remote servo in valve operator via tubing cdnnections. The signal the valve operatOr. The valve operator moves the is controlled by controlling the flow of oil to mgchanism to increase or decrease the steam, and from the .,EG remote servo piston in the which returns the turbine speed to normal. valve operator (discussed later). The load signal box detects change§ in' load The actuator receives its electric control before they, appear as speed changes and applies signalsfromthecontrol box asexplained a proportional voltage to the control box. It previdusly. The 'actuator has no self-contained detects these changes through the resisto? box; oil Sump and rebeiyes operating oil from the oil which develops a voltage from the secondary of system for the turbine control.. thecurrent-transformers.Thisvoltageis When starting the turbine,,you must control - comparedwiththegeneratorloadoutput the turbinetiieed manually by using a trip voltage -and, if a difference exists, the load signal throttle valve (located at the turbine) until an box applies apropOrtional voltage to the control input signal and power become attailable to tV., box. control box: You must manually operate tlie The drpop switch allows parallel operation trip throttle, valve because the actuator doesnot with governors Of types other than EG. The use a centrifugal flywheel head assembly. circuit breaker auxiliary contact provides a path If the control Signalis loSt, or if ,a fault5; for control load sieials to other paralleled units. control box sends a continuous increase ;peed signal, the actuator closes the steam valve to EG-R HYDRAULIC ACTUATOR shut -down the steam supply .which trips the turbin.e off the line. The EG-R hydraulicactuator(fig.8-3) Since the .hydraulic actuator d6es not have a provides the hydraulic, control signal for thE me Ch a'n i cal speedsensingflywheelhead . 137 1.48 ELECTRiCIAN'S "MATEl',& C ARMATURE MAGNET CENTERING SPRINO TO EG-M CONT,Ii0L BUFFER SPRING (2) , BOX . :BUFF R PISTON TWO-COIL SOLENOID NEEDLE LVE PIEDT VALVE PLUNGER dOMPENSATION LAND TO PORT CI PILOT VALVE BUSHING D. (FIG.8-4) a (ROTATING) TO PORT A CONTROL A PQRT (FIG. 8-4) CONTROL LAND . 4 BY PAIS i.UMP GEAR HOLE SUMP , Awz TO PORT. E (FIG 8-4) OIL PUMP RELJEF VALVE PLUNGER' 1111 PUMP GEARS N.V.° 'RELIEF VALVE SpRING Z7ZA --a, I A - Figure 8-3.:EG-R hydraulic-actuator,mechanical diagiarri. assembly, its drive shaft doesnot have to be Pressure oil from the4pump issupplied' to the driven directly by the tUrbine. Thedrive shaft is buffer piston, which constantly rotated by a shaft from thegear only to turn the applies pressure oil to the top side of theEG,remote servo piston actuator pump gears (fig. 8-3) andto provide (fig. 84) through slot 'relativerotationbetweenthe A. Pump .pressure ,is nonrotating applied to the underneath sideof the EG remote pilot-valve plunger and its rotatingbushing. The servo piston through slot E and the drive shaft is an integral part.ofthe pilot valve pilbt valve plunger. The pressure' in thishydraulic circuit bushing. The oilpump of the adtuator is tendi" always to ove the EG remote servo, designed for drive shaft rotationin one direction piston down in the decrease only, and the relief valvemaintains the operating eam direction. oil pressure. However, the EG remoteservpiston cannot Oil &Om the external 'supply move down unless the oil.trapd between the enters through underneath side of it and thepilot valve plunger port B-to. the oil pump. Thepump gears first fill can escape to sump. the oil passages and thenincrease the hydraulic" pressure. When the pressure overcomes the force The pilot valve plunger (fig. of the .relief valve spring,the relief valve plunger 8-3) controlsthe flow of oil to and from thebottom side of the is pushed down, touncover the bypass hole; EG remote servo, piston thus, recirculating oil through the in the valve operator. pump. .The pilotvalve. plunger .is connectedto an 138 1,4 9 Chapter 8 ELECTROHVbRAULIC LOAD-SENSNG SPEED,GOVERNIORS INCREASE TO !TEAM 411 VALVE .ADJUSTI,INIG SCREW ri 7, A MAP 74 if. OW ! zezrz.7 FLIAt if arA FLOATING LEVER 04 0 ..0 EG REMOTE G - SERV PISTON PILOT VALVE .7100 ,PLuNGER r sp,049,. pe ,ff4rA, Algra " AL I 11 ROOVES fi Apr CUT OUT" VALVE4' EG REMOTE ploirmo,jpi S RVO PISTON417r E INCREASE 14$ ' ADJUST,ING SCREw 0 tr. FA 'FL AN% /AM 111 .153 ..."" Figure 8-4.Valve operator, mechanical diagram. %- armature magnet which is spring-suspended in . covers (he control por in the pilot valvebushing the field of -atwd-coilk solenoid. The output (as shown in fig, 8-3) signal from She EG-M control box is applied to With the pilot valve plunger centered, no oil th'esolenoid coils^ to produce a force floWS to or from the EG reMote servo piston:If (proportional to the current in the coil) which the pilot valve plunger is raised,due tO a decrease moves the armature magnet andpilot valve in load,.the oil trapped on..the. bottegn side of 4. plunger pp or doivn. The pilot valve plunger is the piston is free to escape to sump. . raised aS 'aresult of a decrease ,in kiad or a decrease in the Speed setting of the control box. Stabilityof a ,,systemcontrolled by the It is lowered as a result of an increase in either electric goVentor section is enhanced by the use the load or the control box speed setting., When of a temporary negative feedback signal which the .electric Control signal fades to its .onspeed biases the speed and load 'signal to the actuator voltage value, the centering springs retufn the pilotvalve plunger. The temporary feedback armature magnet and pilot valve plunger to thcir` signal isin the form of. a pressure differential steady-state, centered positions. The pilot valye applied across the compensating land of the plunger. is centered when its control land exactly pilot valve plunger. The pressure differential is a 139 < -, P q 0. , , ELECTRICIAN'S MATE I & C derived:from the buffer system, and is allowed displaced on the left side of the bufferpiston to f4ikawayias the turbine returns to speed. moves the piston to the right, thus causinga Mbvement of the buffer piston to the left pressure differential on the upper and lower partiaqreliei:44thecompressionofthe sides of the compensation land rigIft-hand so that the Pilot barer. springandincreasesthe valve_ plunger is recentered beforeturbine speed comvreSsion of aIileft-hand buffer spring. The returns to normal. This pressure differential forcn* the left-hand buffersPring,tending to dissipates through the needle valve orifice, resist this- motretnent, results in at the ° a slightly higher samerafeatwhich the electricalsignal, is oil pressure on the right side of the bufferpiston reduced, to its onspeed voltage valueas the than on the left side. The pressuieon the left turbine speed returns to normal." side of the buffer. piston is transmitted to% the Surrounding the EG remoteservo piston and underside ofthefl compensation land of the its pist-t HI(fig. 8-4) are grooves connected actuator pilot varve plunger, while the pressure to (1,, pump limit pressure through _port C. on the right side of the buffer piston is fedto Th, the upperside of the compensation ,2s have nothing to do with land. The ope- zeactuator. They are used to difference in. pressures on the two sides offhe assure ,ny leakage of pressure oil from the compensation land, PrOduces a force which acts serVo comes from a pareof the hydrauliccircuit to push the. pilot valve plunger backto its where it will do no harm. centered position. When the EG remote servo piston hasbeen moved far enough to satisfy thenew steam VALVE OPERATOR 1 requirement,theforceofthepressure differential on the actuator pilot valveplunger The valve operator'..d pdifies thehydraulic, will have recentered the actuatorpilot valve signals from the hydrati1C--4:tuatorto provide plunger, even though turbine speed isnot yet the high power that is neededto operate the completely back to normal. The EGremote turbine steam valve. servo piston movement is thereby stoppedas the Pressure oil from one side Of theactuator control 'box signal returns to its onspeedvoltage buffer system is applied constantlythrough port value. At the same time, thepressure differential A (fig. 8-4).to the upper side of theEG remote on the two sides of the buffer piston (andon the servo piston. The actuator pilot valve plunger upper, and lower sides of the compensating land) (rig. 8-3) controls the oil flowthrough port E to is being dissipated by flow of oilthrough the and from the area under theEG remote se'rvo needle valve Orifice. As this oCcurs, thebuffer piston. Pressure oil from thegovernor piimp is springs return the buffer piston to itsnormal sent through port C to sealgrooves around the (central)position.. The decreaseinelectrical EG remote servo piston and pistonstem. Port]) Signal to its onspeed value and thedissipation of is for draining lealsage oil tosump. Whenoil differential pressure on the two sidesof the fromthehydraulicactuator . compensaiion landoccur at the same rate, and (thro.ugh port .E) forces the EGremote servo the pilot valve remains centered untilthe turbine piston upward, the .pilot valve plungeris lifted, isagainatthe' onspeed conditionatthe allowing the pressure oil supplyto flow through decreased load. port F to the top side of the operatingpiston. Thus the operating pistbn is forced When the turbine load increases downward in and the the increase steam direction.As the operating turbine speed decreases, the pilot valve plunger piston moves downward, the pilotvalve plunger is lowered, and pressure oil flow§to the bcittom is lowered to side of the EG Tremote piston. its centered (null) position(as Because the area shown in figure 8-4). This actionshuts off the on the bottom side of the piston against which pressure oil flow to ,the top of the operating the oil pressure acts is greater than the area on pistod and stops the movement ofthe operating the upper side of the piston againstwhich the oil piston. pressure acts,- the net force moves the piston If the EG-R hydraulic aetuatorpilot valve , upward in the increase steam direction. The oil plunger (fig. 8-4) is raised,any oil under the EG 140 %Gs, 151 Chapte'r 8 ELEtTROHYDRAU L IC LOAD-SEN.SING SPEED GOVERNORS remote servo piston drains out through port E. suply Oil' pressure through port F will' rise. Then, the pressure oil above the EG remote When the supply oil pressure 'is sufficient o s :.servo piston pushes the.piston downward. At the overcome thepressure.of thq cutoff valVe sarne time, the pilot valve plunger lowers and the: thecutoff valyeplunger willrise,enabling area, abovethe operatingvalve drains oat n8rmal operatiOt) of the valve operator. :through Port, t. The -spring force and oihupply The adjusting screws at the to; and bottom' pressure on theuhderside of the operating oftfieEG rernOte* servo pitonlimitthe piston forces the' Piston upwarcrin ttle decrease directionof pistontraVel and, through the steam direction. As the operating piston moves. floating lever, limit thf oiTeratiug piston stroke. upward, the pilot xtalve plunger moves up with it.-.The top scre7 sets the maximum valve limit and until thd, .plunger reaches its'shull position ...Ind the- bonom 'screw sets the shutoff poSition of the operating piston movement ceases'.'" thioperating piston5"' The cutout valVe (fig. 8-4) minirazeS- the amtunt 61 manut1 pumping required to obtAn Ed-M CONT1OLbX ..enough oil to open theaiteaM ValVe to start the turbine. As the siippIT oil dissipates thrOtigh port E with the-unit shut down, the spring atop,, 'The ccintról ttox is des.igned to provide the the cittourvalve pushes the plunger down to control signal to the electrohydraulic,traiisducer oPen the'area under the operating Piston to in the .hydraplic actuator.' drain 'thapvgh port. G. The cutoff valve- will . As shavn in the block diarain of figure 8-5, lower ufitil it closcskoff the supply .oil path fro.m the cdntrol box, hasahree ii puts. One is from the underside of the operating piston to Port F. the load, signal box ancl will .be discuSsed , The other two are &OM the PMG and the speed During' turbine startup, the starting oilis setting (reference) pOtertiometer: 4irec1ed through Port B to the uAderside of the Theinput from the PMG is applied tO:the -pilotNalve plunger, -causingitT torise. The speed section where itis converted into a d.c. maturatITpumped supply oil pressure (through voltage proportional 'to the speed or the turbine. port F)is Considerably less tpari: the normal The ,reference"voltage,(speedcontrol) is tuppfy oil and will flow to the uppef side of the established by the speed'setting potentiometer operating piston,' forcing it down (this will also but is.developed internally oPen the steam valve). The operating piston The outputs of the 'speed section and-the needs only to overcome .the force of the spring. speed reference section are compared and, if under it plus 'any unbalance forces Of the-steam equal and of opposite polarity, no signalis valve. As the turbine begins to operate, the applied to the amplifier .section. If the speed.of LOAD EG-R SIGNAL BOX YDRAULIC . IN -ACTUATOR REFERENCE IN 111.154 . Figure 8-5.EG-M control bbx, block diagram. 441 ELECTRICIAN'S -MATE 1 & C POSITIVE a-REFERENCE SUMMING POINT 0.0 0 . SPEED SETTING 0 FDTEN- tiomETER REFERENCE) F' R3 COMMON 0 REFERENCE P1 111.155 Figure 8-6..-41471control box, simplified schematic. the turbine cbanges, there isa corresponding actuator coilinthe direction to move the change in the signal from the PMG. This causes a actuator pilot valve plunger in the increasesteam change in the output of the speed section andan direction. This steam increasecauses the turbine error voltage- is applied to the amplifier section, to increase speed. The negative speed, which isamplified and sent to the hydraulic signal increase counteracts the previous positivespeed actuator. Some output is fed back through the signal increase and anew steady state condition stabilizersection to keep .the system from of essentially zero voltage is reachedboth at the overreacting.. surriming point and the actuator. . The schematic representation .of the control To further explain the function of box (fig. 8-6) is a simplification of the the actual amplifier and its stabilizing feedbacknetwork, amplifierand is usefulin describingits refer to the voltage wave forms of figure8-7 as operation. well as the schematic of figure 8-6. Ifthespeedsettingpotentiometer adjusted to increase speed, itcauses a voltage Assume that. a 'step input voltage -signal signal change at the base of transistor is Q1 in the applied to the summing point of the amplifieras positive direction. This increases the conduction shown on curve 1 of (fig. 8-7). If the feedback transistor QI,causingincreased .current circuit is disconnected at point I (fig. 8-6),the through resistor RI anda drop in potential at dutput voltageforthiscondition (without point A (base of transistor Q4). The effecton feedback and stabilization) wibe very high as transistor Q4 is to cause an increase incurrent shown ip curve 2 (fig.- d will cause the. through resistor R5. The increased' voltage di.op turbine to hunt excessively. The gain(output across resistor R5 raises the potential at pointB. voltage divided by input voltage) is Very high An increase in potential at point B in (base of thiscondition.Assumethatthefeedback transistors Q5 and Q6) causes Q5to conduct network -isreconnected at point I, and the more and Q6 to conduct less which increases the stabilizing network is disconnected potential at point C (base of transistors at point J. In Q7 and this case the output signal from pointD is fed Q8). This increase causes Q7to conduct more through the stability potentiometer and Q8 to conduct less which to the base increases the of transistor Q2 (Point E) andreduces the potential at point D. An increase inpotential at amplifier gain. Inresponse to the step input of point D causes current to flowthrough the curve1, an output voltage for this condition 1421 153 - Chapter' 8ELECTROHYDRAULIC LOAD-SENSING SPEED GOVERNORS amount of voltage drop otherwise experienced STEP INPUT VOLTAGE SIGNAL . CURVE 1 at point A. In turn, the amount of conductance of transistor Q4 is reduced. Consequently, there is less voltage.change at point B. Adjustment of P1 increases the potential at point E and further re-ducestheamplifiergain.Transistor Q2 conducts a greater amount thereby reducing the potential at point G because of a greater voltage drop across resistor R2. The potential at G OUTPUT VOLTAGE OF AMPLIFIER WITHOUT FEEDBACK AND WITHOUT (applied to the base of transistor Q3) causes Q3 STABILIZATION to conduct more with a greater voltage drop acroSsresistor R4. Consequently, the lOwer CURVE 2 potential at point H (the emitter of transistor Q4) causes it to conduct less, resulting in less increaseinpotentialatpoint B, r a gain Keduct ion. The stabilization signal is obtained through theuse of acapacitor. With capacitor Cl OUTPUT VOLTAGE OF AMPLIFIER disconnected at point J. (fig. 8-6), the negative' WITH FEEDBACK BUT WITHOUT feedback effect reduces the gain (curve 2, fig. .STABILIZATION 8-7). When the circuit is reconnected at point J, CURVE 3' the capacitor tempOrarily diverts some of the feedback signal away from point E ,during the charging period of the capacitor. In response to the, input voltage of curve 1 e*. (fig.8-7),theinitial output voltage of the OUTPUT,VOLTAGE OF THE amplifier goes to a high level (curve 4) at the, 4' NORMAL AMPLIFIER WITH BOTH firstinstantthesignalisapplied andthe, FEEDBACK AND STABILIZATION feedbacksignalisvaried. As the capacitiaTii CURVE 4 charges, the voltage comes down on the curved portionofthe lineand . levelsoffat TIME approximately the same level.as curve 3 when a steady state condition is reached. The shape of 111,156 curve 4 is determined by an. RC time constant Figure 8-7.Voltage relationships. and R is adjustablebythestability potentiometer. The normal response of the amplifier to ail open loop test (fig. 8-7) produces (feedback connected but without stabilization) an output voltage waveform characteristic of is obtained (curve3; fig. 8-7). . curve 4 in response to the input voltage of curve Thegain is reducedinthefollowing Sequence.Earlier., we statedthat the output voltage at .point D and at the actuator increases in response to an increasedpotential atthe *LOAD SIGNAL BOX summing point of the amplifier. The increase in potential is applied to the base of transistor Q2, The load signal box enableS the governor causing Q2toconductagreater amount, system 'to respond to generator load chanizes therebyincreasingthevoltage drop across well asto speed changes. Load changes are resistorR3. The potential .atpoint' F (the, detected and responded to before they appear as emitter of input transistor Q1), is raised. causing turbinespeedchanges,thereby,minimizing Qltoconductless,therebyreducingthe change transients. 143 154 4 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE I & C The load signal box (fig. 8-8) convertsa output will appear. gut if they three-phase input signal (from the are out of phase generator (the load is changin'g), a voltage inproportion to 1ea(4 through the resistor box) to a,d.c.voltage the generatorload will be rectified which is proportional to the KW load. by CR1 and on, the CR2. (Although only one phaseis shown in generator. The voltage is applied to 'the lOad figure8-9, each phase pulse section and the paralleling network is compared anel the used comparison circuitry is identicalto that shown.) with single generator or...paralleled with.other The amplitude of the signal similar EG governors. When operated can be varied by with the GAIN 4DJ. potentiometer.A variable pulse dissimilar governors, the droop and .loadpulse output is developed by the charge/discharge sections are used. The droop switch determines time' of Cl through the LOADPULSE ADJ. operating mode for which the system isset up. potentiometer. The load pulse signal is initially Single Generatoi.Operation maximum and gradually decreasesto zero. Figure 8-10 represents load pulse signals in Look at the simplified schematic of response to load the load changes. The signal is of theproper polarity to signal box in figure 8-9. Input signalsfor the set the' steam valve in the right load signal box are taken from the direction to secondary of compens4e for the. change. Theoutput signal is thegpnera t orcurrenttransforrhersand applied rothe summing point in theEG-M developed in the resistor box. Theresistor box control box (fig. 8-6). contains three resistors (one foreach phase). The voltage input is appliedto transformer T2 Parallel Operation with and conipared to thegenerator voltage 'phase Other EG Governor Systems (which is taken from thegenerator line, stepped down, and applied to transformerT1'). If both When the load signal box is voltages ,are in phaSe, they will used with other cancel and no EG gOvernor systems, theoperation is the same TO EG-M CONTROL BOX LOA6 PULSE SECTION LOAD INPuT--al SECTION DalapP SECTION 01 DROOPSwITCH PARALLELING NETwORK r ..;:k TO PARALLELr GENERATOR LINES Figure 8-8.Load signal box. bloc,: diagram. 144 153 A. Chapter 8ELECTROHYDRAULIC LOAD-StikINGSPEED' GkERNORS. . I PHASE OF GENERATOR OUTPUT I OROOP I I SWITCH I CRI R5 I TO PARALLEL GENERATOR LINES GAIN A0J, TO CONTROL BOX 1 (FIG. 8-G) OROOP A0J. STEPOOWN TRANSFORMER NOTE I RESISTOR I NOTE I: CONTINUES TO CIRCUITS BOX FOR OTHER PHASES I I NOTE I NOTE ? NOTE I NOTE 2; CONTINUeS ACROSS ALL 3 PHASE .6 CuRRENT TRANSFORMER SECONDARY I I II I I I LOAD 111.158 Figure 8-9.Load signal box, simplified schematic. Parallel Operation with Dissimilar Type Governor Systems TIME Fdr operation with dissimilar type governor systems. the droop switeh must be turned on (dOwn poSition in fig. 8-9). This shorts out the parallelinglines so that the parallel units are effectively!indt connected to the load signal box. TIME Yhe signal to the control box is fed via the DROOP ADJ. potentiometer. This adjustment compensates for differences in generator ratings 111.159 'and the reactive load carried by, them. . Figure 8-10.Comparison of load pulse signals to load changes. MAINTENANCE 0S. for single operation (fig. 8-9) except for a GoVernorfaultsareusuallyrevealedin .clOs,ed circuit bteaker (not shown). The closed turbine speed variations. However, a check .of circuit breaker connects the paralleling lines to the' systemisnecessary since not all speed enable 4he load signal box to proviae the Same variations are caused' by a faulty governor. sinal i nformation to the control box of all the Check first to determine that the chanees are parallel units. not a transient result of load changes: If the load I 45 1 ELECTIOCIAN'S MATE 1 & C is constant, hold zAn. inspection ,to see .that the- The convertersection is working properly if o pera tinglinkagebetweenthehydeaulic (afterremovingtheamplifiersection)the actuator and the turbine is free from binding or voltage at the collector of Q2 (fig. 8-6) is correct lost motions. If the linkage is proper, check.the (6 Vac at rated speed). If thisA orrect, place voltage regulator for proper operation. If these the, ainPlifier back in the circu4:.:The.oltage .ebeeks do not reveal the cause of the speed acri$s 'the resistive load shdüld, be about 2e'ro variation, the governoris prob,ably fatilty. volts. If pot, the amplifier section'js:faulty:! In troubleshooting the governor system, first checkthevoltageacross ..theinput 'tothe If the trouble is a change in Unit.steadY State' hydraulic actuator with the systein runningon speed as the load is changed, cheek,the, voltage 'speed and set for single operation. If the voltage across the actuator input Under difterentload is not correct (+0.5 Vdc to 70.5 Vdc) and 'cannot cbnditions. If the Voltage is the same ai both be set within range by the centering screw in the loads, the c.ontrol box maY be,defective.-if ihe actuator, or if ,the voltage fluctuates more than voltages difkr,At by more_ than: 0:2 Vdc,, the A:0.25 Vde and cannot be stilled by the GAIN actuatOr iS probibly faulty. , AD.I. or the STAB. ADJ.., 'the control boxmay TR; --:so44-Cesof 'most 'troubles.in, the be defective. hydr:titc'''actuatoror valve:operator idirty oil.- To bench test the control box, disconnect it Grit 'and other' impurities in'ay.".be:in'tioduced from .the load signal box, use a 3-phasepower into the system with the Oil or'inay: form when supply instead of the-nornIal supply, instead of the 611 begins to break,'down'. Cokidize) or the speed signal apply a frequency oscillator become sludge. The moving parts within the output signal set to the rated speed frequency of actuator andvalve° operator arecbntinually the PMG (fig.. 8-6), and usea.resistiye load lubricated by the oil wi,thin the units. Thus, grit instead of the actuator. If an oscillator is not and other impurities can cause excesSive:wear of available.you. can manuallycontrolthe valves, pistons, and plungerS.; and can cause these turbine-generator set to provide the PMG signal. parts to Stick or freeze jri their bores: 1. 157 146 CHAPTER 9 ENGINEERING 'CASUALTY CONTROL The operating efficiency of a ship dePends efficiency. Casualty control can be divided into largelyontheabilityoftheEngineering' three phases: prevention,correction,and Department to continue its services both during restoration. normal operations and during casualty to any part of the ship. Engineering casualty control is cbncerned with ,the prevention, minimizafion,- CASUALTY PREVENTION and correction of the effects of operational and battle casualties as outlined in chapter 9882 of -Casualty preventionisthe most effective Nav Ships Technical Manual. phase .of 'casualtycontrol.Itconcerns the In this chapter we shall disCuss the broad quality. of-preventive maintenance on machinery as pe ct so fengineeringcasualtY:control, and systems as an effort toward counteracting including casualties to the machinery; electrical,- the eftectsof operational and battle casualties.. "and piping installations aboard ship. The text Properpreventivemaintenancewillgreatly and illustrations are based on DE1445/692/710 reduce the occurreve of casualties caused by class destroyers. Refer to the Casualty Control material failures. Continuous detailed inspection Manual prepared by tile, typc commander for protedures are necesSary not only to disclose , details concerning engineering casualty 'control partially damaged Parts that may fail at a critical instructions for your class ship. time, ut alsoto eliminate the underlying ondistions, including maladjustment, imprope'r Althoughan Mate is Electrici4i's not lubOcation,andcorrosion,whichare responsible for machinery other than that,driven detrimentaltomachineryandcauseearly by electric power, you should have a general failure. knowledge of the main propulsion and auxiliary plantstohelpyouacquire abetter t understanding of the overall system. CASUALTY 'CORRECTION , Casualty correction concerns the correction MISSION OF CASUALTY CONTROL' of the effects of operational and battle damage to minimize the eftect on the mobility and The_ missionofcasualtycdntrolisto offensive and defensive power of the ship. This maintainall .engineering services in a state of phase consists of the action taken at the time of '.;rnaximunr retliability.f.in derallconditions of the casualty to prevent future damage to the ;:9peration. Failure to provide all normal services affected unit and to prevent the casualty from will decreaSe.t4e ship's effectiveness ast fighting spreading through secondary etfects. unit, either dirctly by reducing its Mobility or The speed with which corrective action is ',....its. Offensive, ancf daensive power (including the applied to an engineering ca,sualty is often of abilify to contrOl fire, flooding, and hull or paramountimportance. Theextent of the arrnaMent damage.' or indirectly by reducing damage must be thoroughly investigatea and 'habitability ai0-11-4Us, personnel morale and the° engineer officer. To maintain 147 58 ELECTRICIAN'SMATEI &C, maximum available, speed andservices,the stearikto .the starboard lines, and boilers 2 and 4 engineer officer 'must be informed at all times of suppf, auxiliary steam to Ihe port find'. This the condition of his plant condition ol readiness must be used at general Thecommandingofficerhas the; quarters. On ships having both electric and responsibility of. deciding whether tcontinue steam pumps, the steam pumps should be used: operationofequipmentundercasualty with the electric pumps lined bp:in 'standby conditions with the possible risk of permanejg, cohdition. - damage. Such action can be justified -a-4 the risk' of even greater damage or loss of the CONDITION 2 utilizes two boilers with the ship may be incurred by immediatelY securing main plant split. The remaining two boilers: the affectdd unit. should be boosted to assure readiness within 1 hour. This condition of readiness shOuldte used CASUALTY RESTORATION in a war zone when altatk is probable. , . Casualty ,restoration concerns making, the 'CONDITION 3 utilizes two boilers with the necessaryrepairstOcompletelyrestore .the remainingboilers secured b.ut completely installation to its original condition. operational within 2 hours. The mai'plant can If' damage to equipment cannot be repaired be split: or cross-connected to co orm with by the repair, facilities of the forces afloat, the security requirements. However, the main plant. ship will probably be- sent to a naval-shipyard should, besplitwider war .conditions, when before returning to service.Inthis 'case, the entering or,leaving port, or when steaming in salvage efforts :.of the crew must ensure that no restricted waters and in heavy weather. additional deterioration of equipment will occur bet-wen the time of- beginning operations after CONDITION 4tutilizes boiler and turbine the casualty and arrival at the yard. combinations., for thebesf4. fuel economy to :conform with operational requirements. The. r(Yinaining boilers should be available within 8 ENGINEERING CONDITIONS hours. OF READINESS The main and auxiliary steam systems are : The purpose of engineering conditions of shown in figures 9.-1 and .9-2. readinessis to establish, standards of .material readiness in the engineering department for the AUXILIARY MACHINERY various conditions of operation of the 'main propulsion units and auxiliary machinery. The Thereadiness required engineering, conditions of readiness are of auxiliary machinery is doterminedbytherequiremenpofthe conditions I through 4. turbogenerators, diesel generators, refrigeration plant, and the main drain system for the various MAIN PROPULSION UNITS conditions of readiness. The classification of valves and fittings in the auxiliary systems for The factorsthat determine the readiness setting material conditions is contained in the condition of the main plant are the number of Damage Control Book. boilers in use and the standby condition of the Both, TURBOGENERATORS shouldge remaining boilers, and whether'the main plant is used with theelectricalloadsplit when in splitor cross-connected. The four readiness condition 1 orcondition2,andunder conditiOns ase sillefined in terms Of these factors circumstances when split plant i,s, required in for DD692 class destroyers: conditi6n 3.Incondition I both Fp IS t urboge neratorsshouldexhaust totheir -CONDITION 1utilizes fbur boilers with the auxilry condensers. When both generators are main plant sklit. Boilers 1 and 3 supply auxiliary inus+duringgeneralquartersandbattle , 148 159 . -A " Wet', 9UNGINEERING CiiiSUALTY CONTROL U. CC U. 0 < : - .- 0 0 ..TeiocNGINERodu AFTER F1REROOM FORWARD ENCINEROOM FORWARDFIREROL . d e' T$... 6. Ts:',4 TS14 TS.10 TS-3 MS-20 AIS-16 HIP'S SERVICE TS-12 GENERATOR TS-2 MS-2 ?AHEAD AkEAD t-ASTERN Licil I 32 SHIP'S SERVICE TS5 GENERATOR ms.s.V TS-I MS-17 MS-9 MS-3 TS-7 TS-11 a l man 1. . ii TS-9 ' . 6 CLOSED DURINGSPLIT PLANT OPERATION . %igure 9-1.Main steam systeth. 111.55 \ / NOT oN DD692 SHORT HULL\\ // ON 445 CLASS ONLT ri NOT ON 445 CLASS/ 44 AFTER ENG1NEROOM a AS-116 AFTER FIREROOM FORWARD ENGINEROom 4.74. ID 41.... FORWARD FIREROOM AS 116' AS-80 I" S-*2 AS-90 A5.64 AS-54 0 AS511 0 0 AS-62 AS-52 0 AS-17 AS-87 AS-57 e A3,159 AS-135 1.,:>-"- A 5-79 A5-57 CLOSED DURING SPLIT PLANT OPERATION 'Figure 9-2.Auxiliary steam system. 11156 S. ELECTRICIAN'S MATE 1 & C condiiions, the electrical load should be split by valves to the refrigeration condensers should be opening the a.c. and d.c. bus-tie circuit breakers classified, red circle Z. on both the forward and after ship's service The MAIN DRAIN SYSTEM for condition L switchboards. consists of lining up fire and bilge pumps 1 and 'The .DIESEL GENERATORS should be set 3 ( forward and after firerooms) to discharge to up forfull automatic operation at all tiMes the firemains (fig. 9-3). except when receiving shore power. The fully Fire and bilge pumps 2 'and 4 (fdrward. and automatic operational condition of the diesel after engmerooms) are turning over slowly on generators should be maintained during nuclear., sea suction and dischazging to the. sea: In this biological,orchemiealoperations.Positive condititth the pumps can tie placed rapidly On ventilationmilst 4e assuredtothediesel the firemain or bilge suctions. generatorroomsduringtheseoperations. The bilge suction valves. in each space should Blowers should be turned off, but vent ducts can be left open at all times, especially for condition remain open to prevent.suffoOtion of petsbnnel 1.Bulkhead cutout valves, Should be closed, when,the dieserengine starts. Personnel in these except:when pumping on.an 'adjacent space. spades arerequired to %nor 'gasnt.asks- and prqtective clothing. CA'SUALTY CONTROL ORGANIZATION The REFRIGERATION PLAINT' should be securedfor, condition 1 and reenergizedas The speed with whieh, corrective action is necessary to preserve food. Salt water supply applied io an engineering casualty depends on 4 ' 04P FP 1-98 u2 FIRE a.' PUMP ^ FP 2-170 ... I I S-131 2 181 FP 1r t 5-137 .44 i Fp' I-1". w NOT ,ON 44S CLASS CLOSED DURING SPLIT PLANT OPERATION 111.57 Figure 9-3.;FireMain system. 1 50 161' ) Chaiiter 9ENGINEERINGCASUALTY CONTROL . . effective personnel organi and. congtant easily,seluyed and understood. When practicable, training. One -thrnand should initiate a whole casualty re. It .is6.much more effective within the WATCH TEAMS. teant aotd between teams,to pass the command, "cross-connect theplant,"- or '`.*oss-conn1 Thebasicorganizationfor .engineering main. feed _port si4cle," than -"open valves- main casualty 'control isthe watch team in each steam 15, main steam 8, auxiliary steam 74 machinery space. Three watches are required for 80, auxiliary 44,.and so on." each 6f the steaming spaces. -If the command from main engine contiol is The watch teams should be .thorotighly croA-connect main- feed starboard sia..e1,".the. orsanized with each man assigned his duties for 11"petty - officers in 'charge of No:1 aneNo. 2 watch stimding, including Intl casualty control, fireroOms will repeat."crOss-connect ni.4in feed procedure, fire, flooding, aniksefting of material starboard Side.7 The men already assigned 'this conditions. The petty officer in charge of each procedurewill, open, y.alv.es, and MF-37 .team should maintain complete Control to avoid (fig. 9-4), with...no fyrther eoarnand. Themen confusion, which could disrupt-the organization should report' back Athen a job is done 'because Sand -coordination of his seam. *. theengineer otifieer often. has to wait for a Dissemination of infortnation to all.stations report before giv* other command. The use is extremely important in effectively controlling Ofgoodtalkerpredureandstandard * engineering casualties.Itisessential that the phraseology will show immediate results. engineer, officer receive brief, clear, and concise informationfromallstationstoproperly adminiStertheoperation of the engineering CASUALTY CONTROL BOARD plant and to promptly order corrective measures for the control of casualties'. The casualtycontrol board(fig.9-5)is essential The sound-powered telephone (circuit 21V) to :effettive castialty control during battle condition's. It furnishes a complete picture istheprincipalmeansoftransmitting of the engineering casualty information efficientlY. The machinery a'vailabletothe engineer telephone Stalker has an important job. He is the officer at general quarters and watch personnel. during condition watches... key ,to good communications. If a message is not For optimum results, relayed promptly and correctly, itmay plade the a casnity control ship in danger,' In battle, the safety of the ship board should be ,installed at the main en4Irte, and the crelAr depends on how wetl the talker. control, the after enginerooTh, and at the Maiflc. uses his voice and equipment. The importance of propulsion repair party station. The 2.1V talkers officers ind petty officers being proficient in atthesestations should . be responsiblefor using proper engineering te.rins and phraseology Maintaining the ..boards. The status of machinery is Mdicated by marking .the affected 'unit witha cannot beoverstressed. It is notthe grease responsibility of,thetalkertodecipher, pencil on the plexiglass front of the translate:, or rephrase improperly transrnitted casualty control board.. 'orders: This is the responsibility of the., person issuing the order or originating the message. RI PROPULSION REPAIR PARTY the duty of the talker to relay the messageas given. Theengineering 4 casualtycontrol organizatiop also includes the propulsion repair Casualty Control Phraseology party,whichisintegratedintorepair 5 (propulsionrepairstation).Thepersonnel Standardphraseologygreatly enhances assigned should be specialists in main propulsion . communicationsbofliwithinandbetween. operation and repair as well as highly skilled in teams. It minimizes confusion by reducing the. the, overall 'field of damage and casualty control. amount of conversation so that transmissions are Repair 5shouldlieorganizedto facilit* 151 162 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE 1 & C. AFTER ENGINER. OM AFTER FIREROOIA FORNARD.ENGINEROOM . ..FORARD FIREROOM 2IX *4 MF-2 s j ArI'b MP34 z1 EMERGENCY FE Eb PUMP AF-34 -MF30 MF43 CLOSt 0 DURINOSPLIT PLANT OPERATION 111.58 . F:igure 9-4.:--Main feed system. cmmediate sect.ning ofany or all Prdpulsion The relationship between repair 5 and other spaces; to effecl ,repairs to any steam piping_or repair parties appears_ in Military Requiretn,ents equipment; to station an underway watch and fgr Petty Officers* 3 & 2, NAVEDTRA 10056-C. relievethegenerall,quartersteaminany ElectricalOfficerisinchargeofthe propulsion space; and,to evaluate and Control propulsion repair station. He is the ;valuator, any casualtY or damake in that section of the coordinator;andthereliefforthe ship for which it (repair 5) is responsible. officer-in-charge'of main propulsiQn. . Personnel assignedto repair5 aboard a Machinery Repair (MMC) isin charge of . destroyer with afullpersonnel complement secaing, engineroom spaces and in effecting consistof anElectricalOfficer (normally a efigineroom and auxiliary repairs. He is the relief 'junior officer);I MMC and P MM2 (Machinery for the CPO .of the 'watch. The MM2 assists in R9pair); 1 BTC and1 BT of any 'pay, grade securing engineroom spaces. an FI. in effecting (Boiler Repair); 1 MM or MR of any pay grade engineroom and aixiliary repairs. He is the relief. (AuRiliary Repair);1 EMC or EMI (Electrical for the engineroom lower-level watch: r Repair ; 1 MMFA and 1 BTFA (Stretcher Boiler Repair (BTC). is in ;charge of securing. !.'"), Bearers); 1 MM3 or MMFN (2JZ Ta1ker);i1 MM3 fireroomspacesandin :- effectingfireroom or MMFN (2JVTalker);and 1 ' BTFA repairs. He is the relief for tiie BT of the watch. '= (Messenger);. / The BT, "(any pay gade) assists in securing An theey9Atof damage requiringthe firerooMspacesandineffectingfireroom abandonmen of any machinery space, personnel repairs. He is the relief for the checkman. abandOning the space should reporttothe Auxiliary Repair (MM-or MR any pay grade) officer in carge of rep*, 5 for assignment to assistsinsecuringengineropmspaces -and duty. -auxiliary machinery and in effecting enginercrom 152 163_ FR 14B, ROOM FR TV) AFT FALR0A ER 92 AFT FR 110F D. FC ENGINE ROOM 12 FWD, FIRE ROOM FR 72 a iAIR NO , ,iR t.,I0 6 co DIESEL `1,t F,L 1, comPi. .-INkp 1 F,D, ,, 1 ,.,0-,-,C-OTTR7 AFT !, F.O.SER F.D. SER ,F,O. StR Y.,.., 1 BLOM.- I -- BLOWER NO I S.S. z PUMP PUMP PUMP 1 I ci.ENERATOR __I " BOILERS'_4___ , SUPERHEATLR SUPERHEATER EMERGENCY ----- NO I LIJ Hi', FEED ENGINES ___2___ CRUISi . , F.B.P. ..- TLRii.INE Tuo EVAPORATOR -______- PUMP ' GENS o ° . v PORT . z i- 1 * .1.. SHAFT I -lit,' 'L° NO. I w ',KNOTS AUX', KF.P, I MR DEC. _r- tuRBINE BOIL ER BOILER iLIT PLANV. NO .I. NO 3 I . .. . 4 II .. . .mAIN STEAM . NO 2 1EL Er; 1 1 SI ELEC ST.F. 4CI' ., FBP,1,. JURBO STEAM Lop 1 op I COND ,;,O, 6, 1_____il'. I I $ - AUX. STEAK . . 7,71 1 yalti , AUX, EXH, .--- ,, , NO 4 NO 2 ' I rP 1 .,mR EJECTOR ,, i iSD. F.D, ( H,P, DRAIN EICONQMIZER NOI BLOWER. e" F.CGNOmr.TERE BLOWER .1 6,P.DRAIN DI I T , 1 , TANK INV, TANK NC' '2 , , , NEL OIL HEATER< OFT MAIN L FUEL OIL HEATER11 DRAIN MAIN I C.IR2,31.ATT)R, . TA,,,I,. '. 4 4 , MN. FEED DISC, t ,- I 0 . b " 11011 N, .. ECONOMIZER 'ECONOMIZER 'BOOSTER PUMP, _., ..) \ -- L... FAAI 1 NuTi 0 ti? , 'DISC, AIR MAr; ,...'. ' s T I') COND PL3 DISC., . EJEC, . , CIRC. , . NO SECONDARY DR o INO 2 EI, NO ITT- -- SIM' ELK P AIN DR;. I---- COND . COND .*,D 7 LOP, LOP FIREMAIN;, , NO4 F,D, F.D. BOW ,'BOILER 1,,H-7:17, FNC3 I , BLOwE ,IBLOwtR NO 2 . CASPA, Till +4 BP I v.F.P, , ,,...r.o 1 'NO I.' FR:V __TO L.P. ,'L, ,;TT.Tu,,' TURBINE :m. TO. i 1 I r STir` 1 AL.., _. ..4.,lil, .1 TO, ,A;T I i1 E.10R j A 1..) .,, 1 I I _ .S 1 r 1 13 o l'J I TEED PumP 1 i BP i ix 777 -I.:. H.P. CRUIS 1 i s3, , . , , i ,. :TURBINE c4:4)-1. ------. %AB' L. ...-, SUPERHEATER 1-5-,-/pERHEATER . DIESEL . 1F110,S., f.0,S.1 'rF70:51 NO 3 NO I It ; ND, ,i PAP 1-PLy2 1.i,,O., F,D, ,. Puyp coa E',.. F.D. . BLOWER BLOWER Figdie 9-5,Cas'ualty controlboard, 16: km AFT ;RL ,.[S [: AF I ER.Hi:. FroD, r*D ENE ROOkr F92 ; F AD, FIRE ROOM FR 72 r 1 T No Alp T71 7 F.O. s-E-71 E,O, SIR NCI I S.S, f,31.3*E.P. - 0*H 1' PUMP PumP IrERATC)rv AVAILABLE t BOII:ERS 4 t EMERGENCY H'riE AFi7 I FEED ENGINES TZ7S-1 .Et.P. PUMP GINS TUR KNOTS I , A - ; . : SPLIT pi_AliT YES m.AIN 1LAM. /7. I ')TEAro TURK 511AM 7nr,r I A , ALA. STEAM A. ; 7,7,771 AUX. E 1.1 "'I I 1/ IL2Ki - . arT', I Aro, -- rkArN MAIN A r, mN. I LED DI`,;... ,,,ONC,_,r,41, 1 1°) :ASC. LOND PL ;4I5c It SECONDARY DR > miorl DP, FIRE.mAIN CASLIM T P(rerI P r, 7 . FROM TO 1,;,,,,,,riE [RUM TO_ F FROM TO_ 0 iv-JAI:4; -1 [ -[[[ . . r.:!!_ll;) TIPH.! `,JPEPHIA Tr.+ `.1_IPE4r11ATEP DIESEL 1 I ; . FAD, ,[ -?;;. 111.59 Fiuure 9-5.Casualty control board. 165 I.LECTRICII(N'S MATE .1 & c and auxiliarrepairs..1,1c k the relief tor the Wh.eit eplering,' a imagedspace, throttleIllarr. investigators shouta ascertain It he condition of Electrical Reptir i):MC ("ir .E.M I I is in charge a.uxiliary. and .main .skam linesas soonas .or securhig electrical poWer and circuits. rigging possible. and report their findings to main eogine .casualty power HI the main propulsion spa...es, .cOntrol.' A. More' thorough description of all -and in, cfr,ect ing elect*al repairs...fle'is'the relief titimage to Imichine'ry and lines should roll"' for the electrical switehhoard watch.. .the:ipitialfindings.If damagy isinthe after 'Stretcher Bearci7N1N1EAI,,ass,isis in securing fitcroom,itis of utmost im4rtance that the enginerimm spaces and in effecting e,ngineroolp auxilbryittt5rit lint.--be immediately inspected and aqxiliare repairs.Ileistherelief for the and allundamagedlinef rolatheforward a mom iney:Filger. retCher, Bearer EA . toltile after engineroom be isolated as,sists,.in securi*lireroomspacesand. m from 'allythimagedsection..fhisactionis (:treting firentom 1,epairs. Ile is the relief for ihe necessaty so th.at .steam can he rapidly burnCl. restoredtothe lubeoil+ pumps inthe 'after t lalLem ll\l. or 11\11.N) correlates and. engineroitm. tic;ni!, transmits icports. Communications from a damaged space to :..31V 'FAL' 11113.or 117.11.ti I,relays em ormatiim from malll control to repair 5. main engine control shouli he established as as possihle7-using the 2JV circuit. The -I 1V. t\kenger B I EA .,issisis in securing ,fireroom;pacesand ineth,,ctimw_ fireroom circuit can he used in the af ter engineroolu if the icpairs.Ilektherelieftorthe trircroom ;IV circuitis damaged. 11 the 11V circuitis inessengei. used.nnmediatestepsshouldbetakento establish an emergency 21V circuit to this space. Rt.P.1IR 5 RLSP()NSIBILITIES Repair 5 is responsible for rigging emergency ,ir- communications 'circuits. Each Allan should be. fair.iliar with the casualty communication circuit RepliF 5 is respoi,11\,H1)1'eforprompt and V4 4. and a team should he designated to rig cttcctu\c a.lom iii thc ev4:11.1ofmajor casualties when necessary. All men hl repair 5 intire cugnieering spaces ;ino. when Ycquc:,,ted, shor.uld ako he familiar with all remote operating should he prepared to :aid engineering personnel l_lear tom ellghlt_Tring vakes. mi ftandling "ninior casualties..Securnigand lightin 1 Ic tuil hOuld he designiited within cpa 5 with man ;issigned specific duties. OPERATING CASUAI:FIES Repair w. ill he ;isked to wheneviacomThimications arelostoroilier I he. principal doctrine to he impressed on iiidiLutim shov.that a casiialfletS occurred Iii .r.,i1,,,perymtiel in (he event.Of a ca,,ualty of the space.IIthe HIP (4,,teamii or ilo), the WWII plant....js the necessity of seerci damatieil. it shimicl4.he secured opercitiop if possible, Try to keep the ..from topsiile ;nid ship underway except when ono (I operation would 'damagethe, ,mair; engii ',;otifythe iiitlre..-,enithat;Hi eng:ineriminHi iust11k: Wed. fir: Hi init pt,issihle. engineering of ricerof the watch as soon as possihle; he, in turn, notifieS 'the officer 'of the shol Nu auxiliary1111('t() nianitain th hi litpossihle deitr.ecoloperational deck ol tHe casualty and of any effe.ct on ttie ship's sp.,:ed or the ahility" to answer hells. The me, I Mid HI lorin'Thollhlnothe ;Wowed in the line CIII!'11111, Or I r;iir-dliiw a space ymimeering otlicer NI the watch also notifies the einimeei «II icer. ni v,Inch 1 Inaiur until ht,:n 111Vi"alISIIi'd and HelimeCr(r-,,VC(MIR'llifir,du(' to IO,,ti Ul steam kluolcd HILL'ur prupylk,kplaledto pressure in one plant, investigate the cause 61, Ind nt'llIll'ulon4IT,liii 1 he Is, iii.,pressii Rememherthat ny' cross-connecting to a Juptined line can cause f Chapter 9ENGINEERING CASUALTY CONTROL loss of pressure throughout the plant. If loss of Lbw Water steam pressure is due to a ruptured line or battle damage, isolate the damaged section thoroughly The fireroom casualty, LOW WATER IN before cross-connecting. Ensure that lube oil BOILER, also requires that the affected boiler pressure is maintained to the turbine at all tinies. be. secured. It is not necessary to trip the ship's In the event the auxiliary steam cannot be service generator .as in the case of high water. cross-connectedand lube oil pressure cannot be .However, speed in cross-connecting is important maintained either by the steam-driven Or electric to maintain steam to the turbine. standby pump, t-he shaft should be stopped. Failure of Forced FIREROOM CASDALTIES Draft BIower Underallcircumstances, theBoiler Failure of a forced draft blower can be Techniciannotifiestheengineroom of -the serious, depending on the existing conditions. If fireroom casualties. . two blowers are in use and the speed of the ship Engineroom action to be taken is basedon is high, the ship will have to be slowed. If only the report,given by the Boiler Technician. When one blower is in use, its failure will necessitate a fireroom.casualty affects the operation of the securing the boiler until another blowercan be engineroom, cooperation and communication started. If thereis only one boiler furnishing betweenpersonnelof boththespacesare steam to a space, the Machinist's Mate should extremely important. cross-connect the space and take steam from Some of the fireroom casualties that affect another boiler. theengineroom, and the pirceduresfor controlling them, are listedin the following Loss of Fuel Oil Suction paragraphs. The loss of fuel oil suction willcausc the 'High Water burners to sputter, fires to die out, and possible sudden racing of the fuel-oil servicepump. In, the event of the fireroom casualty, HIGH The fireroom watch' securesallburners, leaving at WATER IN. BpILER, with split plant Operation, least one air register on each side (superheated and saturated) open to expel the° Electrician's Mate should tripthe, ship's any service generator circuit breaker and close the gases. and to supply air for combustion of any oil a.c. and d.c. bus-ties, and the Machinist's,Mate that may have accumulated on the bbiler floors. should close the main engine throttle and trip The.forced draft blowers are kept running to the ship's service turbogenerator. All steam line purge the furnace (use purge chart applicable to ship's boilers). drains and all turbine drains'shOuld be opened, to ensure that all water is drained from the steam The 'standby. pu mp should be sta rted with lines and turbines before the cross-connection suctiOn on the stancltly service tank. The watch valveisopened. The plant should then be notifies the engineroom of the casualty and that cross-connected to receive steam from "another .the fires are secured, and, if unableto regain 'boiler. These procedures should .be carriedout firesbeforesteampressuredropsto *htf simultaneously.Thefireroomwatch should predetermined value, notifies the engineroom close the feed check valve, secure the burner's; that the boiler is being secured by closing the stopthe blowe,rs,anti r.closethemain,the. main, turbo, and auxiliary boiler steamstops in turbogenerator, and the auxiliary boiler steam the order indicated, stopvalves.After the boileris secured, the Thefireroomwatch .shouldncitifythe fittroom watch should run down the water to engineroom that the boiler is secured andopen the steaming level, relight .fires, and bring the the cross-connecting valves when so directed by 'boiler on the line. the engineroom. The servicepump discharge tl 155 4011. G ELECTRIdIAN'S MATE 1 & C P pressure should be .observed. If the pump races rumbling noiseprobably indicates the presence and the noise level increases, there is water in of Water in the casing, either from boiler priming the oil, and, if no pressure is .indicated, the or inadequate casing drainage. pump is air bound. If there is water in-the oil, If the turbine has been standing idle for thewatchshouldrunthe . oiltothe more than 5 minutes without being spun, it is contaminated oil tank through the recirculating probablethattherotorhasbeenbowed hne until the service line is free of water. If the temporarily. Uponrestartingtheturbine, pump is airbound, the priming cock should be vibration may be evident and, ifso, a brief 'opened and the system vented. slowing of the turbine will usually permit the The BT should close the airregisiersand rotor to straighten.7' " slow down the forced draft blowerk.after all .oil has been burned from the furnace deck and all combustible gases expelled. After it has been Loss of Lube Oil determined that good oil is available, he should ?P carry out the procedure for placing a boiler on Itshouldbe impresed on all personnel the line. concerned that even a mornentary loss of flow The BT should then investigate .and correct oflubricatingoilcanresultinlocalized the cause of the trouble and sound the tank to overheating and probable slight wiping of one or determine -tile quantity of oil in..the tank. If the more bearin. Such wiping may result in only a. oilis- above the suction line,, thefuel oilis Momentaryriseinthetemperature of the contaminated or the suction line.is clogged. If lubricatingoildischarge .from thebearing(s). the fuel oil contains water°, he should sound the Damage can be prevented or 'minimized by tanks in use and from wilich oil was transferred stopping the shaft rotation and quickly restoring to find the source of the contamination. the lubricating oil_ flow. Continued operation withwipedLearingscan causeserious ENGINEROOM CASUALTIES derangement to the shaft packing, oil seals, and blading. The operational engiberoom casualties that Loss of 'lubricatingOilpressure may be might occur include excessive vibration of a caused by failure of the system itself, including ; shaft, vibration of a turbine, loss of lube oil, and the main lubricating oil pumps; failure of steam many others. orelectricalpowersupplytothe'main lubricatingoilpumps; or damage toboilers,' Excessive Vibration of Shaft steam lines, or electrical equipment. Failure -to component parts of the lube oilS If a shaft develops excessive vibration, the system may be caused by the presence of dirt, man on watch should obtain permisSion to slow rags.,orothdirforeign matter resulting from the engine until the vibration ceaSes, and speed improper cleaning. Failure of the system,may be up the other engine to maintain speed, as the caused by a piping failure, by a failure of the tactical situation requires. If vibration continues operating pump, or by failure of the standby atall .speeds, he should obtain Oermission to pumptostart.Standby pumps shouldbe stop and lock the shaft to investigate the shaft maintainedreadytostartthe moment the,: bearings. If the cause is undetermined, he should pressure drops below the prescribed operating 11 investigatethe . propeller,fairwaters, (sleeves), range.Ifauto,inaticstarting devices are not and rope guards at the first opportunity. availableon steam-driven pumps, the pumps should be lined up so that opening the throttle is Vibration Of Ttirbine the only action required to start the pumps. Steam supply lines to standby pumps should he If aturbine begins to vibrate, the men on drained continuously. Where electrical pumps watch should, with permission, slow down the areinstalled, personnel should be thoroughly engine and reduce...the superheat temperature. A familiar with alternate sources of power. * 1 56 168' Chapter 9ENGINEERING, CASUALTY CONTROL The general procedure when low lubricating Additional information concerning casualties 'oilpressure occurs is to immediately stop the to the DDG-2 class destroyer and the DLG-23 is affected shaft and simultaneously endeavor to contained in Electrician'sMate3 &2, regain lubricating oil pressure. NAVEDTRA 1 0546-D.Thisinformation . If steam presfgre is available, stop the shaft includes' theoperation of emergency diesel . . by using the astern. throttle. Engage the jacking generators and their operation under.emergency ..gear and apply the brake. If the speed isin conditions. excess of one-half full power speed, stop the Shaftbymeans of the astern ;prbine, slow down the ship to a safe speed., and then lock the shaft. Electrical Fires Listen for, and endeavor to locate, the source of any unusual or abnormal sounds. After the The proper, procedure in the .event of an .affected shaft is secured, the ship's speed may be electricalfireisfor the assigned Electrician's increased to the limit for locked shaft operation. .Mate to deenergize the power supply to the affected controller, 'power panel, or switchboard If steam' pressure is lost in one engineroom and make certain that all power is off (normal, during split-plantoperation 'and the tactical alternate, and emergency.) Then he reports the situationpermits, take way off the ship by fire to the engineering officer of the watch and backing the other engine. Determine the nature theofficer of thedeck,usesa CO2 fire of the caSualty causing the loss of steam. If a extinguisher .onthefire,,andSecureSall loss of steam pressure in the engineroom will not ventilation. He should nof stand directly in front cause a' loss of steam to the other plant, open of the panel that is on fire. He should keep low theauxiliary:lidthcmainsteam and to one side and set a reflaSh watch until the cross-connections immediately. If the damage danger of a reflaSh has' passed. The electrician caused alosS of steam to the other plant, isaite should 'open the panel with'rubber gloi,es, using the damage and then open the auxiliary and the a rubber mat or bodts, as additional insulation, mainsteamcross-connectionsas'soonas to determine and repair the source of trouble. possible. Stop and lock the affected shaft as, If anelectricalfireshould occurina soon as steam is available., switchboard with a. generator on the line, the circuit breaker should be tripped (refer to fig. 9-6) and the Machinist's Mate should trip the ELECTRIC PLANT CASUALTIES overspeed trip on the generatOr and notify the' control engineroom, which in turn notifies the . Knowing the maximum operating limits of officer. of the deck and\ the engineering officer. the electric plant is of prime importance during The Electrician's Mate should secure the casualtyoperatiOn.'You mustknowthe voltage regulator, trip the bus-tie circuit breaker maximumallowablebearingtemperatures, and openhe feedback ci`rcuitbreaker. If the fire genera torwinding tem pe To t ures, maXimum is ,in thforward switchboard he should notify generator loads, etc. the after switchberahl wafclito :Open the after Supplyingvital powerduringcasualty bus-tie circuit breaker andth.viteshould use a operation Allayrequirethatgeneratorsbe CO2 fire extinguisher on the lire. The damaged operated under overload conditions. Assuming sectionof theswitchboard, 41.Ouldnotbe that tho prime mover can handle the overload, reenergized until repairs have been made. . the temperature of the generator windings is the If an electrical are occurs in a gcneiator, the determining' factor during'sustained overloads. A generator should be 'secured immediately. If the., portable blower may be used on open type fireoccurswhileoperatingsplitplant, 'the machinestokeepthewinding' temperature . Electrician'sMateshould thptilepnerator within safelimits. circuit breaker for the affected generator, close the bus-tie and use a CO2fire extinguisher on Operational. electricplantcasualtiesthat 1 - might o6cur include loss of generator, electrical the fire.II a generator fire should wcur auring- fires, loss of lube oil, antroverloaded generator.. opera t ionwith a single generator, . the riC) 157 169 ELECTR.ICIAN'SMATE I SHIP SERVICE SWITCHGEAR GROUP/ I\ S SERVICE SECTION I SHIP SERVICE SECTION I SB NORMAL VR:1 /"..\ . ALTERNATE SUPPLY DISC SW DISC SW TO SWBD ) 52 BT-I - -1 SUPPLY TO IE- SYIBD, 2 E \ ) 52 1:11 I )52S1 J 1 EMER I SWBD EMER J 2E SW80 I E 52-2E TO SHORE POWER COIAECTIONS (BOO AND 400 AMP.) L _ _ -J r- * BUS TIE )5282 1 )52 AI TO SHORE POWER CONNECTION (BOO AMP.) L _ L._ _ _J SHIP SERVICE ALTERNATE SUPPLY SWITCHGEAR TO SWEID IE GROUP 2S 4,_...NORMAL SUPPLY TO SWBD 2E L - , L _ _ ) sz )52S2)52-2A I * INTERLOCKED )52BT-2 )52-20 52 I DISC SWI CIRCUIT DISC SW BREAKERS ISHII. SERVICE SECTION 2SA L. SHIP SERVICE _SECTION 2S8 Figure 9-6.PoWer distribution (60 hertz)system on a DLG. switchboard should betriPped of all nonvital lcus-tie, and close thegenerator turbine throttle circuits and the vital circuitssupplied from the valve. The hand-opeiated emergency diesel generator. lube oilOmni)shouldk be used to maintain lubeoil Pres:sure to th& hearings until the turbineis comOletery:stoppgd. Loss of Lube'Qil After the turbine has stopped,,investigate and correct the casualty, Uponjailure of generator lubebilpressure, the electrical load shouldbe aemoved .fromthe Overloaded Generator,../ affected generator, and the,generator should be stopped immediately. The .normalprocedure is to trip the generator circuit rload on agenerator,isreduced by breaker, close the re 1 vhinornital lbads. Power shouldnotibe' ,Of; 158 Chapter 9ENGINEERING CASUALTY CONTROL interruptedtovitalmachinery andcircuits.04excitation control switch has to be in the OFF unless absolutely necessary. Vital machinery and position before the control transfer switch can circuitsincludethesteeringgear, IC 'be' operated), and, thenturnthe excitation switchboard, fire, pumps, drainage pumps, vital control switch .to ON. auxiliaries in the boiler and enginerooms, gun , mounts, and navigational li BATTLE CASUALTIES DIESEL ELECTRIC D.C. DRIVE Shell or torpedo hits in engineering spaces (FLEET TUG) CASUALTIES usually result in multiple casualties to machinery and systems. The corrective action for any 'Operational casualties that..may occur to this particular casualty depends on the.location and type of drive may include casualties to any one extent of damage. While battle casualties differ 'in many. respects, the following procedures can ofthefour._ mainpropulsion generators or ciektictos4-the main propulsion motor. and the be applied to most casualties of, this type. control equipment and assOtiated circuits. Secure the space or isolate damaged sections, as practical,and cross-connect systems or plants, when possible, 4PROPULSION GENERAT'OR CASUALTY .r.Carryoutapplicablecasualtycontrol procedures in the event of damage to machinery .A .casualty. to one of the main propulsion generators :or associated exciter, requires cutting or piping systems, such, as: stop and lock the shaftin.the event ,kof serious damage to. the th e. affectedgkeratoroutof Theseries turbine, yeduction gear, or the main shaft or loss propulsion loop. of lubricating oil pressure to the main engines Itisnotnecessarytoturnthespeed controller'to the STOP position when cutting a and use "'softpatches,i blank flanges, wooden... ,generator linto or out of the propulsion circuit. plugs:or:Other suitable means to repair lube dil: .Normally, the controller should be brought to a lines, fresh water lines, salt-water cooling mains; auxiliary ,exhaust lines, and 2ther low .presSUre positionnothigher 'thanthe II th(ensi9e, Ines. opfk-ating,. at350. -1.pm). VVhen rec.]iryt- .1 generator may be cut out of the circuif If' a IruptRe0 steagi line prevents entry ogine speedis in ekcessf,or 353 rpm a§ thg ':,rcpIparty iierrioner into4,.space, Secure the P'nc,tator setup s-Witcheare designed for such space,bYustIng.remoteconç.;tls. Take aikprecatitions fo prevent flooding of service.WaitseveralsecondsbetWeen, the opening of the generatbr's control switeh an0 space., P,ut all available pumps on the bilges setup switch. This:reduces artipg at the setup of:.the dainaged space; plug all holes, and, if swit9ott contacts, alid preVents flashover of ,the,., ilostiibh; prevgikt flooding of other spaces. Ektinguish" fires, ,inve,stigate aftmageand genclator Commutator. ":14. tvv. 7 makeArliiairs, to' return machinery `or the space 40 tickto*,,,sevice,., ifpracticable,as fsoon as COfsITROL.,c61;ISQLE CASU/kLTY 'possible. , ev, . Ketcbmmuni ation ,linesi,en and.feeP A cas, ito the pilothouse control,Cons60'.::. .main ;engine'P contr ol. advised of the .ekisting or ass-90 rEct6, requires a shiftLin control' .,ColidiOtis. lie cnginerocnn 'station.' To. . engine co shiftc A the DAMAG4kABLE.", QUIPMENT con0-oll fetyntrol st. d II&STOP, positIon,t L citatioll ftrol sWiteh to' Anlank'casualty lvolvIngdamage oto OF turn the ehgineroom-pilothouseg control :eletrica17-t4able'and:e'cfuipittent, electrical c4cuits (4)fAs witeh to the ENGINEROOM positiOn , ,,ihay;: be .a hazard .if theyieniain eneigized. The ittrectiv trol transfer switch and ,the' excitation' circunistances sttounditeach case of chimage coNot ..iwitchareinterloCkedsothatthe , diet* the tiel,ipn.ib be taken. In cases of .1/ ,159: 4,FLECTRICIAN'S MATE 1 & C serious damage it is usually necessary to remove permanentlyinstalled-cables, exceptfor the electrical power from all cables in the damaged vertical risers and bulkhead terminals. The risers area , to preventtheiimition of combustible areinstalledto carry circuits through decks liq,uidsandgases. Corilinuedoperations,. without impairing the watertight integrity of the howqver, may requirethe reestablishment of ship. A riserconsists of a TSGA-60, cable.. power to undamaged cireints'i including those extendini from one deck to anotherwith a riser thdt extend through tthe damagedarea. terminal connected to each end forattaeluneiria Splices ntay be made or temporary jiimpers of portable cables. . may:be run in some cases to reestablish powerto Portable THOF-42 cables in suitable le the required circuits. pghting circuits are not to forimall the circuits required to supplypo .4 .disregardedinthisconNctionbecause equipment designated to receiVe casualty, ft damagecontrolactivitiescanbe seriously While the normal current carrying caPa fe haWicaPpedorrenderedimpossibleby THOF.42 cablesis 93 amperes, inigdequate lighting at the its casual y °- scene of damage. rating is 200 amperes. Under normalconditions Damagedelectrical equipment should be this cable will carry 200amperes for 4 hours isolated from all availablesources of power. In without damage to the cable. 6se, -ofa damaged switchbOard,allcircuits The.bulkheadterminals feeding to the switchboard from remote carrycircuits sources cr. through . bulkheads.withoutimpairing shouid be deenergized and tagged at the , , thesource, watertight integrity of the ship. .Thepowerpanelssupplying equipment CASUALTY POWER SYSTEM designatedfor'casualtypowerserviceare equipped with terminals so that casualty The casualty power system of power a DDG-2 can be fed into the- panels. These panelscan also destroyer is described in Electrician's Mate 3d'c 2, be used as a source ofpower for the casualty 'NAVEDTRA I 0546-D. The system is limitedto powe.c.system 'in the event thatpower is still bare minimal electrical facilities requiredtO keep available. from the perm'anent, feeders to the ship afloat in the event of damage andto.,get the. .panels...flowever, the decision totake power it out of a danger area:linpartant basiefeatures from thepanelinstead of the switchboard ofthecasualty power systemincludethe 'should be based on knowledge that equipment preservation of the watertight integrity ofthe on that panel will not be required for the safety ship, simplicity of installation and operation, of the ship. Operating the equipment flexibility of application, interchangeability 'that is of normallysuppliedbythepanelplus ,.the partsand equipment, minimmn weight and equipment to .be supplied with casualtyi.WVer s pa ce re quirements,andtheabilityto ,may caUse an overload on the circuit breaker accomplish the desired functions. supplyingthepanel.Portable The casualty power system is switchesare a ternraiy. located in several strategic positionsthroughout means of providing power and is not a -Incas of the ship for use with the casualty making power system. temporaryrepairs.Toretail ingeneral,thecasualtypower system igfectiveness, the system is purposely limitedi prIvides a horizontal run of portable cablealong its scope. The more equipment that is added and the .inain deck with risers for thepower supply the more the system is expanded, thegreater and for loads extending to and .from.this level. willbethe possibility ; of errorinmaking Rigging and unrigging..casualtypower cables are connections as well as the possibility of faultsat described in Electtician'sMate3 & -2, relatively unimportant.equipment causing loss of NAVEDTRA I 0546-D. power at vital, eq uipmnen;. lts Ao probable that The ship's service sWitchbotirds, IS and2S, the casualty Power system, if expand9d,'Would and the emergency,switaboards, 1E and be burdened with miscellaneous loads 2E, are at a time providedwithcasualtypowerterminals, when its use would be essential for vital loads,. installed on the back of the switchboard.Each The electrical casualty power system ina casualty power terminalis connected to the typical destroyer is illustrated in theschematic buses througha diagram in figure 9-7. The sYstem standard .250-ampere AQI3 contains no' ,circuit breaker. -The circuit breakershave an r. 1 160 172 Chapter 9ENGINEERING CASUALTY CONTROL em DIESEL GENERATOR ROOM AFTER ENGINEROOM FORWARD DIESEL . FORwARD ENGINEROOM GENERATOR ROOM POwER PANEL AFTER FIREROOM FORWARD FIREROOM 2-146-2 CONN. TO R.T. 1.116-2 POwER PANEL CONN. TO 2-99.2 R.T. 1149-2 CONN. TO R.T. 1.11.11* a POwER PANEL 2.77.2 zo Ix POWER PANEL L' . 2-123-1 PO ER PANEL R.T. 2.94-1 2.141.1 P. CONN. TO A R.T. 1.72.2 CONN. TO R.T. 1.96-2 '-.411 POwER PANEL. 2-105-1 C.) ear. R. T. RISER TERMINAL C. T. - CASUALTY TERMINAL ,103.1 Figure 9-7.Electrical casualty power ssistem. instantaneous (magnetic) trip element setting to ON-STATION training with frequent instruction prevent tripping of the generator breaker or and inspection of watch sectionS by engineering fusingofthecasualtypower cableunder officers and leading petty officers to ensure that shorCcircuitconditions. Connectionstothe themenareindoctrinatedintheproper buses are between the generator circuit breaker procedures and are familiar with the installations and disconnect switch. in their rnachinery space. Instructions pertaining' to the machinery setup- for varions,engineering :conditionsofreadinessshould . be well CASUALTY CONTROL TRAINING promulgated and inspections should be .made to ensure that these instructions are carried out. 'Knowledge is'thekeystoneof casualty Realistic simulation of casualties shotild be control...Maximum .knowledge of the operating preceded by adeq-uate preparation. The,arnount details of the engineering installation should be of advance preparation necessary is not always imparted to the greatest possible extent to all readily apparent and care should be exercised to engineering personnel. Instructionin casualty visualize the full 'consequences of error, which proceduresshOuldbe basedonthorough may be madeinthe handling of simulated knowledge of the proper and normal operating casualties intended to be of a relatively, minor proCedures ol; the plant. Complete familiarity nature. Hence, the simulation of major casualties with normal operation 'should be gained by all and bifttle damage should be preceded .by an personnel concerned before any atteMpt is made extremelycomplete_ analysis and by careful. to carry out simulated casualties. instruction to all participants. Casualtycontroltrainingshouldbea Any new crew should be given an adequate -continuous step-by-step procedurewith constant opportunity to become familiar with the ship's -refresherdrills.Thesedrills'comprise systems and equipment prior to- simulating any 7 .3 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE 1 & e casualty that may have other than purely local withgoodcommunications, a crewcan effects.Inthe preliminary phases a so-called proficiently handle any battle.problem. DRY RUN isa useful method for imparting earefiknowledge of. casualtycontrol procedures CONDUCTING AND SUPERVISING without endangering the ship's equipment. ELECTRICAL CASUALTY PRILLS Under the "dry-run procedure,a casualty is . announced and all indiyiduals are requked to. As an EMI or Chief Electrician's Mate,you report as though action were taken,except to willberequiredto conduct and supervise indicate that action was only simulated. Definite electricalcasualtydrills.Thiswillinclude corrective actions can be made and, with careful conducting such drillsasfiresin generators, supervision ,the timing of individual actionscans-.4... switchboards, and otherelectrical equipment, be made very realistic. Such 'tlryruns should emergencysecuringof alwaysbe. carried generators,useof out before anyrealistic emergency generators, stripping switchboards of attempt is carried out to siniulateany involved nonvital circuits, supplying casualty casualty, regardless of the state of training. - power to vital rnachinery, and others, .. G , Individual casualty procedures should be the In addition to conducting frequent dryruns, basis of casualty control training withemphasis you should ensure that all Electrician's Mates get bn operatingcasualtiesin, the earlystages.'some experience inaaually perforMing the. Canducting ba ttle problems before 'acrew is casualty operations.. Themen stationed on the proficient in. handling operating casualties only .switchboard during generalquarterswillget results in confusion and disrupts the effortsto ulectricplantcasualtyoperating eXperience organiie and coordinate the teams.A battle during general quarters drills. YouShould ensure problem is a sequence &of individual casualiies that the other switchboard watchstanders '.get whichrequires indivi81ual'casualty' control this experience. Always obtainpermission from procedures by the teams, as wellas intraplant appropriateauthority,however,, before coor.dina t ionbetweenteams.With well conducting any casualty drillsthat may affect organized training. in individual casualtiesand the statuS of the engineering plapt. ? t. 1;s7 162. 't CHAPTER 1 0 MAINTENANCE ADMINISTRATION Maintenance of ships can be divided into systemalsoproducesalargereservoir of two broad categories: preventive maintenance knowledge about equipment disorders, ,which, and,correctivemaintenance.Preventive -when fed back to the appropriate sources for maintenanceconsistsofroutineshipboard analysis, should result in the 'distribution of procedures that increase the effectivefife of information regarding corrective steps to prevent elluipment or forewarn of impending troitbles. recurrences, Obviously, the correctness of the Corrective maintenance consists of procedures results depends on the accuracy of the basic that analyze and correct material defects and reports. troubles.Themainobjectiveof shipboard The 3-M System,,,like any other system or preventive' maintenance is toprevent prograin,, is only as eohd as the personnel who breakdown, deterioration, and malfunction of make it Work. Your, rble in the system as a P0-1 equipment.lf, however; this objective is not or CPO will include the training of lower rated reached,the.,\alternativeis corrective personnel in its use, as well as the scheduling and maintenancerepairing or replacing the failed supervision bf maintenance. In addition to the equipmen t. inforination found in Military 'Requirements fories In the past, shipboard maintenance progiani's Petty Officer 3 & 2 and Military Requirements varied from one command to another, resulting for Petty Officer I & C, details on the system in various degrees of.operational readiness. The and changes related to it are available in the system now in 1.1e is the Navy Maintenance and Maintenance. and Material Management (3-M). MaterialManagement(3-M)System.,Itis Manual (revised). Other sources of information designed to upgrade erational readiness of include OPNAV Instruction 4700.16 (revised), ships. The systemisintr &iced inMilitary -the NA VSEA Journal, and directives issued by RequirementsforPetty fficer3 & 2, typecommanders. NAVEDTRA 10056-CandMilitary RequirementsforPettyOfficerI & C, NAVEDTRA 10057-C. We recornmendihat you SCHEDULINb Of.RLANNED reviewthatmaterialbefore you beginthis MAINTENANPE chapter. The g-M System should not be considered a The planning and scheduling of planned "cure all" for your equipment and maintenance maintenance., isaccomplishedthrough the proiilems. The procedures of the system are Planned 'MaintenanceSubsystem(PMS).In intendedtoobtainthemostaccurate and addition,the PMS definesthe MINIMUM completeinfortnationpossibleby, ,collecting maintenance required, contiols its performance, ,isepo.rtr,s-.directly loin the 'ship's niiiintenance describes the methods, materials, and tctls to be perSonnel.. The rtrports are analyrzed, and the used, and aids in the 'detection and prevention of resultsare,14Intto, -maintenanceactivities, impending'casualties. These factors should prove .1s logistics activities, and design activities in the to be a definite asset to the.leading petty officer formof 'improvedfirocedures, and/or in forecasting future material requirements and "recoMmendations- fordesignchanges.. The in the proper utilization 6failable manpower. ;, 175 ELE,CTRICIAN'S MATE 1 & C It should be noted that the PMSDOES NOT except for the routine preservation cover certain operating clwcks and actions such inspections as chipping, painting, and cleaning. that are required . as a norma! part of the regular Theshipboard watchstanding routine. For example, installationofthe you wi MaintenanceData Collection notfind `such thingsas hourly voltage an Subsystem includes a central, functionaldata collection. 'ciirrent checks or routine gyrOchecks listed as center. The primary function ofthe shipboard maintenance requirements underthe PMS. Even data collection center is though these routine operating to screen all documents checks are mit for completeness and listed as PMS requirements, accuracy before they are you must, of course, forwarded to the data processing stillperformthemin center. During accordaniewithall the screening process, the data applicable WatchstandeY's instructions. collection center adds.a 'four-digit inaintenancecontrol number to each document'unless the ThePlannedMaintenanceSubSystem is person, doingthe task based on the proper utilizationof PMS'Manuals, has already.roceived andentered a Maintenance Maintenance' Requirement,C4ds (MRC's), and control nuniber to obtainparts or 'materials schedules for the accoMplishmentof planned from the supply department. .maintenance actions: , Initially,the effectiveness of the MDCS The PMS usesthe Cycle Schedule, the depends on the accuracy ofthe report by the Quarterly Schedule, and theWeekly Schedule to individual performing themaintenance action. Leadingpetty simplify the scheduling of planned.maihtenance. officersare'responsiblefor ensuring that.all forms used All required plannedmaintenance- actionsare in connection with programmed throughout the overhaulcycle of a the MDCS are completeand accurate. Leading ship. In addition, the system. isflexible enough petty officers. should alsoensure that a form is to readily accommOdateany. changes in a ship's submitted .for each applicableaction, and that no action is reported more than employment schedule. Theschedules, are once. -discussed in ,detail inMilitaryRequirements for . hrtty Ofjicer 1 &C, NAVEDTRA 10057-C; EQUIPM,ENT IDENTIFICATIONCODE MASTER INDEX (EIC MANUAL) RECORDING OF MAINTENANCEACTIONS All personnel hayingany responsibility for maintenance actions mustknow how to use the The Maintenance Data CollectionSubsystem ( M DCS) EIC Manual. The E1CMamial coptains many pr9vides a. means ofrec,thding . codes used in reporting qiiformation concerningboth inaintenance actions. planned. and Each major system is coded correctivemaintenance. actibns. and broken down to Maintenance a level which identiftes it. This, in performedis turn, will help . recorded by code insu fficien; you maintain your equipment.. The detail to 'collect a great varietyof informatiOn following' example shows you howto obtain -an EIC co n ce rning maintenance actions and the performance of the equipment number. You want the sliprings on the rotor of involved. The the -steam turbine driven, 60-Hz .cOncl es used in, recording ship's serVice and reporting generator trued and cleaned. maintenance actions cermit Look in the EIC. Machine' Processing Manual Index table of with automatic data processing contents:.Notice that the equipMent. The electricpower ,generation '' systems code system also provides data concerningtilc* initial is discovery of a mallunctioni.lioi,V,,:the 3000000. Now turn to 'the "'ridgeindicated to eqiiipment find, the fiirther breakdoW-n, malfunctioned, how many.hoin1S-the YOU will notice th,at equipfent; the generator set, 607Hz, was in steam turbine driven is operation,whit:itiftii'...4equipMent was, 3 1 0C000'...jhe.. titimber involved, what repair,parts:., .3 identifies the d.,.materials were . componeht ',.,',',.'. electrical powergenerration 'used, what delays ,were, in.curra.,.....,#rredson for systems. T , identifies' the component -delay, and the technicalispecpltyoework center as which ship's servirce,*.6041z,'steam driven. With this- performed the''inairllenance. Eaah code you have identified the 'ecit-npoir.nt of the.. maintenance actibn is reported inthis manner, u nit ,Whers a problem' is lotated.i. fhis 11.1 164 1.7 6 Chapter 10MAINTENANCE ADMINISTRATION informationcanaidlogisticspersonnelin design,materials,number, ;location,of supplying spare parts and engineers in solving relationship'ofthe component parts of an . 0. design problems. assembly regardless of whether it is.undertaken separately-from,orintidentalto,orin conjunction with, repairs." MDCS DOCUMENTATION ,A.NAVALT is In alteration that affecg the, chamtetensticsofaMaya!vessel. Information, for the MDCS is documented military identified bY theword Data N'A V A LTSare on standard forms such as the Maintenance .14AVAUT, and a number, irany, assigned' to*the Detailed . . Porm andtheFeedbackReport. project in the Ship Improvement Guide. (Tile descriptions .of the forms are liSted in SectionI issuance' of a Ship ImproVement Guide project oftheEIC .Manual,theMaintenance .and AsImprovementPlan :.Which Manna! kreVised), cafd,Oracjs Material Managenient describesth alteration,indicatesthat the and the Military.RWquirelAents for Pet 0: Officer alteration has been approved or is under activ0 3 ct.2. NAVEDTRA 0Q56-C. cOnsideration.) The document that dpscribes the alteration in detail and lists the specific yossels MAN-HOUR .ACCOUNTING SYSTEM' to which. itisapplicableis also known as a NAVALT. . . . TheMan-hour' . AccountingSystem, A .SHIPALTis .analterationunder' the sopetimesreferredtoasEXceptionTime, techniCal cognizance of NAVSEA, regardless of Accounting tETA),isusedby 'therepair .whether it affects the military chapeteristics of. department of a 'repair activity in conjunction a, vessel. Thus,some alterations maybe both with the MIX'S. Itisbasieally a management NAVALTS and SHI,PALTS whereas others may tool and accounts for dOiations from anoirnal beonlySH1PALTS.Thedocumentthat 7-hour working day. describes analteration, and 'list'sthe., specific ETAincludes.the us.e ofCodes,the . vessels to which, it is applicable is also known as preparation of a Master kOster LiSting. and the a SHIPALT, preparation and submission of Daily Exception Each SHIPALT is identified by a composite number consisting of two serial numbers and, a Cards(OPNAV .Form4700-2E).Detailed prOcedures for Using the card are discussed in let ter.Serial.numbers,areassigned' theMaintenance andMatel.lal Management chronologically ifi the order in. which alterations I,3-MT Manual(revised)andtheMilitary arc. approved. Thefirstserial number isthe Re.quireMimts Ibr'Petti. 0.1.ficer& C. TYPE SERIAL NUMBER (the..pumber of the alteration wiThin'a type). The letter indicates the expenditure account chargeable. And, the seccind REPAIRS AND ALTERATIONS serial number 1s. the SHIP SERIAL .Ntr,m:Bgit (the number of:the'alteration for a-spekl,04- A5 .a 'sepior petty officer, your concernwith within the'type)'.. ,.:.? .. ,''''''' ' . ;!:,...-; t 7 All repairs'and alteriltions depends to.a.great extent Forexamph.,!,'coh.sickr...SHIPALT.' : on wherc you:stand in the chain of command. Iri 150A70-FORRE.STAL CV isthe'sliiqYpe' , . the folloWing* section we will consider several deSignation Jin this case an'attack carrier): 150 aTeasof. arepair '.peripdaridCoVer. various indiea testhi.t. thisis; the150t1r alteration' dermitions. approved for CV's: "A". designates.. the47:Oiint to v:ifficly.the charge§ will be.made:. : 1.,^t REPAIR is defined inNury Regulations as "work necessary tO restorte a.ship or article to .riticeable condition .withoj.'d change in design, TYPE AVAILABILITIES feria's, ridniber, location, or relationship of the.Component patts" and. an ALTERATION is AVALLAlipTY' is.lefinne.d'. in .yaity.. eined pas !`40:y change ii,i thehull, machinery, RegulatUms, as" "'the. period -of time .assigried aUthbrityfotifthe ,equisMent,Or rittings,whtch involves a change in sh p b cp h pe te at . 1411 1 fb 165 ti 177 ELECTRItIAN'S ...uninterrupted accorriplishment.ofwork ',which unschedtiled. basis. requires'. services ..Of-a repair .a-ctivity ash,ore,-or Cortcurrent 'afloat..."r, scheduled to coincide with theregular shiPYard ., To say that a. ship has overhaulorrestrictedavailabilityforthe been` graded 'an .accomplishnient :'.availa.l2ility means simply that"she of ship-td-shop work bya iS available for . tender or repair ship. ma in tenance' :-workbetauSe , acompetent Support availability is for specific authority, usuallYthe Met ,Comniander, .:has. items of work for unitsor commands other than a 14ip suspendell'heroperational Schedule fOra sPecific (such as an afloat staffor shore-basea activrty). period to. perinit accomplishment'of 'Work at. a `rePair actiVity. Any availabilify for the accomPlishmentof work .A,repaircictivity may.. request pn a naval reserve training (NRT) . ....that availability be'eXtended'.$64hat ,Work can be sh,ip falls Lompletid under,an NRT ship availability, ,S or tliç activity May recommend:a completion 'date to the prOnerauthority.... To illustrate.,let us use a motion picture- projector tolearin 'when routinerepair work can There are four availabilities forshipyard or be accbmplished bya repair facility. .other 'shore-based repair activities. These are Motion picture.' projectOrsaresenttoa regular overhauls, restrictedavailability, voyage motion picture equipment repairfacility, tender, repairs, andtechnical aVailability. . or rePair ship every I000.,hoursof operating A regular overhaul' is:normally'scheduled in., time: When maintenance isbeyond the technical advance and .in accordance withan established skills .of personnel aboard' eYsle the. comniand; o'jf .to accOmpli.Thgeneral'repairsand the necessary tools andgages,are not.availaffl ...alteratiOnS. 'The restr;cted .availall-lity. is assigned, aboard the c,ommarid. 1 on- ly for specific ,.- itemS of 'werk,'fiornitlly . With ° Supportavailability,and' the shiv present...During .NRI,ship a restricted aVailability availability are .two availabilities,-which 'canrbe the ,.ship i,s Tenderedincapable, ',of. fully assigned to either ship dr sho'rerePair facilities. "perfaming its-assigned missiOn.Voyage- repairS., .`" ' Thre..elnergency work.neeessarY tOenable the Ship H The projector. Will nornrilybe sent t,oa .td.coritinue on its mission...Theserepairs mast be repair facility,tender:or repair ship during.any accomplished without.a"..eltarige.in -the ship's Of... the ab,ove".'availabilities-except.' duiing ..restricte'd availabitity, operating scheduler:-.;A. technicalavdilabilityis voyage repairs, technical assigned': for specific, iterns ofwprk,.. normally availability ,oreAtergericy'.tender `availability. In With' tile ship potpresent. Its opposed loa practict!,:the.projector could be SenteVen during, restrictedavailability atechnical .ayailabilitY these. aVailabilitiesas longas it does not interfere leaves the ship', hilly capableof performing its - tk-ith 'the primary repair misSionor the repair ,assitned activities porn-ql_work' , . For tenders- orrep,aft' ships, four other aVailabilitiesarc '..as.signed:' These arc, regular 11EPAIR.13?OCEDURE tenderavailability._ epiergen.cytender availabilitY,"parent. tenderfautomaticavailahility, ' .and concurrent vailabitity . 4.. As a firstVelass or chief pettY4,Officer,-yo A _regular tender. availability Is nOrniall Willsometimes- be 'requiredto supervise or _ sc heduled. iii advan4 gener;alrepairS an, .otlierwise paAiciriate ingeneral shipboard repaira aythori:Led alteratioiwhiCh ',;atebe.yopd the' dr (Our -repairs.. EM areas. Tliis section- -On re pa i r.p ro&dures capacity..,:of,. thes .1:forcealOngside.An'.. willhelp,: you bo:tte r ginerwncytender, ailability :is assigned'to 'Understand 'thenormal; orrequired, .,rePair .procedures(' render... repairs ,toSp.e.cificcasualties. oiliest!, 1-!pairstake'. first ''priority Oyer other 'tender -1:;.; work, A parent tende'r/auto.matie,iveability is-. REPAMSilitiS ANUTENDER fr't use'd to atcomPish items of,,Ark.ustialiy, on 0. ship-to-shop basiS.:Tlie rePhirs are, normally bf a the repair.shiP (AR) tionoperatibnal 'nature ...'and--are done pp an was Vended, AI, rimarily Tepaidng battleships..and cruisers. 7' b- ,,. 166. 178 Chapter 10MAINTENANCE ADMINISTRATION WO'j 7ft OP4' 113 Dpring- World War II several types Of repair ships additional precaution, keep a readyrtrerenzof k were developed for. ,specialized types Of work; serialnumbers.Technical umpt,p154'.4114 for example, the landing craft repair ship (ARL). blueprints should be availableN, Repair ships perform repair and maintenance .facility. ,Nonetheless, require a checkout Troth 'a 'flinctions thatare beyond the capabilities Of competent repair facility representatt400 other ships' facilities or personnel. documents. If you show the facility fr good, Tenders perform repair work, supply repair efficient electrical shop, the facility will -be more parts, and render.other serVices to the ships they inclined to give you their best work. s6rve. At present there are .twO types of tenders Completed jobs shouldbe oper tionally in service; the destroyer, tender (AD) eind the cl?ecked bel'ore you ask the assigned oicer :to apubmarine tender (AS). ,c0,* sien the job off as completed.. UPKEEP PERIOD t >LAVAL SHIPYARDS Generally, :thetypez.; commanderwill Periodically your ship will undergo extensive authorize a 2-Week upft period during which repairsin a naval shipyard. The condition of tll'e stipyard a tender or repair shin' .4ailable -to assist your equipment when you leave will depend onthe- yard assigned and- your in repairs. To ensure os ,en,,17 ...should* in advance (with, ,itilon tiler):the initiative. The planning departm,ent of the yard screens maintenance you desire s accompl sK.,As a Group Leader, you should als0 look Infi5 such and assigns all work requests to the_ prodnction factors as personnel leave and-dental, care which department which is responsible forthe work may affect yourschedUling. Aq'good upkeep being done. requires good planning. . Shops Arrival Conference As an.Electrician'sMate,, yon wilt have occasion to deal with- marly shops in the naVal _- On the first day, if not before, cp*an upkeep shipYard. Of primary concern will, be Central period, an arrival conference will tie held aboard Toolroom (Shop 06), Public Works (Shop 07), the repair facility. 'Your commanding officerand Electric Shop (Shop 51), and Riggers (Shop 72). yout engineer officerWill discass your needs with the facility personnel. This discussion will Personnel include scheduling; serviees, messing, etc. Your work requests should be made out in such a The technicians and repairmen of a naval mannerthatyour jobswillbeconsidered shipyard have ratings just as yoU have. These favorably. Upon completion Of the arrival,conference, men have advanced experience and their rating is the engineer officer will, promulgate a schedule, a sourcyof pride.The currentratings,in descendingorderofseniority, areGroup ____and you :shouldmOdify.,._ your planning _to conform with it. Su p.erintend'e n t,Superintendent Itis important that you bring ship-to-shop Superintendent I, General' Foreman II, General itenis such as motors, coils, and meters fo the, Foreinan I. Foreman (Leadingman), and rvder tender as scheduled. A personal visittothe (Head). Be 'sure you know to whom you .are electrical and IC repair shops is often quite talking when discussing job progjess. beneficial. Many details can be discussed over a cup of coffee. You should also follow up your OVERHAUL jobs to ensure receipt of proper maintenance. Itis, good practice to tag. all equipment When your ship is scheduled for an-overhaul, beforeitgoestothefacilit)* and,asan the planning department of the yard will go over . o 167., 1 7.9 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE 1 &C your work requests months in 'a4nceof yOiir duty, -carryit -out to the best ofyour ability. arrtval. Agatn, the requestshould be worked :,3t.a ,You are the bY you and your divisionofficer to the extent one who indicates theprogress. required by the planning Therefore; you are personally,resppnsible for its department personnel. accuracy.. A naval officer familiarwith the shipyard will berdesignated ShipSuperintendent. He will be assigned by the yardto ensure the adequacy DiWlocking offacilitiesandtheexpeditionof work. Generally, thisofficerisaboard from yar DuringeaChoverhaul,iffacihtiesare arrival at the yard untilyour departure and available,theshipwillenter, 'cln/dockfor shduld, through theproper chain of command, necosaiy hull work.As a senior petty officer,- beinformedofanydelaYS,-- bottlenecks, you should exercise added vigilanceduring this period because persOnnelproblems,andmisundei.stlindings, your ship when -drydocked, is which might tipd to slowor stop the progrets of quite vulnerable tosevere damage. a good yard OVerhaul. AShip Progressman (a Aftrocedures regardingequipment, fueling, civilian from the productiondepartment of the sthoking, etc. should befollowed to the letter. yard) will 'alsobeassigned.toworkin Ensure that yourmen are briefed and that they 'conjunction with the ,ship'ssuperintendent /o comply to the letter ofall drydock regulations. expedite yoqr overhaul. , Post Repair Trials Progress of Work The, dock trial isyour oppOrtunity to check During an overhaul the out a large part of theoverhauled equipment shipis generally prior to an underway required to submita weekly report ofprogress trial. Ensure thatyour to men are stationed at all indicators the type commander.To assistinthe and that each' comPptationof 'this modeofoperationis"checkedout." A report,a"Shipyard complete check of all Overhaul Work ProgressChart" (fig.. 10-1) is systems is required. used. The inspector (a The post repair trial isthe final test. Accept senior petty officer) nothing but optimum whose name appearson this chart is responsible perforrhance from 'your for keeping it up-to-date. equipment. Checkevery, item and every mode. If you are assignedthis Thisisthe L. checkoutthatcounts.Every , _.4,/,Vo.eo ofrrie,,,faz 114,feReex.cer_reel4e-r-62.re-rAZD/v/r/o,c/ I '41(4.4"1"4"`"f.tetmaxe*owePercehoradeuri/.0fir necotireewel-enro a -Ar /A/01M es ,,,e4Pfrneer 4:5-41/4404(1#r4fii-,0740Ao14044,0As 90740 Az-Jre"7.9;7, *fa -Mr*/ -7%7/4. 4.134%),e29. -. 4,-,674-;94,1,- Is-ir- A-.12wc.ore,e ,04 / 47/Ai erle er',31ti-sitenewecreffac 77- tre;6449// a ../1- oitcr.,r,01.4-44440.4ef,i brns9 fe, . 6.4229-7..t.t/f 47424C4444'Xmc 7.- . t"..1/t"; 6ftt . . --s.-*ft.-"6"-----"..--.------"'"----' .. , '18.3 Figure 10-1.--Representative shipyard overhaul workprogress chart. ell 168 180 Chapter1 0MAINTENANCF ADMINISTRATION discrepancy, no matter how small, should be prevent delay, you s_hould ensure that these reported,to the eleetrical officer. reports are accessible. ThereiS no reasyn to . A- readiness-for-sea period of approximately. "beat around the hush,- Answer questions and Iweek follows during winch all "loose ends' display your records in such a fashion as 'to should be tied up. A good overhaul starts when expedite the. insrfection. Grades ara'assigned as your ship enters the yard .and ends with the Outstanding, Excellent, Good, Satisfactory, or 'readiness-for-sea 'trials. It all depends on you and. Unsatisfactory. Hard work and prOper your interest in the job at hand. preparation' yields the former: the latterisa resultof poor ;work and pool . planning. A critiquefollows. .the inspection during which INSPECTIONS deficiencies are covered and'the inspection party gives explanations for gradys given. To maintain the high standards ot .efficiency, and morale on b 4rd nav.il vessels, OPERATIONAL READINESS frequent and varied inspee io s are required. As INSPECTION A a senior electrOan, youii41 be an inspector or . you" may be inspected..The, tul section of this ( chapter will deal with the typ's of inspections The aim o itispeOion istotest-ror generally encountered. combat reaaine'st4:4'ealistic battle proble'm is set up during wh,,VIli,the.ship's'crew goes through ADMINISTRATIVE INSPECTIONS evolutions as neiar.:qo.-.battleconditiOns -as possible. Various pt.2bleins are imposed 'such as Administrative inspections cover tl general . loss -of steering, partul loss of distribution. etc. administration of the ship as- a wholeid the This is where the training you and yo'ur men had ; administrationofeach department. "Tlils in:casualty and damage control has its proving diseussiOn will apply inaMly to the engineering-1,-,.--ground. This inspeetionis 'based not only on. and abilities relating tO the 'department. 401a,r.,knOwledge The purpose of an adMinistrative inspection ship'selectrical systems, but also n ittwofold. One, to learn whetherthe coordination a,--d teamwork. engineering department is'being administeredin.. an intelligent, sound. and efficient manner. And MATERIAl INSPECTION two,' to determine whether the organizational and adMinistrative methods and procedures are Your._ equipmentand your diligcoe.in directed toward the objective of every naval mairitainMg it are the paramoirnt. items ship, namely, ,the readiness to 4,1arry out her consikred in a material inspection. ,The .Board intended mission. of InspectiOn and 'Survey,. When directed by the. CNO ristralty every 3 .years). inspects the ship GENERAL INSPECTION for material condition prior to regular overhaul. OF THE SHIP Their purpoSe is to ascertain the suitabilitY of Our ship for naval service and which repairs, . Denis i this section rt.:fer to the ship as a alt&ations: and design changes should be made. whole. Since you have a responsibility _for junior New' vessels must be inspected by a Board prior men, they too should be borne in mind. Their to final acceptanCe. appearance and that .of their living spaces are of Forces Afloat Inspection Teams .willAn all paramount importance. likelihood,' be composed of men from'another ,Oip of your class. This inspection is conducted Inspection of the usingstandardformsand is preceded by Vngineering Department . conditionsheets upon which you. listyour equipment status. Various pieces of equipment A departmental checkoff is accomplished for willrequiresecuring,opening, andpartial all records and reports which are m_aintained. To disassembly: ' 1, 8 .ELECTRIC1AN'S MATEi & c- A critique will follow anda final report is sent to the type commander. Generally, the fulVOwv andeconolny trials scheduledbythetype commander areof interest td'all engineers, andthe primary task for OPERATIONAL TRIALS the electrician's male is recording the switchboard instrument.readings at preScribed Vations trials are run periodicallyon naval intervals. vessels.Theseincludebuilders, preliminary The othertrialsmentioned will acceptance, final acceptance,post repair, laying varyin workload depen4won the amount of repairs up or preoverhaul, recommisSioning,full power, and economy. which have precededthem or the equipmentt being tested. , 4;4 et 1- 182 170, CHAPTER 1 1 VISUAL ,LANDING AIDS (VLA , Visual landing aids (VLA) are a complement HOMING BEACON to the Light Airborne Multiple Purpose System I(LAMPS). LAMPS is found aboard nonaviation The Hoining Beacon is a high inteniity 'White ships and Consists of ship and air integration in lamp located on the main mast or high on the which a helicppter is used as an extension of the superstructure. *It should be visible for at least shipboard surveillance andottack systems. The 3300 in aziMuth. The beacon has minimuM, oribnalinlegrationconcept of LAMPS was reffectiVe intensity of 1500 candles ove span limited to daytime operations and fair-weather of 7° in elevation and produces 'approxim ly conditions. Because of increasing demands for 90- flashes per minute. The ,intensity of th all-witather andnightoperations,alighting beacon light can be varied from qa`ckout tO full system (VLA) was designed to, aid the LAMPS intensity by a dimmel' control,ph the lighting concept. VLA consists of specially designed control panel. The -homing beqcon is wired in lights to provide the helicopter 'pilot with: two circuits: the motor which turms the reflector is wired to a fixed-voltage circtift (115 volts), while the lamp (150 watt) is,Ilited Through a An initial Visual contaet with the ship stepdowntransformer(115/32Volts)to. a voltage dimMing circuiC 2. A safe glide path to the landing area STABILIZED GLIDE SLOPE 3.Precise infonnation (visual, cues) relative INDICATOR SYSTEM to the shlp's deck position and any obstructions 'that may be present during.launch and recovery Thetabilized Glide Slope Indicator (SGSI) .; operations . system (fFg. 11-2) projects a tri-colored beam of -light centered along a safe glide path to the ship. 4.ViSiial indications for helicopter in-flight The upper sector of the light beam is green, the refueling (HIFR) andvertical replenishment center portion (command path) is aritber, and operations (VERTREP) * the, lower sectorisred. -In opera*. : helicopter _pilot flies into "(acqUires) t 5. Alightingsystemtosignifyany and follows the command path to the unacceptable landing condition aboard' the ship glide slope indicator (GSI) is mount stabilized platform which i't.orripensates e he 6.Various other lighting systems to aid the ship's roll and pitch to keep the project4lig1ide pilot uin operating under the more demanding path steady. - environmental conditions on nonaviation ships. The stabilized GSI sysfem has six -major components (fig. 11-3): All components of the VLA (fig. 11-1) assist both the helicoffter and the ship in comPleting 1.Electronic Enclosure Assembly the assigned mission. 2.Remote Control Panel Assembly . 171 183. ELECTRICIAN'S MATE1 4:c ..(RED) WAVE OFF LIGHTS 4J'i .(GREEtc) 7.,..TaNCHbow ' ' ARE() 0114141 4 (RED OR WHITE) DECK SURFiCE FLOODLIGHTS (RED) EDGE LIGHTS (WHITE) LINE DP LIGHTS , F igure 111.171 installatiwithflight deck, arid hangaron 0-1 level, dual landing approach. (it 172 184 _41)- -, FLIGHT GSI DECK LIGHT SOURCE 111.172 gtc TRAW 4ER ENCLOSURt, FiEMOTE,CONTROL Asvoip,t.y PANEL ASSEMBLY- Figure 11-3.Stabilized glide slppe indicatorsystern. 11-1.173 4111- 173 185 4 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE 1 &C 3.Hydraulic Pump Assembly 4. .Transformer Assembly 5.Glide Slope Indicator PITCH, ROD 6. ,Stabilize0 Platform END PITCH HY D. Electronic Enclosure Assembly CYL.' The ElectronicEnclosure Assembly (fig. PITCH SERV.° 11-4) contains the circuits,amplifiers and other VALV E electrical and electroniccomponents required to control the major componentsof the system. To understand the system operation,it is necessary to understand feedbackcontrol systeths., A feedback control system 111.175 compares an input Figure 11-5,-Platform pitch drive. signal w4th p reference signaland then generates an error signal. This error signal isthertamplifred and used to drive theoutput in a direction to stable, reduce the error. This synchrotransmitterslocated on \the type feedback system is gimbals will sense often referred toas a servo loop. A gyro (fig. any motion of pitcW or roll.. As the ship begins to pitchor roll, an error signal 11-5), mounted on thestabilized platform, acts as the reference Of the system. Since is developed by the synchrotransmitter stators. the gyro is Look at the block diagramin figure 11-6 and follow the path of theerror signal through the electronicenclosureassembly.(Theblock TERMiNL diagram represents eitherthe pitch or the roll BOARDS control loops. Theyare identical electrically.) From the transmittertators the error signal is sent to the gyro demodulator .EOMPONENT PANEL where the signal is ASSEMBLY changed from a.c. to d.c. Thesignal then goes through a stab-lockrelay (:lescribed later) andis ampld as it moves throughthe servo amplifier whiclirn turn operatesthe servO valve. The Servo valve opens ,and allowshydraulic fluid to enter thehydraulicactuator(fig:11-7),thereby leveling the platform andthus cancelling the error signal. When thisoccurs, a READY light is \ actuated on the remotecontrol panel. If the system develops a malfunctionaq tHe error signal is not cancelled,an error-sensing 'circuit will light the NOT READYlight on the-remote ANECI,0% control -panel ana turn off AMPLIFiER the gli4 slope 5 VAC,400 47, tvvERTER indicator. 28 yOC 80.YE8 SUPPLY In the previous paragraphwe discussed the normal mode of operationin the electronics portion of the systeni.-Thestabiaition lock ' 111.174 featUre. (stab-lock relay)tests'and aligns the GSI. Figure 11-4.Efectronic enclqjtire assembly. * Referring to figure 11-8; 11 you will see a stab-lock f. 174 18 6 , Chapter 11VISUAL LANDING AIDS (VLA) MANUAL PUMP CONTROL .* EARTH GYRO S TAB LOCK SERVO SERVO GYRO GR AVITY"'"- . 0 E MOD RE L AY AMPLIFIER VALVE . LV.D T HYDRAULIC DEMOD LV DT ACT UATOW ELECTRONIC ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY PLATFORM TOP GS I 111.176 Figure 11-6.Block diagramstabilization circuits. GSI LIGHT STABILIZED PLATFORM ROD END TOP PLATE ASSEMR LY) GYRO UNIT UNI RSAL7N HYDRAULIC JOINT R-OLL ACTUATOR 77 LVDT 1\111A SERVO VALVE A4, CALL JOINT BASE PLATE 111,177 Figure 11:i.Stabilized,platform asseMblyfunctional diagram. 175 187 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE I '& ERROR RELAV STAB LOCK 9 F 2 6 AMP ON GYRO ELAPSE D TIME mE T ER OFF P3 G YRO PWR 3/4 A P STAB POWER POWER LOCK ON OFF.. EXT PITCH EAT ROLL t.NTERN AL OVER TEMP. TX PUMP SYSTEM ON CIRCU,T, BREAK ER PWR /PUMP 111.178 Figure 11-8.Components panel assembly(lockteci ire Itonicfenclosure assembly). < push button tand two test switches on-off maintenanceandxalgnmenti , oue ofwhickl is pitehlaff-roll. of th Z/estem. 0 As previously Provisions are also ma.de.to drive the platform, - mentioned, the error sigtiff inthe normalmode manuallY usingthe test switches and the manual goesthrouglj astab-lockrelay. When the drive potentiometer ( 11-8 anek fig. stab-lock button is -pushed, the.normal error 1 1-10). signal supplied frovi the:gyro is stopPedat this' 6 point. Loo,k at figure 11-9. Whenthe tab-lock button is pushed, theerror signal comes from Remote Control thelinearvoltagedifferentialtransfornier Panel Assembly' (LVDT) when the testswitch isin the off. position. The core of the LVDT ismechanieally The Remote Control Panel (fig_ attached the hydraulic actuator which levels 11-1 1)iiis located in the flight operationcontrOl rootp. the platrm. As..the actilator moves, thecore also This pahel provides control.andindicators for m yes,itherebysu pplyingasignal operating and monitoring the SGSI 'proportioi t 'from a the aniont of roll or pitch. remote location. It contains the READYand ThtN4gna s can be measured. to,aid in -the lOrti NOT READY lights describedpreviously; The- . 176 188 te Chapter 1 1VISUAL LANDING AIDS (V LA) NOT READY READY VARIAC .REMOTE ERROR CONTROL RELAY T9TRANSFO'RMER SERVO SERVO LAMP AMP VALVE CONTROL REITJAY 1, LVDT DEMOD STAB LOCK PU,SH BUTTON srA 13 `a. ".Loe'k RELAY , 111:179 Figure 11-9.Stabilization control.circuitssignal flow. ERROR + V DETECTOR MANUAL PLATFORM CONTROL AMPLIFIER, ACTUATOR 1 TOP POT TEST SW. FEEDBACK PATH LVDT 1A.180 Figure 11,10.LVDT,seryoop. 177 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE 1 & Q; ADY lOVER TEMP1OVER TEMP PANEL SOURCE LIGHT' FAILURE ILLUMINATION 4 ,6 .7 -8 11, I 9 0 ,/, 111.181 Figure 11-11.Remote control panel assembly. panel also .cOntains two OVERTEMPlights to oil pressure. Hydraulic' fluid heaters in indicate when the hydraulic fltiid is thetooil heated o a ,,reservairmaintainthetemperatureat' temperature higher than 135° F -±5.°:,a source approxiinately 90° F ±r, failure light to indicate thatone or More of the- GSI source lightsare .burned;..out ;a variable '- --transformer tO control the intensity ofGSI light; Transformet Assembly and a panel illuminatiorisontrol.A standby light will be energize,d when the main Switch on-the Tte Transformer Assemblyis electronic,enclosure assetnbly is located as close es Possible to the gtabilized platform.Its Purpose isto step down the voltage, for the Hydratijic Pu'rnp A*mbly source light (GSI) from 155 VAC to 18.517AC. , The Hydraulic 'Pump> Assembly (tit;;. : 2) Glide Slope Indicator (GSr)' is located as close as possibleto the stzibilized platform. It provides hydraulic fluid.at1400 psi, to The Glide' Slope Indicator (fig. 11-13A)'s a the hydraulic actuatoron the stabilized . celLassembly_ madeupofthree ain platform. The motor and contr011eroperate On Seetions=the lamp houseassembly, the 'light , 440 V 3 O received from normalship't power. tunnel, and the temperature conttol seCti*:The SiiPply. The -4kemperature switches (nof shoN)). lamP house asseinbly(fig.11-1313') contains operate the HIGH TEMp light..On the iOrnOfe three source lights, control pokl. A1b, a avent fah ito co's:A the pressure $witchl in the section, ad optical lens,)(nOtshowp),.reflec'tors, hjdraulic pump discharge line wiltclose at 1200. etc. The light ;tunnel provides space flor,thc fOcal psi.If _notclosed, the'. pressur0 switch wilt lengthofthelensto .4106 Th% deenergiie the electronic panel arnblyoiilow teMperatureconqolsectfvn . (fig. 11-13CY 178 .190 7,0 'AO Chatiter --VISUAL LANDING AIDS (VLA) HYDRAULIC FLUID TEMP SWITCH (NOT SHOWN) A HYDRAU L C MOTOR CONTROLLER FLUI D HEATER JUNCTION BOX ELEC TRIC MOTO ri HYDRAULIC FLUID FILTER COU P.LI4G HYDRAULIC AS SEM BLY PUMP s, 111.182 FigUre'11-12.-Hydraulicpump assembly. ft contains the..fresnel lens which iss nsitiye to -S!,,circulate the heated- air throughout the cell teinperature. To maintain c'onstaht temperature, , *assembly. . two heaters, each haYing a bIoviet arelnounted .on- either sine Of the cell assembly. Each heater Stabilized Platform Aisembly -.N. controlled by 4+, ! thermostat whith maintains TheStabilizedPlatformAi...c,nljolISf(fig. the temperature...at 100° F -±3°. The bloweri. 11-14),which will umain level dOpite':the pitch `.\ 4 P 179 1I ELCTRICIAN'S' .MAT-E. 1gc, LIGHT TUNNEL BLOWER .MOTOR 'AND FAN ASSEMBLY TEMP URE CONT. L SECTION AiR E)diAUST PROJEOTION LAMP SHROUD r LOUVER ASSeMBLY BLOWER,(82). f' COOL AIR INLET ! 'NE ATER (HI) 0 . 'BLOWER (13I) T HE,RMOS Wttaki ( I ) FiIiGHT:NA'ND SIDE Vt. Figure 11-13.=-A. Glide Wipe indiCator; B. Lamp house assemblif; C. Temperature controlsection. ,1 80 19.2s f Cha.pter 11VISUAL LANDING AIDS e(VLA) EDGE LIGHTS The edge lights outline the yeriphery of the obstruction-free ,.helicopterdeN-- area with a minimum of ,four lights along each edga of the area. Edge.lights are red omnidirectional lamps which can be 'seen in any direction above deck level. 'They are connected toethe low voltage side of a 115/12 volt stepdown transformer. The 115 vorl side of each transformer '(onetransformer 111.184 per light fixture) is connected to a motor-driven Figure 11-14.Stabilized platform assembly. _ variable transformer whicji controls the intensity of tile lights. and roll attitude of the ship, providesa mount for the GSI. The :assembly, shewn in0 figure 11-15,,consists of a stabilized platform attached LINE-UP LIGHTS to two hydraulic actuators (pitch and roll) which maintain the platform level, at all times. The Line-Up Lights are white and flash in The block diagram in figure 11-16 shows the sequence. They are installed on the deck along complete system interconnected. . the line-up line,for deck landing. Line-up lights STABILIZED PLATFORM PITCH ROLL ACTUATOR ACTUATOR PITCH - - PITCH ROLL _ ROLL ERROR SERVO SBRVO VALVE vALVE / ERROR ELECTRICAL \ ELECTRICAL .,CON.TROL CONTROL SIGNAL SIGNAL ../.. MANIFOLD HIGH RETURN PRESSURE ACCUMULATOR LINE ACCUMULA TOR (750 PSI) (30 PSI) HYDRAULIC HYDRAULIC PRESSURE RETURN INPUT PRESSURE (1400 PSI) .(75 PSI) 111.185 Figure 11-15.Function diagram of the stabilized platform assembly. 181 ELECTRICIAN'S \MATh 1 .& C LIGHTING CONTROL ELECTRICAL PANEL HYDRAULIC, GLIDE SLOPE MECHANICAL DIMMER INDICATOR ASSY. SWITCH TRANSFORMER STABILIZED ASSY. PLATFORM VARIABLE ELECTRONICS TRANSFORMER ENCLOSURE ASSY. MOTOR-DRIVEN 4, VARIABLE TRANSFORMER HYDRAULIC 1 PUMP ASSY. . FLASH SEQUENCER REMOTE CONTROL PANEL ASSY. III 440 V, 60 Hs, 3 fi 120 V, 60 H. POWER SUPPLY POWER SUPPLY ITRANSFORMER 111.186 Figure 11-16.Stabilized glide slope indicatoi 1 systemblock diagram. TO LIGHT FIXTURE 111.18 areeitherunidirectionalorbidirectional Figure 11-17.-8implified interconnection of line-up dependent on the ship'S landing capability. Each lights. lamP is connected to the secondary side ofa 115/6.5 volt stepdown transformer. The primary is connectedtoamotor-driVen,variable line-up lights and extend above the flight-defk transformer (intensity) and a flash -sequencer level. In other words, these,lights merely extend (fig. 11-17). theline-uplightsforwardtoprovidethe helicopter pilot with final position information FLASH SEVUENCER forthetouchdown maneuver duringnight .landing operations. The extended line-up lights The Flash Sequencer (flg.11-.18), is wired are a minimum of six individual light fixtures into the line-up lights to provide the ,helicopIer either monnted vertically to a bulkhead oron a pilot with additional visual cues and depth light 'bar assembly mounted to the.flight deck. perception during night landing approach. The Each extended line-up light fixture is.connected cam operated unit sequentially flashes 9 to 10 to a 6.5 -,Volt secondary of a' 1200.5 volt line-uplights. On Sh.%with both port -and stepdown transformer. The primariet of the starboard aPproach, flash sequencer Must be transformers are connected to the same circuit capable of producingashes (sirobing) of either as the deck-installed, line-up lights. port4 or starboard line-up lights- ,asNelected by controls on the lighting control p,11,,e1..\ . , , VERTICAL DROP-LINE LIGHTS EXTENDED LINE-It LIGHTS , Vertical Drop-Line Lights ar.e red and serve Extended Line-Up Lights ar teh,lights as an aft extension of the deck-installed, line-up installed at the forward end of the ailed lights.Thelightbar assemblyisinstalled 182 194 Chapter 11.7-VISUAL LAN113411 A.IDS (VLA) 'ft44:41/34. j. FLASH,. , SEaUENCER PANEL GEAR .RACK . 0, MOTOR END BASE PLATE KNURLED KNOB 'DRIVE GEAR CAM Nb, I CAM NO.2 CAM NO.10 DIRECTIdN, OF SHAFT ROTATION IS CLOCKWISE, WHEN LOOKING AT END OPPOSITE DRIVE GEAR ,1 111.188 Figure,11-18.Flash sequencer panel and ti'mer asiembly. 183 1 9 5 4104-'4 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE' I 8c., immediately aft of the lan'ding line-up lights and WAV4FOLIGHT SYStEM contains four to six red lights ,..vhich extend below the f4ht deck in the vertical plane. These Thp'4Wai;,-Off Light,(WOL) ysterrinefig. lightsprovidethehelicoptecpilotwith 11-19) prOvidis a vistial+ cue to the pilot that Continuous line lip durihg night approach when la n ding ';cOnditionsaboardtheshipare deck-installedline-uplightscantnOtbe seen unaCceptable. TlIt-gystein consists of nine major because of Mt ship's motion. The ,drop-line bar components: assembly operates from a single 120/12 volt 1.Mater Control Panel Assembly stepdown transformer/enclosure asse,mbly which ,2. Two Reihote/Panel Asseniblies , iswiredtoa motor-driven,priable voltage 3: Two-Plug InQunction BoN Assemblies' . traptformer (dimmer). 4. Terminal Junction Box Assembly. 5.. Two Wave-Off Light Assmblies 6.Portabl Switch TOUCHDOWN LIGAT Master Control Panel The TouchdownLightis, a een, omnidirectional light lOcated at the centerf the The Master Control Panel (fig., 11-20) is touchdoWg circle to indicate to the pil the located in the flight.control station. It functions desitaliding .spot. The 'light is wired to a to control the power for the WOL, houses the 115/12-voltstepdowntranSformer,an its electronic circuitry to control intensity and hash intensity is controlled by the same di er as rate of the WOL, permits operation of the WOL, the edge lights. and indicates which station has control. WAVE OFF LIGHT MASTER ASSEMBLY CONTROt. PORTABLE PANE t '1 14 .a.-- REMOTE PANEL ASSEMBLY . JUNCTION BOX PLUG IN JUNCTION, BOX i , 111.189 % Figure 11-19.Wave-off light system. 184 196 , Chaptti 11 2VISIJAU LANDING. AIDS (VLA) E r or , SYSTEM 'ON \ /* ' \ ./1.- WAVE-OFF MASrER, FLIGHT , PANEL 'C o.A4 M AND CONTROL BRIDGE .. LOCATION DECK 0 WAVE.OFF SWITCH. r I AMP MASTER (CONTROL PANEL 'WAVE- OFF SYST M Y DEPAP NAVAL AIR SYS? MAND MANUFACT Y F igu re 11-20.Master control panel. 185 197 ELE,CTRIdAN'S MATE P & c Remote Panel Assembly Wave-Off Light Assembly 7 .The Remote Panel Assembly (fig.11-21) The Wave-Off Lights are located one oh allows the WOL to be operated froth,remote either side of the GSI. Figure 11-22 shows stations located at the captain's bridge and flight interconnection,of the VOL system. control station. FORWARD STRUCrURE/DECK Plug In Junction SURFACE-FLOODLIGHTS Box Assembly) Two plug in junction boxes are containain Red or white floodlights are provided to one assembly: 'The junction boxes are located illuminate any structure forwardof the landing one.on either side of the hangar 'door\ to permit area and td provide greater dep_th perception to plug in of a pOrtable switch to operate the WOL the pilot during.,night pperations. At least two pn the flight deck. fixtures, -one port and one starboard, must be installed and adjusted to illuminate the aft face of the hangar as'well as structures forward of the Terminal Junction landing area. Other fixtures are installed and Box Assembly adjusted to illuminate the landing area itself. These fixtures are connected to a motor-driven ,. TheTerminaljunction. Box 'Assembly variable transformer (intensity): Each fixture is contains the terminals for the connections to the connected to the low voltage side of a separate WOL and the Master Control Parrel. 120/30 vOlt stepdown transformer. MAINTENANCEFLOODLIGHTS . Red Maintenance FlOodlights. are reqUired for nighr preflight and postflight ma41tenance. The floodlightassembly consists of alight fixture,' lamp-, redfilter, ,,,on/off switch and support. The light is wired to the ship's 120-volt, 60-Hz, i(1) power supply. . OVERHEAD FLOODLIGHTS . 1 _Red or white overhead floodlights provide illiimination of the helicopter deck for support ,of night; operations. These lights _are itiounted above the landing area and are, connected to a motor-driven variable transformer. 0 WAVE -OFf SYSTEM 0 REMOTE PANEL ASSEMBLY IIELICOPTER IN-FLIGHT REFUELING -HEADVG LIGHTS (HIFR) H elicop terIn-FlijVRefuelingHeading 111.191 Lighis are red and arreiquired fdr helicopter Figure 11-24.Remote panel assembly. refuelingoperation's.Theselightsgivethe 186 198 . 'PORTABLE SWITCW'r 111.192 Figure 11-22.Wave-off light system. , lrlicopter pilot a visual indication oft_theship's distanceaid extending forward. headingatalltimes and All HIFR provide' a height heading Lights are installed at thesame height, referce during in-flight refueling operations. approximately 30 to 40 feet, above the Thr\eX red HIFR.heading lights ship's are installed waterline. All lights are controlled bYa single fOrward`lo aft on the port side ofthe ship ih a on/off switch located line parallel fo the ship's centerline, on the lighting control (heachng). panel, and are a standard watertightassembly Spacing betWeen the lights is,approximately 20 feet, consisting, of a lighting fixture, red glob.e,and a beginning outsidetherotor clearance, 115-volt, 50.-watt rough service lamp. 187 ELECTRI.CIAN'S.MATE1 & , LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL o.0 StROBE . LINE.UP [VERT DROP LiNfl OVERHEAD -5 5 -5 :t m. 7.C-4 :-Urt 0S12 0Sn 0SIO 590 Se0 0ST Om 0. OM (:) oFF ci OFIF OFF OFF OFF 0OFF ?PPR NON NCJIEACON EDGE TOUCHDOWN DECK SURFACE HANGAR !SLUM SPARE PANELALLUAS . 111.193 Figure.11-23.Lighting.control panel. VERTICAL REPLENISHMENT arrangement,however,- precludesthe (VERTREP) LIGHTS siniultaneous energizing of both the landing approach line-pp lights and the VERTREP/hovet 5VERTREP line-uR lights are bidirectional line-up lights. fixtures for VERTREP/licwer approaches and theyforman athwartship .pathat approximately 8- to 12-foot intervals. Spacing LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL between lights is uniform and such that the 'ci pilot's view ofthelights is not obstructed during The Lighting CdntraPanel (fig. 11-23) that the helicopter's approach. When installdlin controls the lightsin Ow. YLA package are landing areas equipped with landing approach installed on all ships which conduct helicopter line-up lights, the VERTREP line-up lights are' operations athight. This control panel is located 'connected to the same dimmer as the landing at the helicopter control stationnd consists of appr6ach line-up lights. The circuit switching switches, diMmers and red indicator lamps. The 188 200 r-, ' PANEL ILUMI- NATION L __ __ L _ Fi:ASH SEOUVER VOTOR- :VT DRIVEN:, VARIABLE TRANS- FORMEp 4 HIFR . I I HANGAR VERTICAI LIGHTS ILLUMINATION DROP-LIN LIGHTS LIGHTS ,m 4 EDGE LIGHT PORT STBD PORT STBD VERTREP I:AMP MOTOR' LIGHTS LANDING TOUCHDOWN, OVERHEAD 'DECK HOMING BEACON LINE-UP LIGHTS LIGHT ' FLOOD LIGHTS FI!OODLI'GHTS Figure 11-24,SirnPlified line diagr'am of the lighting control panel. 2 01 \ 4 MOTOR- QRIVEN, VARIABLI TRANS- FORMERS HANGAR VERTICAL ILLUMINATIN DROP-LINE LIGHTS LIGHTS PORT STBD ORTe STBD VERTREP LIGHTS , LANDING TOUCHDOWN OVERHEAD DECK INE7UP LIGHTS LIGHT FLOOD LIGHTS FLOODLIGHTS 111.194 tigure 11-24.Simplified line diagram of the lighting ,controlpanei. 202 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE 1 & C- dimmers are variable autothmsfortnefsmounted inthecontrolpanel of remotely located autotransformers controlled by potentiometers in the control panel. The. lightingcontrol panel requirs input poer' at 120 volt, 60 Hzand is designed to accommodate the applicabklight t:quipmentdiscussed in the preceding- paragraphs.Figure 11-24isa simplified line diagram of fhe lighting cOntrol MOTOR-DRIVENVARIALE TRANSFORMERS Motor-drivn remote variable transformers' (fig. 11-2-5) are used in the VLAlighting control system to control the intensity of thevarious 111'1954. lights.Therearefour10-ampereandtwO Figure 11-25.Motor-driven variable trAnsformer. 22-amp,eretransformersin .- the systernThe PiOSITION DETECTORaMOTOR ENCLOS1-7q1 POSITION' DETECTOR DETECTOR CIRCUIT RE FE REN1t 9 FEEDBACK POWER POWER 0 11111. S UPPLY 61 SUPPLY I I LOWER RAISE .1 A A 20 01 90 09 CAMS ILIMIT SWITCHc5 R I C I RED B1.2.SAK. MOTOR MOTOR L._ ASSY _ i20 LIGHTING co -z CONTROL ;UPP._ NE 0 NEL 3 5 REMOTE CONTROL VARIABLE 0-120 V POTENTIOMETER 60 HZ TRANSFORMER' OUTRUT Figure.11-26.Motor-driven remote variable transformercircuit diagram. 111.196 190 r2 0 3 Chapter 11VISUAL LANDING AjbS (VLA)_ , 22-amperetransf rmersareusedwith the The detector circuit consists of a comparator overhead and deck surface floodlights and the andsolidstateswitches (TRIACS) which 10-amperetransformersafeusedwith` the energizeeithgr theclockwise( OWER) or following lights: counterclockwise (RAISE) winding o e drive motor. l'he drive motor rotates the wipeshaft 'on the transformer in the prop,er direction until 1.Hangar illumination floodlights the feedback voltage equals the reference, and 2.Line-up lights the motor stops at a position Corresponding to 3..Vertical drop-line lights the desired light intensity. -Cam-operated limit switches open the motor circuit and prevent Ulf 4.Edge and touchdown lights motor from driving the.wiper on the transformer beyond the upper and lower stops. Inputpowerisappliedtothevariable transformer, and, the controlled 0 to 120 VAC output is connectejl to the lights (fig.11-26). MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS The transformer wiper (secondary) is moved by C. the synchronous motor which is controlled by The VLA system contains many electrical the potentiometer ih the lighting control panel. and electronic components which require both The detector circuit in the position preventiveandcorrectivemaintenance.The- determines from the setting of the-remo e components that we have discussed in this control potentiometer whether the motor turns chaptercontain .manymotorS,controllers, inadirection to raise or lower the outpui blowers, heaters, pressure switches, and lighting voltage. fixturesthatareexposedto weather. The electronicportionsaresolidstateandare The reference power supply in the position primarilyonprintedcircuitcards.Ar an detector converts a.c. input voltage to d.c., and Electrician's Mate you can realize some of the thepotentiometerin 'thecontrol panel problems which will be encountered both with Otermines themagnitude of d.c.reference 'electrical and electronic, parts. It is of utmost voltagesenttothedetectorcircuit.The importancethatyoufollow all PMS feedback power supply in the position detector requirements carefully to keep all portions of convertsthea.c.ohtputvoltagefrom the thissystemoperatingeffectively.When variabletransformer toaproportionald.c. performing any corrective action, always refer to voltage which is also sent to the detector circuit. the manufacturer's technical manuals. y, T.. , AOREN DIX 1 TEttAkRATORECONVERSION TABLE Numbers in ttle renteit_ ablumn-(between those-marked---An4-9-refer-totempergure-,-either Centigrade or Fahrenifiiit, which itis desired to convert into the other scale.aoconvert from Fahrenheit fo Centierade find equivalent temperature in lefthind column marked C; in like manner fmd equivalent temperature in right hand columnwhen Converting from Centigrade to Fahrenheit. Example: 50 F: is 10 C.; 50 C. is 122 F. e. F. C. F. C. F. C. F. -12.2 10 50.0 4.4 40 104.4 21.1 , 70 158.0 37.8 100 212.0 -11.7 11 51.8 5.0 41 105.8 21.7 71 159.8 38.9 102 215.6 -11.1 4 12 53.6 5.6 42 107.6 22.2 72 161.6 40.0 104 219.2 -10.6 13 55.4 6.1 43 109.4 22.8 73 163.4 41..1 106 222.8 -10.0 14 57:2 6.7 44 111.2 23.3 74 165.2 42.2 108 226.4 - 9.4/ 15 59.0 7.2 45 113.0- 23.9 - 8.9 75 167.0 43.3 110 230.0 16 60.8 7.8 46 114.8 24.4 76 168.8 44.4 112 233.6 - 8.3 17, 62.6 8.3 447 116.6 25.0 77 170.6 45.6 114 237.2 - 7.8 18 64.4 8.9 48 118.4 25.6 78 172.4 46.7 116 240.8 - 7.2 19 t6.2 49 120.2 26.1 79 174.2 47.8 118 244.4 6.7 20 68.0 10.0 50 122.0 26.7 80 176.0 48.9 120 248.0 -6.1 21 69.8 10.6 51 123.8 27.2 81 177.8 50.0 122 251.6 - 5.6 22 71.6 11.1 52 125.6 27.8 82 179.6 51.1 124 255.2 - 5.0.23 73.4 11.7 53 127.4 28.3 83 181.4 52.2 126 258.8 - 4A 24 75.2 12.2 54 129.2 28.9 84 183.2 53.3 128 262.4 - 3.9 25 77.0 12.8 55 - 3.3 131.0 29.4 8.5 185,0 54.4 130 266.0 26 78.8 13.3 56 132.8 30.0 86 186.8 55.6 132 269.6 - 2.8 27 80.6 13.9 57 134.6 30.6 87 188.6 56.7 134 273.2 - 2.2 28 82.4 14.4 58 136.4 31.1 88 190.4 57.8 136 276.8 - 1.7 29 84.2 15.0 59 138.2 31.7 89, 192.2 58.9 138 280.4 1.1 30 86.0 15.6 60 140.0 32.2 90 194.0 60,0 140 284.0 - 0.6 31 87.8 16.1 61 141.8 32.8 91 195.8 61.1 142 287.6 0.0 32 89.6 16.7 62 143.6 , 33.3 92 197.6 62.2 144 29L2 + 0.6 33 91.4 17.2 63 145.4 133.9 93 199.4 63.3 146. 294.8 1.1' 34 93:2 17.8 "64 147.2 34.4 94 201.2, 64.4 148 298.4 1.7 35 95.0 18.3 .65 149.0 35.0 95 203.0 2.2 36 96.8 18.9 66 150.8 35.6 96 2048 . 2.8 37 98.6 19.4 67 152.6 36.1 97 206.6 3.3 38 100.4 20.0 68 154.4 36.7 98 208.4 3.9 39 102.2 20.6 69 156.2 37.2- 99 210.2 205 192 APPENDIX II TitMETRIC SYSTEM The metric systein was developed by French , WiTh-the exception -611he United-State's, all scientists in 1790 and was specifically designed theindustrialized nations of the world -have to be an.: easily used system nf weights and adopted the metric system. Even England and measurestobenefitscience,industry,and Canada arechanging fromtheirtraditional commerce. The metric systemiscalculated systems of measure, and the metric system will entirely in powers of 10, so one need not work be almost universal by 1980. with the various mathematical bases used with Although the .metric system has not been the F itlish system, such as 12 inches to a foot, officially legislated by the-Congress, the metric 3 feet to a yard, and 5280 feet to a mile. system is becoming more prominent inthis The system is based on the "meter" which is country. Most automobile mechanics own some one ten-millionth of the distancefrom the metric wrenches to work on foreign cars or Equator to the North Pole. Itis possible to foreign components in American cars. Almoss all develop worldwide standards from this base of photographicequipmentisbuilttometric measurement. The metric system of weigbts is standards. Chemicals and drugs are usually sold- bassd on the gram, which is the weight of a in metric quantities, and "calorie counters" are specific quantity of water. using a metric unit of thermal energy. Soonafterthesystemwas developed Because we are allied with countries who use scientists over the world adopted it and were themetricsystem,much ofourmilitary abletodeal with the mathematics of their information is in metrielerms. Military maps use e xperimentsmoreeasily.Thedataand meters and kilometers instead of miles, and particulars of their work could be understood by many weapons are in metric sizes, such as 7.62 othar scientists anywhere in the world. During mm, 20 mm, 40 mm,5 mm, and 155 mm. the early 19th century many European nations Interchange of military equipment has caused a adopted the new system for engineering and mixtureofmetricandEnglishmeasure cottirrierce. It was possible for these countries to equipment since World War I when the army trade manufactured goods with one another adopted the French 75 mm field gun, and World without worrying whether it would be possible War II when th9 Navy procured the Swedish 40 torepair machinery from another country - mm Bofors and the Swiss 20 mmOerlikon heavy withoutals6 buyingspecialwrenchesand machine guns. measuring tools. Countries cou0 buy and sell Itis inevitable that the United States will machinetools and other sophisticated and officially adopt the metriv systejn. Exactly when p re c i s ion machinerywithouttroublesome this happens and how rapidly 'the changeover modifications or alterations. It was much easier will depend on economics, since the expense of to teach the inetilc system, since meters can be retooling our industry and commerce to new changed to kilometers or centimeters with the measurements will be very great. The cost of movement of a decimal point, which is roughly conversion will be offset by increased earnings like being able to convert yards to miles or from selling machinery and products overseas. inches by adding zeros and a decimal instead of Another benefit is that scientists use the metric multiplying by 1760 or dividing by 36. system, but their calculations now have to be .193 206 .ELECTRICIAN'SMATE 1 & C translated into English'measure to be used. by. industry.' With adoption'of The basic quantities ofthe,metric sYsteni are the metric system multiplied or divided by ideas can go directly fromthe drawing board to powers of 10 to give the assembly line. other workable values. Wecannot easily measure . machine partsinterms of a meter, The Navy will be usingthe metric System so the millimeter, or one-thousandth ofa meter is used. more duriqg the next fewyears. Although you For very fine will fin'd it easier to solveproblems using-this measure the micron, also called the sYstem, at. first micrometer, can be used. It isone-millionth part you will finditdifficultto of a meter, or one-thousandth visualize or to estimatequantities in unfamiliar of a millimeter. units of meaSure. For small weights themilligram, one-thousandth of a gram is used. All ofthese multiplesare Fortunately, many metricunits canbe expressedwith standard prefixes ._ taken from_ related-to equivalent-units-M-the-EngliSh-Syste ni The meter bichisthebasicunitis approximately one-tenth longerthan a yard. micro I /1,000,000 milli The basicunitof' volume,the-liter,is =1/1,000 approximately one quart. Thegram is the weight centi =1/100 of a cubic centimeter,or milliliter, of pure water *deci =1/10 and is the basic unit ofweight. As a common *deca =10 weight though, the kilogram,or kilo, which *4iecto =100 equals the weight ofa liter of water, weighs 2.2 kilo =1,000 pounds. The cubic centimeter(cc) is used where *myria =10,000 we would use the square inch,and where we mega =1,000,000 measure by the fluid ounce, themetric system employs the milliliter (m1).For power measure * Rarely used the metric systemuses the kilowatt (kW), which approximately 1.3 horsepower. Over the next fewyears the metric system In will become more used by termsofdistance,....alandmileis the NavY as wellas by eight-fifths of a kilometer anda nautical mile is the civilian.world. Youwill find it easy to Work 1.852 kilometers,or nearly 2 kilometers. with .once you have masteredthe basic terms. It will 6e difficult A basic metric expression to translate values fromour of pressure is the present system to the metric kilogram per squarecentimeter, which iS 14.2 system, but this psi, nearly I atmosphere of operation will becomeunnecessary once the new pressure. measurements are totally adopted. When workingon foreign machinery,you . may notice Tables of equivalentEnglish measure and that your half-inch,three-quarter metric equivalents inch, and one-inch wrencheswill fit many of the are essential when you work bolts. These sizes correspond simultaneously with bothsysteMs. The table to 13 mm, 19 min, which follows shows the and 26 inni respectivelyin the metric system, equivalent measures of' and the two systems. Thecolumns on the left have areverypopularbecausetheyare interchangeable. the equivalent valueswhich are accurate enough The1346-inch sparkplug formostwork, and on the wrench, which is standardin this country, is rightarcthe intended to fita 20 multiples used to convertthe values witha high pun nut. degree of' accuracy. 2 0 7 194 METRIC CONVERSION _ CONVERSION OF INCHES TO MILLIMETERS CONVERSION OF MILLIMETERS TO INCHES Inches Inches Milli- Inches Milli- Milli- Inches InChes Milli- Inches meters meters metess meters meters meters 0.001 0.025 0.290 7.37 0.660 16.76 0.01 0.0004 0.35 0.0138 0.68 0.0268 0.002 0.051 0.300 7.62 0.670 17.02 0.02 0.0008 0.36 0.0142 0.69 0.0272 0.003 0.076 0.310 7.87 0.680 17.27 , 0.03 )3.0012 0.37 0.0146 0.70 0.0276 0.004 0.102 0.320 8.13 0.690 17.53 0.04 0.0016 0.38 0.0150 0.71 0.0280 0.005 0.1/7 0.330 8.38 0.700 17.78 p.05 0.0020 0.39 0.0154 0.72 0.0283 0.006 0.152 0.340 8.64 0.710 18.03 0.06 0.0024 0.40 0.0157 033 0.0287 0.007 0.178 0.350 8.89 0.720 18.29 0.07 0.0028 0.41 0.0161 0.74 0.0291 0.008 0.203 0.360 9.14 0.730 1834 0.08 0.0031 0.42 0.0165 0.75 0.0295 0.009 0.229 0.370 9.40 0.740 18.80 0.09 0.0035 0.43 0.0169 0.76 0.0299 0.010 0.254 0.380 9.65 0.750 19.05 0.10 0.0039 0.44 0.0173 0.77 0.0303 --- -0,020-- 0.308 0.390 9.91 . 0.760 19.30 0.11 0.0043 0.45 0.0177 0.78 0.0307 0.030 0.762 0.400 10.16 01770 19.56 0.12 0.0047 0.46 0.0181 9.79 0.0311 0.040 1.016 0.410 10.41 0.780 19.81 0.13 0.0051 0.47 0.0185 0.80 0.0315 0.050 1.270 0.420 10.67 0.790 20.07 0.14 0.0055 0.48 0.0189 0.81 0.0319 0.060 1.524 0.430 10.92 0.800 20.32 0.15 0.0059 0.49 0.0193 0.82 0.0323 0.070 1.778 0.440 11.18 0.810 20.57 0.16 0.0063 0.50 0.0197 0.83 0.0327 0.080 2.032 0.450 11.43 0.820 20.83 0.17 0.0067 0.51 0.0201 0.84 0.0331 0.090 2.286 0.460 11.68 0.830 21.08 0.18 0.0071 0.52 0.0205 0.85 0.0335 0.100 2.540 0.470 11.94 0.840 21.34 0.19 0.0075 0.53 0.0209 0.86 0.0339 0.110 2.794 .0.480 12.19 0.850 21.59 0.20 0.0079' 0.54 0.0213 0.87 0.0343 0.120 3.048 0.490 12.45 0.860 21.84 0.21 0.0083 0.55 0.0217 0.88 0.0346 0.130 3.302 0.500 12.70 0.870 22.10 0.22 0.0087 0.56 0.0220 0.89 0.0350 0.140 3.56 0.510 12.95 0.880 22.35 0.23 0.0091 0.57 0.0224 0.90 00354 *0.150 3.81 0.520 13.21 0.890 22.61 0.24 0.0094 0.58 0.0228 0.91 0.0358 0.160 4.06 0.530 13.46 0.900 22.86 0.25 0.0098 0.59 0.0232 0.02 .0.0362 0.170 4.32 0.540 13.72 0.910 23.11 j 0.26 0.0102 0.60 0.0236 0.93 0.0366 0.180 4.57 0.550 13.97 0.920 23.37 0.27 0.0106 0.61 0.0240 0.94 0.0370 0.190 4.83 0.560 14.22 0.939 23.62 0.28 0.0110 0.62 0.0244 0.95 0.0374 0.200 5.08 0.570 14.48 0.940 23.88 0.29 0.0114 0.63 0.0248 0.96 0.0378 0.210 5.33 0.580 14.73 0.950 24.13 0.30 0.0118 0.64 0.0252 0.97 0.0382 0.220 5.59 0.590 14.99 0.960 24.38 0.31 0.0122 0.65 0.0256 0.98 0.0386 0.230 5.84 0.600 15.24 0.970 24.64 0.32 0.0126 0.66 0.0260 0.99 0.0390 0.240 6.10 0.610 15 .49 0.980 24.89 0.33 0.0130 0.67 0.0264 1.00 0.0394 0.250 6.35 0.620 15.75 0.990 25.15 0.34 0.0134 .. . 0.260 6.60 0.630 16.00 1.000 25.40 0.270 6.86 0.640 16.26 ...... 0.280 7.11 0.650 16.51 195 208 INDEX ., . ,., 4N A Compa. s failure annunciator,106 Compe f ption,circuit, droop andcross curtent, Administration, maintenance, 163-170 57-6 I Administrativedinspections, 169 Cotpensation signAls,1.09 AdvanCeMent system, navy enlisted, 3, Components, no break power supplie117 '. . Alarm sYgem, 113 .Conditions of readiness, engineering', 148-1150 start inge.tontrOl systems, 113 '. Conneaing And disconnecting shore'power, AlteratiOns:aad repairs, 165 , 16-19 , Annigieialtgr,,Ompass failurei, 106 supervising, 17 ApOendixii tAkierature 6onversion tatilecin.., work aloft, 18 Appendix IINhe metric system, 193-195 Control devices, transistorized, 50-75 Automatic OegatTing, 76=85 .P Controls, g"focompass, 106-110 AMomAtiirvO1tage regulator; 43-48 Azimuth 4Wup system, 110;311 rc11;aI h'folloWuP systerri, 1!,7113. ' Damp windings, 126 Degaussing, automatic, 76-85 Battery lockers, 15. Degaussing remote control unit, 83 Battle casualties, 159-161 Diesel electrk d.c. drive (fleet tug)casualties, casualty power system, 160 , 159 damaged cable and equipmeriti 1"59 control console casualty, 159 Billet, EM, 3 . propulsion generator casualty,1 59 Direct acting rheostat voltageregulator, 25-30 Droop and cross current compensationcircuit, 57-61 Avi. Career program, 1-9 Duties, 3 , Casualties, operating, 154-159 Casualty control, engineering, 147-162 Casualty control mission, 147 Casualty control organization, 1 50-1 54 casualty control board, 151 EG-M control box, 141-143 propulsion repair party, 151-154 Ecrg hydraulic actuator, 137-140 repair 5 responsibilities, 154 EM billet, 3 watch teams, 151 duties, 3 Casualty control training, 161 Edge lighti, 181 conducting and supervising electrical Electric plant casualties, 157-159 cailyttlty drills, 162 Electric shock, 10 196 209 INDEX Electrical safety precautions, 12 Gyrocompass records and logs,113-1IS battery lockeri, 15 Gyrocompasses, 86-I16 ' portable metal case electrical equipment, 13 H removing meters and instrument. transformers, 1-6 Helicopte'r in-flight refueling heading lights, servicing switch boards, 15 186-188 solvents and volatile liquids, 1 3-1 5 High voltage warning sign, 19 work area safety, 12-16 . Homing beacon; 171 Electrohydraulic load-sensing speed governors, 1354M Enforci*s4fety, 22 En rufg' asua1ty control, 147-162 nditions of re diness, 148-150 Inspections,.169 chinery, 148-150 administrative, 169 n units,148 general, 169 . ertt dentifTcatioñ code master index Aaterial, 169 (EileAanual), 164 .operational readiness, 169 Equipment, test, 19-21 Inverter, Itatic, 126,134 Exciter, 50 Extended line-up lights, 182 Jeli;:r? Airy rigs, 21 W.)4, Field flashing,"67 Flash sequencer, 182 Lighting control panel, 188-190 .-4 Followup systems, 100, 110-113 7 Line-up lights, 181 z 'azimuth; 110-113 Load signal box, 143-11'7, spider, 100 Logs and records, gyrocoNit , 113-115 Forward structure/deck surface floodlights, 186 Free gyroscope, 86-93 . converting.the gyioscope into a compass, 90-93 effect of earth's rotation, 89 MDCS documentation, 165 gyrocompass errors, 93 Lt* Maintenance actions, recording of, 164 gyroscopic properties, 87-89 Maintenance administration; 163-170 three degrees of freedom, 87 Maintenance floodlights, 186 Frequency difference monitoring,circuit, 70-74 Maintenance, no break power supplies, 126 Frequency discriminator, 124-126 damp windings, 126 Frequency and voltage regulation, 2349 oil soaked windings, 126 Maintenance and repair, gyrocompass, 115 Maintenance requirements, 191 Man-hour accounting system, 165 Material inspection, 169 Meridian gyro control system, 106-108 wGeneral inspection of a ship, 169 '. Generator field rectifier,122-124 Metric system, Appendix II, 193-195 Gyrocompass controls, 106-110 Mission of casualty control, 147 compensation signals, 109 casualty correction, 147 meridian gyro control system; 106-108 casualty prevention, 147 casualty restoration, 14S . slave gyro control system, 108 197 '210 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE 1 &C Monitor circuits, 119 Propulsion generator casualty, 159 Monitor, synchronizing, 63-74 Propulsion repair party, 151-154 Motor-driven variable transformers:190 0 Qualifying for advancement, 3 NavPers and NavEdTra publications, 5-8 Nav Sea publications, 8 Navy, enlisted advancementsystem, 3 qualifing for advancement, 3 who will be advanced, 4 RF radiation hazard warningsigns, 20 No break power supplies andstatic inverters, Rate training manual, 117-134" scope of, 4 Recording of maintenance actions,164 MDCS documentation, 165 0 equipment identification codemaster index (EIC Manual), 164 'man-hour accounting system,175 Oil soaked windings, 126 Record's and logs, Operating casualties, 154-159 gyrocompass: 113-115 Regulation, voltage and frequency,23-49 electric plant capalties, 1 57-1 59 Regulators, types'of voltage, 25-39 engineroom casualties, 156 Remote control unit, degaussing; fireroom casualtiei, 155 83 Removing meters and instrumenttransformers, OperatiO, electrohydraulicload-sensing speed 16 governors, 136-145 Repair 5 responsibilities, 154 EG-M control box, 141-143 Repair and maintenance, EG-R hydraulic actuator, 137-140 gyrocompass, 115 Repair procedure, 166-169 - load signal box, 143-145 naval shipyards, 167 ri valve operator, 140 overhaul, 167-169 Operation, gyrocompass, 1,15 repair ships and tenders, 166 , Operation, no break power supplies, 117-126 upkeep period, 167 frequency discriminator, 124-126 Repairs and alterations, 165 generator field rectifier, 1 22-1 24 type availabilities, 165 monitor circuits, 119 Responsibility for safety, 10-12 synchronizer, 124 Rewards and responsibilities, 1-3 voltage regulator, 119-122 IZigs, jury, 21 Operational readiness inspection, 169 /70 Roll and pitch f011owupsystem, 111;.113 Operational trials, 170 , Output circuit, 64 Rotary amplifier voltage regulator,30-39 Overhead floodlights, 186 SPR-400 line voltage regulator,61-63 Periodicals, 22 maintenance, 63 operation, 61-63 Phase difference monitoring circuit, 65-69 SSM automatic degaussingsytem, 76-85 -Planned maienance scheduling,163 t'ortable metal degaussing remote control unit,83 case electrical equipment, 13 degaussing switchboard, 76-80 Power, types I, II, and 111, 23-25 maintenance, 83 Precautions, safety, 21' power supply, 80-83 Promoting safety, 22 troubleshooting, 83-85 198 211 INDE4 Safety, 10-22- Static excitatio nd voltage regulation system, Safety, enforcing and promoting, 22 , 39-49 Safety, precautions, 21 autofnatic operation, 49 enforcing safety, 22 Automatic voltage regulator, 43-48 periodicals, 22 --- maintenance, 49 promoting safety,,,, 22 manual operation, 49 Safety precautions, electrical, 12 parallel operation, 48 Safety, responsibility for, 1 0-1 2 static exciter, 4143 : Scheduling of planned maintenance, 163 Static inverter, 126-134 Scope of this rate training manual, 4 functional description, 127-131 Servicing switchboards, 15 maintenance, 134 Servicing techniques for transistorized circuits, operating, procedure,.134 74 operation cycle, 131-134 precautions, 75 S,uperviping, 17 testing, 74.. Switchboard, degaussing, 76-80 Synchronizer, 124 Ship's service generator exciter-regulator Synchronizing monitor, 63-74 type SB-SR, 50-61 droop and cross current compensation frequency difference monitoring circuit, circit, 57-61 70-74 exciter, 50 output circuit, 64 phase difference monitoring circuit, field flashing, 57 Maintenance, 61 65-69 voltage difference monitoring circuit, 69 . manual operation of the exciter-regulator, 57 yoltage regulator, 51-57 Shock, electric, 10 Shore power connecting and disconnecting, 16-19 Temperature conversion table, Appendix I, 192 Slave gyro control system, 108 Test equipment, 19-21 Smoke pipe gases warning sign, 19 Touchdown light, 184 Solvents and volatile liquids, 1 3-1 5 Training films, 9 Sources of inforthation, 5-9 Transistorized control devices, 50-75 NayPers'and NavEdTra publications, 5-8 Transmission system, spider, 101 NavSea publications, 8 Trials, operational, 170 training films,9 Troubleshooting, .83-8.5 Sperry Mk 11 Mod 6 gyrocompass, 92-97 Types I, II, and III power, 23-25 mercury ballistic, 96 phantorn eltment, 96 sensitive element, 93-96 V Sperry Mk 19 gyrocompa s, 102-106 compass failure annu ciator, 106 control cabinet, 105 Valve operator, 140 master compass, 104 Visual landing aids (VLA), 171-191 standby supply, 106 edge lights, 181 Spider, 97-102 extended line-up lights, 182 control and'alarm system, 97-100 flash sequencer, 182 followup system, 100 forward structure/deck surface transmission system, 101 floodlights, I 86' Stabilized glide slope indicator system, helicopterin-flight refueling heading 171-181 lights, 186-188 199 212 ELECTR 11'S MATEI & Visual landing aids (VLA) (Continued) Voltage regulators, types of, 25-39, -homing beacon, 171. direct acting rheostat 'voltage regulator, lighting control panel, 188-190 25-30, line-up lights, 181 , rotary amplifier voltage regulor,* maintonance floodlights, 186 30-39 motor-driven variable transformers, 190 overhead floodlights,186 stabilized glide sloi3e indicator system, 171-181 Warning plate for electronic equipmentinstalled touchdOwn light, 184 in small crafts, 21 vertical drop-line 'lights, 182-184 Warning signs, plates, and tags, 18 vertical replenighment lights, 188 Warning tag;13 wave-off light system, 184-186 Watch teams, 151 Voltage .difference monitoring'circuit,.69 Wave-off light system, 184186 Voltage and frequency regulation,2309 Windings, 126 Voltage regulatiOn and static excitition damp, 126 systew, 39-49 , Oil soaked, 126 Voltageregulator; 51L57, 119-122 Work aloft, 18 Voltage regulator, automatic), 43-48 Work area safety, 12-16 of 200 "OCCUPATIONAL ST-ANDARDS eTRICIAN'S MATE FIRST CLASS (EMI). 18 TESt EQUIPMENT 18442 Determine appropriate test equipment for tests and measurements NET 10546-D 24 ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE 24472 Isolate grourfds, open circuits, and short circuits in ship's . - service, and emergency generators and issociated switch gear 1,2°, NET-10546-D 24473 Inspect and test-operate automatic starting equipment of emergency generators NET 10546-D 24474 Conduct bench tests on electric governors 4 24475 Check logic or solid state electrohydraulic controllers .NET 10546-D 24476 Testinspect, and direct repairs of automatic degaussing equipment 24477 Inspect ship's service and. emergencyswitchboard equipment when power is secured NET 10546-D 24478 Estimate extent of casualty to equipment under EM cognizance 24479 Identify and classify casulaties of motion-pictpre projection equipment as repairable at shipboard or tender level NET 10546-D 24480 Remove, test, and replace defective components in automatic-degaussing control panels 24491 Determine type and value of acceptable substitute components NET 10086-13 214 201 50 MAINTENANCE PLANNING AND QUALITYASSURANCE 50934 Check electrical operating logs and maintenance recordsto determine if equipment is operating properly 3, NET 10546-D 50986 Review completed maintenance data collectionsub-system (MDCS) F 5, NET 10054-D1_ 50987 Prepare weekly schedules of preventive maintenance NET 10054-D 54 LOGISTICS SUPPORT 54427 Post changes and additions to COSAL NET I 0056-C CHIEF ELECTRICIAN'S MATE (EMC) 424 ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE 24481 Test, inspect, and direct repairs ofpower and lighting equipment 2, 4, NET I 0546-D, 24482 Test, inspect, and direct repairs of static magnetic amplifier equipment 2 24483 Inspect, test, and direct repair Oj voltage and speed. regulators associated with 400-NHertz systemS 4, NET I 0546-D , 24484 -Inspect;-test;--and -direct repair "cirttbti'C iniferters 4 4 24485 Inspect and direct maintenance and repair 'of casualty, emergency and special distribution elettriCal sys/ems' 4, 5, NET 10546-D P 38 ADMINISTRATION 38949 Maintain files NET 10858-E 38951 Direct operation and control of electrical. distribution and interior communication systems and circuits 38952 Organize work within an electrical shop, establish work prjorities and assign work 5, 1ItT:' 10054-D v, 38953 Plan, organize, arid direct work of personnel opetatingand maintaining electrical systems 5 38954 Supervise the qualifications of watch standers NET 10057-C, PQS 38955 Preparg and maintain shipboard 'data collectionsub-system (MDCS) submit reports NET 10054-D 202 215 42 GENERAL WATCHSTAND'iNG. 42340 Interpret the dutiel of the engineering officer of the watch ,EOSS 50 MAINTENANCt PLANNING AND QUALITYASSURANCE 50984. Estimate 'time, materials, and labor.`feqairedeorrepair ofr 4 ,electrical systems and equipment 0 5 50988 Prepare quarterly schedules of preventive maintenance NET 10054-D 54 LogIsTIcs SUPPORT 4SO4_. Enterchangesto S ±pEquiprnent_ConfiguraiiOn_Accounting - System (SECAS) and submit report to SECAS Validation NET 10056-C Field Office (VFC) NET 10057-C 98 ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION CONTROL 98243 Superse compliance With envirOnmerital pollutioncontrol programs NET 10115 216 203 ELECTRICIAN'S MATE. 1 & C NAVEDTRA 10547-D Pref)area.by the,Naval Education and Training Program'Developm Center, Pensacola, Florida -) Your NRCC contains a set of assign- at least 3.2. If.you are NOT Oh active ments and self-scoring answer sheets 'duty, the average of your gr des in all (packaged separately). The Rate Train- aSsignments'of each credita e unit.umst ing Manual, Elegrician's Mate 1 &TC, be at least3.2. The unitreakdown of NAVEDTRA 10547-D, is your textbook for, the course,if 'any, is show later under the NRCC. If an errata sheet comes with. Naval Reserve Retirement Cr_dit. 'the NRCC, make all indicated changes or - corrections _Do_not_change_orcorrect_ the textbook or assignmenta in any other WHEN YOUR COLIRSE IS ADMINISTERED way. BY LOCAL:COMMAND As soon as you have finished an HOW TO COMPLETE THIS COURSE SUCCESSFULLY assignment,.submit the completed self- scoring answer sheet to the officer Stud the textbook pages.giyen at designated to administer, it. He will , 'the begin g'of each assignment before . check the accuracy of your score and trying to answer the items. Pay atten- discuss with you the items that you do tion to tables and illustrations as they not understand. You-may wish to recorok cOnrain a lot of information.. Making yo ore on Ihe assignment itself .your own'drawings can help you under- s ce e'self-scoring answer 9heet is stand the subject matter. Also, read ot ret rned. the learning objectives that precede the sets of,items..The learning objectiVes If you arecompletingthis NRCC.to and items are based on the.subject matter become eligible Eb take the fleetwide or study material in the textbook. The . advancement examination, follow a sched- --obiectives-tell-youwhet. you-should be ule that will enable you to complete all able to do by studying assigned textual assignments in time. Your schedule material and answering the items. ,should call for the completion of at . least one assignment per month. At this point you should be ready to answer the items,. in the assignment. Although you complete the course Read each item carefully. Select the ; successfully, the Naval Education kid BEST ANSWER for each item, consulting Training Program Development Center will your textbook'when necessary. Be sure not issue you a letter of satisfactory ,to select the BEST ANSWER from the sub- completion. Your command will make ale ject matter in the textbook. You may mote in your s ice record, giving you discuss difficult points in the course credit for your w rk. With others. However, the answer you select must be your own. Use only the .self-scoring answer sheet designated fot WHEN YOUR COURSE I ADMINISTERED your assignment. Follow the scoring BY THE NAVAL EDUCXrION AND TRAINING directions given on the answer sheet PROGRAA( DEVELOP NT.CENTER itself and elsewhere in this course. After finishing an assignment, 4o on to the next. Retain each completed . Your NRCC will be administered by self-scoring answer sheet until you your command or', in the case of small finish all the assignmentein :a unit commands,.by theNaval Education and (or in the course if it is not divided Training Program Development Center'. No into units):Using the.envelopes pro- matter who administers your course you vided, mail your self-scored answer can complete it successfully by earnin4 sheeta to the Naval Education and Train- grades that average,3.2 or higher. If in Program Develqpment Center where the you are on active duty, the average of sc es will be verified and recorded. ' your grades in all adsignments must be Mak sure all blanks.at the top of each 217 -answer sheet are filled in/Unlessyou NAVAI., RESERVE RETIREMENTtREDTT, furnish all the information required,it ) - mill be impossible togiveyou credit .This course is evalUated for your work. at 12 You may wish tp record Naval Reserve retirekent points. These- your scores on the assignments since the points zre creditable to personnel , self-scoring answer sheets are not eligible' to receeve them under currefit returned. direätives governing retirement of liaval 40 Reserve Personnel-. Points will'be . ,The Naval Education and Training credited upon satibfactory completj.on of- program DeVelopment Center will issuez the entire course. Naval Reserve,retire- letter 'of SatisfaCtory domp etion to ment:.cedit will not be given if the certify suCcesSfUl completin of the student Ilds vevibuSly received credit course (ona creditabláünit ofthe !or: any Electrician's Mate l&C,NRCC,Or course). To' receive a course.* letion letter, folloW the directions. oh. the course-coMpletion form in tId ,Dack ot this NRCC. You may keePlthe textbook and assignments for ,t4s.course. _LReturn -' them only in the event You dasenr011 frOm the course dr otherwise.>fail to : complete the'courSe. Dire4ions tor returning thetektbook and'assignments are given on,tha,book-retprn 1'sorm in the back of this NRC'. COURSE OBJECTIVE PREPARING FOR YOUR ADVANCEMtNT When you complete this course, you EXAMINATION -RS will be able to supervise arikelectrical A gang to ensure that safe practices are Your examination for advancement is a waypof life aboard ship. You will be based on the Manual of Navy EnliSted . able to point.out to your junior petty . Manpower and Personnel Classification- .officers the operating principles of and Occupational Standards (NAVPERS- Voltage 1-egulators,-.transistdrizedcon- 18$68-D). The sources.of question's in trol devices, automatic degaussing. this examination are given in the systems, gyrocompasses, no break,power, Bibliography for Adm ncement Study supplies, electrohydraulic load-sensing (NAVEDTRA 10052). S'nce your NRCC and speed governors, and visual landing .textbook are-among the sources listed in aids. In additiOn, you will be able to this.bibliography, be sure to study both help them troubleshoot and.maintain in preparing to take- your adVancement these systems using the aPpropriate examination. ..The standards for your technical manual asz' guide. You willi rating may have changed sinceyour also be able to brief your menon the -.course and textbook were printed, so details of maintenance administration refer to the latest editions of NAVPERS as well as to guide.theM.through the 18068-D and NAVEDTRA 10052. administrative details of a yardover- haul. While working on this nOnresidentcareer course, You may refer freely to the text. You may seek advice andtinstruction from others - on problems arising in the course, but the -1 sOlutions submitted must be the restlt ofyour own work and decisions. You are prohibited from referring to-or copying the"scilutionsof others, or giving completed solutiong to anyone. else taking the saMekcourse. 218 Naval nonresident'career courses may include a variety of items -- multiple-choice, true-false, m metching,.ete:. The items are not grouped by type; regardless of type, they are presented in the same ikz, general sequenCe ps the textbook,material upon which they are based. This presentation is designed to preserve continuity of thought: Permitting step-by-step development'of ideas.Some courses use many types of items,others only a'few. The student can readily identify the type of each item (and the ac'tion required of him) throUgh inspection of the samples given below. MULTIPLE-CHOICE ITEMS 'a Atem contains seVeral alternatives, one of whicE-provides the best answer to the item. ét tIie :best'alternative and erase the appropriate box on.theanswer sheet 7.,..%,' .....' ',°. , . . . . SAMPLE . 1:-The.jtrst person to beappointed. SecretarTZTDefense The erasure of a correct answer is in- .*.46der the National Security'Act Of '1947 was dicated in this way on the answer sheet: ji. George.MarShall 2. James Forrestal ,... 3. Chester Nimitz " 4, William Halsey TRUE-FALSE ITEMS Determine if the statement is true or false. If any part of fhe statement is false the state- ment is to be considered false. Erase the appropriate box on the answer sheet as indicated below. The erasure of a correct answer is also SAMPLE indicated in this way on the answer naval.officer is authorized to corresTiOTT-7 ;Officially with a bureau of the Navy-DePartment sheet: withohis commanding officer's endorsement. 2 F MATCHING ITEMS . ,.,_ . , 5-2 CC :Each'sqt of...items consist% Of two columns, each listing wor s, pirases or sen ences. The task ...'*tO'selkt,l'hq".item in column B which is the best match for the item in column A that is being ...... 'OnsIdereC;:-S:petific instructions are given'with each set of items. Selecethe numbers identifying 44e a'nswe'rs 00 erase the appropriate boxes on the answer sheet. SAMPLE itemS_s-'3!through 5-6, match the name 17IEI shipboacd officer in colUmn A'by selecting from coLumn B:thq namvbf the department in-which the officer functions. . - A. OfficeeS: B. Departments , The erasure.of a correct answer is in- dicated in this way onthe answer sheet: Damage ,cppr..-1 AsSlstant 1. Operations Department 2. Engineering Department 11 s-5:qAlsi3tant:fdr'DiSbUrsing ii 3. Supply Department s-6. COmmunicatiOns Officer s-6 How To Score Your Immediate Knowledge.of Results (IKOR) Answer Sheets Total the number of 1A- Sampleonl correct erasures (those Number of boxes -T- .that show page numbers) erased incorrectly 0-2 3-7 9 _IL for each item and-place C :(>in the blank space at Your score 4.0 C 12 the end of each item. Now TOTAL the column(s) of incorrect erasures and find yourscore in the Table at the bottom of EACHanswer sheet. NOTICE: If, on erasing, a page number appears. review text (startingon that page) and erase again until "C", "CC", or "CCC" appears. For\ courses administered by the tenter, the maximum number of.points (or incorrect erasures) will be deducted from each item which doesNOT have a "C", "CC", or "CCC" uncovered (he., 3 pts..for-75UTEFoice items, 2 pts. Tor three choice items, and 1 pt. for T/F items). iii 219 Assignment 1 Career Program, Safety, and Voltage and Frequency Regulation '0 Textbook Assignment: Pages 1 through 30 In this course you will demonstrate that learning has taken place by correctly answering teaching items. The mere physical act of indicating a choice on an answer sheet is not in itself important; it is the mental achievement, in whatever form it may take, prior to,the physical acp that is importanr and .poward which nonresident career course learning objectives are directed. The selection of the correct choice for a nonresident career course teaching item indicates that you have fulfilled, at least in part, the,stated ohjective(s). The accomplishment of certain objectives, for example, a physical act such as drafting a memo, cannot readily be aetermined by means of objective type nonresident career course items; hoWever, you can demonstrate by means of answers to teaching items that you have acquired the requisite knowledge to perform the physical act. The accomplishment of certain other learning objectives, for example, the mental acts of comparing, recognizing, evaluating, choosing, select- ing, etc., may be readily demonstrated in a nonresident career course by indicating the correct answers to teaching items. The comprehensive objective for this course has already een given. It states the purpose of the course in terms of what you will be able to do as you complete the course. The detailed objectives in each assignment state wh'ae you should accomplish as you progress through the course. They may appear.,singly or in clusters of closely related objectives, as appropriate; ,they are'followed by iteMs, which will enable you to indicate your accomplishment. All objectives in this course are learning objectives and items are teaching items. They point out important things, they assist in learning, and they should enable you to do a better job for the Navy. This nonresident career course is on1.3, one part of the total Navy teaching program; by its very nature it can take you only part of the way to a learning goal. Practical experience, schools, selected teading, and the desire to accompliSh are also necessary to round out a fully meaningful learning program. 1-2. Why should a petty officer strive con- Learning Objective: ReCognize stantly to improve his use of grammar and the benefits and r crsibilities technical terms pertaining to his rating? , e acquired thrOugh advancement. Text- 1. To increase his ability-to communicate took pages 1 and 2, with others 2. To avoid criticist by trainees having . higher formal education 3. To vitalize his techniqu of instruc- 1-1 Ad1.6ncements in rating are profitable to tion boeh the personnel being advanced and to 4. To impress trainees with hisugerior the Navy. One of the most lasting per- command of language sonal benefits you receive from advance- An EM1 or EMC must keep himself informed ment is the 1-3: of all changes and new developments that 1. more.challenging assignments you get affect his rating or work. because you can shoulder increased responsibility 2. higher standard of living you can maintain because of increased pay 3. greater prestige you acquire when given more authority 4. satisfaction you derive in developing knowledge - 1 1-8 Which of the courses listed foryour rating in NAVEDTRA 10052 must you complete Learning Objective: Point out before you are eligible to take the sources.of information and require- advancement examinhtions? ments for advancement. Textbook 1. All courses listed for the Engineering pages 3 through 9. and Hull group t 2. All courses listed for the next higher rate I 3. Asterisked courses listed for'the next 1-4. In addition to his examination score, higher rate other facto s influencing the advancement 4. Unmarked courses listed for the next of an EM2 q alified for EM1 include all higher rate the follaring except 1. his length.of time in service 1-9. The completion requitement for a mandatory 2. his performance marks . rate training course marked with an aster- 3. the amount of sea duty he has served isk (*) in NAVEDTRA 10052 mhy be satisfied 4. the number of vacancies in the EM by rating 1. passing the nonresident career course 2. successful completion of the appro- priate school 3. both 1 and 2 In items 1-5 and 1-6 select the publication, 4. successfully demonstrating your skills from column B that is a source of the informa- tion in column A. 1-10. Appropriate,officer texts and their com- 'panion correspondence coursed are useful', A. Information, B. Publications as sources of information to personnel preparing for advancement to EMI or EMC.. 1-5. Minimal practical 1. Manual of factors applicable Navy Enlisted to each rate within Manpower and the EM rating Personnel Learning'Objective: Recognize principles Classification of electrical safety and effects of 1-6. Latest .edition of a and Occupa- electric shock on the human body. given Rate Training tional Stand- Textbook pages 10 through 12. Manual ards 2. Training Pub- lications for. 1-11. The extent of body damage caused by elec- Advancement trical shock depends on which of the following? 3. Bibliography 1. Size of the body for Advance- 2. Value of voltage touched by the body ment Study 3. Amount and duration of current flow through t1ie body 4. Naval Train- 4. Whether the current is a.c. or d.c. ing Bulletin 1-12. Which value of 60-hertz current flowing through the body from hand-to foot for 2 seconds is fatal? 1-7. Which of the following actions should an 1. 0.0001 amp EM take when he is transferred from one 2. 0.001 aMi, activity to another? 3. 0.010 amp 1.. Request a statement concerning his 4. 0.100amp qualifications from the activity he is leaving 1-13. The human body will not receivean electric 2. Secure his NAVEDTRA Form 1414/1 and shock unless the body forms paft of a take it to his new commanding officer closed circuit and a difference in 3. Inform his new division chief that hi ' potential exists. has completed his practical factors 4. Insure that his NAVEDTRA Form 1414/1 1-14. When the hUman body is shocked by more is up to date and is in his'service than 200 ma of 60-hertz current, the chest r,2cord muscles contract to clamp the heart and stOp it for as long as the;shock lasts. 2 2 1 1-15. For which purpose are sign4 posted in 1-19. Operators of power-driven machines can , work areas? help avoid accidents by making it a 1. To.eliniate danger practice to 2. To eliminate hazards 1. remove chips with compressed air 3. Both 1 and 2 are correct 2. wear gloves and a long-sleeved shirt 4. To alert working personnel to possible 3. have sufficient light to work by injury 4. remove machine guards before starting 1-16. By what means is the operator of a port- 1-20. When, if ever; should gasoline be used able metal-case electric tool protected for cleaning aluminum? from electric shock? , 1. When liberal ventilation is provided 1. .By grounding conductor and Osulation 2. When use'of a chlorinated solvent on the tool and its cord would damage the aluminum 2. By-geounding conductor and Insulation . When inhibited methyl chloroform is on the distribution system unavailable 3. By grounding conductor, insulation 4. Never on the distribution system, and insulation on the tool and its cord 1-21. Which solvent are you permitted to use 4. By insulation on the distribution for cleaning electrical insulation only system and insulation on the tool after having proved that the solvent and its cord will not damage the insulation? 1. Gasoline or benzine 1-17. Which of the following resistance values 2. Methyl chloroform or dry cleaning for the ground connections between the solvent, type II metal case of a portable electric drill 3. Trichloroethylene and the steel structure of a ship should 4. Inhibited methyl chloroform protect the drill operator from electric shock? 1-22. Which'step can maintenance.personnel 1. 0.9 ohms or less take safely when cleaning equipment with 2. 2.0 ohms to 5 ohms inhibited methyl chloroform? 3. 5 ohms or more 1. Wear a chemical cartridge air 4. All of the above respirator 2. Inhale its vapor directly 1-18. When instructing personnel in the non- 3. Apply it in the presence of an open electrical ratings on matters regarding flame electrical safety, which of the follow- 4. Use a vaporproof or watertight . ing statements should you emphasize? portable light 1. Voltages as low as 30 volts are hazardous 1-23. Which practice for minimizing fire 2. Danger from electric shock is greater hazards applies when a safety type.dry ashore than aboard ship cleaning solvent is being Sprayed? 3. Only painful shocks received from 1. Cleaning the sprayer nozzles electrical equipment should be 2. Grounding vaporproof lights reported 3. Grounding watertight portable lights 4. All personal portable radios and. 4. Grounding the sprayer nozzles record players are safe to use aboard ship 1-24. The practice of spraying a solvent near an open flame or on hot equipment is safe provided the solvent is a safety type such as type II dry cleaning Learning Objective: Recognize safe solvent. and unsafe working conditions or practices associated with switch- boards, test equipment, hand tools, batteries, shore power, and cleaning agents. Textbook pages 12 through 21. 2 2 2 3 1-25. Give one reason for maintaining an ade- 1-31. 'Before closing any switch, besure that quate and:Constant supply of fresh air 1. the circuit is ready in all in a battery locker. respects to be energized 1. To help evaporate any electrolyte 2. any men working on the circuit are that overflows from batterieson the notified line 3. 2. .only one hand is used ff Possible To.keep the temperature of the locker 4, all of the above are done from dropping below 950.F 3. To prevent the tormation ofan explo- 1-32. What is the procedure for'placing sive mixturg of air and hydrogen warning tags on switches when more than one giyen off by batteries being charged repair party is working on a circuit 4. To permit the use of a battery that can be energized by closing the charging rate that will forcebattery switches? temperatures to rise above 125° F 1. Each party tags the switch nearest his work site 1 1-26. The temperature of a battery locker 2.. Each party tags each switch in the should be'maintained at circuit, 1. 95° F or ldwer' 3. Party to begin work first tags each 2. 100° F or lower switch in the circuit .3. 95° F or higher 4.f. Party to begin work first tags the 4. 100° F or higher switch nearest his work site 1-27. Under normal conditions, what should you BefOre starting repair workon a deener- do if battery. locker ventilation is, gized switchboard, you should make '9 interrupted while the batteries sure are that the metering and control circuits being charged? are deenergized. 1.. Stop battery charging until ventila- tiOn is restored 1-34. Before any work is done on an energized, 2. Reduce the charging rate of all switchboard, who must give approval to batteries do the work? 3. Reduce the charging rate'of half of 1. Electrical officer the,batteries 2. Damage control assistant 4. Determine the-cause of ventilation 3. Engineer officer loss 4. Commanding officer 1-28. When charging batteries what should you 1-35. Which of the following materials is do before repairing a connection to a, suitable for covering'grounded metal battery on the line? to keep a worker from coming in contact I . Lower the'charging rate with the metal? 2. TUrn off the charging current 1. Dry canvas that ha holes in it 3. Discharge the battery 2..bry phenolic mateeial that hasa 4. Reduce the, charging voltage conductor imbedded in it 3. Dry insulating material that contains 1-29. When removing a battery which has one no holes or conductors grounded terminal, you disconnect the 4. Damp plywood A-. . : ungrounded terminal first. 1-36. In most installations, potential trans- 1730. What is the proper way to mix electro- former primaries are deenergized by. lyte? 1. opening circuit breakers 1. Pour acid sloWly into the water 2. opening knife switches 2. Pour water slOwly Into the. adid 3. pulling fuses 3. Pour acid rapidly into the water 4. opening selector switches 4. Pouryater rapidly into the acid 6? 4 223 41-37. Assume that you are connecting a ship's switchboard to a source of electrica& power ashore. You conduct a check which Learning Objective: Identify obliga- Shows that the ',babe sequence is incor- tions of the senior electrician for, rect. What shoUld you doeto correct supervising all facets of electrical the phase sequence? safety aboard shtp. Textbook pages 1. Deenergize the cable, then reenergize 10 through 22. the cable and discennect the phase. sequence meter', . 2. Deenergize the cable,,connect the phase sequence peter, and reenergiie 1-43.. If safety precautions have not been the cable issued or are incomplete, who issues 3. Deenergize the cable, check the phase the safety precautions that are deemed sequencemeter connections, and if necessary? they are incorreCtinterchange any 1.. Division officer two of the shore pcnier cable:con- 2. Engineer officer ductors 3. Commanding officer 4. Deenergize the-cable, check.the.pfiase 4. Type command sequence meter connections, and inter- change any two of the shore power 1-44. As the leading EM abeard g ship, you cable conductors if the phase sequence ' have ajesponsibility to instructA0e meter connections are correct enliftela meil of E division and other div4ifpos.An;matters:tegarding electrical 1-38. Before disconnecting a shore power cable 1"1:- after having shifted the eleCtrical. load to the ship's generators, you should The commanding 'officer delegates his first authoritYor enforcing safety to 1. test the male prongs of the plug-in 1:' leading pettY officers type cable 2. division.officers 2. ensure that the ship's shore power 3. engineering officers circuit breaker at the switchboard 4. all of the above is off and tagged 3. ensure that the cable is deenergized 1-46. What is the greatest cause of electric 4. test the terminals at the4ship's shock aboard sfiip? shore terminal box 1. Equipment failure, 2. Poor equipment 1739. To prevent damage to electric meters, you , , 3. Equipment design should protect.them against the effects. 4. Human error of 1. weak magnetic fields 1-47. During a.visit to the machine shop an 2. lbw currents Electrician's Mate Second Class observes 3. both 1 and 2 a man working.without goggles at a drill 4. mechanical shock .press. What should the electrician do? 1. Stop the work 1-40. Instruments being used on.a vibrating 2. Notify the petty officer in charge surface should be placed on thick pads of the shop of felt or cloth to protect them from 3. Provide the man with goggles damage. 4. Put the man on report 1-41. What should you do to ensure that metal- 1-48. When shore power is being rigged by two case test instruments are safe tp use? working parties, who is responsible for 1; Energize tfie instruments ensuring the ship's rigging procedures 2. Ground the metal cases. - are,followed? 3. Insulate each metal case from ground 1. Shore supervisor 4. Connect all metal cases to a commOn 2. Ship's-supervisor lead . I -3. Ship's electrical officer 4. Ship's Officer of the Deck 1-42. You should work barehanded when Cesting voltages that are likely:to exceed 300 volts. 'It is the resPonsibility:of the Officer IP 1-53. When expressed in percentage', which of of the Deck to verify that the Chief the following ratios defines the harmonic Engineer and Communication Officer haVe been content Of an a.c. power system? notified that a man is going aloft: He also 1. Effective value of voltage variations notifies the Officer of the Deck of adjoining diVided by the equipment voltage ships, when ships are alongside. The leading rating or senior petty officer should ensure that.the 2. Equipment voltage rating divided by, man'going aloft, his assistant who remains on the effective value of voltage deck, and the Ship's Boatswain's Mate know the variations app1i4ble safety' precautions. 3. Effective valde of voltage variatiOns that remain after elimination of the 1-49-SoMetimes, meh working aloft are required fundamental voltage divided by the 'to work with tools without prevehter equipment Voltage-rating lines. 4. Equipmpnt viatage rating multiilied by the square.root of 2 and divided 1-50. Who grants permission for a man to work by the effective value of voltage aloft? , Variations remaining after elimina- -1. Commanding officer ,, , tion ofthe fundamental Voltage . 2. Communication Officer4 3.. Chief Engineer 4. Officer of the Deck . .In items 1-54 through 1-56 select from coluMnB .1-51.- Who is thesource of supPiY Of nigh the factor which, Alen divided by theequipment Voltagh Warning Sign+NavSea No. voltage rating, defines the electrical charac- RE 10B 608B? ., teristic in column A. 1.- Supply OfficerMechanicsburg, Pennsylvania A. Electrical' B. Factors. '2. Communication Officer Characteristics 3.. Commander, Philadelphia Naval Shipyard 1-54. Modulation amplitude 1. Effective 4. : Ship's Supply. Officer value of 1-55. Steady state toler- voltage var- 1-52. What is the best means at.your disposal ' ance.band iations for eiiminating jury7rigged electrical equipment from your ship? 1-56. Voltage unbalance 2. Highest phase 1. Publish facts in the ship's plan of between phases voltage-minus the day about the hazards ofSury latiest phase rigs ' :voltage 2. Emphasize the hazards of jury rigs each time an opportunity arises 3. Periodic var- 3. Post safety reminders throughout the iation in ship voltage caused 4. Conduct periodic safety inspections by regulators, yourself intermittent loads, other random. disturbances Learning Objective: Recognize standar& electrical characteristics 4. Maximum aver- 4:)f shipboard a.c. power systems:. age voltage Textbook .pages 23 And 24. . variation- caUsed-by drift, envi- ronment, and load changes (excluding traneient load changes), 6 1-61. The mixpumsdifference between the volt- age wav/e and harmonic content of a Learning Objective: Recognize 440-volt.type III' a.c. power system is the characteristics of type I . approximately , and type II a.c. power systems. 1. 26 V Textbook page 24 and-Table 3-1. 2. 31 V 3, 37 V_ 4. 40 V .1-57. Which electrical characteristic is expreAied as ±18% in table 3-1 of,the textbook? Learning Objective: Point out 1. Difference between the highest phase operating principles of the direct- voltage and the lowest phase voltage acting type voltage regulator and 2. Maximum difference between the volt- . procedures for operating ship's age wave and the harmonic content service installations using this . Changing conditions of frequency type of regulator. Textbook pages that goes beyond and returnS 'to .the 25 through.30. steady state tolerance band within the recovery.time . . 4. Changing conditions of,voltage that goes beyond and returns to the steady 1-62. The silver buttons.in a silverstat type__ state tolerance.band within the voltage regulator are connected to taps reCovery ime on the 1. regulator coil 1-58..Which eleCtrical characteristic of type 2. voltage *adjusting rheostat. II 4.c. power systems is expressed in 3. regulating resistance plates textbook table 3-1 as 0.25 second atle00 4. range-setting resistors hertz and 0.75 second at 60 hertz? 1. After a voltage change is initiated, 1-63. The range covered by each voltage adjust- . the time it takes the voltage to ing rheostat of the regulator can be set recover and remain within the steady so the midposition of the rheostat is state tolerance band the normal operating position to obtain 2. After a frequency change is initiated, rated generator voltage. The range is the tiMeit.takes the frequency to set by means.of a recover and remain within the steady 1. ,damping transformer state frequency band 2. resistor connected in series with 3. Duration of voltage unbalance between the regulator coil. phases caused by transient load 3. resistance plate connected in series, changes with the rheostat 4. Duration of voltage unbalanCe between 4. resistance plate Connected in ralleI phases caused by random disturbances with the rheoStat 1-59. What are the respective maximum and mini- 1-64. Where is the primary'of the damping mum line to line 3-phase'voltagesper- transformer connected in a regulator mitted for a 440volt, type II, a.c. that.controls a large,a.c, generktor?- power system? I. Across the output of the exciter 1. 444 V and 436 V . , 2. In series with the voltage adjusting 2. 448 V and .432 V rheostat 3. 444 V and 440 V ' 1. In series with the regulator coil 4. 440 V and 436 V 4. Acroas the outputnf the crossCurrent compensator . 1-60. The difference between type I and type II power systems is that type II requires 1. better voltage control at the load .2. isolation of the load from the power ystem 3. less frequency regulation 4 4. generator vol age control rather than' load voltage control " 2 6 7 J 1-65. When switching a direct acting voltage 1-67, How will the moving Arm ofa direct regulator system from manual to auto-7 acting regulator behave if the damping matic control it is necessary ta leave transformer connections are reversed? the control switch in the TEST position 1. It will swing continuously from miomentarily to allow the one end of its..travel tothe Other 1. exciter field current to stabilize - 2: It will% move very sluggishly in 2e generator field current to stabilize reaponse to a generator voltage \ 3. damping transformer transient current-. change. , to die down It will be pulled towardthe 4. silver buttons to readjust / regulator coil and 'remain in'that- position 1-66. Howdoes a direct acting voltage regula-' 4. It'Will be.pulled away from the tor respond to a decrease in generator ioad? regulator coil and remain in that position' 1. The resulator armature is pulled 'toward the regulator coil, more silVer buttons are pushea together, and the regulating resistance increases . The regulator.>armature is pulled toward the regulatorjcoil, More silver buttons 'ate spad aliart; and the regulatinvtesistance increases- 3. The ragUlator armature is pulled away from the regulator coil, more silver buttons are pushed together, and the regulating resistance decreases. 4. The regulator armature is pulled away from the regulator coil, more silver buttons are spread apart, and the regulating resistance decreases J227 Assignment 2 Voltage and Frequency Regulation; Transistorized Control.Devicea; and Automatic Degaussing' Textbook Assignment: pages 30 through 85 2-4. The stabilizer functions to prevent . hunting in the voltage regulator circuit -fearning Objective: Identify operating' by producing a voltage thab principles-of the rotary amplifier .1. aide any change in amplidyne control' (amplidyne) type of voltage regulator and ,field current procedures for operating ship's service . cipposes any change in amplidyne installationa using this type of regu-:. control field current lator. Textbook pages 30 through 39. .3. increases the inductance of the saturated reactdr, 4. decreases the inductance of the saturated reactor 2-1. When the voltage regulator transfer switch for two generators,- A and B is in the GEN 2-5.. Wherfgenerator voltage is near norMal in B position, how are the.voltages of the the automatic control circuit of textbook generators controlled? figure 3-6,,buCk circuit Current fromF2 1. Both generators are controlled by to Fl Ph the amplidyne control field is generator B's regulator, 1. negligible . 2. Only generator B is regulated, since 2. Maximum to overcome the boost circuit o .generator A is out of the circuit :current 3. Generator A is controlled by its own 3.,,minimum to enable the boost circuit regulator, and generator B is con- current to keep the amplidyne control trolled by the standby regulator field'ateady 4. Generator A is controlled by the nearly equal to the boost circuit standby regulator and generator B is current controlled by its own regulator 2-6. .How does the automatic control circuit act, 2-2. When the number, of saturated reactor coil to oppose an increase in a.c. generator turns in the voltage adjusting unit is voltage? decreased, the inductance of the saturated 1. The pilot alternator voltage increases, reactor e causing an increase in amplidyne con- -1. increases, and the voltage held by the trol field current regulator is raised 2. The pilot alternator voltage decreases,. 2. increases; and the volfage held by the causing a decrease in amplidyne con- regulator is lowered trol field current 3. decreases, and thevoltage held by the 3. The saturated reactor current regulator is xaised, increases, causing an increase in 4. decreases, and the voltage held by the amplidyne control field current. regulator is lowered', 4. The saturated reactor current decreases", causing a decrease in 2-3. .The unit that 'provides the'segulatorwith amplidyne control field current .e a signal proportional to the, a.c.genera- tor voltage is the.. 1: pilot alternator 2. potential unit' 3. amplidyne 4. stabilizer 228 2-7. How does a decrease in generatorSfrequency 2-10. Switches S1 and S2 contain a large affect the reactances of the saturated number reactor and the frequency compensation of seriesoconnected tontacts for the purpose of circuit? 1. 1. eliminating arcing when turned to the The reactance of the saturatedreactor OFF position increases, and the frequency compen- 2. minimizing arcing effects whenspower 'sation network behaves like an induct- is removed ance 3. providing multiple circuit path 2. The reactance of the saturated reactor connections increases, and the frequency compen- i. preventing the contacts from becoming sation network behaves like a capaci- hot tance 3. The reactance of the saturated reactor 2-11. The output of the static exciter is decreases, and the frequency compen- controlled by the current through the sation network behaves like an induct- 1. transformer primalies ance 2. transformer secondaries 4. The reactance of the saturated reactor 3. transformer control windings decreases, and the frequency compen- 4. output rectifier CR1 sation network behaves like a capaci- tance - 2-12. The initial field current for starting the a.c. generator is provided bya 2-8. At unity power.factor, the compensating field-flashing circuit'from voltage across the compensating potenti- 1. the static exciter ,ometer rheostat is in phase with the 2. the output rectifiers . 1. -voltage across the teaser leg of the 3. a 50 kW,.d.c. generator T-connected potential tranafOrmer 4. all of the above secondary 2. resultant outPut voltage, of the 2-13. The autobatic voltage regulator maintains 3-phase resPonse network the generav?r'i output.voltage by regu- 3. phase B Iine-to-neutral voltage lating the direct current through the 4. voltage across ttle resistor-inductor static exciterrs series circUit in the 3-phase response 1. control winding network 2. primary winding 3.. linear inductor 2-9. When two generators are being placedin 4. secondary winding parallel operation in a rotary voltage regulator system, load distribution and in items 2-14 through 2-19 refer to power factot are adjusted by means of the textbook figures 3-14 through 3-16. 1. manual control handwheels and prime -mover governors 1-14. The reactance value'of L6 in the voltage 2. manual 'control handwheels and voltage regulatom is dependent on the adjusting unit 1. average of the line voltages . voltage adjusting unii and primemover 2. output of CR6 governors 3. value of the secondaryof T5, 4. yoltage adjusting unit and saturated 4.'output ofrCW1 reactor tap Switch ' 2-15. The amount of voltage acrosa:fil.ter' capacitor Cl is . 1. proportional to the voltage drop Leaeming Objective: Recognize-operating across R8 principles of the static excitation. 2. equal to the output of T6 . voltage regulator system and procedures 3. proportional to the line voltage for operdting'ship's service installations average using this system. Textbook pages 39 4. equal to the amount of ripple when through 49. the line voltages are unequal 2-16. What condition will cause current to flow in the primary winding of CW4 in such a manner that exciter voltage will increase? 1. VE equal to VR and VL 2. VE greater than VR 4)9 4, 9 3. VR greater than VL 4. VE greater than VL 10" 2722 2-17. The amount of flux in the magnetic ampli- The d.c..eicitation ts the output of the . fier cores iecontrolled by the field rectifier bridge. What furnishes:. 1. output of transfdrmerT5 the a.c. power to the rectifier bridge? 1. Linear reactors 2. output of'the comparison Circuit 2. 3. amount of gated:a.c; in CW5 Saturable transformers, 4. setting of voltage adjusting 3. Current transformer! rheostat 1(6 4. All of the.above 2-18. When does MAXiMUM current flow in the load 2-23. Under no7load Conditions, which of the winding? following determines the output of the 1. When the flux is zero field'rectifier bridge? 1. 2. When the flux is greater than zero Linear,reactors and saturable but the cOre is not saturated transformers 3. Wherl the core has been saturated by Saturable transformers endcurrent the control winding transformers 4. When the core has been saturated. by 3. Current transformers and saturable the load winding transformers 4. Paralleling current.transformers 2-19. Each magnetic amplifier is operated in tbe center portion,of its magnetic core 2-24: Theoutput of the current transformers saturation curve by adjusting le Prop6rtional to the 1. L7 and R13 1. field rectifier Curre0' 2. 2. Rll and R12c saturable transformer 'Voltage 3. load . . 3. L6 and L7 4. 4. R14 and R15 synchronous reactance 2-20. You are checking the reactive droop 2725. How does the voltage regulator control compensation circuits of a.c. generators mismatch between exciter and generatOr? A and B prior to placing them in parallel 1. It regulates the Voltage to.the operation. Generator A is satisfactory. current transformer When you add a reactivg lagging load to 2. It regulates the control current generator B, the terminal voltage de- winding of the saturable transformer creaSes. What should you do next? 3.. It regulates the VOltage to the field 1. Connect the two generators in parallel flashing system It regulates the control current 2. Secure the generator and reverse the secondary leads of T4 winding of the linear reactor 3. Secure the generators and reverse the secondary leads of T6 2-26. Which of the following are functions of 4. Equalize the voltage decrease to that the voltage. regulator? of generator A by adjusting R8 .1. Sense terminal.voltage ; 2. Rectify 3,- Amplify and compare 4. All of the above Learning Objective: Identify parts of ..the static eXciter and regulator by their 2-27.71n thesensing circuit, 8111:n411in figure functions within their associated cir- : 4-2 of.the text, what is the purpose of cuits. .lextbook pages 50 through 57. R6, R14, and R16? 1. To Serve as a voltage divider 2. To provide power'to choke L2 3. To compensate for capacitor .C1 2-21. How are the current transformers of,the 4', Each of therabove exciter connected? 2728. The generator vOltage is sensed by 1. In paeallel with the generator field and the-armature 1. diodes pi, CR2, CR3, CR4, CR5, and' .FR6 2, In parallel with th2 generator ter- minals and the load 2. (transformer T2 3.,. resistor R14 3. In series with the generator field and the armature 4. choke L2 4. Inaeries with the generator ter- minals and the load 230 2-29. One purpose of the amplifier and'refen- ence circuit (fig. 473 of the textYis to' Learning Objective: Point out qperating compare the.error signal:orvoltagettith principles and maintenance requirements a reference voltage. What is the 'source of_an SM-400 voltage regulator. Tett= of the;reference voltage? book pages 61 through 63. 1. Transistor Q3 2. Zeper diode WU 3. 'Transistor Q4. 4. Magnetic amplifier Ll The purpose of theiSPR-400 line volage regulator is tuensure precision cotltrol 2730. In figurea 4-2 and 4-3 of the text;i1A of variations in parts of the sensing circuit and the.- 1. line amplifier and reference circuits are).;.': 2. load common? - 3. power factor 1. Voltage divider and T2 4. all the above 2, L2 and voltage'diVider 3. LT and Ti 2-31: What effect does a decrease of direct./ 4.. Q4 and VR2 current in the control winding haveon ',the operation of the autotransformer? 2-31. In figure 4-5 of the text what is the i. The voltage in the ofPosing source of reference voltage for:Q3 and winding decreases andthe outpUt where is ii applied? decreases 1. VR23emitter of Q3 2. The voltage in the opposing 2..VR1,base ofQ3 winding decreases and the output VR2, base ofQ3 increases 4. VR1,emitterof Q3 3. The voltage in the opposing,winding increases and the output Aecreases 2-32. If there is 4 decrease in generator volt-- 4. The voltage in the opposing *inding age to T2, what is the end result at,L1? increases and the output increases' 1. Output voltage remains the same 2. Output voltage decreases. 2-38. The pulse circuit:Q1 responds tu,an 3. Output voltage increases error'signal and regulates the output .° 4. Input voltage decreases' voltage. 2-33. In the'xectifier circuit, what partspre,- 2-39. The purpose of potentiometer R21 lin vent aipp7on aetion of magnetic amplifier figure 4-6. bf thwtextbook is to Ll? compensateftfor tit! 1. SCR thyristor CR10..and CR11 1. resisahce invthe cahles from-1', 2. -Diodes CR7 and CR9,, regulator to load 3. Resistor .R.24 and caPacitor C7 2. internal,resistance of the regulator 4. All of the above 3. resistance of the regulator load 4. resistance of the input voltage 2-34 Manual controrof:the generator provides -a.method to,counteract generator voltage 2-40. Vrequent inspectiond for dust, dirt, and variations caused by moieture must be made in an SPR-400 line 1. increase in ;oad voltage regulator. '2. variation in temperature 3. decrease in load 4. each of the,above . Learning Objective: Recognize the pur- 2-35. Diodes CR58, CR59; CR60,.CR61, 'CR62, and pose and operation of a synchronizing CR63 form a fullIwave bridge rectifier. monitor. Textbook pages 63 through 73. What.is the source 'of a.c7 for this rectifier? . . 1. Ll 2. A.C. generator 1. permanent magnet altetnator PMA) 4. Transformer T4 When answering-items 2-21 and 2-22, refer. 2-46.'-'012 ia.controlled by 1. the phalle difference.circuit 'to figures 4-13 and 4-14 inyour teXtbook. 2. thefrequency difference circuit. .2-41. The Ki relay iS energized for which of 3. simultaneoua.action of'the voltage' .thafolloWing eicamples of phase angle difference circUit and the frequendy :(0), voltage difference (LV)., and fre- difference circuit quency differende (AF)? 4. either the voltage difference circuit . or the phase differencetpircuit 1.,6 ... -450;AV.= 1%; AF 6.1 hz 2. 0 -22°;AV 3%; AF 6.1 hz . 3. 6 00;AV 5%1.AF 6.5 hz 6 + 5°;AV = 5%.;:'AF 2.0 hi . Assume that the sYnchronizing monitor is ,connected to cloircuit consisting of two ,..,:generators and that the Kl relay is energized.:119w does this affect:. the parallel operation of fhe generators? generators,are automatically pfralleled . Ple:generators ire ot'autoMatically.' paralleled but mal be' manually . ThejgenerAorsmay,riot be,paralieled While' the Kl relay is energized but Gommakw .!aie automatically,paralleled when it VoNots is deenergized The generators may not e paralleled': ji.li,while th4,K1 relay is energized but: -may .he Manually:paralleled when ale. relay id deenergired When answering iteMi,2.-43 through 2746 re'fer . ,-...... 40 to figure 4-15 in your texthook. .. . 2-43: The reference bias iroltage'forAl: skrichronizing monitor:40@er! acros'ai, - A . . rti 1.- capacitor qi . 0*.j 2. resistor R2 Figure 2A 24r 3. resistor RO , AA 4. Zener, diode CR8 2-47.-Refer to figure 2A. Which generator volt-7 age occurring simullaneoualy with the indicated-bus voltige will.produce the 2-44. The phase difference circat\tgri' ff . by. means of a maximuM current flow in CRiO.in the phase 1. .reverse.biaa voltage acroas CRIO Aifferente Monitoring circuit of the 2. reverse bias voltage across Rg 4 ;synchronizing monitor? 3.. lbase=to-emitter short caused by he 1. 'A conduction Of CR9 2. B 4s. base-to-emitter short ca4Sed by the 3. C ' conduction of CR10' 4. D , 1 . 2-45.__Jhavoltagedifference circuit turns 2-48. K1 relay will NOT close if the voltage .Q1 off by means of a difference in.the generators is more than 1. reverse bias voltage across Q5 1. 5% 2. reversebias voltage across R19 2. 2% 3. baie-to-emitter shert caused .by _3, 3% the conduction of CR18 4% 4. base-to-emitter short.caused by the zonduction of Q5 2-49. What is the purpose of R19 in figure 4-21 , of the textbook? 1. To prevent.large voltage yariations 2. To deenergize relay K1 3. :'ioensure that Q5 will remain off .when relay K1 is deenergized, 4. to'ensure that Q5 will remain off when K1 is energized 4, , ff.t. ' 2-50.. Refer to figure 4-21 of your textbook. 2-54. What is the time period for The difference in the Magnitude of the one.cycle of the beat frequency voltage? sensing signals from the oncoming gen- 1., 0.5 sec6nds erator and the bus is deteCted in bridge 2. 2.0 seconds circuit 3. 2.5 seconds 1. CR15 4. 2. CR16 5.0 seconds. 3. CR17 (points A and B) 4. CR18 Learning ObjectiveT Recognize 2-51. Wilich of the followingcomponents in the funda- mentals olf servicing transistorized frequency difference monitoring circuit circuits. Textbook pages 74 and 75. (figure 4-23 oftheiextbook)are con- nected in such a wayt that a beat fre- quency voltage is produced between the oncoming generator and the bus? 1. Primaries of T2 and T3 2-55 High-pow&t transistors 2. Secondaries of T2 and T3 that are notice- ably hot while oPerating have been- 3. $econdary of T2 and CR11 damaged beyond use. 4. Transistors Q3 and Q4 , 2-56 What is the first connection 2-52. Figure 4-24 of the textbook shows the you make when using a signal generator results of various steps in the as a generation transistor tes er? of a signal that is used to fire SCR1 in 1. Connect th the frequency difference monitoring powerline io an isolation cir- transforme cuit. What is tiu, ourpose of the step 2. that produces tpe waveform depicted by Connect the chassis of the signal diagram E? generator to ground 3. 1. To produce a beat frequency voltage Connect the chassie of the signal generator to the chassis of.the between the oncoming generator and the bus equipment to be tested 4. Connect line voltage to signal 2. To rectify and filter the beat generator frequency voltage 3. To assure that the clipped signal 2-57. Ohmmeters will damage transistors if goes to zero when the original beat the meters are used in a frequency voltage goes to zero range greater than 1. 0.25ma 4. To assure that the clipped beat fre- 2. 0.50 ma quency signal maintains a constant 3. 0.75 ma d.c. level 4. 1.00 ma 2-53. Assume that a unijunction transistor has 0 volts on base 1 and 12 voltson base 2. If the transistor fires when the base 1- Learning Objective: ^to-emitter voltage reaches 8 volts, the Recognize operating principles of the switching and control transistor, has an eta value (intrinsic circuits in the degaussing switchboard standoff ratio) of of the SSM'Automatic Degaussing 1. 1/3 System. Textbook pages 76 through 80. 2. 1/2 3. 2/3 4. 4/3 2-58. What circuit or coil in the SSM 1 To answer item 2-54 refer to figures 4-23, automatic degiussing system receives 4-25, and 4-26 of your textbook and assump the gyro that the difference in frequency between the Remote control circgit oncoming generator voltage and the bus voltage 2. is 0.2 hertz. FI-QI degaussing coil 3. M degaussing coil 4. Control circuits Hint: The time in seconds required for one full cycle (period) is.found by dividing the tiltrialit, one secoa, by thefrequency, in hertz. 2 3 3 14 2-59. In the SSM Automatic Degaussidg Control Whieh amplifier, connected through System, which coil channels are manually reversing contacts on the pilot relay, controlled? presents a constant polarity signal to 1. M and A coil channels the inputs of the circuit? 2. A and FQ-QPcoilchannels 1. Single-ended mixer amplifier 3. A and FI-QIcoilchannels 2. Switehing amplifier 4. M and FP-QPcoilchannels 3. Excess error amplifier 4. Each of the above 2-60. Control power for the manual coil channel control circuits is supplied by 2-66. The magnitude of the full-wave rectified 1. the secondary of a common power signal produced by the mixer amplifier transformer is modified by the 2. the secondary of a separate power 1. current feedback from the output transformer circuit 3. .a d.c. power source 2. voltage feedback of the output circuit 4. a ship's service lishting generator 3. current feedback from the input circuit 2-61. The gyrocompass signal is a true heading 4. voltage feedback from the input signal. It is modified by the magnetic circuit variation to obtain the magnetic heading signal used to compute the 2-67. Howmanicpairs of silicon controlled 1. necessary degaussing currents rectifiers (SCR) are in the power state 2. FP-QP power supply circuit of the SSM Automatic4Degaussing 3. M-coil power supply System? 4. H-zone setting 1. Three 2. Four 2-62. The gear train, H-tone circuit, and the 3. Five magnetic variation circuits of the com- 4. Six puter drawer are independent control circuits of the A coil and FI-QI coil 2-68. Current through the primary windings of channels. ,4 the, 3-phase transformer in the power stage ctrcuit is controlled by the 2-63. The maximum control signal or sain of the 1. control transformer in the first control circuit in the SSM Automatic stage Control Degaussing System is set by the 2. SCR's in the driver circuit 1. voltage divider 3. excess error amplifier 2. demodulator converter 4. switching amplifier 3. a.c. signal of the resolver 4. d.c. signal from the H-zone circuit 2-69. W4ich component determines when the secondary power is rectified, filtered, In which of the following coil channels and connected to the degaussing coil in does a separate perm circuit apply a proper polarity? manually set d.c. signal to the opera- 1. Switching amplifier tional amplifier input? 2. Excess error amplifier 1. A 3. Reversing contactor . 2. M 4. Pilot relay 3. FP-QP 4. FI-QI 2-70. In the degaussing remote control:unit, what controls the FI-QI and A coils when the automatic coils are in manual opera- tion mode? NZ Learning Objective: Point out operating 1. Meter Selection Switch principles of the power supply and func- 2. Heading Switch tions of components in the degaussing 3. Ammeter remote control unit of the SSM Automatic 4. Each of the above Degaussing System. Textbook pages 80 through 83. 2-71. What is the purpose of the degaussing remote control unit in figure 5-7 of the textbook? 1. To monitor and control all degaussing coils 2. To monitor the A-coil only 3. To control the coil only "434 4. To monitor and control the A and FI-QI coils 15 2-75. What is the best'techhique fortrouble- shooting the SSM Automatic Degaussing Learning Objectives: Identify mainte- Control Syatem? nance practices for the SSM Automatic 1.. Observation Degaussing System. Textbook pages 83 2. Replacement through 85. 3. Logical:method 4. Historical data In items 2-72 through 2-74 selectfrom coluMn B the safe practice to observe whenmaintaining the components in colum,A. a A. Components B. 'Safe Practices 4 2-72, Capacitors,and 1. Remove care- RFI filters . fully because of excessive 2-73. Printed circuits weight and semi- conductors- 2. Do not attempt to repair; 2-74. Drawers in the maintenance is ,switchboards ,at a depot level 3. Ground to pre- rent shock hazards 4. Connect power before testing 16 I).' ha ti Assignment 3 Grocompasses Textbook Assignment: Pages 86 through 116 Learning Objective: Indicate the principle of operation of a free gyroscope, and the added properties that make it north-seeking, Text- book pages 86 through 93.9' 3-1: Nhat are the suPporting rings of a gyroscope? I; Gimbals 2. Planes A3. SuperetruLcures-c,, m. 4. Polles 3-2. A gyroscope rotor has how many degrees of freedom? 1. One 2. Two 3. Three 4. Four' 3-3. If the supporting frame of a gyroscope is tilted to tile left, ihe rotor axle Figure 3A.--Gyroscope Rotor. .Will 1. .tilt to the left 3-6..If a gyroscope spinsin thedirection 2. iilt,to the right shown in figure 3A, aforceapplied at 3, not 'change direction,. X will cause 4. point in the same direction as the 1. no precessioa: supporting frame 2. precession apoutthe vertical axis, VV' 3-4. How can you increase gyroscope rigidity? . precessionabout the spinning axis, 1. By-inFreasing che weight,of the rotor Sd' . 2. By'jncreasinethe conceatration of 4. precessionabout the-hoiizontal axis, rotdY weight near the-circumference HH' 3., By,increasing thexotor speed 4. By carrying.out any of the .above 3-7. A free-spinning gy.roscope is aligned east measures and west at the equator. If viewed from . the earth's surface'for 8.12-hour period, 3-5. A free-spinning"gyroscope is aligned east , the gyroscope w.41 appear to do whiGh of and west at the equator. If viewed from the following , space for a 12-hout,period the gyroscope 1. yake one compleke.revolution will appear to do which of the following? 2.. MaTw.two doMpletetevolutions 1. Make one complete revolution 3. .Make'one-half revolution 2. Make two complete revolutions 4. Remain stationary 3. Make one-half of a revolution 4. Remain stationary 3-8. .Horizontal earth rate is (a) at (b) . 1. (a)MaaMum;(b) Both poles ,2. (a)Mialtum;(b) Both poles 3. (a)Maximum;(b) Tquator 4. (a)Minimum;(b) North pole only 17 2 3 6 39. To Convert a gyroscope:into a gyrOcompass, 3-16. In the electrical/electronit, it is necessarY to compass dampening torque is obtained by applying 1. rovide torques of-the correct a portion magnitude and direction 1. of the gravity reference signal about 2. haVe the axis of spin of thegyroscope the vertical axis nearly level when parallel to the 2. of the, torque from theinerctiry ballis- meridian tic about the vertical axis 3. do both 1 and 2 above 3. of the gravity reference signal about 4. provide two rotors ttie horizontal axis 4. of the torque from the mercury ballis- 3-16. The mercury balliskic causes the Mk 11 tic about the horizontal axis gyrocompass to seek north by applying torque 1. to the horizontal axis Learning Objective: Recognize charac- 2. to the vertical axls teristics, functions, and operating , 3. about the horkollial axis principles of the Mk 11 gyrocompass 4. about 1Moveetial a#s 'and its associated equipment. Text- book pages 92 through 101. 7 The offset_po#t OfL7chnnection isa fracti4h"Ofan inch lroethebottom center of thet,tOtOr6ase..: Theiefore,a small torque is inti.pdtitedtd daOilen oscillations 3-17. The Sperry Mk 11 gyrocompass is around the meikati. used principally on what type ship? ' 1. Cruiser 3-11r What mechaniCal device(s) cause(s) the 2. Aircraft carrier compass to be called a mechanical compass? 3. Destroyer 1: Ballistic 4. Mine eweeper 2. &feet point of connection I 3. Both 1 and 2 above 3-18. Which of the following is NOT 4. Compensation weight a ihrt of': the sensitive, or north-seeking element? 1. Vertical ring 3-12. The Sperry Mk 19 gyrocompass employs 2. Compensator weights which of the following to make it north- 3. Binnacle seeking? 4. Follose.up indicatOr 1. The pendulous factor 2. Electronic control system 3-19. The rotor of the Mk 11 Mod 6 3. Both 1 and 2 above gyrocompass rotates at a speed of 11,000 rpm in a 4. Mercury ballistic vacuum of 1. 10 to 20 inches of.mercurY 3-13. What causes the resistance to vary between 2. 15 to 25 inches of mercury the upper and lower electrodes of the 3. 20 to 30 inches of mercury electrolytic level? 4. 26 to 30 inchee of mercury 4. The movement of the bubble 2. The movement of the potentiometer 3-20. When a gyrocompass is NOT runninghe 3. The speed of the accelerometer vertical ring should be locket 4. The movement of the mercury ba4istic alignment so that the 1. suspension wire does not obtain 3-14. The signal from the electrolytic level a. is lasting set amplified by the gravity reference system. 2. gyro case cannot tilt'about its Where is the amplified signal applied? horizontal axis 1. To the mercury ballistic 3. gyro rotor cannot tilt about its 2, To the offset point'of qonnection horizontal axis 3. To/bOth'Ind 2 above 4. suspension wire does not bear the 47Throtigh'torquea to the senaltiVe, weight of the mercury ballistic eleMeii 3-21. 3-15; The compensating weights are attachedto The mereury ballistic applies tail* the (a) about the and can be adjusted in the direction of (b) . 1. spin.and vertical axes 1. (a) Phantom ring; IA Rotor axis 2. vertical axis 2. (a) Vertical ring; (b) Rotor axis 3. horizontal axis 3. (a) Vertical ring; (b) Vertical 4. horizontal and vertical axes axis 4. (a) Phantom ring; (b) Vertical. mcpis A 237 18 3-22: The sensitive element is suspended from 3-31. The transmission system proVides a meant the phantom element by. to transmit OSC readings .to gyro .repeaters 1. small steel wires at various Atations on.the ship. 2. two steel bars, . 3. a series of steel balls 3-32.. The visual alarm for the transmitter 4. a rubber coupling overload relay is a red lamp. In the transmission system of the Sperry Mk 11 3-23. .The.phantom element hat horth-seeking gyro-compass; what happens when,a trans- properties of its own.. mitter overload relay is energized? 1. The alarm lamp is energized 3-24. Where are the mercury ballistic support. 2. The alarm lamp is energized, and the bearings located? transmitter rotor is deenergized 10. On the vertical ring 3. The alarm lamp is energized,'and the 2. On-the gimbal ring transmitter stator is deenergized, 3.. bon the rotor case. 4. The alarm lamp is energized, and both 4. On the-phantom ring the transmitter rotor and stator are 1 deenergized 3-25. Tbe gravity-controlling force of the mercury ballistic acts upoh the sensitive element of a gyrocompass through the Learning Objective: Identify a Mk 19 1. 'Mercury reservoir gyrocompass, its associated equipment 2. mercury ballistic frame and functions. Textbook pages.102 3. offset connection bearing through 113. 4. mercury ballistic soIenoi&!.' 3-26. Which component of the gyrocompass stipports_3-33. The Mk 19 gyrocompass is superior to all the inner members'of the master compass? compasses preceding it because 1. Phantom element 1. it furnishes accurate heading data 2. Suspension wire 2. it accurately measures and transmits 3. Binnacle angles of roll and pitch 4. SpiAer 3. of both 1 and 2 above 4. it is legs extiensive'. 327. The 120volt, IT-phase 60-hertz power supply is designated as a Secondary 3-34. 0ne of the desigii, 1eatureè1oftheMk.19 . source of power for the compass. gyrocompass ie..thatit..;.' 1. tontainsenly One:Wo.4 3-28. If the primary..source ,of power fails, the 2. has two jhoriZontell!ntedslyTos secondary source (the 24-VDC battery) 3. has two'Verticaily-mountergVrop will drive the motor generator. Where 4. has three horizontally mounted gyros is the battery throwover relpq found? 1. On the motor generator 3-35. The slave gyro furnishes 2. On the Ompass control 1. heading information 3. On the bridge alarm.indi Or 2. heading and pitch information 4. On.,theTIC switchboard 3.,:headingand roll information 4. roll:And pitch information 3-29. What is the purpose of the 'damping eliminator switch? 3-36. Howare the meridian and' slave gyro 1. To restart the motor generator sphekes:suspended? 2. To start the damping action of the 1. The meridian is suspended by steel mercury ballistic wire; .the slave is suspended in oil . 3. To stop the damping action of the 2., The slave is suspended by wires from mercury ballistic 'the Meridian 4. to stop the mbtor generator . The slave and meridian are bOth euspended in oil - ; :' 3-30. The purpose of the foltowupsyateuiète. 4. The slave and meridian are both 1. detect any misalignment .betweenthe.. suspended by wires phantom and sensitive Iiimens. 2. drive the phantom elemehOnine 437i Wkich of the following is/are included in proper direction to restore:alignment. the compass element/ , with the sensitive plemehe , - 1. Followup amplifier 3. .accomplish both 1 Old 2 above'.."":' 2. Alarm syetem 4. drive the sensitive.element in the 3. Both 2 and"3 are correct proper direction to restore alignment -4; Phantom with the phantom element 238 338. Which of'the following is/are includedie 348. Theoutput Of the azimuth control the phantom assembly?. amOlifier is applied about the vertical 1. Seftsitive.element axis of the slave gyro. 2. .Gimbals 34 Phantom How many electrical degrees is the . 4. All of the above torque reference field.diaplaced from . the cOntrol field? . 3-39. Where are the roll and pitch synchro 1. 45° assemblies mounted?. 2. 90° 1. Roll and pitch phantom 120° 2. Azimuth phantom 4. 180° .3. Phantom element 4. Frame and binnacle 3-50. In figure 6-21C, the meridiangyro leveling control system has (a) 3-40. Which of the following units isNOT input(s) and ' (b) output(s). contained in the control cabinet of the l'. (a) one; (b) two Mk 19 gyrocompass? 2. (a) two; (b) two 1. D.C..power supply- 3. (a) two; (b) one 2. Analog computer 4. 3 . Amplifier (a) three; (b) one . 4.. Sensitive element 3-51. Compensation signals in the Mk 19 3-41. gyrocompass compensate for earth, Where.are theComputer aMplifiers mounted? ship and mechanical effects. 1. On the front of thecontrol panel 2. On the rear of the control panel door 3-52. How is north*south drift compensated? 3. On the T-ehaped pacel 1. Manually 4. Behind the anaunciator 2. S sine C 3. S cos C 3-42: The follOwup amplifiers are 4. 1. type 1 North-south acceleration computer 2. type 2 3-53. The latitude and tangent.lmtitude 3. type 3 computers compensatb foegart4 rates. 4, identical and interchangeable 3-54:Where is the azimuth pia0fOor 3-43, Thp regulated output voltage produced the by azimuth followup system,loditted? ii*.voltage regulator for theMk 19 gyro- 1. On the gyro sphere'''. compel:184s accurate-to . . . 2. On the vertical ring 3. On the azimuth phantom Z. 4. On the horizontal ring Arolte . . 4 :7A0.:QA 3-55. Whete is the meridian gyro roll-pitch pickoff located for the roll-pitch 344....:The,Compeas failureannunciator for the followup? -..1*.,11),.Hlod 3A gyrocompass is a visual and' 1. Gyro sphere :qUikibte indicator.' 2. Meridian gyro cradle 3. Slave gyro cradle. Ti-45..'ihe standby supply of the Mk 19 Mod 3A 4. Meridian vertical ring gyrocompass is a static supply. 3-56. What.positions the roll-pitch synchro controle for the Mk 19gyrocompass data transmitters? eystaa are contained in 1. Roll-pitch resolver 1....1. three major systems 2. Roll-pitch phantom ,three major systems and one minor 3. system Roll-pitch followup amplifiers 4. Roll-pitch followup motors 't 3. four, major systems 4. four major systems.and one minor. 3-57.. What actuates the alarms for systei the Mk 19 4 gyrocompass? 1. Above normal tube current 1244: Which of the following signals is NOT an 2. Normal tube current 4 .':.: output of the gravity reference system? 3; Failure of tube current 1. Tangent latitude component 4. Energizing the alarm relay 2. MMridian control signal 3. Damping signal 4. Compensated tilt signal qa t, 20 4 43-58. Whit is the purpose of thefastsettling 3-62. Nov.does PQSJielp. the Begideering officer system? obtain cotrect.maintenaMe0.4, 1. To reduce starting time 1. Ensures that.-watchstaeders are : 2. To level the gimbals qualified .3. To ellmlnate damping 2. Ensures that operatets ere qualified 4. Each'of the above is correct 3. Ensures that mainteMeAde peraonnel are qualified 4. Each Of the above is cOtrect Learning Objective: Describe records, logs, maintenance and operaIing pro- 3-63. Whenever the gyrocompass la started, the cedures for all gyrocompass. Textbook time must be entered in the Engineering pages 113 through 116. log. 3-64. When is the standby compass made the master compass? 1-59 The Gyro Service Record Book is a record 1. When the 20-2400 watch is relieved of all work performed on the gyrocompass, 2. When the end of the quarter is cluding planned maintenance. reached 3. When there is a casualty to the 3-60. Whoia responsible for the care and master compass matenance Of.the gyrocompass? 4. When the senior engineer of the watch Navigator designates a change is required Eiecutive officer 3. Engineering officer 3-65. Who grants permlssion to secure the 4. Each of the above gyrocompass? 1. Commanding officer 3-61. What is the greatest problem caused by 2. Navigator neglected records? 3. Chief Engineer 1. False record of reliability 4. Engineering officer of the watch 2. Incorrect dates 3. Inspections are neglected 4. Repairs are neglected "le c. /Assignment '4 No Break Power Supplies; Electrohydraulic Load-lensing Speed Control Governors; and.Engineering Casualty Textbook Assignment: Pages 117.through 162 4-5. What event takes place if theinput voltage becolas higher than the Learning Objective: Recognize the reference voltage in the error voltage characteristics of a no breakpower detector supply. Textbook pages 117 through circuit as shown in figure 7-3of the 119. textbook? 1. The voltage drops across 1(6 2. Ql conducts more thanQ2 4-1. What are the voltage and 3. Q2 conducts more than Ql frequency low 44 The power supply will limits of a no breakpower supply? shift to the 1. 317 V 54 Hz stop-gap mode 2. 115 V 54 Hz 4-6.. What happene to capacitor . 3. 315 V 57 Hz C4 when the 4. 317 V 57 Hz voltage peaks at the unijunctiontransis- tor Q4? 1. 4-2. What is the maximum tilde required C4 will short for a no 2. C4 will open break power supplYto return to the normal 3. C4 will charge mode after normalpower has been restored? 4. 1..1 sec C4 will discharge 2. 2 sec 47 3. 1 min. Refer to figure 7-6 of the ttXtbboi,''Novi 4. 2 min do SCR's accomplishpower '4onttol?.. . 1. By varying the voltage tif, tt'ke trigger' 4-3. What is the tolerance pulse range of the voltage , 2. ,By varying the conducting aide a regulator under high load andtemperature fhe variations? gate pulse 3. 1. 5% By varying the trigger timeon,esch 2. 2% half cycle 4. 3. 9% By varying the conducting arigla 4. 4% 4-8. The average power outputof the generator field rectifier can be variedby delaying Learning Objective: ..Recognize the gate pulse fromzero to nearly 180° funda- along the phase time axis mentals of operation ofa no break of each.half cycle. power supply.TeXthook pages 117 through 125. Learning Objective: Point out 4-4. maintenance And repair practices Under the nbrmir operatingcondition, what for,a no,break power supply. is the supply-10d ina no break power, Text- supply? book page 126.. 1. Emergency power supplies thea.c. motor; d.c:. generator chargesthe Vittery 2. Ship's generators supply the a.c. motor; 4-9: 'What is the,maximum d.c. generator charges the allowable pressure to batcery use,in cleaning the 3...Battary..-supp1ies the d.c.motor; a.c. no break FioWer supply 1,):Motor-generator with compressed :Age,oeratoOupplies the criticalloads air? ':1:.. 10 psi .gthekgenoy power supplies the a.c. motor; 2. 20 psi generator supplies the critical 3. 30 psi 1-044 4. 40 psi 22 241 * , 74,4. Rhich method can be used to dry the 4-16. In textbook figUre .7-11 ihe time fraMe "..;'Windings of.a no break power supply that q2 discharg"as.is determ1ul.ed-when1 .motor,-generator eetwbotelinIslation 14-f012stOpe. conguctinfr , reataiince 1.*,BlOwWarm'ait across ihe windings with .-*,..(T4.*ppa conducting , conducting Dry the windings in'an oven at a temperature greater than 90°C 4-17.' *en:ilatOps conductino, What action 3. Circulate through she windings a low catiseithe induced voltage in. the 6-7 voltage current that exceeds 80% of winding to reveree polarityl 1. Sudden drop to zero Of Carrent.* . full load rating 4. Each of the.above the 2-3 winding of Tl 2: Gradual drop to zero the 2-3 winding of 11 Learning Objective: Identify the 3. 4'sadden rise of current in",0e 2-3 principlei Of.operation of atstatic winding of T1 . inverter. TeXtbook pages 127 4. Gradual risea.current in ift4/.2-3 through 134:,; Winding of T1 4:18. Refer to textbook figure 7-10. The 4-11. The input voltage to the model 4345A outpsieof:the power stages is filtered static .inyerter, which develops. 400-Hz to d4Werk . 3-phase outpOt, is a WOO-Hz aquare wave to a sine wave 1. 220 VAC 2,.:--4an 800-Hz square wave to a sine wave 2. 120 VAC, 3. a 400-Hz sine wave to a square waVe 3. 120 VDC. 4. an 800-Hz sine wave to a square Wave 4. 250 VDC 4-19. Transients developed in the systemaresi7" 4-12. Whatcompone4s enable the inverter to removed:by tjli,e'r, cdnvert a 2-phase input toA3-phase power? I. ; 1." 2. powli,r -Bulge* 2. Variable 3uise wid h generator 3: clippers 3. Scott.1%n.ected transformers 4. drivers- . . 4. Power'stag 4-20:'.The1Aresence,of which d.c. signalin the -- 4-13. The reference-f equency used in the synchrOnizing stage should enablehe 4345A ipiticJitiVerter control circuitsis. mult4Vib'r' 15r idturn the static;" , . 1. invererf? 2. 800 Hz 1. 30 3. 400 Hz 2. -20 V- 4. 60 Hz 3.1.6 4: '4'20. V , 4-1 .The width of.the pulse received by the 114voltage error-sensing.circuit from a. 4-21. The time delay introduced by the B- VPWG is determinedlby.which of the voltage interloCk in the synchronizing fol1owi70., . stage enablesi,which,circuit to reach a 1. The duration of\tiMe that the steady s;aFeJbefore the static inverter monostable multivibrator is in an is tlirned4 1' ,.unstable state \. 4. 1.. Oscillator 2. The level of conduction.A.the 0 2. -Variabli4 pulse width generator .?,.. transistor in the,modolati3O circuit 3. hrOditing, 3.':t1ie'diacharge time ofIthelitpacitor 4. ach fl:qfie ahove' in the modulating cir it -r 01!/"I. bove, ' ,Du thecr mpde the ruintrol Circuit All of the ' :4* 4-2z. . -: 4 .. ir po. from.the . 4-15. Once the SCR has arted,donduciing, the 1. D DCpaCier supOly only way td stop ondpt.t1on-40 2. 'put J. power source 1. .remove the gaieTvoltage 3. pha thi inverter '-. 2. 'reyerse'the;g4a vOltiage, inpuX voltage aledightli_gzi4er44erse :.-pegatiVeahOde',toc'posiflfe cathode ... 4.. apply a slightly greater reverse . positive anode.to negatiVe cathode voltage \ 23. . ' ' 7'471/2.; 44 TI'e- +- . . 4.-23, The duration of the OM time of the power 4-29. stage is controlled by the The proper load ratio for paralleled 1.. leading edge of wavefotm'C genera6ors equipped wirhelectrohydrsul: 2. trailing edge of waveform C ,load-sensing governors is obtained Ili,' 1.. 3. leading edge of Waveform P psing load-measuring circuits in th4 4. trailing edge of waveform,P governor 2. A circulating current, in.the tie' cable connecting thegenerators, act in the transistor amplifier Learning Objective: Point outthe circuit 3. increasing or deCreasfng the functions of the generalcomponents amount of fuel supplied to,the of an elvctrohydraulicload-sensing generator govetnoi. Tektbook pages 135 prime mover through 141-, 4. each' of the above _ ... In the ,text refer to figutes 8-3-i!8-4 41 4-24. and 8-.Lbr itens 4-30 through 1MAch componentcorrectivponitions.the 4-35. steam ,i,ralve orthrottle in'an eVectr6- 4-30. hydraulic .oacigenliiing governor'? The.EG-R hydraulid actuarorreceives Ate 1. Magnetic aMilifier ,operating oil:from 1. ,pne ot"ite amn, oi1A6mps 2. Eliactto*dAulicactuator. 3. flyweight head assembl§ 2. the oil system f6r turbind/contro1 z 3. 4. Permanent magnet genetator . the engineroom hydraulgsystem k. 4. 4.5 a generagtot bearingLofl Pump ' 4-26. , .. . An error signaria,producedby which 911i,,. 'Q the follo4118=milrmf#131- -4=i3IT-What.*Iality qf'ap electrohidraulic 1:--Speed signal circuit governor is enhapced by a temporary negative 'feedback signal? Transistor amplifiercircuit 1. 3. Reference circuit Dependability I 2. Stability 4. .irequency sensitiveand reference ' .circuit 3. Reliability 4. Each of the above 4-26. In figure 8-1'of the textboak, changes in 4-32. ate detected before theyappear/za, Wifat'.1.0. the purpose of tt\1 grooves'that -4eed changes by the surround the EG remote.setAmpiston? L. EG-Wcontrol box 1.%,.T0'..Mooth the movement-.t.drthepiston 2. perMinent magnetgenerator 'by/allowing 'oil presOte'to equalize loacLeignal box on both sides of the piaton 4, resistor box 2. To ensure that any leaks.ofpressur- ized oil from the seivo come.froma 4-27. What happens when theremote servo-piston part.of the.hydraulic systemthat movement iajYopped by the control will do no harm box ' 3. To allow a presamre differential signal retUthing to itson-speed value? to 1. The preasUre differential.dissipates dissipate at the same rate thatthe 'on both-s1;:les Of the buffer electrical signal is reauCed 4. To displace oil on either side The buffer opting returnsthe buffer of , piston to the normal poaition the piatpn to create a pressure.dif- The pilot.-yalve, remainscentered until ferential on the upper side of the the turb,ine.:speed is adjusted compensating land 4% All the'above,,eepts Occur 4-33. What happens to the steam whenthe Ep 4-28. remote setva piston-is.forced upward3. Where is the referenceyoltagedeveloped° for the EG-M cOntrdtbOi? 1. It decreases 1% Speed setting potentiometer 2. It increaaes 2. 'EG-M control box 3., It oscilliees 3. Permanent magnet altetnator ,4,.,, It remains steady 4. Load signal circuit 4-34. What happens to the supply:4?of-the EG-R:hydraulic'actuatOt-Whan the unit is .shut down? Learning Objective: Recognize the 1. fundamentals of operation ofan, Pressure increases through port A e1ectrohydrauli4 load-sensing 2: Pressure increases through port E goiiernor. lextbdok pages 135 3., Pressure decreases throughport A 'through 144. .4., Preseure decreases through port E ' " 43 4735.. If.the speed section offers -10 volts. and the reference section offers +10 voles, what yoltagais applied to ehe Learning Objective.: Identi,fy the amplifieriedtion of the EG-7M control operatinglifirameeers and greatest box? Source of trouble with theelectto- 1.. Zero volts hydraulic governor: -TextbOok pages 2. -10 volts 144 through 146. 3. +10 volts 4. -420 volts When answering items 4-36 through 4-38 4-42. What are the input vOltage limits across refer to figure 8-6 in the textbook. the hydraulic actuator of's single I. operating unit? 4-36. What happens to decrease the.potential at 1. +0.5 to -0.5 ViDC point B? 2. +5.0,to -0.5 VDC 1. An increase in the current through R5 3. 40.25 to -0.25'VDC 2. A clecrease in the voltage drop through 4. +2.5 to--2.5 VDC R5 '. 3. An increase in the resistance of the 4-43. 'What s the source of,most of the troubles speed setting potentiometec in the hydraulic actiUntor of a load- 4. A decrease in tge potential at point sensing governor? A 1. Unit out of 2. Defective contro'l! How is the turbine affected if the control 3. Faulty actuator '4-37' box is disconnected at point I? 4. Dirty hydraulic oir 1. It stops ./2. It speeds up 3. It hunts excessively Learning'Objective: Point out. 4,.-v'-at slows down . fundamentals of engineering - casualty control. Textbook pages 4738. An open at point J of the cpntrorboxwilr ,147 through 152.. cause 1. the,prime mover to stop 2. a loss in reliabiliey Vho is responsible for formulating . 3. a lops in stabilization engineering casualty procedures and 4. the speed of the prime moverto instructions pertinent to the electrital I increase plant installed aboard yout class of ship? 1. Engineer officer Items 4-39 through 4-41 refer to figure 8-9 of 2.. Commanding offAcer .the textbook. Select from column B.ehe function' .3. Type commander, for the pptentiometer in column A. 4. Squadion commander A. Potentiomerer B. Functions 4-45. The primary objective of engineering casualty control is to .4-39. iira6p adjustment-: 1. Compensates 'for 1. minimize personnel.casualties the difference in 2. minimize secondary.damage to 14-40. Load pulsaadjust- generator ragings engineering equipment afid reactive .3. maintain maximum reliability Of loads engineering, equipment , "4GainadjUstment 4. ,operate engineering equipment at 2. Changes the maximum economy amplitude of the °input signal 4-46. Each of the following is a normal function Of casualty control except 3. Compensates for ' 1. .inspecting engineering equipment the change in 2. operaeing engineering equipment, direction of the 3. replacing a damaged part on engineer- steam valve ing equipmenttoprevent further''; damage 4. Applies a vari- 4. overhauling completely a piece of able voltage to engineering equipment, transformer.T2 25 244 , :.,4747. The restoratiOn phase of casualty,control 4-54 Who is responsible for marking the le concerned, with the, minimization Of casualty control board located in the, operational damage to prevent secondary after engiheroom? damage:to vital machinery. 1. Messenger fcom Repair 5 2. Engineer officer 4-48.. Continuoui P.PeratiOn of equipment under -3. 23V talker -.casualty conditions, is a responsibility 4: Puty MMC of a:ahip's .1. ,operations officer -55k: 2. Assump.,that a fire has made...it netessary commanding officer . 2Pr. for all personhelto abandon tie after 3. engineering officer - gireroom. To whom do these'personner officer of'the watch' :report for' assignment tilo.ty,?, ;:- Damage control officer Which of,..the following bestdescrpbes' 2. Otficer in charge of Repair5 engineeiingrreadinesa.condition.2tetwetd 3. Officer of the watch. a DDt 4. '1- Boiler and turbine .2JV talker at the caiuelty conttol combinations in. ,board at main engine-control use; remaining boilers available 'within 8 houre /2. Two boilers in use; remaining boilers Learning Objective: Recognize fire-, secUred, but operational within 2 hours room, engineroom and propulsion plant - casualties, ahd procedurea fot handling Two boilers in use With the main .z plant them. Texttiook pages 154 thiougll split; remaining,boilers boosted-to aesufe readiness within.1 lfpur 4. Four boilers in use with' the main plant split , , 4-56. AssuMe that the 2JV talker receivesthe message, "Claes B Fireigireroom No..1 4-50. Which of the following engineering cendi- . portside under FOS pump 2.". Then; tions of readinessAsconcerned with the .2jV talker iosei contact with the obtaining,the best.gueleconomi fire- to . otom talker. conform with operational requirements? What action must be taken 'immediately? 1. Conditidn 1 1, 2. Condition 2 Enginerooth NO. lmust be notified.:,to :steam on the euxiliarSi line. 3. Condition. 3 , 2. 4, Condition 4 The bridge must be notified, aidfire- llicirrno.' 1 must.be securedfrom : topside and'adjacent spaces 0 4-51. A continuous training program along with 3. effective personnel organization will Repair 5 muat,investigate the firerooM -ind aid personnel ensure the application of prompt correc- 4:. The 2JV talker must tive action'to an engineering casualty. gttempt tO'rees-' ' tablish communications with the fire- room add if this is not possible, he 4-52, What isthe primary means of communioation between the engineer officer must notify the officer of the watch and the of the break in communications Various'watch:teams during casualtY' control procedures? A-57. During a casualty in the forward 1. Sound-powered telephones,' engine7° 2. A general announcing system room,-when the 2JV. circtlit.is damaged, 3. who ie responsible for riggingan Messengers . emergency circuit? 4. Ship's service terephones 4 1. Engineroom talker. 2. 4-53. Assume thet valves'Xdg,, and Z; Electrical repairman of Repair 5 must be 3. Messenger of Repair 5 opened, to cross7connat main feed port- 4. side. Which of thejollowing commands Repair 5 team assigned to.the job will be most effecrive in Accomplishing 4-58. the cross-connection? When a ship's speed is affected byan engineroom casualty, the engineer officer 1. "Portside, open ell main andauXiliary. feed valves." of the watch will itmediately notifythe 1. engineer officer 2. "Ctoss-connect main feed port side." 2. officer of.the deck 3. "Portside, open valves. X, Y, and.2'," 3. .executive officer 4. "Open main and.auXiliary feed velvet 4. X, Y, and Z, portsidit" commanding officer 26 ra 459, What is the monc..important single factor 4-64. While yoniare -standing the engineroOm in efficient control of a fireroom watch, one of the turbines begins to' casualty affecting engineroom operation? vibrate: What. Should you do? 1. Flow of infOrMation between affected. 1. Reduce the engine speed and the spaces superheat temperatuie 2. Speed of Corrective action 2. .Increase the engine speed ani.reddte 3. Safety of personnel the superheattemperature 4.: Speed in crosa-connecting standby 34. Stop the engine ahd notify the officer units . of.the watch 4. Stop the engine and investigate to 4-60. Which of the following actions should ah determine the cause kleCtiician's Mate take when4thelireroom reports a boilerhigh water casualty 4-65. Assume that the shaft effected by low Airing split plant operation? : lubricating oil pressure'is rotating at 1. Trip the ShiOs service generator three-quarter fullpower speed. To.stop circuit breaker the shaft, if steam is avitilable, you 2. Close the.a.c:..and d.c. bus-iies §hould use 3. Do both of the'Zhove 1.- ',the astern throttle 4. Trip the ship's'service turbogenerator 2. the'astern,turbine the jacking.gehr 4-61. Whichibf ihe following procedUres should 4. either the'iatern throttle or turbine the fireroom watch carryrout if loss of fuel oil suction occurs? A 1. Securelthe burners and blowers anci.' Learning. Objective:Recognize start the:standby serVice pump with operating .procedures under normal' suction on the standby service tank .and emergency conditions of the 2. Secure the'burners and blowers and ship's service electrical plant. start the standby service pump with Textbook pages 157 through 159. suction on the regular service tank . Secure the burners, keep.the blowers , * running, a d start the standby service . pump wi Uction on enentandby, A-66'. Which of e6g, following extinguishing Service tank. agents-is used for electrical fires? 4. Secure thd-burnersiclose all regis-, 1. CO2 - ters, keep the,blowers running, and 2. 1Themic4 foam .start the standby service pump.with 3. Mechanical foam 'suction -on the standby.service tank 4. Water fog 4-62. Assume that you are in charge of a fire- A-67. If the lube oil.pressure to a ship's . room team. Your men reporttb you that . service turbogenerator is lost while the burners are sputtering and the fuel- operating split plant,,the usual steps oir service pump is,suddenly racing. to be thken in securing the affected What is the probable Cause of the trouble? generator include 1. The pump is airbound 1. tripping the generator circuit 2. The fuel oil pumpllas lost suction breakers 3. The fuel-oil suction, line is clogged. 2. maintaining oil pressure by'means of 4. The fuel line is broken a hand-operated lube oil pump s. 0 3. closing the a.c..and d.c. bus-ties 4-63. What is the first corrective action you. and the generator turbine throttle Should take if one of a ship's twO valve propulsion shafts begins to vibrate all of the above excessively? ls Investigate the spring bearings 4-68. Jt is not necessary to stop 'a propulsion 2, Slaw the affected shaft generator to remove it from the line. 3. Stop and secure the affected shaft 4. Slow both shafts 246 27 4-69. Assume that you are unable to operate the 4-72. Which components of -,control tranafer switch ofa diesel elec- emergency wwitch tric d.c. drive. boards.feed sasualty-powerto equipment? Which of the following 1. conditions is the most likely Bus bars cause? 2. Circuit brealpre. 1. Controllers in the STOP position ' 3. 2. Transformers Excitation control switch inthe OFF 4. position Casualty power ,riset terminale 3. Excitation control switch inthe ON position 4. All of the above Learning ObjectiV$: P4int pit;4rhe value of drillinAkftsualty.control training. Textbodk pages 161.4nd 162. Learning Objective: Identify the purposes of the casualty power system and its components. Text- 4-73. Simulated casualty exercises book pages 160 and 161. are often , rendered ineffective Vecause of . 1. the limitation of simulatedcasualties ,2. the lack of personnel withbattle 4-70. experience The purpose of a cgsualtypower.system is to 3. the use of dry runs 1. 4. inadequate advance preparation provide lighting-for, theship when 4 the normal lighting fails 4.-74. What is the most 2. maintain a 'source of electrical important,requirement supply for personnel who participate for the most vitalmachinery needed to \ in simulatedL keep the ship afloat in \ engineering casualty contioloperations? case of damage 1. 3. provide an electrical supply Expert knowledge of,repairoperations for 9 2. making temporary repairs Familiarity with personnelcasualty 4. procedures provide an electrical supplywhen the 3. Familiarity with battle ship's service,generatorsfail conditions 4. Familiarity with normal operating 4-71, procedures Although the c44ba1typower system is designed to utilize portable cables, the 4-45. Dry runs are essential in system contains per6anently the training of , installed new crews in casualty control because risers and bulkhead terminals. The they purpose of the risers is to permit the crew membersto 1. 1. become familiar with casualty permit extension of circuitsthrough control procedures without endangering decks without destroyingthe water- the tight integrity I. ship's equipment 2: 2. take action as they would undir prevent errors in makingconnections actual 3. make the system more flexible casualty conditions and 3. simplify its application function under simulatedrealistic and operation battle conaitions 4. limit the loadsto.beconnected 4. do all of the above 4. . 28 2 4 7 0 Assignment 5 Maintenance Administration and Visual Landing Aids Textbook Pages 163 through 191 a 5-5. As part of the MDCS, the data collection' centet has the primary responsibility for Learning Objective: Identify fundamentals filing the MDCS documents and making of maintenance administration. Textbook them available upon request pages 163 through 170.. 2. cataloging the info'rmation contained on the MDCS documents 1, screening the MDCS documents for completeness and accuracy 5-1 :orrective maintenance consists of pro- 4. doing all the above ' -edures that extend the effective life e C. :f equipment or give advance notice of 5-6. rh which of the following manuals will impending troubles. 'you find the codes that are used in reporting maintenance actions? 5t2. What is the main objective of shipboard 1. PMS Manual preventive maintenance? 2. EIC Manual 1. ATo repair or replace equipment 3. MDCS Manual 7. periodically evdt though it shows 4. NavShips Technical Manual nb sign of wear V 2. .To prevent the breaking down, Items 5-7 and 5-8 are based on the following deteriorating,.or malfunctioning list of typical jobs doneby the shipyard oflOtipipment force duiing a regular overhaul: 3. TeiglaWkze equipment failures to pre- A. Installing guided missile launchers 'vent recurrence and strengthing adjacent deck 4. To correct.equipment failures structures B. Replacing corroded metal piping with 5-3. To fulfill its main purpose, the 3-M newly authorized plastic piping System must result in C. Rdplacing a worn turbine bearing 1. automatic updating of information on D. Rewiring the armatures of several Maintenance Requirement Cards electric motors 2. self-starting and selfimplementing maintenance schedules 5-7. What jobs are Classified as repairs? 3. increased operational readiness of 1. A and B r ships 2. A and C 4. complete eliminationlof equipment 3. B and D failures 4. C and D., 5-4. Which of the following is an imporiant 5-8.; Job A is classified as, a NAVALT because part a P01 or CPO playsvin making the this work Causes a change in the 3-M system work aboard his ship? 1. maker's design 1. Providing cure-alls for equipment 2. ship's fighting ability . disorders 3. ship's displacement 2. Training lower rated men to use the 4. shipyard overhaul budget system properly 3. 4erforming routine operating checks 5-9. SHIPALT CVA223A--USS Forrestal CVA-59, only when they are listed under the indicates that the number of alteratipns system as planned approved for CVA's is 4. ConsUlting the PMS Manual for the 1. 23 maximum maintenance .action required 2. 69 to eliminate equipment failure 3. 223 4. 269 Jr 29 14 8 5-10. According to Navy Regulations, the period 5-18. of time assigned a ship for uninte- You will probably.havesome contact with the Civilian personnel working if rupted accomplishment of workat a repair a activity is the ship's naval ahlrard.Which of the following 1. availability shipyard civilians has the highest rating? 2. technical'availability 3, shipyard overhaul 1. Superintendent I 4. upkeep period 2. Superintendent II A 3. Group Superintendent 5-11. 4. Foreman (Leadingman) A ship needs emergency repairsto the anchor windlass at a naval shipyard. 5-19. Assume you are the ship's supervisor If the ship must continue hermission, and require a speedup in work which availability classificationwill on some equipment the shipyard has removed probably be'assigned? for , 1. Voyage repairs repair. You will normally talk to the 2. Technical availability ship's progressman who isa 1.- civilian from the production vt. 3. Regular overhaul 4. Upkeep period department .2. supervisor from the planning 5-12. Under which availability department classification 3. can a ship leave_a searchlight for naval officer' from the shipyard 4. Leadingman from shop.56 repair at a'shipyard and have itfor- warded to the ship's next port of call? 5-20. A. Interim overhaul Weekly'progress reports of the regular 2. Technical availability overhaul-work being accompliihedon .% Restricted availability commissioned naval vesselsare sent to 4. 1 e type commander 1 Voyage repair , 1 0 e Chief of Naval Operations 3. OK3. Generally, instructions to report for'a the NavSea System Command 4. all of the above 2-week upkeep period willcome to yoxFf" ship from the NOT 1. Chief of Nam Operations The petty officer whosename appears in 2. type commander the ship's inspector column of the 3. ship's commanding officer Shipyard Overhaul Work ProgressChart is personally responsible for ) 4.. repair acqvity command keeping the chart accurate and up-to-date. 5-14. As a group leader yOu should plan in 5-22. advance with your diVision officer, the One of the purposes of the docktrial is to.asCertain whether, overhauled repairs to be performed bya repair machinery' is ready for service. ship during a- 2-week upkeep period. 5-23 Which of the following is 5-15. Who attends the arrival conference wioth a purpose of repair ship personnel to discuss the an engineering department administrative inspection? ship's work requests submitted for a 1. 2-week upkeep period? Ensuring that all recordsare kept 1. Commanding officer 's in an intelligent and soundmanner 2. . 2, Executive officer Ensuring that all hands are highly 3. Commanding officer and engineer trained not only in their specialties officer but also in damage control 3. 4, Executive officer and engineer Ensuring that all equipment is ina officer state of readiness so that the ship can carry out her intended mission 4. Each of the above 5-16.- .:Each repair item sent by ihe shipto a *Opair facility should be tagged and its 5-24. Administrative inspections are usually erial number should be recordedfor ready reference. divided into two categories--generalor detailed. Which of the following items is part of the general inspection? 5-17.. The ElectirShop at a naval-shipyard is 1. identified.by the numerals Condition of living spaces 2. 1.. '06 Posting of the Watch, Quarter and 2. 07 Stition Bill . 3..51 Maintenance of.Ship's Material History 4. 72 24.) 4. Availability of ship's plans 30 40 5-25. An objective of the battle problem is 5-32. In the normal operating mode,. where is to determine how well personnel are able the reference voltage changed from o.c. to work as a team under simulated battle to chc.? conditions. 1. Gyro demodulator 2. Stab-lock relay 5-26. The Board of Inspection and Survey 3. Servo amplifier conducts a shipboard material inspection 4. LVDT demodulator to determine 1. the suitability of the ship for 5-33. What does the amplified d.c. signal further service operate? 2. needed repairs* alterations, and 1. Hydraulic actuator design changes 2. Servo valve 3. both 1 and 2 above 3. Servo pump 4. the methods and procedures used in A. 0,VDT demodulator organizing each shipboard department 0 5-34. In figure 11-9 of the text, if the 5-27. Which of the following is a duty of the stab-lock relay is operated, the EM durini an economy or full-power trial? leveling signal will 1.. Sounding fuel oil tanks J. flow 'from the gyro through the relay ,2. Recording switaboard,instrument. 2. not flow frod the LVDT through the Teadings relay , bkeerving condenser water injection 3. flow from the relay through the LVDT and discharge temperatures 4. flow from the LVDT through the relay 4. Maintaining proper engine speed . 5-35. In f;gure 11-10 of the text, what generates the error voltage that determines the position of the stable Learning Objecti dentify components platform? of the.Visual Landing Aide by their 1. Manual control pot function. Textbook paAes171 through. 2. Error defector 191. . 3. LVDT 4. Amplifier 5-28. Why were Visual Landing Aids (VLA) 5-36. How many light dimmer controls are developed? shown in figure 11-11 of the text? 1. To extend'flight to night .1. One 2. To extend flight in ,foul weather 2. Two 3. Both 1 and 2 are correct 3. Three 4. To provide visual contact with the . 4. Four ship 5-37, On the remote control panel, what does . 5-29. WhaI voltage is available to the homing the standby.lamp indicate? beacon lamp? 1. That power is-available to the main 1. 440 switch 2. 230 2. That the main switch is energized 3. 115 3. That the source lighr is energized 4. 32 4. Thaf the hydraulic fluid is up to operating temperature' 5-30. The stabilized glide slope indicator (GSI) is essentially a servo loop. 5-38. At what pressure will the low pressure relay be closed? 5-31. What is the function of the gyro on the 1. 90 psi stabilized platform of the GSI? 2. 1200 psi 1. To hold the platform stable by force 3. 1400 psi 2. To provide heading infolination to the' 4. 1400 psi ± pilot J. To furnish reference information to 5-39. The lamp house essembly of the GSI the servo loop contains which of the'following? 4. To stabilize the light beam 1. One lamp and two heaters 2. Three lamps and'two heaters 3. Three lamps 4. Two heaters, a thermostat, and three .250 lamps 31 5-40. What is the,purpose of the tooling fan? 5-46. In figure 11-22 of the 1. To cite].the fresnel lens text,'howr many 2. To coolthe light tunnel operating stations are shown forthe WOL?: 3. To coolthe temperature control 1. 5 section 2. 2 4. To Coolthe lamp house assembly 1 3. 3 4. 4 5-41. How is ihe dimmer for the edge lights connected?, . 5-47. What is/are the purpose(s) of 1. In Series with.a rheostat the three red HIFR lights? 2. The primary of the transformer is 1. connected to a dimmer rheostat To indicate ship's heading 2. To indicate height 3. The primary of the transformer is 3. connected to 6 variable transformer Both 1 and 2 above arecorrect 4. To indicate helicopter's heading . The secondary of the transformeris connected to a rheostat 5748 Why can't the VERTREPlights and the line-up lights be'lighted 5-42. In figure 11-17 of the text, how is at the same the time? flash sequence for the.line-up lights 1. connected? The transformer cannot carrythe load 2. 1. In series with the variable The two sets 'of lightsare at right transformer angles to each other 3. 2. In series with tte 115/6.5 volt The switching arrangement prevents transformer illuminating.both sets of lights ' simultaneously 3. Eoth 1 and 2 are correct sotS 4. The fuees will preveA operating 4. In parallel with ttie line-up lights both circuits, at once 5-43. What color are the extended line-up 5-40.tThe detector for the control lights? circuit of 1. Amber- the variabie transformer receives 1. one a.c. 2. White and one d.c. signal 2. two a.c. 3. Green signals 3. two d.c. 4. Red signals 4. one'-d.c.signal ' 5-44. Where are the vertical drop-line lights located? 1. Aft of the line-up lights 2. Forward of the line-up lights 3. Across from th e. touchdown light 4. Up from the 'forward end of. the'line-up lights 5-45 Where is the Master Control Panel ofthe wave off light (WOL) located? 1. In the flight control station. 2. At the captain's bridge control station 3. At the remote control station on the boat deck 4. On the fantail . *U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 1976- 641.277:32 4 COURSE DISENROTIMENT All study materials must be returned. On disenrolling,, fill out only the uppek part ofthis.pageand attach it to the inside front cover of the textbook for this . course. Mail your study materials to the,Naval Education and Training Program Developmdint Center. PRINT CLEARLY NAVEDTRA Number COURSE TITLE 10547-D NRCC Electrician's Mate 1 & C Name Last First Rank/Rate Designator Social decurity Number COURSE COMPLETION Letters of satisfactory cOmpletiOn are issued only to personnel whose courses are administered.by the Naval Education and Training Program Development Center.,On completing the course, fill Out the lower part of this page and enclose it with your last set of self-scored answer sheets. Be sure mailing addresses are complete. ,Mail to the Naval EducatiOn and. Training Program .Development Center. NAME , ZIP CODE MY SERVICE RECORD IS HELD BY-: Activity Address ZIP CODE Signature of enrollee PDD Form 111 252 V. 9 ) A FINAL QUESTION: What did you think of this course? Of the text material used with the course? Comments and reCommendations received fromenrollees have been a major source of course improvement. Youand your command are urged to submit your constructive criticisms and your'recommendations. This tear-out form letteris provided for your convenience. Typewrite ii possible, but legiblehandwriting is acceptable. . Date From: ZIP CODE lb: Waval'rEdUcaticm 'end Training Program Development Center (PDD 4) Building 923 p PensaCcla, Florida 32500 Subj: Electrician's Mte4 1.& C, NAVEDTRA 10547-D 1.' The following .comments are hereby submitted: 1 4 Oold alon dottedline and staple or tape) .(Fold along dotted lineand staplé:or tape) DEPARTMENT OF THENAVY. NAVL EDUCATION, AND TRAININGPROGRAM DEVELOPMENT CENTER (P 4) ,POSTAGE AND FEEE PAID PENSACOLA, FLORIDA 32934 DEPARTMENT00THEMAVY tiobala OPFICIALLIUSINEW PENALTY FOR PRIVATE USE, $300 NAcALEDUCATION AND TRAINING PROGRAWDEVELOPMENI,CENTE0Ani4j BUILDING 923 PENSACOLA, FLORIDA 32509